Grade Thresholds - June 2017: Cambridge IGCSE Combined Science (0653)

Grade thresholds – June 2017
Cambridge IGCSE Combined Science (0653)

Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0653 (Combined Science) in the June 2017 examination.
minimum raw mark required for grade:

maximum raw
mark A B C D E F G
available
Component 11 40 – – 19 17 15 13 11
Component 12 40 – – 21 18 16 14 13
Component 13 40 – – 21 18 16 14 13
Component 21 40 26 21 17 15 13 11 9
Component 22 40 25 20 16 14 12 10 8
Component 23 40 25 21 17 15 14 12 10
Component 31 80 – – 33 27 21 16 11
Component 32 80 – – 38 31 24 17 11
Component 33 80 – – 38 31 24 17 11
Component 41 80 44 33 23 19 14 11 8
Component 42 80 49 39 28 23 17 12 7
Component 43 80 44 33 23 19 14 10 7
Component 51 30 19 17 14 13 11 8 5
Component 52 30 22 21 18 17 14 12 10
Component 61 60 34 28 22 19 16 11 6
Component 62 60 37 32 27 22 18 15 12
Component 63 60 36 28 21 16 12 10 8
Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component.
The maximum total mark for this syllabus, after weighting has been applied, is 200.
The overall thresholds for the different grades were set as follows.
Combination of
Option A* A B C D E F G
Components
BX 21, 41, 51 141 118 95 73 62 52 41 30
BY 22, 42, 52 149 127 105 83 70 58 46 34
CX 21, 41, 61 140 116 92 69 58 48 38 28
CY 22, 42, 62 146 123 100 77 64 51 40 29
CZ 23, 43, 63 140 116 92 68 57 47 37 27
Grade thresholds continued
Combination of
Components
FX 11, 31, 51 – – – 89 76 64 50 36
FY 12, 32, 52 – – – 103 88 73 58 43
GX 11, 31, 61 – – – 85 72 60 47 34
GY 12, 32, 62 – – – 97 81 66 52 38
GZ 13, 33, 63 – – – 93 77 62 49 36
Grade thresholds – June 2017

Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0653 (Combined Science) in the June 2017 examination.

maximum raw
mark A B C D E F G
available
Component 11 40 – – 19 17 15 13 11
Component 12 40 – – 21 18 16 14 13
Component 13 40 – – 21 18 16 14 13
Component 21 40 26 21 17 15 13 11 9
Component 22 40 25 20 16 14 12 10 8
Component 23 40 25 21 17 15 14 12 10
Component 31 80 – – 33 27 21 16 11
Component 32 80 – – 38 31 24 17 11
Component 33 80 – – 38 31 24 17 11
Component 41 80 44 33 23 19 14 11 8
Component 42 80 49 39 28 23 17 12 7
Component 43 80 44 33 23 19 14 10 7
Component 51 30 19 17 14 13 11 8 5
Component 52 30 22 21 18 17 14 12 10
Component 61 60 34 28 22 19 16 11 6
Component 62 60 37 32 27 22 18 15 12
Component 63 60 36 28 21 16 12 10 8
Combination of
Components
BX 21, 41, 51 141 118 95 73 62 52 41 30
BY 22, 42, 52 149 127 105 83 70 58 46 34
CX 21, 41, 61 140 116 92 69 58 48 38 28
CY 22, 42, 62 146 123 100 77 64 51 40 29
CZ 23, 43, 63 140 116 92 68 57 47 37 27
Combination of
Components
FX 11, 31, 51 – – – 89 76 64 50 36
FY 12, 32, 52 – – – 103 88 73 58 43
GX 11, 31, 61 – – – 85 72 60 47 34
GY 12, 32, 62 – – – 97 81 66 52 38
GZ 13, 33, 63 – – – 93 77 62 49 36
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMBINED SCIENCE 0653/51

Paper 5 Practical Test May/June 2017
CONFIDENTIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Great care should be taken to ensure that any confidential information given does not reach the
candidates either directly or indirectly.
* 5 4 6 7 5 7 7 7 0 3 *
The Supervisor’s attention is drawn to the form on page 8 which must be completed and returned
with the scripts.
If you have any queries regarding these Confidential Instructions, please contact Cambridge stating the
Centre number, the nature of the query and the syllabus number quoted above.
email info@cie.org.uk
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
This document consists of 7 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (ST/SW) 139087/2
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
These Confidential Instructions detail the apparatus, reagents and specimens required by each
candidate for each experiment in this paper.
The Supervisor is not allowed to consult the Question Paper before the examination. This teacher
should, as part of the preparation of the examination requirements, test the apparatus in order to
ensure that it is satisfactory.
All specimens should carry only the code letters and numbers as indicated and their identity
should not be revealed to the candidates.
More material may be issued if required, without penalty, but this should not be necessary. If a candidate
breaks any of the apparatus the matter should be rectified and a note made in the Supervisor’s Report.
It is assumed that the ordinary apparatus of a science laboratory will be available, including a supply of
purified water (distilled or deionised).
Supervisors are advised to remind candidates that all substances in the examination should be treated
with caution. Only those tests described in the Question Paper should be attempted. Suitable eye
protection should be provided.
In accordance with COSHH (Control of Substances Hazardous to Health) Regulations, operative in the
UK, a hazard appraisal of the examination has been carried out.
Attention is drawn, in particular, to certain materials used in the examination. The following codes are
used where relevant.
C corrosive substance MH moderate hazard
HH health hazard T acutely toxic
F flammable O oxidising
N hazardous to the aquatic environment
Hazard data sheets should be available from your suppliers.
If arrangements are made for different sessions for different groups of candidates, care must be taken
to ensure that the different groups of candidates are effectively isolated so that no information passes
between them.
The Supervisor should make sure the Supervisor’s Report is fully completed and a copy is enclosed
with each packet of scripts.
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17

3
Question 1
Each candidate will require
(i) approximately 3 cm long piece of ripe peeled fresh banana
(ii) chickpea puree labelled chickpea (see note 1)
(iii) 10 cm3 1% albumen solution labelled egg white
(iv) 9 test-tubes (125 mm × 15 mm) and method of supporting them (see note 2)
(v) stirring rod
(vi) table knife
(vii) white tile
(viii) small beaker approximately 100 cm3
[N] (ix) iodine solution and dropper, labelled iodine solution
(x) Benedict’s solution and dropper, labelled Benedict’s solution
[C] (xi) biuret solution and dropper, labelled biuret solution
(xii) access to a water bath at approximately 80 °C
(xiii) paper towels
(xiv) distilled water
(xv) means of labelling glassware.
Notes
1. Chickpea puree can be made from tinned chickpeas with no added sugar. They should be
liquidised in a blender with a little distilled water to form a paste that can be poured. It may be
made fresh or the day prior to the exam and refrigerated. It can be provided in a large beaker
between several students, each student will require approximately a tablespoon of the puree.
2. Centres may provide fewer test-tubes, the minimum being 3 test-tubes (125 × 15 mm). If this is the
case, candidates will have to rinse test-tubes with distilled water so extra must be provided.
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17 [Turn over

4
Question 2
(i) approximately 15 cm3 0.1 mol dm–3 barium nitrate solution labelled H
(ii) approximately 15 cm3 0.40 mol dm–3 ammonia solution labelled J
(iii) approximately 30 cm3 0.2 mol dm–3 copper sulfate labelled copper sulfate
(iv) red litmus paper
(v) blue litmus paper
(vi) small beaker approximately 100 cm3
(vii) 4 test-tubes (125 mm × 15 mm) (see note)
(viii) 2 filter funnels
(ix) filter papers.
Notes
Centres may provide fewer test-tubes, the minimum being 2 test-tubes (125 mm × 15 mm). If this is the
case, candidates will have to rinse test-tubes with distilled water which must be provided.
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17

5
Question 3
(i) a d.c. power supply of approximately 1.5 V to 2 V. If candidates are supplied with a power
source of variable voltage output, the voltage should be set by the supervisor and fixed
e.g. taped
(ii) a voltmeter capable of measuring up to 2.5 V with minimum resolution of 0.1 V
(iii) an ammeter capable of measuring up to 1.00 A with a minimum resolution of 0.05 A
(iv) a switch. The switch may be an integral part of the power supply
(v) a wooden or plastic metre rule
(vi) approximately 100 cm of straight, bare constantan wire of diameter 0.27 mm (32 swg),
taped to a metre rule at two places (between the zero and 5.0 cm mark and between
the 95.0 cm and 100.0 cm mark). The zero end of the wire is to be labelled P and the
other end Q. The left hand end of the wire must be taped over up to the 10.0 cm mark to
prevent candidates attaching the crocodile clip in this area
(vii) a sliding contact, labelled C. This should be a crocodile clip attached to a lead.
Notes
1. The circuit shown in Fig. 3.1 below must be set up for the candidates. The crocodile clip must not
be connected to the resistance wire.
At changeover, check that the circuit is still connected correctly and working.
V
sliding contact
resistance wire
metre rule
C
P Q
0 cm 100 cm
power supply
A
Fig. 3.1
2. If dry cells are used as the power source, check that they remain adequately charged during the
examination. Spare cells should be available.

6
Spare materials and equipment should be available and can be provided without penalty. Candidates
should be made aware of this.
Information required from the Supervisor:
The Supervisor is asked to carry out the experiments and to enter the results on a spare copy of
the examination paper, clearly marked ‘Supervisor’s Results’ and showing the Centre number.
This should be done, out of sight of the candidates, using the same solutions, reagents,
specimens and apparatus as the candidates.
A copy of the ‘Supervisor’s Results’ should be returned with each packet of scripts. Failure to
do so may cause the candidates to be penalised.
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17

7
BLANK PAGE

8
0653/51
This form must be completed and returned in the envelope with the scripts together with the
seating plan and the Supervisor’s Results as mentioned on page 6.
May/June 2017
General
The Supervisor is invited to give details of any difficulties experienced by particular candidates giving
their names and candidate numbers. These should include reference to:
(a) difficulties due to faulty apparatus;
(b) accidents to apparatus or materials;
(c) physical handicaps, e.g. short sight, colour blindness;
(d) any other information that is likely to assist the Examiner, especially if this cannot be
discovered in the scripts;
(e) any help given to a candidate.
The Supervisor is asked to supply the following information:
Plan of work benches, giving details by candidate numbers of the places occupied by the candidates
for each session and a copy of the Supervisor’s Results.
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
SIGNED .........................................................................
Supervisor
CENTRE NUMBER ....................................
DECLARATION (to be signed by the Supervisor)
The preparation of this practical examination has been carried out so as to maintain fully the security
of the examination.
NAME ......................................................................................................................................................
(in block capitals)
SIGNED .............................................................................................................................. (Supervisor)
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17


* 5 4 6 7 5 7 7 7 0 3 *
with the scripts.
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
DC (ST/SW) 139087/2
2
between them.
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17

3
Question 1
(i) approximately 3 cm long piece of ripe peeled fresh banana
(ii) chickpea puree labelled chickpea (see note 1)
(iii) 10 cm3 1% albumen solution labelled egg white
(iv) 9 test-tubes (125 mm × 15 mm) and method of supporting them (see note 2)
(v) stirring rod
(vi) table knife
(vii) white tile
(viii) small beaker approximately 100 cm3
[N] (ix) iodine solution and dropper, labelled iodine solution
(x) Benedict’s solution and dropper, labelled Benedict’s solution
[C] (xi) biuret solution and dropper, labelled biuret solution
(xii) access to a water bath at approximately 80 °C
(xiii) paper towels
(xiv) distilled water
(xv) means of labelling glassware.
Notes
1. Chickpea puree can be made from tinned chickpeas with no added sugar. They should be
liquidised in a blender with a little distilled water to form a paste that can be poured. It may be
made fresh or the day prior to the exam and refrigerated. It can be provided in a large beaker
between several students, each student will require approximately a tablespoon of the puree.
2. Centres may provide fewer test-tubes, the minimum being 3 test-tubes (125 × 15 mm). If this is the
case, candidates will have to rinse test-tubes with distilled water so extra must be provided.

4
Question 2
(i) approximately 15 cm3 0.1 mol dm–3 barium nitrate solution labelled H
(ii) approximately 15 cm3 0.40 mol dm–3 ammonia solution labelled J
(iii) approximately 30 cm3 0.2 mol dm–3 copper sulfate labelled copper sulfate
(iv) red litmus paper
(v) blue litmus paper
(vi) small beaker approximately 100 cm3
(vii) 4 test-tubes (125 mm × 15 mm) (see note)
(viii) 2 filter funnels
(ix) filter papers.
Notes
case, candidates will have to rinse test-tubes with distilled water which must be provided.
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17

5
Question 3
(i) a d.c. power supply of approximately 1.5 V to 2 V. If candidates are supplied with a power
source of variable voltage output, the voltage should be set by the supervisor and fixed
e.g. taped
(ii) a voltmeter capable of measuring up to 2.5 V with minimum resolution of 0.1 V
(iii) an ammeter capable of measuring up to 1.00 A with a minimum resolution of 0.05 A
(iv) a switch. The switch may be an integral part of the power supply
(v) a wooden or plastic metre rule
(vi) approximately 100 cm of straight, bare constantan wire of diameter 0.27 mm (32 swg),
taped to a metre rule at two places (between the zero and 5.0 cm mark and between
the 95.0 cm and 100.0 cm mark). The zero end of the wire is to be labelled P and the
other end Q. The left hand end of the wire must be taped over up to the 10.0 cm mark to
prevent candidates attaching the crocodile clip in this area
(vii) a sliding contact, labelled C. This should be a crocodile clip attached to a lead.
Notes
1. The circuit shown in Fig. 3.1 below must be set up for the candidates. The crocodile clip must not
be connected to the resistance wire.
At changeover, check that the circuit is still connected correctly and working.
V
sliding contact
resistance wire
metre rule
C
P Q
0 cm 100 cm
power supply
A
Fig. 3.1

6
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17

7
BLANK PAGE

8
0653/51
May/June 2017
General
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
SIGNED .........................................................................
Supervisor
CENTRE NUMBER ....................................
of the examination.
NAME ......................................................................................................................................................
(in block capitals)
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17


* 2 7 3 2 9 7 8 5 2 9 *
with the scripts.
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
DC (LK/SW) 139104/2
2
between them.
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/M/J/17

3
Question 1
(i) an insect pollinated flower, radially symmetrical with between 4 and 6 petals of size
approximately 4 cm to 10 cm, large enough to see the petals, carpel and stamen easily
(e.g. a lily or tulip)
(ii) white tile
(iii) hand lens
(iv) 30 cm ruler graduated in mm.

4
Question 2
(i) approximately 100 cm3 1.0 mol dm–3 hydrochloric acid labelled hydrochloric acid
(ii) three lots of 10 marble chips (2–4 mm) each labelled ten marble chips
(iii) clamp and stand
(iv) 25 cm3 measuring cylinder
(v) 100 cm3 measuring cylinder for use as in Fig. 2.1 (see note 1)
(vi) 1 large test-tube (150 mm × 25 mm)
(vii) beaker to support large test-tube in (vi)
(viii) delivery tube to fit large test-tube in (vi) with 50 cm of flexible tubing finishing in a small
glass or rigid U-tube (see Fig. 2.1)
(ix) a container (e.g. a plastic bowl or plastic box) for the water, three quarters filled with
water and large enough to allow candidates to place the 100 cm3 measuring cylinder full
of water and inverted below the surface (see note 2)
(x) stopclock
(xi) thermometer, –10 to 110 °C in 1 °C graduations
(xii) large beaker (at least 250 cm3) labelled waste
(xiii) large beaker for hot water
(xiv) source of hot water at about 80 °C.
delivery tube
clamp
100 cm3 measuring cylinder

large test-tube
water
water container
Fig. 2.1
Notes
1. it does not matter if the 100 cm3 measuring cylinder does not have a scale for the first few cm3.
2. the apparatus should not be assembled for the candidate.
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/M/J/17

5
Question 3
(i) 100 cm3 measuring cylinder. This should be dry.
(ii) a dry test-tube, approximately 15 mm diameter and 125 mm in length. The mass of the
test-tube should be no more than 25 g. The test-tube should be able to float approximately
upright and not touch the bottom of the measuring cylinder when the measuring cylinder
contains approximately 65 cm3 of water
(iii) a balance capable of measuring masses up to 200 g to the nearest 0.1 g. Enough
balances should be available so that candidates have easy, individual access
(iv) a supply of water at room temperature, 100 cm3 will be sufficient. The water may be
supplied in a beaker.
Action at Changeover
Remove the test-tube from the measuring cylinder, if necessary, and empty the measuring cylinder.
Ensure that the measuring cylinder is dry. Supply a clean, dry test-tube.

6
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/M/J/17

7
BLANK PAGE

8
0653/52
May/June 2017
General
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
SIGNED .........................................................................
Supervisor
CENTRE NUMBER ....................................
of the examination.
NAME ......................................................................................................................................................
(in block capitals)
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/M/J/17


* 2 7 3 2 9 7 8 5 2 9 *
with the scripts.
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
DC (LK/SW) 139104/2
2
between them.
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/M/J/17

3
Question 1
(i) an insect pollinated flower, radially symmetrical with between 4 and 6 petals of size
approximately 4 cm to 10 cm, large enough to see the petals, carpel and stamen easily
(e.g. a lily or tulip)
(ii) white tile
(iii) hand lens
(iv) 30 cm ruler graduated in mm.

4
Question 2
(i) approximately 100 cm3 1.0 mol dm–3 hydrochloric acid labelled hydrochloric acid
(ii) three lots of 10 marble chips (2–4 mm) each labelled ten marble chips
(iii) clamp and stand
(iv) 25 cm3 measuring cylinder
(v) 100 cm3 measuring cylinder for use as in Fig. 2.1 (see note 1)
(vi) 1 large test-tube (150 mm × 25 mm)
(vii) beaker to support large test-tube in (vi)
(viii) delivery tube to fit large test-tube in (vi) with 50 cm of flexible tubing finishing in a small
glass or rigid U-tube (see Fig. 2.1)
(ix) a container (e.g. a plastic bowl or plastic box) for the water, three quarters filled with
water and large enough to allow candidates to place the 100 cm3 measuring cylinder full
of water and inverted below the surface (see note 2)
(x) stopclock
(xi) thermometer, –10 to 110 °C in 1 °C graduations
(xii) large beaker (at least 250 cm3) labelled waste
(xiii) large beaker for hot water
(xiv) source of hot water at about 80 °C.
delivery tube
clamp

large test-tube
water
water container
Fig. 2.1
Notes
1. it does not matter if the 100 cm3 measuring cylinder does not have a scale for the first few cm3.
2. the apparatus should not be assembled for the candidate.
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/M/J/17

5
Question 3
(i) 100 cm3 measuring cylinder. This should be dry.
(ii) a dry test-tube, approximately 15 mm diameter and 125 mm in length. The mass of the
test-tube should be no more than 25 g. The test-tube should be able to float approximately
upright and not touch the bottom of the measuring cylinder when the measuring cylinder
contains approximately 65 cm3 of water
(iii) a balance capable of measuring masses up to 200 g to the nearest 0.1 g. Enough
balances should be available so that candidates have easy, individual access
(iv) a supply of water at room temperature, 100 cm3 will be sufficient. The water may be
supplied in a beaker.
Remove the test-tube from the measuring cylinder, if necessary, and empty the measuring cylinder.
Ensure that the measuring cylinder is dry. Supply a clean, dry test-tube.

6
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/M/J/17

7
BLANK PAGE

8
0653/52
May/June 2017
General
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
SIGNED .........................................................................
Supervisor
CENTRE NUMBER ....................................
of the examination.
NAME ......................................................................................................................................................
(in block capitals)
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/M/J/17


Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core) May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
® IGCSE is a registered trademark.
This document consists of 3 printed pages.

0653/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks
1 C 1
2 D 1
3 A 1
4 B 1
5 A 1
6 B 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 A 1
10 B 1
11 C 1
12 D 1
13 C 1
14 D 1
15 B 1
16 D 1
17 B 1
18 C 1
19 A 1
20 C 1
21 C 1
22 D 1
23 A 1
24 C 1
25 C 1
26 A 1
27 A 1
28 B 1
© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 3

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 A 1
31 D 1
32 C 1
33 C 1
34 B 1
35 A 1
36 A 1
37 C 1
38 B 1
39 B 1
40 B 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1 C 1
2 D 1
3 A 1
4 B 1
5 A 1
6 B 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 A 1
10 B 1
11 C 1
12 D 1
13 C 1
14 D 1
15 B 1
16 D 1
17 B 1
18 C 1
19 A 1
20 C 1
21 C 1
22 D 1
23 A 1
24 C 1
25 C 1
26 A 1
27 A 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 A 1
31 D 1
32 C 1
33 C 1
34 B 1
35 A 1
36 A 1
37 C 1
38 B 1
39 B 1
40 B 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1 D 1
2 B 1
3 B 1
4 C 1
5 A 1
6 B 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 A 1
10 A 1
11 C 1
12 B 1
13 D 1
14 D 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 C 1
18 C 1
19 D 1
20 B 1
21 D 1
22 C 1
23 D 1
24 C 1
25 B 1
26 A 1
27 A 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 D 1
31 A 1
32 B 1
33 D 1
34 A 1
35 A 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 B 1
39 C 1
40 C 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1 D 1
2 B 1
3 B 1
4 C 1
5 A 1
6 B 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 A 1
10 A 1
11 C 1
12 B 1
13 D 1
14 D 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 C 1
18 C 1
19 D 1
20 B 1
21 D 1
22 C 1
23 D 1
24 C 1
25 B 1
26 A 1
27 A 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 D 1
31 A 1
32 B 1
33 D 1
34 A 1
35 A 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 B 1
39 C 1
40 C 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1 D 1
2 B 1
3 B 1
4 C 1
5 A 1
6 B 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 A 1
10 A 1
11 C 1
12 B 1
13 D 1
14 D 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 C 1
18 C 1
19 D 1
20 B 1
21 D 1
22 C 1
23 D 1
24 C 1
25 B 1
26 A 1
27 A 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 D 1
31 A 1
32 B 1
33 D 1
34 A 1
35 A 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 B 1
39 C 1
40 C 1


Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1 C 1
2 A 1
3 A 1
4 D 1
5 D 1
6 B 1
7 C 1
8 A 1
9 B 1
10 A 1
11 B 1
12 D 1
13 C 1
14 D 1
15 D 1
16 B 1
17 C 1
18 A 1
19 B 1
20 A 1
21 C 1
22 D 1
23 D 1
24 C 1
25 A 1
26 A 1
27 C 1
28 D 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 C 1
31 D 1
32 C 1
33 C 1
34 B 1
35 A 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 B 1
39 B 1
40 A 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1 D 1
2 C 1
3 B 1
4 B 1
5 B 1
6 C 1
7 B 1
8 D 1
9 A 1
10 B 1
11 D 1
12 D 1
13 C 1
14 D 1
15 B 1
16 A 1
17 C 1
18 C 1
19 A 1
20 D 1
21 B 1
22 C 1
23 A 1
24 C 1
25 C 1
26 A 1
27 A 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 C 1
31 D 1
32 A 1
33 A 1
34 C 1
35 A 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 B 1
39 C 1
40 B 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1 D 1
2 C 1
3 B 1
4 B 1
5 B 1
6 C 1
7 B 1
8 D 1
9 A 1
10 B 1
11 D 1
12 D 1
13 C 1
14 D 1
15 B 1
16 A 1
17 C 1
18 C 1
19 A 1
20 D 1
21 B 1
22 C 1
23 A 1
24 C 1
25 C 1
26 A 1
27 A 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 C 1
31 D 1
32 A 1
33 A 1
34 C 1
35 A 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 B 1
39 C 1
40 B 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1 B 1
2 A 1
3 D 1
4 C 1
5 C 1
6 B 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 D 1
10 C 1
11 D 1
12 C 1
13 C 1
14 D 1
15 A 1
16 D 1
17 C 1
18 B 1
19 A 1
20 C 1
21 A 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 C 1
25 A 1
26 B 1
27 C 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 C 1
31 D 1
32 C 1
33 D 1
34 D 1
35 B 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 B 1
39 B 1
40 A 1


Paper 3 Core Theory May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(a) three lines drawn to 3

produce haploid pollen ;
need oxygen for germination of seeds ;
have root hair cells for water uptake ;
1(b)(i) any two from Max 2

(large) petals ;
(bright) colour ;
scented ;
nectar ;
1(b)(ii) anthers / stamens are below stigma in 2 and level with stigma in 1 ; 1
1(c) flower 2 (no mark) 1

the stigma is higher than the anthers / anthers lower than the stigma ;
2(a)(i) covalent ; 1
2(a)(ii) non-metal(lic) ; 1
2(b)(i) carbon 2
(methane) + oxygen Æ + water
dioxide
Oxygen on LHS ;
RHS any order ;
2(b)(ii) releases heat / thermal energy when it reacts / burns / is used ; 1
2(c)(i) natural gas ; 1
2(c)(ii) coal and petroleum (either order) ; 1
2(d)(i) fractional distillation ; 1

PUBLISHED
2(d)(ii) heating / cooking ; 1
3(a)(i) name of force letter on Fig. 1.1 2
driving force B
frictional force D
upthrust of water C
weight A
two letters correct ;
two more letters correct ;
3(a)(ii) (Force C is 1200 N) no mark 1

no vertical motion / forces (A and C) must balance ;
3(a)(iii) B / driving force ; 1
3(b) 12 km / h (= 12 000 m / h = 200 m / min) = 3.3 m / s ; 1
3(c)(i) (magnitude of) force ; 2

distance (moved) ;
3(c)(ii) kinetic (energy) / KE ; 1
3(c)(iii) transferred to other forms of energy ; 1

PUBLISHED
4(a) an animal that gets its energy / eats (only) plants ; 2

an animal that gets its energy / eats (only) animals ;
4(b)(i) (amount of) light / light intensity ; 2

(amount of) carbon dioxide / concentration of carbon dioxide ;
4(b)(ii) food chains, any one from 2

seaweedÆlimpetÆcrabÆseagull / phytoplanktonÆmusselÆ crabÆseagull /
phytoplanktonÆzooplanktonÆmussel ÆcrabÆseagull ;
arrows in correct direction ;
4(b)(iii) (increase) 3
crabs no longer feeding on the mussels ;
(decrease)
seagulls have fewer crabs to feed on ;
so they eat more mussels instead ;
5(a)(i) carbon dioxide ; 2

copper sulfate ;
5(a)(ii) increases ; 2
salt making / neutralisation ;
5(b) runs out of / no more (sulfuric) acid / copper carbonate / powder ; 1
5(c) higher temperature / more concentrated (acid) / decrease particle size (of powder) / agitate the flask ; 1
5(d)(i) three / 3 ; 2
seven / 7 ;
5(d)(ii) (acidified) barium ions / barium nitrate (soln) ; 2

(result) white ppt / white solid ;

065
53/31 Cambridg
ge IGCSE – Marrk Scheme May/June 2017
2
PUBLISHED
Q
Question Answer Mark
ks
6(a)(i) (tran
nsfer by) radiatio
on ; 2
infra
a-red ;
6(a)(ii) idea of Max

x2
feet lose heat / therm
mal energy ;
heatt / thermal energy lost to water ;
wateer is colder (than
n the feet of the man) ;
6(a)(iii) (line 1) (more) energ

getic/faster and (line 3) energy // speed ; 2
(line 4) temperature ;
6(b)(i) 2
s) correct refracction at surface ;

(possition of X implies
unbrroken ray in a straight line from X joining with ra ay to eye ;
6(b)(ii) refra
action ; 1
6(c) gam
mma visible micro- radio 1
ra
ays light waves ; waves

PUBLISHED
7(a) vitamins ; 2
mineral salts / minerals ;
7(b) energy from eggs = 37 × 11 + 17 + 13 × 17 ; 2

= 645 (kJ) ;
7(c)(i) carbon dioxide and water ; 1

either order
7(c)(ii) carried by haemoglobin ; Max 2

in red blood cells ;
red cells carried in plasma ;
7(d) in any order 3

mouth ;
stomach ;
small intestine duodenum / ileum ;
8(a)(i) transition ; 1
8(a)(ii) copper oxide / CuO ; 1
8(a)(iii) ductile / high melting point ; 1
8(a)(iv) Iron / Fe is too reactive / reacts / rusts (with water) / copper is less reactive (than iron); 1
8(a)(v) stronger / does not get damaged ; 1
8(b) (metal) magnesium ; 2

(gas) hydrogen ;

PUBLISHED
9(a)(i) any two from 1

one or two metals or alloys (other than copper) ;
graphite / carbon ;
9(a)(ii) any two non-metallic materials (other than carbon / graphite) ; 1
9(a)(iii) insulators ; 1
9(b) to limit the current / protect the circuit ; 1
9(c)(i) voltmeter symbol ; 2

parallel connection ;
9(c)(ii) R = V / I ; 3
= 2 / 0.5 = 4 ;
ohms / Ω ;


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED

need oxygen for germination of seeds ;
have root hair cells for water uptake ;
1(b)(i) any two from Max 2

(large) petals ;
(bright) colour ;
scented ;
nectar ;
1(b)(ii) anthers / stamens are below stigma in 2 and level with stigma in 1 ; 1
1(c) flower 2 (no mark) 1

the stigma is higher than the anthers / anthers lower than the stigma ;
2(a)(ii) non-metal(lic) ; 1
2(b)(i) carbon 2
(methane) + oxygen Æ + water
dioxide
Oxygen on LHS ;
RHS any order ;
2(c)(ii) coal and petroleum (either order) ; 1
2(d)(i) fractional distillation ; 1

PUBLISHED
2(d)(ii) heating / cooking ; 1
3(a)(i) name of force letter on Fig. 1.1 2
driving force B
frictional force D
upthrust of water C
weight A
two letters correct ;
two more letters correct ;

no vertical motion / forces (A and C) must balance ;
3(a)(iii) B / driving force ; 1
3(b) 12 km / h (= 12 000 m / h = 200 m / min) = 3.3 m / s ; 1
3(c)(i) (magnitude of) force ; 2

distance (moved) ;
3(c)(ii) kinetic (energy) / KE ; 1
3(c)(iii) transferred to other forms of energy ; 1

PUBLISHED
4(a) an animal that gets its energy / eats (only) plants ; 2

an animal that gets its energy / eats (only) animals ;
4(b)(i) (amount of) light / light intensity ; 2

(amount of) carbon dioxide / concentration of carbon dioxide ;
4(b)(ii) food chains, any one from 2

seaweedÆlimpetÆcrabÆseagull / phytoplanktonÆmusselÆ crabÆseagull /
phytoplanktonÆzooplanktonÆmussel ÆcrabÆseagull ;
arrows in correct direction ;
4(b)(iii) (increase) 3
crabs no longer feeding on the mussels ;
(decrease)
seagulls have fewer crabs to feed on ;
so they eat more mussels instead ;
5(a)(i) carbon dioxide ; 2

copper sulfate ;
5(a)(ii) increases ; 2
salt making / neutralisation ;
5(b) runs out of / no more (sulfuric) acid / copper carbonate / powder ; 1
5(c) higher temperature / more concentrated (acid) / decrease particle size (of powder) / agitate the flask ; 1
5(d)(i) three / 3 ; 2
seven / 7 ;
5(d)(ii) (acidified) barium ions / barium nitrate (soln) ; 2

(result) white ppt / white solid ;

065
53/31 Cambridg
ge IGCSE – Marrk Scheme May/June 2017
2
PUBLISHED
Q
Question Answer Mark
ks
6(a)(i) (tran
nsfer by) radiatio
on ; 2
infra
a-red ;
6(a)(ii) idea of Max

x2
feet lose heat / therm
mal energy ;
heatt / thermal energy lost to water ;
wateer is colder (than
n the feet of the man) ;
6(a)(iii) (line 1) (more) energ

getic/faster and (line 3) energy // speed ; 2
6(b)(i) 2
s) correct refracction at surface ;

(possition of X implies
unbrroken ray in a straight line from X joining with ra ay to eye ;
6(b)(ii) refra
action ; 1
6(c) gam
mma visible micro- radio 1
ra
ays light waves ; waves

PUBLISHED
7(a) vitamins ; 2
mineral salts / minerals ;
7(b) energy from eggs = 37 × 11 + 17 + 13 × 17 ; 2

= 645 (kJ) ;
7(c)(i) carbon dioxide and water ; 1

either order
7(c)(ii) carried by haemoglobin ; Max 2

7(d) in any order 3

mouth ;
stomach ;
small intestine duodenum / ileum ;
8(a)(i) transition ; 1
8(a)(ii) copper oxide / CuO ; 1
8(a)(iii) ductile / high melting point ; 1
8(a)(iv) Iron / Fe is too reactive / reacts / rusts (with water) / copper is less reactive (than iron); 1
8(a)(v) stronger / does not get damaged ; 1
8(b) (metal) magnesium ; 2

(gas) hydrogen ;

PUBLISHED
9(a)(i) any two from 1

one or two metals or alloys (other than copper) ;
graphite / carbon ;
9(a)(ii) any two non-metallic materials (other than carbon / graphite) ; 1
9(a)(iii) insulators ; 1
9(b) to limit the current / protect the circuit ; 1
9(c)(i) voltmeter symbol ; 2

parallel connection ;
9(c)(ii) R = V / I ; 3
= 2 / 0.5 = 4 ;
ohms / Ω ;


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(a) lines drawn from Enzymes to 3

are biological catalysts ;
are usually not active at low temperatures ;
are protein molecules ;
1(b) large / insoluble / food molecules are broken down ; 2

into small / soluble molecules / so they can be absorbed ;
1(c) glycogen ; 2
starch ;
1(d)(i) Benedict’s (test) ; 2

red colour produced ;
1(d)(ii) no reaction ; 2
because enzymes become inactive at high temperatures ;
1(e) chlorophyll ; 2
light ;

PUBLISHED
2(a)(i) potassium / K 2
lithium / Li
sodium / Na ;;
2(a)(ii) hydrogen / H2 ; 1
2(a)(iii) turns blue and 1

stays blue / no change ;
2(b)(i) magnesium / Mg ; 1
2(b)(ii) copper / Cu ; 1
2(b)(iii) (too) dangerous / (risk of) explosion ; 1
2(c)(i) resists corrosion / does not rust ; 1
2(c)(ii) stronger / does not get damaged ; 1

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) 2
name of force letter on Fig. 1.1
driving force A
frictional force C
lifting force B
weight D
one mark for each two correct ;;
3(a)(ii) (Force B is 500 000 N) no mark 1

constant height;
forces (B and D) are balanced ;
3(a)(iii) 1. A / driving force ; 2

2. B / lifting force ;
3(b)(i) 600 km / h = 600 000 / 3600 m / s = 167 m / s ; 1
3(b)(ii) time (= distance / speed) = 2700 / 600 = 4.5 h 1
3(c) loss of kinetic energy ; 2

loss of (gravitational) potential energy ;
3(d) any variation on this shape that goes from the origin to a maximum and returns to speed = 0 ; 2
horizontal section at constant maximum speed ;

PUBLISHED
4(a)(i) A closes and B opens ; 1
4(a)(ii) to prevent backflow of blood ; 1
4(b)(i) any suitable flight or fight situation described ; 1
4(b)(ii) destroyed by the liver ; 1
4(c) transport of oxygen / haemoglobin ; 2

transport of blood cells / ions / soluble nutrients / named soluble nutrient / hormones / carbon dioxide ;

PUBLISHED
5(a)(i) Fractional distillation ; 1
5(a)(ii) no new substance made / involves only changes of state ; 1
5(a)(iii) cooking / heating allow bottling / bottled gas ; 1
5(b)(i) methane ; 1
5(b)(ii) (atoms) five / 5 and 1

(elements) two / 2 ;
5(b)(iii) C atom joined to 4 H atoms by single bonds ; 1

allow correct dot-and-cross diagrams
5(c) coal ; 1

PUBLISHED
6(a)(i) conduction ; 1
6(a)(ii) insulation (in outer layer of aircraft) / make aircraft out of bad (thermal) conductor / owtte ; 1
6(b)(i) (Z – no mark) 1
gas molecules far apart / not touching ;
6(b)(ii) ice / (frozen) water ; 2

water from fuel combustion freezing / condensing in very cold air ;
6(c) gamma visible micro- radio 2

radiation light waves ; waves ;
6(d) (pitch) low ; 2

(amplitude) (very) high ;

PUBLISHED
7(a)(i) for respiration ; 1
7(a)(ii) diffusion ; 1
7(a)(iii) from the (water) plants ; 1
7(b)(i) food web completed as shown ; 2
small animals fish
algae water plants
arrows in the correct direction ;
7(b)(ii) small animals ; 2

water plants / algae ;

PUBLISHED
8(a)(i) filtration ; 1
8(a)(ii) kill microbes / sterilise (water) ; 1
8(a)(iii) (damp) litmus (paper) ; 2

turns white / bleached ;
8(b)(i) 1
;
chlorine + hydrogen Æ hydrogen chloride
LHS either order
8(b)(ii) covalent ; 2
share (pair of) electrons ;
8(b)(iii) HCl ; 1
8(c)(i) anode ; 1
8(c)(ii) copper ; 1
8(c)(iii) copper chloride solution / aqueous copper chloride ; 1

PUBLISHED
9(a) correct symbols for ammeter and lamp ; 3

correct symbol for variable resistor ;
all shown components connected in series, any order ;
9(b) resistance = V / I ; 3

(total resistance) = 2.4 / 0.6 (= 4 Ω) ;
resistance of one lamp = 2 (Ω) ;
9(c) (increase – no mark)

(total resistance less) so current increases ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED


1(c) glycogen ; 2
starch ;

light ;

PUBLISHED
lithium / Li
sodium / Na ;;


PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) 2
driving force A
frictional force C
lifting force B
weight D

constant height;

3(b)(i) 600 km / h = 600 000 / 3600 m / s = 167 m / s ; 1


PUBLISHED


PUBLISHED
5(b)(i) methane ; 1


5(c) coal ; 1

PUBLISHED
6(b)(i) (Z – no mark) 1




PUBLISHED
small animals fish
algae water plants


PUBLISHED

8(b)(i) 1
;
LHS either order
8(b)(iii) HCl ; 1
8(c)(i) anode ; 1
8(c)(ii) copper ; 1

PUBLISHED





MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED


1(c) glycogen ; 2
starch ;

light ;

PUBLISHED
lithium / Li
sodium / Na ;;


PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) 2
driving force A
frictional force C
lifting force B
weight D

constant height;

3(b)(i) 600 km / h = 600 000 / 3600 m / s = 167 m / s ; 1


PUBLISHED


PUBLISHED
5(b)(i) methane ; 1


5(c) coal ; 1

PUBLISHED
6(b)(i) (Z – no mark) 1




PUBLISHED
small animals fish
algae water plants


PUBLISHED

8(b)(i) 1
;
LHS either order
8(b)(iii) HCl ; 1
8(c)(i) anode ; 1
8(c)(ii) copper ; 1

PUBLISHED





Paper 4 Extended Theory May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(a) lines drawn from Flowering plants to 3

use auxins to respond to light ;
have root hair cells which increase water uptake ;
1(b)(i) (anthers) 2
hang outside the flower so pollen is easily picked up by wind ;
(stigmas)
feathery / large surface area to collect pollen ;
1(b)(ii) to increase the chances of pollination between plants ; 1
1(c)(i) the idea that fossil fuels contain sulfur / sulfur compounds ; Max 2
sulfur dioxide produced ;
dissolves in water in the air ;
1(c)(ii) reduces activity / denatures enzymes present in the plants ; 1

PUBLISHED
2(a)(ii) 2
four shared pairs between C and four H atoms ;

all symbols correctly shown ;
2(b)(i) carbon dioxide ; 2

water ;
2(c)(ii) coal and petroleum ; 1

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) D 1
C

no vertical motion / forces (A and C) are balanced ;
3(b) line starts along the speed = 2 m / s horizontal, levelling off at speed = 4.5 m / s and 10 mins ; 2
any curved line between these points, then level after (10,4.5) ;
3(c)(i) KE = ½ m v2 / ½ × 120 × 3 × 3 ; 2

= 540 (J) ;
3(c)(ii) (90 kJ =) 90 000 J (= work done = energy transferred) ; 3

distance moved = 3 (m / s) × 50 (s) = 150 m ;
force = work done ÷ distance / 90 000 ÷ 150 / = 600 (N) ;

PUBLISHED
4(a)(i) contain chlorophyll ; 3

trap light (energy) ;
converts (light) into chemical energy ;
the idea that chemical energy is contained in glucose / starch / carbohydrate ;
4(a)(ii) flagellum ; 2
the idea that the flagellum is for movement ;
4(b)(i) food chain containing the following organisms 2

phytoplanktonÆzooplanktonÆmusselÆcrabÆseagull ;
four arrows in correct direction in the chain ;
4(b)(ii) fewer steps / stages / organisms in chain containing mussels / ora ; 3

use of the term trophic level ;
energy is lost at each stage ;
by heat / movement / avp ;

PUBLISHED
5(a)(i) increases ; 2
neutralisation / salt-making;
5(a)(ii) CuSO4 ; 2
CO2 and H2O ;
5(b) filter (to remove excess solid / copper carbonate) ; 2

heat the solution / filtrate / mixture ;
reference to evaporation ;
cool / leave (to allow crystals to form) ;
5(c) the idea that the gradient decreases ; 2

the idea that the rate decreases ;
the idea that the rate becomes zero ;
5(d)(i) less steep initial line ; 2

levels off at a lower volume;
5(d)(ii) (decreases rate of reaction) because particles collide less frequently / owtte ; 1

PUBLISHED
6(a)(i) infra-red / radiation ; 2
poorly absorbed / mainly reflected by white ;
6(a)(ii) the idea that feet lose heat / thermal energy ; 2

the idea that heat / thermal energy is lost to the water ;
because the water is colder ;
6(a)(iii) (line 1) more energetic/faster and (line 3) energy / speed ; 2

6(b) ray from X refracts correctly at surface ; 2

unbroken rays drawn with a ruler to the eye with at least one arrow on a ray ;
6(c)(i) gamma Visible micro- radio 1

rays light waves ; waves
6(c)(ii) v = f λ / f = 3 × 108 ÷ 0.12 ; 2

= 2.5 × 109 (Hz) ;

PUBLISHED
7(a) energy = 37 × 11 + 17 + 13 × 17 (= 645) ; 2

× 2 = 1290 (kJ) ;
7(b) eggs (no mark) 1

contains the most fat ;
7(c)(i) 6CO2 and 6H2O ; 1
7(c)(ii) in red (blood) cells ; Max 2

by haemoglobin ;
7(d) chemical digestion:- 2

mouth, and stomach and small intestine / duodenum / ileum ;
absorption:-
small intestine / duodenum / ileum ;

PUBLISHED
8(a) 2,8,3 ; 1
8(b)(i) oxygen (gas) ; 1
8(b)(ii) aluminium ions gain electrons ; 2

gain 3 electrons / ions are discharged / become aluminium atoms ;
8(c)(i) carbon / C / carbon monoxide / CO ; 1
8(c)(ii) aluminium / Al is more reactive than carbon / C ; 1
8(d)(i) Al is less reactive than Mg ; 1
8(d)(ii) Al is more reactive than Cu ; 1

PUBLISHED
9(a) any two from 1

one or two metals or alloys (other than copper)
graphite / carbon
9(b) = 2 / 0.5 = 4 ; 2
ohms / Ω ;
9(c)(i) (2 A) 1
sum of currents in parallel branches = current from source ;
9(c)(ii) P and Q have different resistances / thicknesses ; 2

P less resistance than Q / P is thicker than Q ;


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(a) lines drawn from Flowering plants to 3

use auxins to respond to light ;
have root hair cells which increase water uptake ;
1(b)(i) (anthers) 2
hang outside the flower so pollen is easily picked up by wind ;
(stigmas)
feathery / large surface area to collect pollen ;
1(b)(ii) to increase the chances of pollination between plants ; 1
1(c)(i) the idea that fossil fuels contain sulfur / sulfur compounds ; Max 2
sulfur dioxide produced ;
dissolves in water in the air ;
1(c)(ii) reduces activity / denatures enzymes present in the plants ; 1

PUBLISHED
2(a)(ii) 2
four shared pairs between C and four H atoms ;

all symbols correctly shown ;

water ;
2(c)(ii) coal and petroleum ; 1

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) D 1
C

no vertical motion / forces (A and C) are balanced ;
3(b) line starts along the speed = 2 m / s horizontal, levelling off at speed = 4.5 m / s and 10 mins ; 2
any curved line between these points, then level after (10,4.5) ;
3(c)(i) KE = ½ m v2 / ½ × 120 × 3 × 3 ; 2

= 540 (J) ;
3(c)(ii) (90 kJ =) 90 000 J (= work done = energy transferred) ; 3

distance moved = 3 (m / s) × 50 (s) = 150 m ;
force = work done ÷ distance / 90 000 ÷ 150 / = 600 (N) ;

PUBLISHED
4(a)(i) contain chlorophyll ; 3

trap light (energy) ;
converts (light) into chemical energy ;
the idea that chemical energy is contained in glucose / starch / carbohydrate ;
4(a)(ii) flagellum ; 2
the idea that the flagellum is for movement ;
4(b)(i) food chain containing the following organisms 2

phytoplanktonÆzooplanktonÆmusselÆcrabÆseagull ;
four arrows in correct direction in the chain ;
4(b)(ii) fewer steps / stages / organisms in chain containing mussels / ora ; 3

use of the term trophic level ;
energy is lost at each stage ;
by heat / movement / avp ;

PUBLISHED
5(a)(i) increases ; 2
neutralisation / salt-making;
5(a)(ii) CuSO4 ; 2
CO2 and H2O ;
5(b) filter (to remove excess solid / copper carbonate) ; 2

heat the solution / filtrate / mixture ;
reference to evaporation ;
5(c) the idea that the gradient decreases ; 2

the idea that the rate decreases ;
the idea that the rate becomes zero ;
5(d)(i) less steep initial line ; 2

levels off at a lower volume;
5(d)(ii) (decreases rate of reaction) because particles collide less frequently / owtte ; 1

PUBLISHED
6(a)(i) infra-red / radiation ; 2
poorly absorbed / mainly reflected by white ;
6(a)(ii) the idea that feet lose heat / thermal energy ; 2

the idea that heat / thermal energy is lost to the water ;
because the water is colder ;
6(a)(iii) (line 1) more energetic/faster and (line 3) energy / speed ; 2

6(b) ray from X refracts correctly at surface ; 2

unbroken rays drawn with a ruler to the eye with at least one arrow on a ray ;
6(c)(i) gamma Visible micro- radio 1

rays light waves ; waves
6(c)(ii) v = f λ / f = 3 × 108 ÷ 0.12 ; 2

= 2.5 × 109 (Hz) ;

PUBLISHED
7(a) energy = 37 × 11 + 17 + 13 × 17 (= 645) ; 2

× 2 = 1290 (kJ) ;
7(b) eggs (no mark) 1

contains the most fat ;
7(c)(i) 6CO2 and 6H2O ; 1
7(c)(ii) in red (blood) cells ; Max 2

by haemoglobin ;
7(d) chemical digestion:- 2

mouth, and stomach and small intestine / duodenum / ileum ;
absorption:-
small intestine / duodenum / ileum ;

PUBLISHED
8(a) 2,8,3 ; 1
8(b)(i) oxygen (gas) ; 1
8(b)(ii) aluminium ions gain electrons ; 2

gain 3 electrons / ions are discharged / become aluminium atoms ;
8(c)(i) carbon / C / carbon monoxide / CO ; 1
8(c)(ii) aluminium / Al is more reactive than carbon / C ; 1
8(d)(i) Al is less reactive than Mg ; 1
8(d)(ii) Al is more reactive than Cu ; 1

PUBLISHED
9(a) any two from 1

one or two metals or alloys (other than copper)
graphite / carbon
9(b) = 2 / 0.5 = 4 ; 2
ohms / Ω ;
9(c)(i) (2 A) 1
sum of currents in parallel branches = current from source ;
9(c)(ii) P and Q have different resistances / thicknesses ; 2

P less resistance than Q / P is thicker than Q ;


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(a) three lines from ‘Enzymes’ to 3

work best in a narrow pH range ;
are made from amino acids ;
1(b) (correct) 2
46 °C is optimum temperature / rate decreases above and below 46 °C ;
correct reference to denaturation ;
1(c)(i) glucose / sugar / simple sugar ; 1
1(c)(ii) glycogen ; 1
1(c)(iii) nitrogen ; 1
2(a)(i) A potassium / K 2
B lithium / Li
C sodium / Na
1 or 2 correct, 1 mark
all 3 correct, 2 marks
2(a)(ii) exothermic ; 3
chemical (potential) ;
two from
thermal (allow heat) / light / sound / kinetic ;
2(a)(iii) in the range 1 to 14 (seconds) inclusive ; 1
2(b) (too) dangerous / (risk of) explosion ; 1
2(c)(ii) stronger / more difficult to damage ; 1

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) C 1
B
3(a)(ii) (D is 500 000 N) 1
the idea that height remains constant / forces (B and D) are balanced / equal and opposite / the resultant force in the
vertical direction is zero ;
3(a)(iii) (decreases) 1
the weight decreases ;
3(b)(i) acceleration = increase in speed ÷ time / (160 – 100) ÷ 30 ; 2

= 2 m / s2 ;
3(b)(ii) potential energy change = mgh or mg∆h / 50 000 × 10 × 2000 ; 2

= 1 × 109 (J) ;

PUBLISHED
4(a)(i) valve A closes and valve B opens ; 1
4(a)(ii) high(er) pressure required to send blood around the body / travel a long distance / ora ; Max 2
high(er) pressure in aorta and low(er) pressure in pulmonary artery ;
low pressure in pulmonary artery prevents damaging capillaries in lungs ;
4(b)(i) reduces blood flow in coronary artery / arteries ; 2

by presence of cholesterol / fatty deposits / plaque ;
4(b)(ii) less fatty diet / reduced stress / reduced smoking / more exercise ; 1
4(c)(i) any valid fight or flight situation described ; 1
4(c)(ii) destroyed by the liver ; 1
4(d) reference to auxins ; 3

greater concentration on dark side (of stem) ;
cause greater (cell) elongation /growth (on that side) ;
5(a)(i) fractional distillation ; 1
5(a)(ii) larger molecules / hydrocarbons have larger inter-molecular forces / ora ; 1
5(a)(iii) larger inter-molecular forces means higher boiling point / ora ; 1
5(b)(i) (D) alkane / saturated ; 2

(E) alkene / unsaturated ;
5(b)(ii) bromine (water / solution) ; 2

(D) no change and (E) decolourises ;
5(b)(iii) cracking ; 1
5(c) (C7H16) + 11 (O2) Î 7 (CO2) + 8 (H2O) ;; 2

PUBLISHED
6(a)(ii) (kinetic) energy of air molecules inside transferred to molecules in aircraft wall (fuselage) ; Max 2
(kinetic) energy transferred between molecules in aircraft wall (fuselage) ;
(kinetic) energy transferred from aircraft wall (fuselage) to air molecules outside ;
the idea that energy is transferred via vibrating/colliding molecules/particles ;
6(b)(i) (Z) 1
molecules shown not touching / apart ;
6(b)(ii) molecules in jet engine moving faster ; 2

because they are at a higher temperature / have greater kinetic energy ;
or
molecules in water moving more slowly ;
because they are at a lower temperature / have smaller kinetic energy ;
or
the idea that molecules from the jet exhaust are able to move more freely ;
because they are separated / far apart ;
or
the idea that molecules in water have more restricted movement ;
because molecules are close together / touching ;
6(c)(i) total distance = speed × time / 3 × 105 × 0.0002 ; 3

= 60 (km) ;
so distance aircraft to transmitter = ½ × 60 / 30 (km) ;
6(c)(ii) (long wavelength end) 2

it is in the microwave part of spectrum / it is a microwave / it is at the low frequency end ;
lower frequency waves have longer wavelength / ref. to inverse proportionality / reference to the formula ν = f × λ ;

PUBLISHED
7(a) an area where the organisms interact with each other ; 2

and (interact with) their environment ;
7(b) 2
all organisms written only once ;

feeding relationships shown using arrows ;
7(c)(i) no light ; 2
for photosynthesis ;
7(c)(ii) bacteria take in / use the oxygen ; 2

for their respiration ;
8(a)(i) 6; 1
8(a)(ii) non-metal 1
together with one from
electrical / thermal insulator /
low melting / boiling point
ovp ;
8(b)(i) (2), 8, 7 ; 1
8(b)(ii) one shared pair and six non-bonding electrons on each Cl ; 1
8(c)(i) ionic ; 1
8(c)(ii) sodium loses one (electron) ; 2

chlorine gains one (electron) ;

PUBLISHED
8(d) reference to full outer shell ; 1
9(a)(i) correct symbols for ammeter and lamp ; 2

only the shown components connected in series ;
9(a)(ii) voltmeter connected in parallel with lamp ; 2

correct symbol for voltmeter ;
9(b) P = V × I = 1.5 × 0.6 = 0.9 (W) ; 1
9(c)(i) total resistance more, (so current decreases / so dimmer lamps) ; 1
9(c)(ii) the idea that (compared to one bulb) the (total) potential difference (across two bulbs) is the same but the current is lower 2
(V the same I lower) ;
(if V is the same, but I is less) then less power (dissipated) / less total energy transformed per unit time ;
or
the relation P = V × I / E = V × I × t therefore shows that the power / energy per unit time is lower (when two bulbs are
used) ;


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(a) three lines from ‘Enzymes’ to 3

work best in a narrow pH range ;
are made from amino acids ;
1(b) (correct) 2
46 °C is optimum temperature / rate decreases above and below 46 °C ;
correct reference to denaturation ;
1(c)(i) glucose / sugar / simple sugar ; 1
1(c)(ii) glycogen ; 1
1(c)(iii) nitrogen ; 1
2(a)(i) A potassium / K 2
B lithium / Li
C sodium / Na
1 or 2 correct, 1 mark
all 3 correct, 2 marks
2(a)(ii) exothermic ; 3
two from
thermal (allow heat) / light / sound / kinetic ;
2(a)(iii) in the range 1 to 14 (seconds) inclusive ; 1
2(b) (too) dangerous / (risk of) explosion ; 1
2(c)(ii) stronger / more difficult to damage ; 1

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) C 1
B
3(a)(ii) (D is 500 000 N) 1
the idea that height remains constant / forces (B and D) are balanced / equal and opposite / the resultant force in the
vertical direction is zero ;
3(a)(iii) (decreases) 1
the weight decreases ;
3(b)(i) acceleration = increase in speed ÷ time / (160 – 100) ÷ 30 ; 2

= 2 m / s2 ;
3(b)(ii) potential energy change = mgh or mg∆h / 50 000 × 10 × 2000 ; 2

= 1 × 109 (J) ;

PUBLISHED
4(a)(i) valve A closes and valve B opens ; 1
4(a)(ii) high(er) pressure required to send blood around the body / travel a long distance / ora ; Max 2
high(er) pressure in aorta and low(er) pressure in pulmonary artery ;
low pressure in pulmonary artery prevents damaging capillaries in lungs ;
4(b)(i) reduces blood flow in coronary artery / arteries ; 2

by presence of cholesterol / fatty deposits / plaque ;
4(b)(ii) less fatty diet / reduced stress / reduced smoking / more exercise ; 1
4(c)(i) any valid fight or flight situation described ; 1
4(c)(ii) destroyed by the liver ; 1
4(d) reference to auxins ; 3

greater concentration on dark side (of stem) ;
cause greater (cell) elongation /growth (on that side) ;
5(a)(ii) larger molecules / hydrocarbons have larger inter-molecular forces / ora ; 1
5(a)(iii) larger inter-molecular forces means higher boiling point / ora ; 1
5(b)(i) (D) alkane / saturated ; 2

(E) alkene / unsaturated ;
5(b)(ii) bromine (water / solution) ; 2

(D) no change and (E) decolourises ;
5(b)(iii) cracking ; 1
5(c) (C7H16) + 11 (O2) Î 7 (CO2) + 8 (H2O) ;; 2

PUBLISHED
6(a)(ii) (kinetic) energy of air molecules inside transferred to molecules in aircraft wall (fuselage) ; Max 2
(kinetic) energy transferred between molecules in aircraft wall (fuselage) ;
(kinetic) energy transferred from aircraft wall (fuselage) to air molecules outside ;
the idea that energy is transferred via vibrating/colliding molecules/particles ;
6(b)(i) (Z) 1
molecules shown not touching / apart ;
6(b)(ii) molecules in jet engine moving faster ; 2

because they are at a higher temperature / have greater kinetic energy ;
or
molecules in water moving more slowly ;
because they are at a lower temperature / have smaller kinetic energy ;
or
the idea that molecules from the jet exhaust are able to move more freely ;
because they are separated / far apart ;
or
the idea that molecules in water have more restricted movement ;
because molecules are close together / touching ;
6(c)(i) total distance = speed × time / 3 × 105 × 0.0002 ; 3

= 60 (km) ;
so distance aircraft to transmitter = ½ × 60 / 30 (km) ;
6(c)(ii) (long wavelength end) 2

it is in the microwave part of spectrum / it is a microwave / it is at the low frequency end ;
lower frequency waves have longer wavelength / ref. to inverse proportionality / reference to the formula ν = f × λ ;

PUBLISHED
7(a) an area where the organisms interact with each other ; 2

and (interact with) their environment ;
7(b) 2
all organisms written only once ;

feeding relationships shown using arrows ;
7(c)(i) no light ; 2
for photosynthesis ;
7(c)(ii) bacteria take in / use the oxygen ; 2

for their respiration ;
8(a)(i) 6; 1
8(a)(ii) non-metal 1
together with one from
electrical / thermal insulator /
low melting / boiling point
ovp ;
8(b)(i) (2), 8, 7 ; 1
8(b)(ii) one shared pair and six non-bonding electrons on each Cl ; 1
8(c)(i) ionic ; 1
8(c)(ii) sodium loses one (electron) ; 2

chlorine gains one (electron) ;

PUBLISHED
8(d) reference to full outer shell ; 1
9(a)(i) correct symbols for ammeter and lamp ; 2

only the shown components connected in series ;
9(a)(ii) voltmeter connected in parallel with lamp ; 2

correct symbol for voltmeter ;
9(b) P = V × I = 1.5 × 0.6 = 0.9 (W) ; 1
9(c)(i) total resistance more, (so current decreases / so dimmer lamps) ; 1
9(c)(ii) the idea that (compared to one bulb) the (total) potential difference (across two bulbs) is the same but the current is lower 2
(V the same I lower) ;
(if V is the same, but I is less) then less power (dissipated) / less total energy transformed per unit time ;
or
the relation P = V × I / E = V × I × t therefore shows that the power / energy per unit time is lower (when two bulbs are
used) ;

COMBINED SCIENCES 0653/43

MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED

increases the concentration of carbon monoxide in the blood ;
damages the cilia in the airway ;
causes more mucus to be produced in the lungs ;
1(b)(i) arrow drawn from plasma to alveolar sac ; 1
1(b)(ii) large surface area ; 2

thin wall ;
reference to good blood supply ;
1(c) carried by haemoglobin ; max 3

enters left atrium / through the pulmonary vein ;
1(d)(i) more glucose available to be broken down by cells / for oxidation / chemical (energy) converted to thermal / heat (energy) 1
1(d)(ii) faster delivery of oxygen / glucose to cells ; 1

PUBLISHED
2(a)(i) C8H18 ; 1
allow H18C8
2(a)(ii) (higher up) 3

lower boiling point ;
smaller molecules ;
lower intermolecular forces ;
2(b) cracking ; 1
2(c) (ethene) alkene / unsaturated ; 2

both (ethane) and (octane) alkane / saturated ;
2(d) 2
2 pairs between carbon ;

1 pair between each H and C ;
(whether dots or crosses does not affect marks)

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) C 1
A
3(a)(ii) (Force B is 1000 N) 1

no vertical motion / forces (A and B) are balanced ;
3(b) 1 km at 15 km / h Æ 1 / 15 h / 0.067 h ; 2

1 / 15 h = 3 600 × 1 / 15 = 240 (s) ;
3(c) KE = ½ mv2 2
= ½ × 100 × 4 × 4 = 800 (J) ;
3(d)(i) energy input = 120 × 250 = 30 000 (J) ; 1
3(d)(ii) work done = force × distance (moved) / F × d ; 2

= 25 × 1 000 = 25 000 (J) ;
3(d)(iii) efficiency (%) = (work got out ÷ work put in) × 100 / (equivalent wording ) ; 2
= (25 000 / 30 000) × 100 = 83.3 (%) ;

PUBLISHED
4(a) geotropism / gravitropism ; 1
4(b)(i) drawing with 2

shoot bending upwards ;
root bending downwards ;
4(b)(ii) auxins become more concentrated on lower surface ; 2

cause more growth / cell elongation ;
4(c)(i) sulfur dioxide ; 2

dissolves in rain water ;
4(c)(ii) denatures the enzymes / makes the enzymes less active ; 1

PUBLISHED
5(a) 8 electrons 2nd shell ; 2

2 electrons 3rd shell ;
5(b)(i) gas / H2 produced / lost ; 2

reaction ends / over ;
5(b)(ii) (Mg) + 2HCl Î H2 + (MgCl2) 2
2HCl ;
H2 ;
5(c)(i) increases ; 2
particles collide more often / forcefully / energetically / successfully ;
5(c)(ii) increases / changes ; 2
no change ;

PUBLISHED
6(a)(ii) air is a good insulator / poor conductor (of heat) ; 1
6(b)(i) (Z – no mark) 1
at 800 °C / such a high temperature water is formed as a gas ;
6(b)(ii) ice (crystals) ; 2

water vapour / steam from engines freezes in contact with air at a temperature well below freezing point of water ;
6(c)(i) microwaves ; 1
6(c)(ii) 1
visible micro-
X-rays
light waves ;
6(d)(i) speed of radio waves / electromagnetic waves (much) faster than speed of sound ; 1
6(d)(ii) vibrations produced by engines / owtte ; 2

create series of compressions and rarefactions through air to man / vibrations passed through air from particle to
particle / longitudinal (sound) waves are passed through the air ;

PUBLISHED
7(a) C6H12O6 and 6O2 ; 1
7(b)(i) line drawn through stoma to cell Z ; 1
7(b)(ii) xylem correctly labelled ; 1
7(c)(i) by evaporation ; 2
from the surfaces of the mesophyll cells / cells inside the leaf ;
7(c)(ii) (greater in A) 2
air around A is less humid than around B / ora ;
transpiration happens more slowly if the air is humid / ora ;

PUBLISHED
8(a) (rubidium) 1
in the range 25 to 50 ( °C ) inclusive ;
8(b)(i) C 2
A
B
D
C and D correct ;
A and B correct ;
8(b)(ii) chemical (energy) decreases ; 2

thermal / heat (energy) increases ;
8(c)(i) cathode ; 1
8(c)(ii) chlorine / Cl2 ; 1
8(c)(iii) (so that) ions move ; 1

PUBLISHED
9(a)(i) (4.5 A) 1
idea that current in main circuit = sum of currents in branches ;
9(a)(ii) (because) same p.d. across both resistors ; max2

(so) R2 and R3 must have different values ;
R2 greater than R3 ;
9(b)(i) 3A 1
9(b)(ii) voltage across R1 = 12 – 3 = 9V ; 2

R1 = V / I = 9 / 3 = 3 Ω ;


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 30
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(a) Benedict’s test ; 1
1(b) Benedict’s test biuret test iodine test 3
banana yellow / green / orange / red blue / no blue-black

change
chick peas blue / no change purple blue-black
egg white blue / no change purple brown / no
change
one mark per column ;
1(c)(i) (reducing sugar) and starch ; 1
1(c)(ii) protein and starch ; 1
1(c)(iii) protein ; 1
1(d) (dissolve in) ethanol; 3
(add) water;
cloudy / emulsion / milky ;

PUBLISHED
2(a)(i) solution H solution J 2
red / no change blue

red litmus paper
and and
blue litmus paper blue / no change ; blue / no change ;
2(a)(ii) (solution H could be) barium nitrate (or) silver nitrate ; 2

(both needed for mark)
(solution J could be) ammonia (or) sodium hydroxide ;

2(b)(i) solution H solution J 3
observations on
(white) ppt. / cloudy / dark blue
slowly adding
milky / turns white (solution) / blue
copper sulfate
ppt. ;
solution
and«
colour of any
white ; blue / light blue ;
residue
2(b)(ii) H is barium nitrate (solution) ; 2
J is ammonia (solution) ;
2(c) (iron(III) sulfate) gives brown ppt. with both sodium hydroxide and ammonia / observations the same with both sodium 1
hydroxide and ammonia ;

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) I and V values recorded ; 1
3(a)(ii) all recorded I values < 0.5 A and to at least 2 d.p. ; 3

all recorded V values < 2.5 V and to at least 1 d.p. ;
V values increasing ;
3(a)(iii) R values recorded to consistent 2 / 3 significant figures ; 1
3(b) suitable choice of scales (⩾ half the grid used) ; 3

5 plots correct to half a small square ;
good best-fit line judgement ;
3(c)(i) value of R correctly read from graph ; 1
3(c)(ii) (directly) proportional / as length increases so resistance increases ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 30
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(b) Benedict’s test biuret test iodine test 3
banana yellow / green / orange / red blue / no blue-black

change
chick peas blue / no change purple blue-black
egg white blue / no change purple brown / no
change
one mark per column ;
1(c)(i) (reducing sugar) and starch ; 1
1(c)(ii) protein and starch ; 1
1(c)(iii) protein ; 1
1(d) (dissolve in) ethanol; 3
(add) water;
cloudy / emulsion / milky ;

PUBLISHED
2(a)(i) solution H solution J 2
red / no change blue

red litmus paper
and and
blue litmus paper blue / no change ; blue / no change ;
2(a)(ii) (solution H could be) barium nitrate (or) silver nitrate ; 2


2(b)(i) solution H solution J 3
observations on
(white) ppt. / cloudy / dark blue
slowly adding
milky / turns white (solution) / blue
copper sulfate
ppt. ;
solution
and«
colour of any
white ; blue / light blue ;
residue
2(c) (iron(III) sulfate) gives brown ppt. with both sodium hydroxide and ammonia / observations the same with both sodium 1
hydroxide and ammonia ;

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) I and V values recorded ; 1
3(a)(ii) all recorded I values < 0.5 A and to at least 2 d.p. ; 3

all recorded V values < 2.5 V and to at least 1 d.p. ;
V values increasing ;
3(a)(iii) R values recorded to consistent 2 / 3 significant figures ; 1
3(b) suitable choice of scales (⩾ half the grid used) ; 3

good best-fit line judgement ;
3(c)(i) value of R correctly read from graph ; 1
3(c)(ii) (directly) proportional / as length increases so resistance increases ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 30
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(a) quality drawing in pencil using at least half the space ; 4

male parts, anther and filament drawn ;
female parts, stigma and ovary drawn ;
petals drawn ;
1(b)(i) line drawn edge to edge ; 2

correct measurement of drawing and sensible flower measurement ;
1(b)(ii) correct calculation ; 1
1(c) benedict’s solution; 3

heat;
orange / red indicates more sugar or yellow / green indicates less sugar ;
2(a)(i) temperature recorded and within 5 °C of supervisor’s value ; 2

both volumes recorded and V2 > V1 ;
2(a)(ii) temperature recorded for experiment 2 and 8–12 °C above the temperature for experiment 1; 2
both volumes recorded and both greater than those in (a)(i) ;
2(a)(iii) temperatures for experiment 3 recorded and to nearest half degree ; 2

V1 and V2 for experiment 3 greater than V1 and V2 for experiment 2 ;
2(b)(i) all values of V correct ; 1
2(b)(ii) the higher the temperature the higher the rate of the reaction ; 1

PUBLISHED
2(c) bubble into water ; 2

count bubbles in a certain time / time for certain number of bubbles ;
or
connect delivery tube to a gas syringe ;
measure volume in a certain time / time for a certain volume ;
or
place reaction flask on a balance ;
measure mass (decrease) in a certain time / time for certain drop in mass ;
3(a)(i) m present and to 0.1 g ; 1
3(a)(ii) V1 present and 65 ± 5 (cm3) ; 1
3(a)(iii) V2 present ; 2
V2 > V1 ;
3(a)(iv) calculation correct ; 1
3(a)(v) calculation correct and 2 / 3 sig fig ; 2

g / cm3 ;
3(b)(i) any 2 from ; max 2
not reading to bottom of meniscus

not reading perpendicular to scale of measuring cylinder / not eye level
test tube touching the side of cylinder / how the test-tube floats
zero error on balance
3(b)(ii) state effect on V or m and hence effect on d2 ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 30
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(a) quality drawing in pencil using at least half the space ; 4

male parts, anther and filament drawn ;
female parts, stigma and ovary drawn ;
petals drawn ;
1(b)(i) line drawn edge to edge ; 2

correct measurement of drawing and sensible flower measurement ;
1(b)(ii) correct calculation ; 1
1(c) benedict’s solution; 3

heat;
orange / red indicates more sugar or yellow / green indicates less sugar ;
2(a)(i) temperature recorded and within 5 °C of supervisor’s value ; 2

both volumes recorded and V2 > V1 ;
2(a)(ii) temperature recorded for experiment 2 and 8–12 °C above the temperature for experiment 1; 2
both volumes recorded and both greater than those in (a)(i) ;
2(a)(iii) temperatures for experiment 3 recorded and to nearest half degree ; 2

V1 and V2 for experiment 3 greater than V1 and V2 for experiment 2 ;
2(b)(i) all values of V correct ; 1
2(b)(ii) the higher the temperature the higher the rate of the reaction ; 1

PUBLISHED
2(c) bubble into water ; 2

count bubbles in a certain time / time for certain number of bubbles ;
or
connect delivery tube to a gas syringe ;
measure volume in a certain time / time for a certain volume ;
or
place reaction flask on a balance ;
measure mass (decrease) in a certain time / time for certain drop in mass ;
3(a)(i) m present and to 0.1 g ; 1
3(a)(ii) V1 present and 65 ± 5 (cm3) ; 1
3(a)(iii) V2 present ; 2
V2 > V1 ;
3(a)(iv) calculation correct ; 1
3(a)(v) calculation correct and 2 / 3 sig fig ; 2

g / cm3 ;
3(b)(i) any 2 from ; max 2
not reading to bottom of meniscus

not reading perpendicular to scale of measuring cylinder / not eye level
test tube touching the side of cylinder / how the test-tube floats
zero error on balance
3(b)(ii) state effect on V or m and hence effect on d2 ; 1


Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 60
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(b) 1 mark per column ;;; 3

Benedict’s test biuret test iodine test
banana yellow/green/orange/red blue blue-black

chickpea blue blue blue-black
egg white blue purple brown
1(c) same volume of apple juice ; max 3
same volume / concentration of Benedict’s solution / excess Benedict’s ;
same temperature / same time ;
yellow/green = less (concentrated) / orange/red = more (concentrated) ;
1(d) (dissolve in) ethanol ; 3

(add) water ;
cloudy / emulsion ;

PUBLISHED
2(a) (solution H could be) barium nitrate (or) silver nitrate ; 2

2(b)(i) add excess copper oxide to sulfuric acid in a beaker (and stir) ; 3
warm ;
filter / filtrate is copper sulfate solution ;

2(c) (iron(III) sulfate) gives same result / brown ppt. with both sodium hydroxide and ammonia ; 3
so does not test/distinguish between sodium hydroxide and ammonia ;
it would identify barium nitrate/H / still gives white ppt. with H ;

PUBLISHED
3(a) 0.36 (V) ; 1
3(b)(i) 2.00 ; 2
6.78 ;
3(b)(ii) choice of scales and linear (⩾ ½ the grid used) ; 3

plots correct to ½ small square ;
good best-fit straight line judgement ;
3(c)(i) candidate’s R value at l = 10 cm ; 1
3(c)(ii) (directly) proportional (if through origin) ; 1
3(d) reading meter scale ; max 2

observe perpendicularly / repeat / digital meter ;
OR
measuring the length of wire ;

observe perpendicularly / repeat (for decreasing lengths of wire) ;
OR
wire gets hot / resistance changes ;

switch off between readings ;

PUBLISHED
4(a) wear gloves / safe disposal of needle / use sterilised/clean needle/equipment ; 1
4(b)(i) line to a red blood cell and labelled ; 2

line to a platelet and labelled ;
4(b)(ii) quality drawing more than half of box with nucleus ; 4

irregular cell (freehand) with nucleus – 3 lobes ;
two of:
nucleus labelled ;
cytoplasm labelled ;
(cell) membrane ;
4(c)(i) measurement 8(.0)/8.5/9(.0)/9.5/10(.0)mm ; 1
4(c)(ii) measurement to the nearest 0.5 mm AND larger than (c)(i) ; 1
4(c)(iii) magnification correctly calculated to the nearest whole number ; 1

PUBLISHED
5(a) label syringe/measuring cylinder/burette ; 2

drawing of gas syringe/burette/up-turned measuring cylinder or graduated test-tube filled with water and in water ;
5(b) 6, 13.5, 28, 54.5, 65 ; 1
5(c) 2.5 AND largest volume of gas/most gas (collected in 2 minutes/same amount of time) ; 1
5(d)(i) stop watch/clock ; 1
5(d)(ii) pipette/burette ; 1
5(e)(i) temperature ; 1
5(e)(ii) reliability / to take an average / spot anomalies ; 1
5(f) CO2 ; 2
turns limewater milky ;

PUBLISHED
6(a) clamp/retort (stand) ; 1
6(b) don't touch the (hot) lamp ; 1
6(c)(i) two plots ; 1
6(c)(ii) smooth curve (through most of the points) ; 2

not through anomalous point / not taking into account anomalous point ;
6(c)(iii) value from graph ; 2

line / marking on graph ;
6(c)(iv) as height increases temperature decreases ; 2

non-linear / T becomes constant ;
6(c)(v) no further decrease in temperature / temperature stayed the same / reached room temperature ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 60
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(b) 1 mark per column ;;; 3

banana yellow/green/orange/red blue blue-black

chickpea blue blue blue-black
egg white blue purple brown
1(c) same volume of apple juice ; max 3
same volume / concentration of Benedict’s solution / excess Benedict’s ;
same temperature / same time ;
yellow/green = less (concentrated) / orange/red = more (concentrated) ;
1(d) (dissolve in) ethanol ; 3

(add) water ;
cloudy / emulsion ;

PUBLISHED
2(a) (solution H could be) barium nitrate (or) silver nitrate ; 2

2(b)(i) add excess copper oxide to sulfuric acid in a beaker (and stir) ; 3
warm ;
filter / filtrate is copper sulfate solution ;

2(c) (iron(III) sulfate) gives same result / brown ppt. with both sodium hydroxide and ammonia ; 3
so does not test/distinguish between sodium hydroxide and ammonia ;
it would identify barium nitrate/H / still gives white ppt. with H ;

PUBLISHED
3(a) 0.36 (V) ; 1
3(b)(i) 2.00 ; 2
6.78 ;
3(b)(ii) choice of scales and linear (⩾ ½ the grid used) ; 3

plots correct to ½ small square ;
3(c)(i) candidate’s R value at l = 10 cm ; 1
3(c)(ii) (directly) proportional (if through origin) ; 1
3(d) reading meter scale ; max 2

observe perpendicularly / repeat / digital meter ;
OR
measuring the length of wire ;

observe perpendicularly / repeat (for decreasing lengths of wire) ;
OR
wire gets hot / resistance changes ;

switch off between readings ;

PUBLISHED
4(a) wear gloves / safe disposal of needle / use sterilised/clean needle/equipment ; 1
4(b)(i) line to a red blood cell and labelled ; 2

line to a platelet and labelled ;
4(b)(ii) quality drawing more than half of box with nucleus ; 4

irregular cell (freehand) with nucleus – 3 lobes ;
two of:
nucleus labelled ;
cytoplasm labelled ;
(cell) membrane ;
4(c)(i) measurement 8(.0)/8.5/9(.0)/9.5/10(.0)mm ; 1
4(c)(ii) measurement to the nearest 0.5 mm AND larger than (c)(i) ; 1
4(c)(iii) magnification correctly calculated to the nearest whole number ; 1

PUBLISHED
5(a) label syringe/measuring cylinder/burette ; 2

drawing of gas syringe/burette/up-turned measuring cylinder or graduated test-tube filled with water and in water ;
5(b) 6, 13.5, 28, 54.5, 65 ; 1
5(c) 2.5 AND largest volume of gas/most gas (collected in 2 minutes/same amount of time) ; 1
5(d)(i) stop watch/clock ; 1
5(d)(ii) pipette/burette ; 1
5(e)(i) temperature ; 1
5(e)(ii) reliability / to take an average / spot anomalies ; 1
5(f) CO2 ; 2
turns limewater milky ;

PUBLISHED
6(a) clamp/retort (stand) ; 1
6(b) don't touch the (hot) lamp ; 1
6(c)(i) two plots ; 1
6(c)(ii) smooth curve (through most of the points) ; 2

not through anomalous point / not taking into account anomalous point ;
6(c)(iii) value from graph ; 2

line / marking on graph ;
6(c)(iv) as height increases temperature decreases ; 2

non-linear / T becomes constant ;
6(c)(v) no further decrease in temperature / temperature stayed the same / reached room temperature ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 60
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(a) 11.1 (cm3) ; 2

15.8 (cm3) ;
1(b) axes labelled with units ; 4

suitable linear scale using at least half the grid ;
at least 4 points plotted ± half small square ;
best-fit curve through origin ;
1(c)(i) carbon dioxide ; 1
1(c)(ii) respiration ; 1
1(d)(i) line below original line ; 1
1(d)(ii) volume of yeast / temperature ; 1

PUBLISHED
2(a)(i) completed apparatus with gas tight bung in one test-tube and delivery tube into other test-tube ; 2
correct labels for delivery tube AND one chemical i.e. H or limewater ;
2(a)(ii) to avoid suck back / to prevent cold limewater hitting hot solid ; 1
2(a)(iii) H is a carbonate ; 1
2(b) H is copper carbonate ; max 2

J is copper sulfate ;
OR
two copper compounds ;

a carbonate and a sulfate ;
2(c) K is copper oxide / CuO ; 1
2(d) add barium nitrate AND white ppt. ; 1
2(e)(i) white ppt. / colourless solution / white ppt. which disappears ; 1
2(e)(ii) any ppt. has dissolved / no ppt. in excess ; 1

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) 7.5 (cm) ; 1
3(a)(ii) 37.5 (cm) ; 1
3(a)(iii) 40.0 and 26.7 ; 1
3(b) any 1 for 1 mark: max 1

move screen slowly to and fro until sharpest focus obtained ;
object / lens / screen perpendicular to bench ;
object and lens same height above the bench ;
carry out experiment away from other bright light sources / darkened room ;
3(c)(i) suitable choice of scale (⩾ half the grid used) for x-axis ; 3
plots correct to half a small square, at least 4 correct ;
3(c)(ii) intercept correct from candidate’s graph ; 1
3(c)(iii) correct calculation for f ; 2

15.0 (± 1.0) cm ;

PUBLISHED
4(a) water ; max 2

oxygen ;
suitable temperature ;
4(b) light from above / all sides equally ; 1
4(c) shoot drawn in all three dishes ; 3

shortest shoot in A ;
tallest shoot in C ;
4(d) Benedict’s solution ; 3

heat ;
yellow / green / orange / red ;
4(e) not all grow / some die ; max 1

identify anomalies ;
improve reliability ;

PUBLISHED
5(a) mention of time AND volume ; 2

link between volume and time ;
5(b)(i) observations: 2
bubbles faster ;
measurement:
more gas in the same time OR less time for the same amount of gas ;
5(b)(ii) repeats ; max 2

at least one more increased surface area ;
3 lots more ;
5(b)(iii) temperature ; max 2

state of Mg ;
concentration of acid ;
5(c) hydrogen ; 2
lighted splint AND pops ;

PUBLISHED
6(a) 40.4 (cm) ; 1
6(b)(i) point plotted within 1 / 2 small square and curve ; 2

curve ignores anomalous point ;
6(b)(ii) as θ increases distance increases ; 2

increase getting less ;
6(c) θ constant ; max 3

at least 4 diameters ;
same material for ball bearings ;
range OK e.g. 1,2,3,4, etc. ;
6(d)(i) kinetic / movement AND kinetic / movement ; 1
6(d)(ii) would go too far / friction of cloth greater / friction of bench too small ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 60
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1(a) 11.1 (cm3) ; 2

15.8 (cm3) ;
1(b) axes labelled with units ; 4

suitable linear scale using at least half the grid ;
at least 4 points plotted ± half small square ;
best-fit curve through origin ;
1(c)(i) carbon dioxide ; 1
1(c)(ii) respiration ; 1
1(d)(i) line below original line ; 1
1(d)(ii) volume of yeast / temperature ; 1

PUBLISHED
2(a)(i) completed apparatus with gas tight bung in one test-tube and delivery tube into other test-tube ; 2
correct labels for delivery tube AND one chemical i.e. H or limewater ;
2(a)(ii) to avoid suck back / to prevent cold limewater hitting hot solid ; 1
2(a)(iii) H is a carbonate ; 1
2(b) H is copper carbonate ; max 2

J is copper sulfate ;
OR
two copper compounds ;

a carbonate and a sulfate ;
2(c) K is copper oxide / CuO ; 1
2(d) add barium nitrate AND white ppt. ; 1
2(e)(i) white ppt. / colourless solution / white ppt. which disappears ; 1
2(e)(ii) any ppt. has dissolved / no ppt. in excess ; 1

PUBLISHED
3(a)(i) 7.5 (cm) ; 1
3(a)(ii) 37.5 (cm) ; 1
3(a)(iii) 40.0 and 26.7 ; 1
3(b) any 1 for 1 mark: max 1

move screen slowly to and fro until sharpest focus obtained ;
carry out experiment away from other bright light sources / darkened room ;
3(c)(i) suitable choice of scale (⩾ half the grid used) for x-axis ; 3
3(c)(ii) intercept correct from candidate’s graph ; 1
3(c)(iii) correct calculation for f ; 2

15.0 (± 1.0) cm ;

PUBLISHED
4(a) water ; max 2

oxygen ;
suitable temperature ;
4(b) light from above / all sides equally ; 1
4(c) shoot drawn in all three dishes ; 3

shortest shoot in A ;
tallest shoot in C ;
4(d) Benedict’s solution ; 3

heat ;
yellow / green / orange / red ;
4(e) not all grow / some die ; max 1

identify anomalies ;
improve reliability ;

PUBLISHED
5(a) mention of time AND volume ; 2

link between volume and time ;
5(b)(i) observations: 2
bubbles faster ;
measurement:
more gas in the same time OR less time for the same amount of gas ;
5(b)(ii) repeats ; max 2

at least one more increased surface area ;
3 lots more ;
5(b)(iii) temperature ; max 2

state of Mg ;
concentration of acid ;
5(c) hydrogen ; 2
lighted splint AND pops ;

PUBLISHED
6(a) 40.4 (cm) ; 1
6(b)(i) point plotted within 1 / 2 small square and curve ; 2

curve ignores anomalous point ;
6(b)(ii) as θ increases distance increases ; 2

increase getting less ;
6(c) θ constant ; max 3

at least 4 diameters ;
same material for ball bearings ;
range OK e.g. 1,2,3,4, etc. ;
6(d)(i) kinetic / movement AND kinetic / movement ; 1
6(d)(ii) would go too far / friction of cloth greater / friction of bench too small ; 1


45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*1300286390*
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
Write in soft pencil.

Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 20.
Electronic calculators may be used.
This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.
IB17 06_0653_11/3RP
2
1 Process Q happens in cells.
carbohydrates → process Q → energy released
What is process Q?
A growth
B nutrition
C respiration
D sensitivity
2 The diagram shows an image of a plant cell that has been magnified.
50 mm
The actual length of the cell is 0.02 mm.
How many times has the cell been magnified?
A × 10 B × 100 C × 250 D × 2500
3 Which statements about enzymes are correct?
1 Enzymes are proteins.

2 Some enzymes carry out chemical digestion.
3 Enzymes speed up the rate of chemical reactions.
4 All enzymes work fastest at pH 7.
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2, 3 and 4
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

3
4 The table shows the results when four foods are tested with Benedict’s solution and biuret
reagent.
Which food contains protein but not reducing sugar?
colour obtained with colour obtained with

Benedict’s solution biuret reagent
A blue green
B blue violet
C red green
D red violet
5 What are the products of photosynthesis?
A carbohydrates + oxygen
B carbohydrates + water
C carbon dioxide + oxygen
D carbon dioxide + water
6 During transpiration, from which part of a leaf does evaporation of water occur?
A cuticle
B mesophyll cells
C stomata
D xylem
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17 [Turn over

4
7 The diagram shows a section through the heart.
The ventricles contract and blood is forced into the arteries.
What is the state of valves 1 and 2 when this happens?
valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

5
8 The diagram shows apparatus at the start of a breathing experiment.
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y
A person breathes in and out through the mouthpiece for a short time.
Which row shows the results?
limewater in tube X limewater in tube Y
A stays clear stays clear

B stays clear turns cloudy
C turns cloudy stays clear
D turns cloudy turns cloudy
9 Which statement about hormones in humans is correct?
A They are destroyed by the liver.

B They are destroyed by the pancreas.
C They are produced by target organs.
D They are produced by the blood.
10 Which part of a plant protects the flower when it is a bud?
A petal
B sepal
C stem
D stigma

6
11 The diagram shows the female reproductive system.
Where does implantation of the embryo normally occur?
B C
12 Which type of organism makes its own organic nutrients?
A carnivore
B consumer
C herbivore
D producer
13 What is not an effect of deforestation?
A extinction of plant species

B flooding of river valleys
C increase of oxygen in the air
D loss of soil by erosion
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

7
14 Which diagram shows how a mixture of dyes in a food colouring are separated?
A B
filter paper filter paper
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper
filter paper spot of food

colouring
water water
15 Which process produces a chemical change?
A adding ethanol to water

B adding sodium to water
C boiling water
D melting ice
16 Sodium and potassium are Group I metals.
Chlorine and bromine are Group VII non-metals.
Which statement describes the formation of a covalent bond?
A Potassium and bromine combine by sharing a pair of electrons.

B Sodium and chlorine combine by electron loss and gain.
C Two bromine atoms combine by electron loss and gain.
D Two chlorine atoms combine by sharing a pair of electrons.

8
17 The diagram shows the electrolysis of molten lead(II) bromide.
anode + – cathode
molten lead(II) bromide
What is produced at the electrodes?
anode cathode
A brown gas colourless gas

B brown gas grey liquid
C colourless gas brown gas
D grey liquid brown gas
18 The diagram shows how the temperature change is measured when magnesium powder reacts
with dilute hydrochloric acid.
magnesium powder
dilute hydrochloric acid
Thermometer reading before adding magnesium powder = 20.6 °C
Thermometer reading after adding magnesium powder = 32.4 °C
Which statement is correct?
A The reaction is endothermic and gives out heat.

B The reaction is endothermic and takes in heat.
C The reaction is exothermic and gives out heat.
D The reaction is exothermic and takes in heat.
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

9
19 Hydrogen peroxide decomposes to form water and oxygen.
Which changes in temperature and in concentration both reduce the rate of this reaction?
temperature of concentration of
hydrogen peroxide hydrogen peroxide
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
20 In which word equation is copper reduced?
A anhydrous copper sulfate + water → hydrated copper sulfate
B copper carbonate + hydrochloric acid → copper chloride + water + carbon dioxide
C copper oxide + hydrogen → copper + water
D copper + oxygen → copper oxide
21 Magnesium hydroxide is an insoluble solid.
Magnesium sulfate is a soluble solid which is formed when magnesium hydroxide reacts with
sulfuric acid.
Which method is used to make pure magnesium sulfate?
A React excess dilute sulfuric acid with magnesium hydroxide, filter and crystallise.
B React excess dilute sulfuric acid with magnesium hydroxide then evaporate until dry.
C React excess magnesium hydroxide with dilute sulfuric acid, filter and crystallise.
D React excess magnesium hydroxide with dilute sulfuric acid then evaporate until dry.
22 Acidified barium nitrate solution is added to solution X. A white precipitate forms.
What is X?
A hydrochloric acid
B limewater
C potassium chloride
D sulfuric acid

10
23 The diagram shows part of the Periodic Table.
The letters U to Z are not the symbols of the elements.
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
U Y Z
X
V W
Which elements are metals?
A U, V and W B U and V only C W and X D X, Y and Z
24 What is an alloy?
A a compound containing two metallic elements

B a compound containing two non-metallic elements
C a mixture containing two metallic elements
D a mixture containing two non-metallic elements
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

11
25 Equal sized pieces of four different metals are added to separate samples of dilute
hydrochloric acid.
The results are shown.
1 2 3 4
Which row identifies the metals in the tubes?
tube 1 tube 2 tube 3 tube 4
A calcium copper sodium iron

B copper iron potassium sodium
C copper magnesium calcium zinc
D iron zinc copper magnesium
26 Which pie chart shows the proportions of gases in clean air?
A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
other other CO2 other
gases gases gases
27 Which property of the compounds in petroleum is used to separate it into useful fractions?
A boiling point
B density
C melting point
D solubility

12
28 A car driver sets out from home to travel to Cambridge. After 1 hour he is 40 km from home. He
discovers that he must return home to collect his briefcase. This journey also takes him 1 hour.
He sets off again immediately. He reaches Cambridge, 100 km from home, 2 hours later.
sets out 40 km
1 hour
turns back
40 km
1 hour
sets out 100 km

arrives
again 2 hours
at Cambridge
What is the average speed for the whole of his journey from leaving home the first time?
A 25 km / h B 45 km / h C 50 km / h D 90 km / h
29 Which row shows the unit for force, the unit for mass and the unit for weight?
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg
30 A heavy ball is dropped from the top of a tower.
Which form of energy decreases as the ball falls?
A gravitational
B kinetic
C thermal
D sound
31 Which force does the greatest amount of work?
A a force of 10 N moving an object a distance of 3.0 m

B a force of 10 N moving an object a distance of 5.0 m
C a force of 15 N moving an object a distance of 3.0 m
D a force of 15 N moving an object a distance of 5.0 m
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

13
32 A liquid changes into a gas and this causes the temperature of the liquid to change.
What is the name of this process, and how does the temperature change?
name of temperature
process change
A condensation decreases
B condensation increases
C evaporation decreases
D evaporation increases
33 Four identical metal tanks in a room each contain the same amount of water.
The water is at the same temperature as the room.
Two of the tanks are insulated, and two of the tanks are not insulated.
A cooling unit is placed in each of the tanks, in the position shown.
In which tank does all the water become cool the most quickly?
A B C D
insulation
cooling water cooling water

unit unit
water water

14
34 The diagram represents a wave on the surface of water. Some measurements are shown.
6.0 cm
distance
4.0 cm
Which row gives the amplitude and the wavelength of the wave?
amplitude wavelength
/ cm / cm
A 3.0 4.0
B 3.0 8.0
C 6.0 4.0
D 6.0 8.0
35 A ray of light is travelling in glass. The ray reaches a boundary with air and splits into two rays as
shown.
50°
air
glass
30° 30°
original
ray
What has happened to the original ray?
A It has been partially internally reflected.

B It has been partially internally refracted.
C It has been totally internally reflected.
D It has been totally internally refracted.
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

15
36 Which electromagnetic wave is used by a remote controller for a television?
A infra-red
B microwaves
C radio
D ultraviolet
37 An electronic circuit in a fire alarm makes a loudspeaker vibrate alternately at two different
frequencies.
Which pair of frequencies is suitable to use in the alarm to alert people to the danger of fire?
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz
38 An uncharged metal rod is held by an insulating handle.
The rod is brought near to a positively charged sphere. This causes some particles in the rod to
move.
positively
metal rod charged sphere
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ +
insulating handle
Which particles in the rod move and in which direction do the particles move?
particles that move direction of movement
A electrons away from the sphere

B electrons towards the sphere
C protons away from the sphere
D protons towards the sphere

16
39 A power supply causes a current in a circuit.
The potential difference (p.d.) of the power supply and the resistance of the circuit are both
changed.
Which pair of changes must result in a smaller current in the circuit?
p.d. resistance
A decreased decreased
B decreased increased
C increased decreased
D increased increased
40 Each wire inside a cable leading from an electric socket to a hairdryer is covered with a plastic
coating. This plastic coating splits and the two wires inside the cable touch each other.
wires touch here
plastic outer
coating insulation
What could happen because of this?
A An appliance plugged into a different socket could become switched on.

B A large current could flow in the wires making them overheat to cause a fire.
C A person near the hairdryer could receive an electric shock.
D The hairdryer plugged into the socket could be damaged.
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

17
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

19
BLANK PAGE
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

The Periodic Table of Elements
Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10
Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
20
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
0653/11/M/J/17
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*1300286390*

IB17 06_0653_11/3RP
2
What is process Q?
A growth
B nutrition
C respiration
D sensitivity
50 mm
The actual length of the cell is 0.02 mm.
How many times has the cell been magnified?
A × 10 B × 100 C × 250 D × 2500

© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

3
4 The table shows the results when four foods are tested with Benedict’s solution and biuret
reagent.
Which food contains protein but not reducing sugar?
colour obtained with colour obtained with

Benedict’s solution biuret reagent
A blue green
B blue violet
C red green
D red violet
6 During transpiration, from which part of a leaf does evaporation of water occur?
A cuticle
B mesophyll cells
C stomata
D xylem

4
valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

5
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y

9 Which statement about hormones in humans is correct?
A They are destroyed by the liver.

B They are destroyed by the pancreas.
C They are produced by target organs.
D They are produced by the blood.
10 Which part of a plant protects the flower when it is a bud?
A petal
B sepal
C stem
D stigma

6
B C
A carnivore
B consumer
C herbivore
D producer
13 What is not an effect of deforestation?
A extinction of plant species

B flooding of river valleys
C increase of oxygen in the air
D loss of soil by erosion
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

7
A B
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper

colouring
water water
15 Which process produces a chemical change?
A adding ethanol to water

B adding sodium to water
C boiling water
D melting ice
16 Sodium and potassium are Group I metals.
Chlorine and bromine are Group VII non-metals.
Which statement describes the formation of a covalent bond?
A Potassium and bromine combine by sharing a pair of electrons.

B Sodium and chlorine combine by electron loss and gain.
C Two bromine atoms combine by electron loss and gain.
D Two chlorine atoms combine by sharing a pair of electrons.

8
17 The diagram shows the electrolysis of molten lead(II) bromide.
anode + – cathode
What is produced at the electrodes?
anode cathode
A brown gas colourless gas

B brown gas grey liquid
C colourless gas brown gas
D grey liquid brown gas
magnesium powder

© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

9
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
21 Magnesium hydroxide is an insoluble solid.
Magnesium sulfate is a soluble solid which is formed when magnesium hydroxide reacts with
sulfuric acid.
Which method is used to make pure magnesium sulfate?
A React excess dilute sulfuric acid with magnesium hydroxide, filter and crystallise.
B React excess dilute sulfuric acid with magnesium hydroxide then evaporate until dry.
C React excess magnesium hydroxide with dilute sulfuric acid, filter and crystallise.
D React excess magnesium hydroxide with dilute sulfuric acid then evaporate until dry.
What is X?
A hydrochloric acid
B limewater
D sulfuric acid

10
23 The diagram shows part of the Periodic Table.
The letters U to Z are not the symbols of the elements.
U Y Z
X
V W
Which elements are metals?
A U, V and W B U and V only C W and X D X, Y and Z

© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

11
25 Equal sized pieces of four different metals are added to separate samples of dilute
hydrochloric acid.
The results are shown.
1 2 3 4
Which row identifies the metals in the tubes?
tube 1 tube 2 tube 3 tube 4
A calcium copper sodium iron

B copper iron potassium sodium
C copper magnesium calcium zinc
D iron zinc copper magnesium
A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
gases gases gases
A boiling point
B density
C melting point
D solubility

12
sets out 40 km
1 hour
turns back
40 km
1 hour
sets out 100 km

arrives
again 2 hours
at Cambridge
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg
30 A heavy ball is dropped from the top of a tower.
Which form of energy decreases as the ball falls?
A gravitational
B kinetic
C thermal
D sound
31 Which force does the greatest amount of work?
A a force of 10 N moving an object a distance of 3.0 m

B a force of 10 N moving an object a distance of 5.0 m
C a force of 15 N moving an object a distance of 3.0 m
D a force of 15 N moving an object a distance of 5.0 m
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

13
name of temperature
process change
A B C D
insulation

unit unit
water water

14
34 The diagram represents a wave on the surface of water. Some measurements are shown.
6.0 cm
distance
4.0 cm
Which row gives the amplitude and the wavelength of the wave?
amplitude wavelength
/ cm / cm
A 3.0 4.0
B 3.0 8.0
C 6.0 4.0
D 6.0 8.0
shown.
50°
air
glass
30° 30°
original
ray

© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

15
36 Which electromagnetic wave is used by a remote controller for a television?
A infra-red
B microwaves
C radio
D ultraviolet
frequencies.
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz
move.
positively
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ +
insulating handle


16
39 A power supply causes a current in a circuit.
The potential difference (p.d.) of the power supply and the resistance of the circuit are both
changed.
Which pair of changes must result in a smaller current in the circuit?
p.d. resistance
A decreased decreased
B decreased increased
C increased decreased
D increased increased
40 Each wire inside a cable leading from an electric socket to a hairdryer is covered with a plastic
coating. This plastic coating splits and the two wires inside the cable touch each other.
wires touch here
plastic outer
coating insulation
What could happen because of this?
A An appliance plugged into a different socket could become switched on.

B A large current could flow in the wires making them overheat to cause a fire.
C A person near the hairdryer could receive an electric shock.
D The hairdryer plugged into the socket could be damaged.
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

17
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/M/J/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
20
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/11/M/J/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*8835554512*

IB17 06_0653_12/2RP
2
1 A person moves their hand away from a hot object.
Which characteristic of living organisms is this?
A growth
B nutrition
C reproduction
D sensitivity
100 mm
The magnification is × 200.
What is the length of the actual cell?
A 0.2 mm B 0.5 mm C 2 mm D 20 000 mm
3 Which statement about enzymes is correct?
A They are killed by high temperatures.

B They are made from amino acids.
C They are unaffected by pH.
D They are used up in biological reactions.
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

3
4 An unknown liquid is divided into three test-tubes and tested as shown in the table.
test-tube test solution added final colour in

number to mixture test-tube
1 Benedict’s solution blue

2 biuret violet
3 iodine solution yellow
Which conclusion about the unknown liquid is correct?
A It contains reducing sugar and starch.

B It contains protein and a reducing sugar.
C It only contains protein.
D It only contains starch.
6 What is transpiration?
A absorption of water by root hair cells

B evaporation of water at the surfaces of mesophyll cells
C loss of water vapour from the roots of plants
D transport of food substances in the phloem

4
valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

5
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y

9 Which characteristics of living organisms does a plant show during a geotropism?
growth movement sensitivity
A
B
C
D
10 Which environmental factor is not a requirement for the germination of most seeds?
A light
B oxygen
C suitable temperature
D water

6
B C
12 What is the correct name for organisms that get their energy by eating plants?
A carnivores
B herbivores
C producers
D secondary consumers
13 The diagram shows the carbon cycle.
Which arrow represents combustion?
D
carbon dioxide in air
A
fossil fuels
carbon compounds
in green plants
dead plants
C
and animals
carbon compounds
in animals
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

7
A B
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper

colouring
water water
15 Which process is a physical change?
A adding zinc to dilute sulfuric acid

B bubbling carbon dioxide through limewater
C electrolysing molten lead bromide
D separating petroleum by fractional distillation
16 A neutral atom of chlorine contains 17 electrons and 18 neutrons.
What is the atomic (proton) number and what is the mass (nucleon) number of this atom?
atomic number mass number
A 17 35
B 17 52
C 18 35
D 18 52

8
17 A molten compound X is electrolysed as shown.
lamp
anode + – cathode
heat
A brown gas is produced at the anode and a grey metal is produced at the cathode.
What is X?
A aluminium oxide
B copper chloride
C lead(II) bromide
D sodium chloride
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

9
magnesium powder

19 Magnesium ribbon reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid to form hydrogen gas.
Which change increases the rate of the reaction?
A adding water to the mixture

B trapping the hydrogen gas
C using a lower temperature
D using powdered magnesium
20 In which reactions is the underlined substance oxidised?
1 iron when it rusts

2 methane when it burns in air
3 copper oxide when it reacts with carbon
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only

10
21 Magnesium sulfate is a soluble solid produced by reacting excess solid magnesium oxide with
dilute sulfuric acid.
Which processes produce pure magnesium sulfate crystals?
A distilling the reaction mixture and leaving the distillate to crystallise

B evaporating the water from the reaction mixture
C filtering and drying the solid from the reaction mixture
D filtering the reaction mixture and leaving the filtrate to crystallise
22 Substance X is warmed with aqueous sodium hydroxide and aluminium.
A gas is produced which turns damp red litmus paper blue.
Which anion is present in X?
A carbonate
B hydroxide
C nitrate
D sulfate
23 Part of the Periodic Table is shown.
The letters are not the symbols of the elements.
Which element is a non-metal?
B C
D

© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

11
25 A mixture of copper(II) oxide and substance Q is heated.
The reaction produces copper.
What is Q?
A aluminium oxide
B carbon
C carbon dioxide
D oxygen
A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
gases gases gases
A boiling point
B density
C melting point
D solubility

12
sets out 40 km
1 hour
turns back
40 km
1 hour
sets out 100 km

arrives
again 2 hours
at Cambridge
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg
30 A car uses petrol as fuel. The car has been parked overnight.
The engine is now started and the car is driven along a horizontal road at an increasing speed.
Which two forms of energy of the car both increase as the car moves?
A chemical and gravitational

B chemical and thermal
C gravitational and kinetic
D kinetic and thermal
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

13
31 Four different forces move an object by different distances in different times.
Which row shows the situation in which the greatest power is produced by the force?
time taken force distance

/s /N moved / m
A 10 400 3.0
B 20 200 2.0
C 30 400 2.0
D 40 200 3.0
32 The diagram shows two thin steel tubes X and Y. The tubes have identical dimensions at room
temperature.
Tube X needs to be made to fit inside tube Y.
tube X tube Y
How can this be done?
A Cool both tubes to the same low temperature.

B Cool tube X only, to a low temperature.
C Heat both tubes to the same high temperature.
D Heat tube X only, to a high temperature.

14
33 On a cold night, a person stands near a campfire. He holds his hands out towards the fire. His
hands are heated by the fire.
hands
campfire
Which process is responsible for transferring thermal energy from the fire to his hands?
A conduction
B convection
C evaporation
D radiation
34 The diagrams represent two waves X and Y. The diagrams are drawn to the same scale.
wave X wave Y
distance distance
0 time 0 time
0 0
From this information, which property must be greater for wave X, and which property must be
greater for wave Y?
greater for greater for

wave X wave Y
A amplitude frequency
B amplitude wavelength
C frequency amplitude
D frequency wavelength
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

15
35 The diagram represents the surface of a transparent liquid. Two rays of light are travelling within
the liquid. They both reach the surface. The path of each ray is shown.
air
liquid 50° 55°
What is the critical angle for this liquid?
A 35° B 40° C 50° D 55°
36 Which type of electromagnetic wave is used in airport security scanners?
A gamma-rays
B microwaves
C radio waves
D X-rays
frequencies.
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz

16
move.
positively
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ +
insulating handle

39 Which circuit can be used when determining the resistance of resistor R?
A B C D
A V V A A
R R R R
A V V
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

17
40 The circuit shown includes two identical lamps and an open switch.
lamp 1
lamp 2
The switch is now closed.
Which statement is now correct?
A Lamp 1 is brighter than lamp 2.

B The brightness of lamp 1 increases.
C The p.d. across each lamp is the same.
D The total resistance of the circuit is greater.
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
20
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/12/M/J/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*8835554512*

IB17 06_0653_12/2RP
2
A growth
B nutrition
C reproduction
D sensitivity
100 mm
A 0.2 mm B 0.5 mm C 2 mm D 20 000 mm

© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

3


2 biuret violet



4
valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

5
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y

A
B
C
D
A light
B oxygen
D water

6
B C
A carnivores
B herbivores
C producers
D
A
fossil fuels
carbon compounds
in green plants
dead plants
C
and animals
carbon compounds
in animals
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

7
A B
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper

colouring
water water

A 17 35
B 17 52
C 18 35
D 18 52

8
lamp
anode + – cathode
heat
What is X?
A aluminium oxide
B copper chloride
C lead(II) bromide
D sodium chloride
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

9
magnesium powder




10

A carbonate
B hydroxide
C nitrate
D sulfate
B C
D

© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

11
What is Q?
A aluminium oxide
B carbon
C carbon dioxide
D oxygen
A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
gases gases gases
A boiling point
B density
C melting point
D solubility

12
sets out 40 km
1 hour
turns back
40 km
1 hour
sets out 100 km

arrives
again 2 hours
at Cambridge
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg

© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

13

/s /N moved / m
A 10 400 3.0
B 20 200 2.0
C 30 400 2.0
D 40 200 3.0
temperature.
tube X tube Y


14
hands
campfire
A conduction
B convection
C evaporation
D radiation
wave X wave Y
distance distance
0 time 0 time
0 0
greater for wave Y?

wave X wave Y
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

15
air
liquid 50° 55°
A 35° B 40° C 50° D 55°
A gamma-rays
B microwaves
C radio waves
D X-rays
frequencies.
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz

16
move.
positively
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ +
insulating handle

A B C D
A V V A A
R R R R
A V V
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

17
lamp 1
lamp 2

© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/M/J/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
20
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/12/M/J/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*2052501322*

IB17 06_0653_13/FP
2
A growth
B nutrition
C reproduction
D sensitivity
100 mm
A 0.2 mm B 0.5 mm C 2 mm D 20 000 mm

© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

3


2 biuret violet



4
valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

5
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y

A
B
C
D
A light
B oxygen
D water

6
B C
A carnivores
B herbivores
C producers
D
A
fossil fuels
carbon compounds
in green plants
dead plants
C
and animals
carbon compounds
in animals
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

7
A B
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper

colouring
water water

A 17 35
B 17 52
C 18 35
D 18 52

8
lamp
anode + – cathode
heat
What is X?
A aluminium oxide
B copper chloride
C lead(II) bromide
D sodium chloride
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

9
magnesium powder




10

A carbonate
B hydroxide
C nitrate
D sulfate
B C
D

© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

11
What is Q?
A aluminium oxide
B carbon
C carbon dioxide
D oxygen
A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
gases gases gases
A boiling point
B density
C melting point
D solubility

12
sets out 40 km
1 hour
turns back
40 km
1 hour
sets out 100 km

arrives
again 2 hours
at Cambridge
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg

© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

13

/s /N moved / m
A 10 400 3.0
B 20 200 2.0
C 30 400 2.0
D 40 200 3.0
temperature.
tube X tube Y


14
hands
campfire
A conduction
B convection
C evaporation
D radiation
wave X wave Y
distance distance
0 time 0 time
0 0
greater for wave Y?

wave X wave Y
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

15
air
liquid 50° 55°
A 35° B 40° C 50° D 55°
A gamma-rays
B microwaves
C radio waves
D X-rays
frequencies.
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz

16
move.
positively
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ +
insulating handle

A B C D
A V V A A
R R R R
A V V
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

17
lamp 1
lamp 2

© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
20
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/13/M/J/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*2052501322*

IB17 06_0653_13/FP
2
A growth
B nutrition
C reproduction
D sensitivity
100 mm
A 0.2 mm B 0.5 mm C 2 mm D 20 000 mm

© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

3


2 biuret violet



4
valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

5
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y

A
B
C
D
A light
B oxygen
D water

6
B C
A carnivores
B herbivores
C producers
D
A
fossil fuels
carbon compounds
in green plants
dead plants
C
and animals
carbon compounds
in animals
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

7
A B
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper

colouring
water water

A 17 35
B 17 52
C 18 35
D 18 52

8
lamp
anode + – cathode
heat
What is X?
A aluminium oxide
B copper chloride
C lead(II) bromide
D sodium chloride
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

9
magnesium powder




10

A carbonate
B hydroxide
C nitrate
D sulfate
B C
D

© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

11
What is Q?
A aluminium oxide
B carbon
C carbon dioxide
D oxygen
A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
gases gases gases
A boiling point
B density
C melting point
D solubility

12
sets out 40 km
1 hour
turns back
40 km
1 hour
sets out 100 km

arrives
again 2 hours
at Cambridge
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg

© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

13

/s /N moved / m
A 10 400 3.0
B 20 200 2.0
C 30 400 2.0
D 40 200 3.0
temperature.
tube X tube Y


14
hands
campfire
A conduction
B convection
C evaporation
D radiation
wave X wave Y
distance distance
0 time 0 time
0 0
greater for wave Y?

wave X wave Y
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

15
air
liquid 50° 55°
A 35° B 40° C 50° D 55°
A gamma-rays
B microwaves
C radio waves
D X-rays
frequencies.
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz

16
move.
positively
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ +
insulating handle

A B C D
A V V A A
R R R R
A V V
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

17
lamp 1
lamp 2

© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/M/J/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
20
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/13/M/J/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*4667062358*

IB17 06_0653_21/3RP
2
What is process Q?
A growth
B nutrition
C respiration
D sensitivity
2 Which row shows the site of chemical reactions in a cell and identifies the selectively permeable
structure in a cell?
selectively
site of chemical
permeable
reactions
structure
A cytoplasm cell membrane

B cytoplasm cell wall
C vacuole cell membrane
D vacuole cell wall

4 Which substance in leaves traps light energy for use in photosynthesis?
A carbohydrate
B carbon
C carbon dioxide
D chlorophyll
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

3
5 The statements show how a person’s diet can be unbalanced.
1 eating too much fibre

2 eating too much saturated fat
3 eating too much salt
Which of these increase the risk of coronary heart disease?
6 Which row matches the adaptation of a root hair cell to its function?
adaptation function
A large surface area uptake of water and glucose

B large surface area uptake of water and ions
C small surface area uptake of water and glucose
D small surface area uptake of water and ions
valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open

4
8 Which molecule contains the energy that is released in aerobic respiration?
A C6H12O6 B CO2 C H2O D O2
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y

10 A shoot is illuminated from one side only.
What collects on the dark side of the shoot?
A auxin
B chlorophyll
C glucose
D starch
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

5
11 Materials are exchanged between a mother and her fetus across the placenta.
Which row shows the overall direction of movement of these materials?
mother to fetus fetus to mother
A amino acids glucose

B amino acids urea
C carbon dioxide glucose
D carbon dioxide urea
A carnivore
B consumer
C herbivore
D producer
13 What is an undesirable effect of overuse of fertilisers in agriculture?
A acid rain
B deforestation
C eutrophication
D global warming

6
A B
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper

colouring
water water
15 Which statement describes a mixture?
A It contains molecules made from the same type of atom.

B It contains only one type of atom.
C It contains two different types of atom joined by chemical bonds.
D It contains two different types of atom that can be separated by physical processes.
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

7
16 The atomic (proton) number of magnesium is 12.
Which diagram shows the electronic structure of a magnesium atom?
A B
key
= electron
= nucleus
C D
17 Aluminium ions have the formula Al 3+.
Oxide ions have the formula O2–.
What is the formula of aluminium oxide?
A Al O B Al O2 C Al 2O3 D Al 3O2
18 Molten sodium chloride is electrolysed.
Which equations represent the reactions at the electrodes?
anode cathode
A 2Cl – → Cl 2 + 2e– Na+ + e– → Na

B Cl 2 + 2e– → 2Cl – Na → Na+ + e–
C Na → Na+ + e– Cl 2 + 2e– → 2Cl –
D Na+ + e– → Na 2Cl – → Cl 2 + 2e–

8
19 Which statement about chemical reactions is not correct?
A A higher temperature increases the rate of an endothermic reaction.

B Chemical energy is converted into thermal energy in an endothermic reaction.
C Temperature decreases in an endothermic reaction and there is an increase in chemical
energy.
D Temperature increases in an exothermic reaction because there is an increase in thermal
energy.
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
What is X?
A hydrochloric acid
B limewater
D sulfuric acid
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

9
23 Which element is a non-metallic solid at room temperature?
melting point number of electrons

/ °C in outer shell
A –210 5
B –7 7
C 98 1
D 3730 4

25 X, Y and Z are three metallic elements.
When Z is heated with the oxide of X, the element X is formed.
When X is added to a solution of Y2+ ions no reaction takes place.
What is the order of reactivity of the metals?
least most
reactive reactive
A X Y Z
B Y X Z
C Y Z X
D Z Y X

10
A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
gases gases gases
27 Which statement about the products of the fractional distillation of petroleum is not correct?
A Fractions obtained from high up the fractional distillation column have low boiling points.
B Fractions obtained from low down the fractional distillation column contain large molecules.
C Large molecules have weak intermolecular attractive forces.
D Refinery gas is used for heating and cooking.
28 The diagrams show two distance-time graphs and two speed-time graphs.
Which graph represents the motion of an object that is moving with constant acceleration?
A B
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

11
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg
30 A spring obeys Hooke’s law. A load of 10 N hangs from the spring and causes the spring to
extend by 12 mm.
Two springs, identical to the first one, are now joined as shown. A load of 5.0 N is hung from the
springs.
springs
5.0 N
What is the total extension of the combination of the two springs?
A 3.0 mm B 6.0 mm C 12 mm D 24 mm

12
31 A brick of mass of 3.0 kg rests on a shelf. The brick drops off the shelf. The brick hits the ground
at a speed of 8.0 m / s. Air resistance can be ignored.
The acceleration of free fall g is 10 m / s2.
How much kinetic energy did the brick have just before it hit the ground, and how much potential
energy did the brick have when it was on the shelf?
kinetic energy potential

before hitting energy on shelf
ground / J /J
A 24 24
B 24 96
C 96 0
D 96 96
name of temperature
process change
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

13
A B C D
insulation

unit unit
water water
34 A wave travels through a substance from point X to point Y. The diagram shows the direction in
which particles of the substance vibrate.
X Y
Which row states the type of wave involved, and gives an example of this type of wave?
type of wave example
A longitudinal radio
B longitudinal sound
C transverse radio
D transverse sound

14
shown.
50°
air
glass
30° 30°
original
ray

36 A space telescope is fitted with an infra-red detector, an ultraviolet detector and a visible light
detector.
An explosion on the surface of the Sun emits infra-red, ultraviolet and visible light at the same
time.
Which detector is the first to detect the explosion?
(Space is a vacuum.)
A the infra-red detector

B the ultraviolet detector
C the visible light detector
D all three detect it simultaneously
frequencies.
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

15
38 The diagram shows a wire of length l and cross-sectional area X.
l
X
Which two changes must decrease the resistance of the wire?
A decrease l and decrease X
B decrease l and increase X

C increase l and decrease X
D increase l and increase X
39 An 800 W microwave oven and a 2500 W conventional electric oven are both designed to operate
from a 230 V supply.
Which row shows the rating of the fuse that should be fitted to each device?
microwave conventional
oven electric oven
A 5A 5A
B 5A 13 A
C 13 A 5A
D 13 A 13 A

16
40 The diagram shows a circuit containing a battery and four resistors. One resistor is labelled R.
Some values of p.d. and current are shown.
12 V
4.0 A
7.0 V R 2.0 V
A
3.0 A
What is the p.d. across resistor R, and what is the current in resistor R?
p.d. / V current / A
A 3.0 1.0
B 3.0 4.0
C 12 1.0
D 12 4.0
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

17
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
20
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/21/M/J/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*4667062358*

IB17 06_0653_21/3RP
2
What is process Q?
A growth
B nutrition
C respiration
D sensitivity
2 Which row shows the site of chemical reactions in a cell and identifies the selectively permeable
structure in a cell?
selectively
site of chemical
permeable
reactions
structure
A cytoplasm cell membrane

B cytoplasm cell wall
C vacuole cell membrane
D vacuole cell wall

4 Which substance in leaves traps light energy for use in photosynthesis?
A carbohydrate
B carbon
C carbon dioxide
D chlorophyll
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

3
5 The statements show how a person’s diet can be unbalanced.
1 eating too much fibre

2 eating too much saturated fat
3 eating too much salt
Which of these increase the risk of coronary heart disease?
adaptation function

valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open

4
8 Which molecule contains the energy that is released in aerobic respiration?
A C6H12O6 B CO2 C H2O D O2
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y

10 A shoot is illuminated from one side only.
What collects on the dark side of the shoot?
A auxin
B chlorophyll
C glucose
D starch
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

5
11 Materials are exchanged between a mother and her fetus across the placenta.
Which row shows the overall direction of movement of these materials?
mother to fetus fetus to mother
A amino acids glucose

B amino acids urea
C carbon dioxide glucose
D carbon dioxide urea
A carnivore
B consumer
C herbivore
D producer
A acid rain
B deforestation
C eutrophication
D global warming

6
A B
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper

colouring
water water
15 Which statement describes a mixture?
A It contains molecules made from the same type of atom.

B It contains only one type of atom.
C It contains two different types of atom joined by chemical bonds.
D It contains two different types of atom that can be separated by physical processes.
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

7
16 The atomic (proton) number of magnesium is 12.
Which diagram shows the electronic structure of a magnesium atom?
A B
key
= electron
= nucleus
C D
Which equations represent the reactions at the electrodes?
anode cathode
A 2Cl – → Cl 2 + 2e– Na+ + e– → Na

B Cl 2 + 2e– → 2Cl – Na → Na+ + e–
C Na → Na+ + e– Cl 2 + 2e– → 2Cl –
D Na+ + e– → Na 2Cl – → Cl 2 + 2e–

8
19 Which statement about chemical reactions is not correct?
A A higher temperature increases the rate of an endothermic reaction.

B Chemical energy is converted into thermal energy in an endothermic reaction.
C Temperature decreases in an endothermic reaction and there is an increase in chemical
energy.
D Temperature increases in an exothermic reaction because there is an increase in thermal
energy.
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
What is X?
A hydrochloric acid
B limewater
D sulfuric acid
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

9
23 Which element is a non-metallic solid at room temperature?
melting point number of electrons

/ °C in outer shell
A –210 5
B –7 7
C 98 1
D 3730 4

25 X, Y and Z are three metallic elements.
When Z is heated with the oxide of X, the element X is formed.
When X is added to a solution of Y2+ ions no reaction takes place.
What is the order of reactivity of the metals?
least most
reactive reactive
A X Y Z
B Y X Z
C Y Z X
D Z Y X

10
A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
gases gases gases
27 Which statement about the products of the fractional distillation of petroleum is not correct?
A Fractions obtained from high up the fractional distillation column have low boiling points.
B Fractions obtained from low down the fractional distillation column contain large molecules.
C Large molecules have weak intermolecular attractive forces.
D Refinery gas is used for heating and cooking.
28 The diagrams show two distance-time graphs and two speed-time graphs.
Which graph represents the motion of an object that is moving with constant acceleration?
A B
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

11
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg
extend by 12 mm.
springs.
springs
5.0 N
A 3.0 mm B 6.0 mm C 12 mm D 24 mm

12

ground / J /J
A 24 24
B 24 96
C 96 0
D 96 96
name of temperature
process change
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

13
A B C D
insulation

unit unit
water water
34 A wave travels through a substance from point X to point Y. The diagram shows the direction in
which particles of the substance vibrate.
X Y
Which row states the type of wave involved, and gives an example of this type of wave?
type of wave example
A longitudinal radio
B longitudinal sound
C transverse radio
D transverse sound

14
shown.
50°
air
glass
30° 30°
original
ray

36 A space telescope is fitted with an infra-red detector, an ultraviolet detector and a visible light
detector.
An explosion on the surface of the Sun emits infra-red, ultraviolet and visible light at the same
time.
Which detector is the first to detect the explosion?
(Space is a vacuum.)
A the infra-red detector

B the ultraviolet detector
C the visible light detector
D all three detect it simultaneously
frequencies.
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

15
38 The diagram shows a wire of length l and cross-sectional area X.
l
X
Which two changes must decrease the resistance of the wire?
A decrease l and decrease X
B decrease l and increase X

C increase l and decrease X
D increase l and increase X
39 An 800 W microwave oven and a 2500 W conventional electric oven are both designed to operate
from a 230 V supply.
Which row shows the rating of the fuse that should be fitted to each device?
microwave conventional
oven electric oven
A 5A 5A
B 5A 13 A
C 13 A 5A
D 13 A 13 A

16
40 The diagram shows a circuit containing a battery and four resistors. One resistor is labelled R.
Some values of p.d. and current are shown.
12 V
4.0 A
7.0 V R 2.0 V
A
3.0 A
What is the p.d. across resistor R, and what is the current in resistor R?
p.d. / V current / A
A 3.0 1.0
B 3.0 4.0
C 12 1.0
D 12 4.0
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

17
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/M/J/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
20
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/21/M/J/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*1153441284*

IB17 06_0653_22/2RP
2
A growth
B nutrition
C reproduction
D sensitivity
2 The diagram shows an animal cell under a light microscope.
What is the function of part X?
A to carry out photosynthesis

B to let molecules in and out of the cell
C to store and pass on cell information
D to support and protect the cell
100 mm
A 0.2 mm B 0.5 mm C 2 mm D 20 000 mm
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

3

adaptation function

valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open

4
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y

8 How does mucus benefit the gas exchange system?
A It absorbs carbon monoxide before it reaches the alveoli.

B It prevents friction between the air and the trachea.
C It removes the nicotine in cigarette smoke.
D It traps pathogens.
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

5
9 The diagram shows a seedling with its root and shoot horizontal.
The seedling is kept moist for three days.
Where will the greatest concentration of auxin be found?
B
root
A D
shoot
10 Which substance is at a higher concentration in the blood on the fetal side of the placenta than in
the blood on the mother’s side of the placenta?
A amino acids
B carbon dioxide
C glucose
D oxygen
11 Which type of blood cell is affected by the human immuno-deficiency virus (HIV) and what effect
does the virus have on those cells?
type of blood cell effect on the blood cell
A red prevents them carrying oxygen

B red stops them from making the blood clot
C white stops them from performing phagocytosis
D white reduces antibody production
12 What is an ecosystem?
A a network of inter-connected food chains

B a specific area in which a plant or an animal lives
C all the plants and animals living within a specific area
D the interactions between all living organisms, in a specific area, and their environment

6
A acid rain
B deforestation
C eutrophication
D global warming
A B
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper

colouring
water water
15 A mixture contains hydrogen, helium, neon and oxygen.
What describes this mixture?
A elements and compounds

B elements only
C molecules and compounds
D molecules only
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

7
16 Which row describes the electronic structures of a chlorine atom and of a sodium ion?
chlorine atom sodium ion
A 2,8,7 2,8
B 2,8,7 2,8,8
C 2,8,8 2,8
D 2,8,8 2,8,8
18 Aqueous copper chloride is electrolysed using inert electrodes.
Which row describes what happens at each electrode?
cathode anode
A chloride ions gain copper ions lose
electrons to form chlorine electrons to form copper
B chloride ions lose copper ions gain
C copper ions gain chloride ions lose
electrons to form copper electrons to form chlorine
D copper ions lose chloride ions gain
19 Methane reacts with oxygen, releasing heat.
Which statement explains the energy changes in this reaction?
A Chemical energy is changed into thermal energy.

B Energy is made in the reaction.
C The heat released increases the temperature of the surroundings.
D The reaction is endothermic.

8


A carbonate
B hydroxide
C nitrate
D sulfate
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

9
23 The elements in Group VII of the Periodic Table are shown.
fluorine
chlorine
bromine
iodine
astatine
Which statement is not correct?
A Astatine has a lower melting point than iodine.

B Chlorine can displace iodine from an iodide solution.
C Fluorine is more reactive than astatine.
D Iodine vapour has a darker colour than fluorine gas.

25 Which pair of substances produces a metal when they are mixed together?
A copper and aqueous iron(II) ions

B iron and aqueous zinc ions
C magnesium and aqueous copper(II) ions

D zinc and aqueous magnesium ions

10
A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
gases gases gases
27 Petroleum is separated into different fractions by fractional distillation.
Which statement about fractional distillation is not correct?
A Larger molecules have stronger covalent bonds between their atoms.

B The boiling point of hydrocarbons increases with the size of the molecules.
C The different fractions have different boiling points.
D The smaller molecules have weaker intermolecular attractive forces between them.
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

11
28 The diagram shows the speed-time graph for a vehicle.
12.0
speed
m/s
6.0
0
0 30
time / s
What is the acceleration of the vehicle, and how far does it travel in 30 s?
acceleration distance
m / s2 travelled / m
A 0.20 180
B 0.20 270
C 0.40 180
D 0.40 270
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg

12
extend by 12 mm.
springs.
springs
5.0 N
A 3.0 mm B 6.0 mm C 12 mm D 24 mm

ground / J /J
A 24 24
B 24 96
C 96 0
D 96 96
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

13
32 Two cylinders contain the same type of gas.
In which case must the gas in one cylinder be at a higher temperature than the gas in the other
cylinder?
A In one cylinder the gas molecules are moving faster.

B In one cylinder the gas occupies a smaller volume.
C In one cylinder there is a greater number of gas molecules.
D In one cylinder there is a greater spacing between the gas molecules.
33 Which surface is a better absorber of infra-red radiation, and which surface is a better emitter of
infra-red radiation?
better absorber better emitter
A black surface black surface

B black surface white surface
C white surface black surface
D white surface white surface
34 What can cause the speed of a wave to change?
A either reflection or refraction

B reflection only
C refraction only
D neither reflection nor refraction
air
liquid 50° 55°
A 35° B 40° C 50° D 55°

14
A gamma-rays
B microwaves
C radio waves
D X-rays
frequencies.
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz
38 Four wires are made from the same material but have different lengths and diameters.
Which wire has the least resistance?
length diameter
/ cm / mm
A 50 0.10
B 50 0.20
C 100 0.10
D 100 0.20
39 A 12 V power supply is connected to a 6.0 Ω resistor. This causes a current in the resistor.
How much thermal energy is produced in the resistor in 5.0 minutes?
A 120 J B 600 J C 7200 J D 21 600 J
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

15
40 The diagram shows a circuit containing four resistors and four ammeters.
Which ammeter has the smallest reading?
A A A D
10 Ω 40 Ω
B
30 Ω
A
20 Ω
A
C
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/22/M/J/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*1153441284*

IB17 06_0653_22/2RP
2
A growth
B nutrition
C reproduction
D sensitivity
2 The diagram shows an animal cell under a light microscope.
What is the function of part X?
A to carry out photosynthesis

B to let molecules in and out of the cell
C to store and pass on cell information
D to support and protect the cell
100 mm
A 0.2 mm B 0.5 mm C 2 mm D 20 000 mm
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

3

adaptation function

valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open

4
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y

8 How does mucus benefit the gas exchange system?
A It absorbs carbon monoxide before it reaches the alveoli.

B It prevents friction between the air and the trachea.
C It removes the nicotine in cigarette smoke.
D It traps pathogens.
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

5
9 The diagram shows a seedling with its root and shoot horizontal.
The seedling is kept moist for three days.
Where will the greatest concentration of auxin be found?
B
root
A D
shoot
10 Which substance is at a higher concentration in the blood on the fetal side of the placenta than in
the blood on the mother’s side of the placenta?
A amino acids
B carbon dioxide
C glucose
D oxygen
11 Which type of blood cell is affected by the human immuno-deficiency virus (HIV) and what effect
does the virus have on those cells?
type of blood cell effect on the blood cell
A red prevents them carrying oxygen

B red stops them from making the blood clot
C white stops them from performing phagocytosis
D white reduces antibody production
12 What is an ecosystem?
A a network of inter-connected food chains

B a specific area in which a plant or an animal lives
C all the plants and animals living within a specific area
D the interactions between all living organisms, in a specific area, and their environment

6
A acid rain
B deforestation
C eutrophication
D global warming
A B
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper

colouring
water water
15 A mixture contains hydrogen, helium, neon and oxygen.
What describes this mixture?
A elements and compounds

B elements only
C molecules and compounds
D molecules only
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

7
16 Which row describes the electronic structures of a chlorine atom and of a sodium ion?
chlorine atom sodium ion
A 2,8,7 2,8
B 2,8,7 2,8,8
C 2,8,8 2,8
D 2,8,8 2,8,8
18 Aqueous copper chloride is electrolysed using inert electrodes.
Which row describes what happens at each electrode?
cathode anode
A chloride ions gain copper ions lose
B chloride ions lose copper ions gain
C copper ions gain chloride ions lose
D copper ions lose chloride ions gain
19 Methane reacts with oxygen, releasing heat.
Which statement explains the energy changes in this reaction?
A Chemical energy is changed into thermal energy.

B Energy is made in the reaction.
C The heat released increases the temperature of the surroundings.
D The reaction is endothermic.

8


A carbonate
B hydroxide
C nitrate
D sulfate
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

9
23 The elements in Group VII of the Periodic Table are shown.
fluorine
chlorine
bromine
iodine
astatine
A Astatine has a lower melting point than iodine.

B Chlorine can displace iodine from an iodide solution.
C Fluorine is more reactive than astatine.
D Iodine vapour has a darker colour than fluorine gas.

25 Which pair of substances produces a metal when they are mixed together?
A copper and aqueous iron(II) ions

B iron and aqueous zinc ions
C magnesium and aqueous copper(II) ions

D zinc and aqueous magnesium ions

10
A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
gases gases gases
27 Petroleum is separated into different fractions by fractional distillation.
Which statement about fractional distillation is not correct?
A Larger molecules have stronger covalent bonds between their atoms.

B The boiling point of hydrocarbons increases with the size of the molecules.
C The different fractions have different boiling points.
D The smaller molecules have weaker intermolecular attractive forces between them.
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

11
28 The diagram shows the speed-time graph for a vehicle.
12.0
speed
m/s
6.0
0
0 30
time / s
What is the acceleration of the vehicle, and how far does it travel in 30 s?
A 0.20 180
B 0.20 270
C 0.40 180
D 0.40 270
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg

12
extend by 12 mm.
springs.
springs
5.0 N
A 3.0 mm B 6.0 mm C 12 mm D 24 mm

ground / J /J
A 24 24
B 24 96
C 96 0
D 96 96
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

13
32 Two cylinders contain the same type of gas.
In which case must the gas in one cylinder be at a higher temperature than the gas in the other
cylinder?
A In one cylinder the gas molecules are moving faster.

B In one cylinder the gas occupies a smaller volume.
C In one cylinder there is a greater number of gas molecules.
D In one cylinder there is a greater spacing between the gas molecules.
33 Which surface is a better absorber of infra-red radiation, and which surface is a better emitter of
infra-red radiation?
better absorber better emitter
A black surface black surface

B black surface white surface
C white surface black surface
D white surface white surface
34 What can cause the speed of a wave to change?
A either reflection or refraction

B reflection only
C refraction only
D neither reflection nor refraction
air
liquid 50° 55°
A 35° B 40° C 50° D 55°

14
A gamma-rays
B microwaves
C radio waves
D X-rays
frequencies.
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz
38 Four wires are made from the same material but have different lengths and diameters.
Which wire has the least resistance?
length diameter
/ cm / mm
A 50 0.10
B 50 0.20
C 100 0.10
D 100 0.20
39 A 12 V power supply is connected to a 6.0 Ω resistor. This causes a current in the resistor.
How much thermal energy is produced in the resistor in 5.0 minutes?
A 120 J B 600 J C 7200 J D 21 600 J
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

15
40 The diagram shows a circuit containing four resistors and four ammeters.
Which ammeter has the smallest reading?
A A A D
10 Ω 40 Ω
B
30 Ω
A
20 Ω
A
C
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/M/J/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/22/M/J/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*5348792529*

IB17 06_0653_23/2RP
2
1 Which are characteristics of all living organisms?
A excretion, breathing and sensitivity

B excretion, movement and respiration
C gas exchange and muscle contraction
D muscle contraction and sensitivity
2 The diagram shows a plant cell and an animal cell.
plant cell animal cell
What is structure P and what is one of its functions?
structure function
A cell membrane controls the entry of
glucose into the cell
B cell membrane supports the cell
C cell wall controls the entry of
D cell wall supports the cell
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

3
3 The graph shows the effect of one variable on amylase activity.
What are the labels X and Y?
X Y
A amylase activity pH
B amylase activity temperature
C pH amylase activity
D temperature amylase activity
4 The equation summarises a process that occurs in living organisms.
6H2O + 6CO2 → C6H12O6 + 6O2
Which molecule contains the greatest amount of chemical energy?
A H2O B CO2 C C6H12O6 D O2
5 Which row matches the part of the alimentary canal to its function?
part of the alimentary canal function of part
A colon absorption of digested food

B ileum egestion
C mouth mechanical digestion
D pancreas production of bile

4
adaptation function

valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

5
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y

9 Which component of tobacco smoke increases the risk of lung cancer?
A carbon dioxide
B carbon monoxide
C nicotine
D tar

6
10 The diagram shows a section through a flower.
Which row correctly identifies structure Q and the method of pollination in the flower?
method of
structure Q
pollination
A anther insect
B anther wind
C stigma insect
D stigma wind
11 What effect does HIV have on the components of blood?
A Blood does not clot as quickly.

B Plasma can no longer carry hormones.
C Red blood cells carry less oxygen.
D White blood cells make fewer antibodies.
12 Which statement about decomposers is not correct?
A They are the final stage of food chains.

B They break down dead organic matter.
C They produce oxygen.
D They release heat energy into the environment.
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

7
A acid rain
B deforestation
C eutrophication
D global warming
A B
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper

colouring
water water
15 Which elements react together to give positive ions and negative ions that have the same
electronic structure as argon?
A calcium and chlorine

B calcium and fluorine
C magnesium and chlorine
D magnesium and fluorine

8
16 Which dot-and-cross diagram represents the arrangement of outer-shell electrons in a molecule

of nitrogen?
A B
N N N N
C D
N N N N
What are the electrode products?
at the anode at the cathode
A chlorine hydrogen
B chlorine sodium
C hydrogen chlorine
D sodium chlorine
19 Which statement describes an exothermic reaction?
A It gives out thermal energy.

B It needs energy to start it.
C It neither gives out nor takes in energy.
D It takes in energy.
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

9
20 Apparatus used to measure the rate of a reaction, which produces a gas, is shown.
cotton wool
acid
marble
51.2 g balance
Which other piece of apparatus is needed?
A beaker
B gas syringe
C stopclock
D thermometer
21 Iron is extracted from its ore using carbon monoxide.
The word equation is shown.
iron(III) oxide + carbon monoxide → iron + carbon dioxide
A Carbon monoxide is oxidised by gaining oxygen.

B Carbon monoxide is reduced by losing oxygen.
C Iron(III) oxide is oxidised by losing oxygen.
D Iron(III) oxide is reduced by gaining oxygen.
22 Which method can be used to make pure solid sodium nitrate, NaNO3?
A Add aqueous sodium hydroxide to a conical flask, titrate with dilute nitric acid, then
crystallise.
B Dissolve solid sodium chloride in dilute nitric acid, leave for 10 minutes and then crystallise.
C Heat sodium with nitrogen and oxygen. Let the mixture cool, then collect the solid that is
made.
D Mix copper nitrate and sodium chloride solutions then filter the mixture and collect the sodium
nitrate from the filter paper.

10
23 Information about an element in the Periodic Table is shown.
Which row describes an element in the Periodic Table?
number of
group number electrons in metal / non-metal
outer shell
A I 1 metal
B II 2 non-metal
C VI 2 non-metal
D VIII 8 metal

A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
gases gases gases
26 Which process does not contribute to increasing levels of carbon dioxide in the air?
A burning petrol and diesel in cars

B combustion of the sulfur compounds in petrol and diesel
C destroying rainforests
D releasing waste gases from coal-fired power stations
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

11
27 Which substance rapidly turns bromine from orange to colourless?
A ethane
B ethanol
C ethene
D methane
28 A car is travelling on a straight road at a speed of 2.0 m / s. It starts to accelerate constantly at

3.0 m / s2.
How long does it take for the speed of the car to reach 8.0 m / s?
A 0.50 s B 2.0 s C 2.7 s D 18 s
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg

12
extend by 12 mm.
springs.
springs
5.0 N
A 3.0 mm B 6.0 mm C 12 mm D 24 mm

ground / J /J
A 24 24
B 24 96
C 96 0
D 96 96
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

13
32 The molecules in a substance vibrate about fixed positions.
The substance is now cooled.
Which row gives the state of the substance and the effect of cooling on the distance between its
molecules?
state of effect on distance

substance between molecules
A liquid decreases
B liquid increases
C solid decreases
D solid increases
33 A solid is heated and it melts. The liquid that is produced is then heated and it boils.
What happens to the temperature of the solid while it is melting, and what happens to the
temperature of the liquid while it is boiling?
temperature of solid temperature of liquid
A increases increases
B increases remains constant
C remains constant increases
D remains constant remains constant
34 A cooling unit is to be fitted in a tank of water to cool all the water.
What is the best position for the unit to be fitted, and what is the main method of thermal energy
transfer in the water?
position to fit main method of

cooling unit thermal energy transfer
A at the bottom conduction

B at the bottom convection
C at the top conduction
D at the top convection

14
35 A microwave oven emits radiation with a frequency of 2.5 × 109 Hz.
What is the wavelength of these waves? The speed of light is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
A 0.0075 m B 0.12 m C 7.5 m D 120 m
36 The diagram shows part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
gamma-rays P ultraviolet Q infra-red
Which row shows the missing types of radiation at P and Q?
at P at Q
A radio waves microwaves

B radio waves visible light
C X-rays microwaves
D X-rays visible light
frequencies.
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz
38 The table gives the lengths and the diameters of four different wires made from the same metal.
Which wire has the smallest resistance?
length of diameter of
wire / m wire / mm
A 3.0 3.0
B 3.0 4.0
C 4.0 3.0
D 4.0 4.0
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

15
39 There is a current of 20 mA in an electrical component when there is a p.d. of 10 V across it.
How much energy is transferred by the component in 30 minutes?
A 6.0 J B 360 J C 6000 J D 360 000 J
40 The diagram shows a circuit containing a battery, three resistors and four voltmeters.
Which voltmeter has the greatest reading?
V
B
A
V
V V
D C
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/23/M/J/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*5348792529*

IB17 06_0653_23/2RP
2
1 Which are characteristics of all living organisms?
A excretion, breathing and sensitivity

B excretion, movement and respiration
C gas exchange and muscle contraction
D muscle contraction and sensitivity
2 The diagram shows a plant cell and an animal cell.
plant cell animal cell
What is structure P and what is one of its functions?
structure function
A cell membrane controls the entry of
B cell membrane supports the cell
C cell wall controls the entry of
D cell wall supports the cell
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

3
3 The graph shows the effect of one variable on amylase activity.
What are the labels X and Y?
X Y
A amylase activity pH
B amylase activity temperature
C pH amylase activity
D temperature amylase activity
4 The equation summarises a process that occurs in living organisms.
6H2O + 6CO2 → C6H12O6 + 6O2
Which molecule contains the greatest amount of chemical energy?
A H2O B CO2 C C6H12O6 D O2
5 Which row matches the part of the alimentary canal to its function?
part of the alimentary canal function of part
A colon absorption of digested food

B ileum egestion
C mouth mechanical digestion
D pancreas production of bile

4
adaptation function

valve 1 valve 2
A closed closed
B closed open
C open closed
D open open
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

5
mouthpiece
limewater
tube X tube Y

9 Which component of tobacco smoke increases the risk of lung cancer?
A carbon dioxide
B carbon monoxide
C nicotine
D tar

6
Which row correctly identifies structure Q and the method of pollination in the flower?
method of
structure Q
pollination
A anther insect
B anther wind
C stigma insect
D stigma wind
11 What effect does HIV have on the components of blood?
A Blood does not clot as quickly.

B Plasma can no longer carry hormones.
C Red blood cells carry less oxygen.
D White blood cells make fewer antibodies.
12 Which statement about decomposers is not correct?
A They are the final stage of food chains.

B They break down dead organic matter.
C They produce oxygen.
D They release heat energy into the environment.
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

7
A acid rain
B deforestation
C eutrophication
D global warming
A B
spot of food
colouring
food colouring
water solution
C D
spot of food
colouring
filter paper

colouring
water water
15 Which elements react together to give positive ions and negative ions that have the same
electronic structure as argon?
A calcium and chlorine

B calcium and fluorine
C magnesium and chlorine
D magnesium and fluorine

8
16 Which dot-and-cross diagram represents the arrangement of outer-shell electrons in a molecule

of nitrogen?
A B
N N N N
C D
N N N N
What are the electrode products?
at the anode at the cathode
A chlorine hydrogen
B chlorine sodium
C hydrogen chlorine
D sodium chlorine
19 Which statement describes an exothermic reaction?
A It gives out thermal energy.

B It needs energy to start it.
C It neither gives out nor takes in energy.
D It takes in energy.
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

9
20 Apparatus used to measure the rate of a reaction, which produces a gas, is shown.
cotton wool
acid
marble
51.2 g balance
Which other piece of apparatus is needed?
A beaker
B gas syringe
C stopclock
D thermometer
21 Iron is extracted from its ore using carbon monoxide.
The word equation is shown.
iron(III) oxide + carbon monoxide → iron + carbon dioxide
A Carbon monoxide is oxidised by gaining oxygen.

B Carbon monoxide is reduced by losing oxygen.
C Iron(III) oxide is oxidised by losing oxygen.
D Iron(III) oxide is reduced by gaining oxygen.
22 Which method can be used to make pure solid sodium nitrate, NaNO3?
A Add aqueous sodium hydroxide to a conical flask, titrate with dilute nitric acid, then
crystallise.
B Dissolve solid sodium chloride in dilute nitric acid, leave for 10 minutes and then crystallise.
C Heat sodium with nitrogen and oxygen. Let the mixture cool, then collect the solid that is
made.
D Mix copper nitrate and sodium chloride solutions then filter the mixture and collect the sodium
nitrate from the filter paper.

10
23 Information about an element in the Periodic Table is shown.
Which row describes an element in the Periodic Table?
number of
group number electrons in metal / non-metal
outer shell
A I 1 metal
B II 2 non-metal
C VI 2 non-metal
D VIII 8 metal

A B C D
N2 N2 O2
N2
N2 O2
other
O2 CO2 gases
O2 CO2
CO2
gases gases gases
26 Which process does not contribute to increasing levels of carbon dioxide in the air?
A burning petrol and diesel in cars

B combustion of the sulfur compounds in petrol and diesel
C destroying rainforests
D releasing waste gases from coal-fired power stations
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

11
27 Which substance rapidly turns bromine from orange to colourless?
A ethane
B ethanol
C ethene
D methane
28 A car is travelling on a straight road at a speed of 2.0 m / s. It starts to accelerate constantly at

3.0 m / s2.
How long does it take for the speed of the car to reach 8.0 m / s?
A 0.50 s B 2.0 s C 2.7 s D 18 s
force mass weight
A kg kg N
B kg N kg
C N kg N
D N N kg

12
extend by 12 mm.
springs.
springs
5.0 N
A 3.0 mm B 6.0 mm C 12 mm D 24 mm

ground / J /J
A 24 24
B 24 96
C 96 0
D 96 96
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

13
32 The molecules in a substance vibrate about fixed positions.
The substance is now cooled.
Which row gives the state of the substance and the effect of cooling on the distance between its
molecules?
state of effect on distance

substance between molecules
A liquid decreases
B liquid increases
C solid decreases
D solid increases
33 A solid is heated and it melts. The liquid that is produced is then heated and it boils.
What happens to the temperature of the solid while it is melting, and what happens to the
temperature of the liquid while it is boiling?
temperature of solid temperature of liquid
A increases increases
B increases remains constant
C remains constant increases
D remains constant remains constant
34 A cooling unit is to be fitted in a tank of water to cool all the water.
What is the best position for the unit to be fitted, and what is the main method of thermal energy
transfer in the water?
position to fit main method of

cooling unit thermal energy transfer
A at the bottom conduction

B at the bottom convection
C at the top conduction
D at the top convection

14
35 A microwave oven emits radiation with a frequency of 2.5 × 109 Hz.
What is the wavelength of these waves? The speed of light is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
A 0.0075 m B 0.12 m C 7.5 m D 120 m
36 The diagram shows part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
gamma-rays P ultraviolet Q infra-red
Which row shows the missing types of radiation at P and Q?
at P at Q
A radio waves microwaves

B radio waves visible light
C X-rays microwaves
D X-rays visible light
frequencies.
A 1.5 Hz and 15 Hz
B 15 Hz and 150 000 Hz
C 150 Hz and 15 000 Hz
D 150 000 Hz and 15 000 000 Hz
38 The table gives the lengths and the diameters of four different wires made from the same metal.
Which wire has the smallest resistance?
length of diameter of
wire / m wire / mm
A 3.0 3.0
B 3.0 4.0
C 4.0 3.0
D 4.0 4.0
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

15
39 There is a current of 20 mA in an electrical component when there is a p.d. of 10 V across it.
How much energy is transferred by the component in 30 minutes?
A 6.0 J B 360 J C 6000 J D 360 000 J
40 The diagram shows a circuit containing a battery, three resistors and four voltmeters.
Which voltmeter has the greatest reading?
V
B
A
V
V V
D C
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/M/J/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/23/M/J/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 7 5 1 4 4 4 4 7 9 8 *

Paper 3 (Core) May/June 2017
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Answer all questions.

You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NF/SW) 137720/2
2
1 (a) Use lines to connect the box on the left to different boxes on the right to make correct
sentences.
One is done for you. The sentence reads ‘Flowering plants can respond to light and gravity’.
Draw three more lines to make three more correct sentences.
produce haploid pollen.
need oxygen for germination of seeds.
lose water from leaves by perspiration.
Flowering plants transport sugar through the xylem.
can respond to light and gravity.
need oxygen for photosynthesis.
have root hair cells for water uptake.

[3]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows vertical sections of two different flowers. They are both pollinated by insects.
stigma stigma
anther
petal
petal filament anther
filament
flower 1 flower 2
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

3
(i) Suggest two features which the flowers in Fig. 1.1 might have that would help the flowers
to attract insects.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe the differences in the arrangement of the male reproductive organs of flower 1
and of flower 2 as shown in Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Pollen can go from the anther to the stigma in the same flower without needing insects. This
is called self-pollination.
Suggest which flower in Fig. 1.1 would have less chance of self-pollination.
Explain your answer.
Flower .................... because ...................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]

4
2 (a) A molecule of methane contains one carbon atom bonded to four hydrogen atoms.
This bonding, shown in Fig. 2.1, involves shared pairs of electrons.
H
X
H C X H
X
X
H
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the type of chemical bonding shown in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the type of elements that bond together by sharing pairs of electrons.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) During complete combustion, methane forms two gases.
Complete the word equation to show this reaction.
methane + +
[2]
(ii) Explain, in terms of energy changes, why methane is used as a fuel.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Methane is the main constituent of one fossil fuel.
(i) State the name of this fossil fuel.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

5
(ii) State the names of two other fossil fuels.
............................................................... and ............................................................... [1]
(d) Refinery gas, gasoline and diesel oil are separated from a mixture of hydrocarbons by an
industrial process.
(i) Name this industrial process.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one use for bottled refinery gas.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a wind surfer on a surf board, driven by the wind, sailing at a constant speed
across the sea. The arrows labelled A, B, C and D show the forces acting on the surf board.
direction of
wind
direction of
travel
B D
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Complete Table 3.1 using the letters A, B, C and D.
Table 3.1

driving force
frictional force
upthrust of water
weight
[2]
(ii) Force A is measured and found to be 1200 N.
State whether force C is 1200 N or has a different value.
Give a reason for your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State which force needs to be increased to make the surf board sail at a faster speed.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

7
(b) The speed of the surf board is 12 km / h.
Calculate the speed of the surf board in m / s.
Show your working.
speed = .............................................. m / s [1]
(c) The wind provides the energy for the work needed to move the surf board across the sea.
(i) State the two quantities that must be measured to calculate the work done in moving the
surf board during its journey across the sea.
............................................................... and ............................................................... [2]
(ii) State the type of energy the surf board has when it is being moved by the wind.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The wind stops blowing and the surf board slows down and stops.
Describe what has happened to the energy in (c)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

8
4 (a) Define the terms
herbivore,
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
carnivore.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows an aquatic food web. Phytoplankton are microscopic plants that float on the
surface of the water. Zooplankton are very small animals.
seagull
fish
crab
small
invertebrates
mussel
limpet zooplankton
seaweed phytoplankton
Fig. 4.1
(i) State two environmental conditions that can affect the rate of photosynthesis of the
plants in the water.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

9
(ii) Using Fig. 4.1 draw one food chain which includes the crab.
[2]
(iii) The population of crabs decreases. Suggest how this can cause the number of mussels
to increase,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
to decrease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]

10
5 A student investigates the reaction between dilute sulfuric acid and copper(II) carbonate powder.
The apparatus she uses is shown in Fig. 5.1.
gas syringe
copper(II) carbonate
dilute sulfuric acid
powder
Fig. 5.1
The reaction produces a gas which is collected in the gas syringe.
(a) (i) Name the gas and the salt which are produced in this reaction.
gas ....................................................................................................................................
salt .....................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe the pH change, if any, of the reaction mixture.
Name this type of reaction.
pH change .........................................................................................................................
reaction type ......................................................................................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

11
(b) The student records the volume of gas in the syringe for 10 minutes.
Her results are shown in Fig. 5.2.
volume
of
gas
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time / minutes
Fig. 5.2
Suggest why the reaction stops at 4 minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The student repeats the experiment using the same mass of powdered copper(II) carbonate
and the same volume of dilute sulfuric acid.
Suggest one change that the student can make to decrease the time taken for the reaction to
stop.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The formula of sulfuric acid is H2SO4.
(i) State the number of different elements and the total number of atoms shown in this
formula.
number of elements ......................
number of atoms ......................

[2]
(ii) Describe a chemical test for sulfate ions and state the positive result.
test ....................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
result .................................................................................................................................
[2]
12
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a man standing in the sea on a sunny day.
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) The man says that his back is getting too hot in the Sun.
Describe how the thermal energy reaches his back from the Sun.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The temperature of the man’s body is 37 °C. The temperature of the sea water is 15 °C.
Explain why the man says that the water feels cold to his feet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The man walks out of the sea, and his wet feet slowly become dry. He says that his feet
get colder as they dry.
Complete the sentences below that explain in terms of the movement of molecules why
his feet get colder as they dry.
The ........................................................................... water molecules escape from the
surface of the water on his feet.
This means that the remaining water molecules have less
........................................................................... so the remaining water on his
feet is at a lower ........................................................................... . [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

13
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a man spear fishing. He sees a fish in the sea in front of him.
Fig. 6.2 shows part of a ray of light from the fish to the man’s eye. He thinks the fish is in the
position shown.
(i) On Fig. 6.2 continue the ray in the water to show where the fish really is.
Mark the real position of the fish with an X.
air
water
Fig. 6.2
[2]
(ii) State the name of this effect when light passes from air to water.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The man cooks a fish in a microwave oven.
On Fig. 6.3 place microwaves in their correct position in the incomplete electromagnetic
spectrum.
gamma visible radio

rays light waves
Fig. 6.3
[1]

14
7 Table 7.1 shows the mass of some of the contents of three foods in a 100 gram sample of each
food.
Table 7.1
number of grams in the 100 gram food sample

food
fat carbohydrate protein water
bread 7 60 13 20
egg 11 1 13 75
milk 3 5 3 89
(a) State the two nutrient groups needed for a balanced diet which are missing from Table 7.1.
.................................................................. and .................................................................. [2]
(b) The energy for the body provided by one gram of each nutrient is shown below.
fat 37 kJ carbohydrate 17 kJ protein 17 kJ
A student cooked a meal using 100 grams of eggs.
Use the information contained in Table 7.1 to calculate the energy provided by the 100 grams
of eggs.
Show your working.
energy provided = ................................................. kJ [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

15
(c) (i) The energy from food is released by respiration.
Complete the word equation for respiration.
glucose + oxygen +
[1]
(ii) Describe how oxygen is transported by the blood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Fats, carbohydrates and proteins are made up from large molecules. They have to be broken
down by chemical digestion into small molecules.
State the three areas of the alimentary canal where chemical digestion occurs.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]

16
8 Fig. 8.1 shows some uses of copper.
coin pipe wire
Fig. 8.1
Copper is extracted from copper oxide by reacting it with carbon.
The word equation for this reaction is:
copper oxide + carbon copper + carbon dioxide
(a) (i) Name the collection of metals in the Periodic Table which includes copper.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Use the word equation to identify the substance which is being reduced during the
extraction of copper from copper oxide.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) A hairdryer is powered through a cable containing copper wire.
Copper is a good conductor of electricity.
State one other property of copper that makes it a suitable material for use in a power
cable.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Suggest one reason why copper, rather than iron, is used to make water pipes.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Explain why copper alloys, rather than pure copper, are used to make coins.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

17
(b) Three metals are placed into beakers of dilute hydrochloric acid, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
iron magnesium zinc
dilute
hydrochloric
acid
Fig. 8.2
State which of the three metals in Fig. 8.2 reacts most rapidly with dilute hydrochloric acid.
Name the gas which is made when this metal reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid.
metal ......................................................................................................................................
gas ......................................................................................................................................
[2]

18
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a simple test circuit for testing different materials to see how well they conduct
electricity. The material being tested is connected between X and Y.
X Y
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) Name two materials other than copper that would be found to be good conductors when
tested.
............................................................... and ............................................................... [1]
(ii) Name two materials that would be found to be poor conductors when tested.
............................................................... and ............................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name given to all materials that are poor conductors.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain why it is important to have a resistor, R, in the test circuit as well as the ammeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

19
(c) A piece of copper wire is connected between X and Y, and a voltmeter is connected in parallel
to R.
(i) On Fig. 9.1, using the correct circuit symbol, show how the voltmeter is connected to the
circuit. [2]
(ii) The ammeter reads 0.5 A. The voltmeter reads 2 V.
Calculate the resistance of R.
State the formula you use, show your working and give the unit of your answer.
formula
working
resistance = ................................ unit .............. [3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

© UCLES 2017
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
20
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/31/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.)
* 7 5 1 4 4 4 4 7 9 8 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 137720/2
2
sentences.
One is done for you. The sentence reads ‘Flowering plants can respond to light and gravity’.
can respond to light and gravity.
have root hair cells for water uptake.

[3]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows vertical sections of two different flowers. They are both pollinated by insects.
stigma stigma
anther
petal
petal filament anther
filament
flower 1 flower 2
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

3
(i) Suggest two features which the flowers in Fig. 1.1 might have that would help the flowers
to attract insects.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe the differences in the arrangement of the male reproductive organs of flower 1
and of flower 2 as shown in Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Pollen can go from the anther to the stigma in the same flower without needing insects. This
is called self-pollination.
Suggest which flower in Fig. 1.1 would have less chance of self-pollination.
Flower .................... because ...................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]

4
2 (a) A molecule of methane contains one carbon atom bonded to four hydrogen atoms.
This bonding, shown in Fig. 2.1, involves shared pairs of electrons.
H
X
H C X H
X
X
H
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the type of chemical bonding shown in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the type of elements that bond together by sharing pairs of electrons.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) During complete combustion, methane forms two gases.
Complete the word equation to show this reaction.
methane + +
[2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

5
............................................................... and ............................................................... [1]
(d) Refinery gas, gasoline and diesel oil are separated from a mixture of hydrocarbons by an
industrial process.
(i) Name this industrial process.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one use for bottled refinery gas.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
direction of
wind
direction of
travel
B D
Fig. 3.1
Table 3.1

driving force
frictional force
upthrust of water
weight
[2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State which force needs to be increased to make the surf board sail at a faster speed.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

7
(b) The speed of the surf board is 12 km / h.
Calculate the speed of the surf board in m / s.
Show your working.
speed = .............................................. m / s [1]
(c) The wind provides the energy for the work needed to move the surf board across the sea.
(i) State the two quantities that must be measured to calculate the work done in moving the
surf board during its journey across the sea.
............................................................... and ............................................................... [2]
(ii) State the type of energy the surf board has when it is being moved by the wind.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The wind stops blowing and the surf board slows down and stops.
Describe what has happened to the energy in (c)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

8
4 (a) Define the terms
herbivore,
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
carnivore.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
seagull
fish
crab
small
invertebrates
mussel
limpet zooplankton
Fig. 4.1
(i) State two environmental conditions that can affect the rate of photosynthesis of the
plants in the water.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

9
(ii) Using Fig. 4.1 draw one food chain which includes the crab.
[2]
(iii) The population of crabs decreases. Suggest how this can cause the number of mussels
to increase,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
to decrease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]

10
5 A student investigates the reaction between dilute sulfuric acid and copper(II) carbonate powder.
gas syringe
copper(II) carbonate
dilute sulfuric acid
powder
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Name the gas and the salt which are produced in this reaction.
gas ....................................................................................................................................
salt .....................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe the pH change, if any, of the reaction mixture.
pH change .........................................................................................................................
reaction type ......................................................................................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

11
(b) The student records the volume of gas in the syringe for 10 minutes.
volume
of
gas
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time / minutes
Fig. 5.2
Suggest why the reaction stops at 4 minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The student repeats the experiment using the same mass of powdered copper(II) carbonate
and the same volume of dilute sulfuric acid.
Suggest one change that the student can make to decrease the time taken for the reaction to
stop.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The formula of sulfuric acid is H2SO4.
(i) State the number of different elements and the total number of atoms shown in this
formula.
number of elements ......................
number of atoms ......................

[2]
(ii) Describe a chemical test for sulfate ions and state the positive result.
test ....................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
result .................................................................................................................................
[2]
12
Fig. 6.1
Describe how the thermal energy reaches his back from the Sun.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
The ........................................................................... water molecules escape from the
........................................................................... so the remaining water on his
feet is at a lower ........................................................................... . [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

13
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a man spear fishing. He sees a fish in the sea in front of him.
Fig. 6.2 shows part of a ray of light from the fish to the man’s eye. He thinks the fish is in the
position shown.
(i) On Fig. 6.2 continue the ray in the water to show where the fish really is.
Mark the real position of the fish with an X.
air
water
Fig. 6.2
[2]
(ii) State the name of this effect when light passes from air to water.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
On Fig. 6.3 place microwaves in their correct position in the incomplete electromagnetic
spectrum.
gamma visible radio

rays light waves
Fig. 6.3
[1]

14
food.
Table 7.1

food
bread 7 60 13 20
egg 11 1 13 75
milk 3 5 3 89
(a) State the two nutrient groups needed for a balanced diet which are missing from Table 7.1.
.................................................................. and .................................................................. [2]
(b) The energy for the body provided by one gram of each nutrient is shown below.
of eggs.
Show your working.
energy provided = ................................................. kJ [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

15
Complete the word equation for respiration.
glucose + oxygen +
[1]
(ii) Describe how oxygen is transported by the blood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
State the three areas of the alimentary canal where chemical digestion occurs.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]

16
8 Fig. 8.1 shows some uses of copper.
coin pipe wire
Fig. 8.1
Copper is extracted from copper oxide by reacting it with carbon.
The word equation for this reaction is:
copper oxide + carbon copper + carbon dioxide
(a) (i) Name the collection of metals in the Periodic Table which includes copper.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Use the word equation to identify the substance which is being reduced during the
extraction of copper from copper oxide.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) A hairdryer is powered through a cable containing copper wire.
Copper is a good conductor of electricity.
State one other property of copper that makes it a suitable material for use in a power
cable.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Suggest one reason why copper, rather than iron, is used to make water pipes.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Explain why copper alloys, rather than pure copper, are used to make coins.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

17
(b) Three metals are placed into beakers of dilute hydrochloric acid, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
iron magnesium zinc
dilute
hydrochloric
acid
Fig. 8.2
State which of the three metals in Fig. 8.2 reacts most rapidly with dilute hydrochloric acid.
Name the gas which is made when this metal reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid.
metal ......................................................................................................................................
gas ......................................................................................................................................
[2]

18
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a simple test circuit for testing different materials to see how well they conduct
X Y
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) Name two materials other than copper that would be found to be good conductors when
tested.
............................................................... and ............................................................... [1]
(ii) Name two materials that would be found to be poor conductors when tested.
............................................................... and ............................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name given to all materials that are poor conductors.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain why it is important to have a resistor, R, in the test circuit as well as the ammeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

19
(c) A piece of copper wire is connected between X and Y, and a voltmeter is connected in parallel
to R.
(i) On Fig. 9.1, using the correct circuit symbol, show how the voltmeter is connected to the
circuit. [2]
(ii) The ammeter reads 0.5 A. The voltmeter reads 2 V.
Calculate the resistance of R.
State the formula you use, show your working and give the unit of your answer.
formula
working
resistance = ................................ unit .............. [3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/M/J/17

© UCLES 2017
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
20
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/31/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 3 2 5 4 4 8 2 0 9 7 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 137721/2
2
sentences.
One is done for you. The sentence reads ‘Enzymes work best in a narrow pH range’.
are used up during reactions.
are biological catalysts.
work best in a narrow pH range.
Enzymes are needed for diffusion to take place.
are produced in the colon.
are usually not active at low temperatures.
are protein molecules.

[3]
(b) Digestive enzymes are added to food in the alimentary canal. They speed up the chemical
digestion of food molecules.
Explain why chemical digestion of food molecules is necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

3
(c) When many glucose molecules join together, larger molecules are formed.
Fig. 1.1 shows a glucose molecule and part of a larger molecule.
glucose molecule part of a larger molecule
Fig. 1.1
Draw a circle around two examples of the larger molecules formed when glucose molecules
join together.
amino acid fat fatty acid glycerol
glycogen protein starch

[2]
(d) A student adds an enzyme to a solution and incubates it at 37 °C for 10 minutes. He wants to
find out if the enzyme causes reducing sugar to be produced.
(i) Give the name of the test he can do to find out if reducing sugar is produced. State the
positive result of this test.
test ....................................................................................................................................
positive result ....................................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) The student knows that reaction rates often increase at higher temperatures. He repeats
the experiment at 80 °C.
Predict what happens and explain your answer.
prediction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Sugar is produced by photosynthesis in plants. Carbon dioxide and water are the raw
materials needed.
State two conditions that must be present during photosynthesis for the raw materials to
react together.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]

4
2 (a) A teacher places the first three metals of Group I in the Periodic Table into separate beakers
of water. This is shown in Fig. 2.1.
water
beaker A beaker B beaker C
Fig. 2.1
The three pieces of metal are the same size.
A student records her observations in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
time for metal

beaker the metal floats the metal melts to fully react in flames are seen
seconds
A yes yes 15 yes
B yes no 60 no
C yes yes 40 no
(i) Use the information in Table 2.1 to identify the three metals in beakers A, B and C.
beaker A ............................................................................................................................
beaker B ............................................................................................................................
beaker C ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Name the gas produced when Group I metals react with water.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) When the metals have completely reacted, the teacher places pieces of red litmus paper
and blue litmus paper into each beaker.
Describe the changes, if any, that are seen.
red litmus paper ................................................................................................................
blue litmus paper ...............................................................................................................

[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

5
(b) The student places pieces of copper, iron, magnesium and zinc into dilute hydrochloric acid.
(i) State which of the four metals react fastest.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State which of the four metals does not react at all.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest why Group I metals must not be added to dilute hydrochloric acid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Saucepans are usually made from an iron alloy rather than from pure iron.
Some coins are made from a copper alloy rather than from pure copper.
Explain why these alloys are used instead of the pure metals.
(i) iron alloy for saucepans
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) copper alloy for coins
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows an aircraft flying at a constant height and constant speed above the Earth’s surface.
The arrows labelled A, B, C and D show the forces acting on the aircraft.
A C
Fig. 3.1
Table 3.1

driving force
frictional force
lifting force
weight
[2]
(ii) Force D is measured and found to be 500 000 N.
State whether force B is 500 000 N or has a different value.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State which force should be increased by the pilot
1. to make the aircraft fly at a faster speed, ........................
2. to make the aircraft go up to a higher height. ........................

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

7
(b) The speed of the aircraft is 600 km / h.
(i) Calculate the speed of the aircraft in m / s.
Show your working.
speed = .............................................. m / s [1]
(ii) The aircraft travels at this speed for a distance of 2700 km.
The pilot tells his passengers that the flight time will be 4 hours 30 minutes.
Show by calculation that the pilot is correct.
[1]
(c) The aircraft slows down and descends to a lower height.
Describe the energy changes that have taken place for the aircraft.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

8
(d) Another aircraft takes off and climbs to cruising height. It then travels at a constant speed
until it descends and lands.
On Fig. 3.2 sketch the shape of the speed-time graph for the whole journey of this aircraft
from take-off to landing.
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 3.2
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

9
Please turn over for Question 4

10
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a diagram of the internal structure of the heart.
left ventricle
Fig. 4.1
(i) The ventricles contract to send blood out of the heart.
State what happens to the valves at A and B when the ventricles contract.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) Explain why it is essential to have valves A and B in the heart.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The hormone adrenaline is secreted into the blood by the adrenal glands which are above the
kidneys. One of the effects of adrenaline is to increase the heart rate.
(i) Describe one situation when the rate of adrenaline secretion increases rapidly.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State how the hormone adrenaline is removed from the blood.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

11
(c) Describe the functions of the following parts of the blood.
red blood cells
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
plasma
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

12
5 (a) Petroleum is a mixture of hydrocarbons.
It is separated into more useful parts using the industrial apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1.
Fig. 5.1
(i) Name the process that occurs in this industrial apparatus.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest why this process involves a physical change and not a chemical change.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Refinery gas is obtained from petroleum.
State one use for refinery gas.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The main compound in natural gas has the formula CH4.
(i) Name this compound.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

13
(ii) State the total number of atoms and the number of different elements shown in the
formula CH4.
number of atoms ..................
number of elements ..................

[1]
(iii) Complete the diagram to show the structure of one molecule of CH4.
C—
[1]
(c) Petroleum and natural gas are fossil fuels.
Name one other fossil fuel.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

14
6 An aircraft is flying at a height of 10 000 m. Outside the aircraft the temperature is −55 °C, but
inside the aircraft the temperature is kept at 21 °C.
(a) (i) State the main method of thermal energy transfer from air inside the aircraft to the
outside.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest how the construction of the aircraft should be designed to reduce this loss of
thermal energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Inside the aircraft’s jet engines, the temperature reaches 1700 °C as the jet fuel burns. The
combustion of the fuel forms exhaust gases containing carbon dioxide and water molecules.
(i) State which of the diagrams in Fig. 6.1, X, Y or Z, shows the arrangement of these
molecules as they are formed in the engine.
X Y Z
Fig. 6.1
diagram ...............
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

15
(ii) Fig. 6.2 shows the white trails across the sky left by the jet engines of an aircraft.
Fig. 6.2
Suggest what these white trails are made of. Give a reason for your answer.
The white trails are made of ..............................................................................................
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Radar is a method of tracking aircraft from the ground using microwaves. Air traffic control
can also use radio waves to talk to the pilot.
On Fig. 6.3, put microwaves and radio waves in their correct places in the incomplete
electromagnetic spectrum.
gamma
visible light
radiation
Fig. 6.3
[2]
(d) The jet engines of the aircraft in Fig. 6.2 emit a very loud noise. Most of this noise occurs at
low frequencies around 100 Hz.
Describe the pitch and amplitude of the sound produced.
pitch ..........................................................................................................................................
amplitude ..................................................................................................................................
[2]

16
7 Fig. 7.1 shows some of the organisms in a lake. Algae are tiny water plants that float on the
surface of the lake.
light oxygen air
algae and water

small animals
lake
water plants
fish
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i) Explain why the fish in the water need oxygen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The concentration of oxygen is higher in the air than in the water.
Name the process which causes oxygen molecules to go from the air into the water.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe another source of oxygen for the fish in the water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

17
(b) The feeding relationships of the organisms in Fig. 7.1 are as follows.
• the small animals feed on algae
• the fish feed on the algae, water plants and small animals.
(i) Use the information provided to complete the food web which has been started below.
small animals fish
algae water plants

[2]
(ii) From the organisms in Fig. 7.1 name
a herbivore, ...........................................................................................................
a producer. ...........................................................................................................
[2]

18
8 (a) Water is extracted from a river and then treated to make it suitable for people to use.
Two processes, J and chlorination, are used in the purification of the water supply, as shown
in Fig. 8.1.
river
process J
chlorination
Fig. 8.1
(i) Process J removes insoluble solids from the water.
Name process J.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why chlorine is added to the water supply.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe a chemical test for chlorine gas.
State the positive result of this test.
test ....................................................................................................................................
result .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Hydrogen chloride is formed when chlorine reacts with hydrogen.
(i) Construct the word equation for this reaction.
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

19
(ii) State the type of chemical bond that forms between non-metallic elements such as
chlorine and hydrogen.
Describe how electrons are involved in this bond.
bonding type ......................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) In a molecule of hydrogen chloride, an atom of hydrogen is bonded to an atom of

chlorine.
State the formula of hydrogen chloride.
.............................. [1]
(c) Chlorine is made during the electrolysis of aqueous copper chloride using inert electrodes.
(i) Name the electrode at which chlorine forms during this process.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the product that forms at the other electrode.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Identify the electrolyte used in this process.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

20
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a simple circuit set up to investigate the electrical properties of a lamp.
cells
0 1
A
ammeter switch
lamps
variable
resistor
Fig. 9.1
(a) On Fig. 9.2 use the correct circuit symbols to complete the circuit diagram for the circuit
shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.2
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

21
(b) The two lamps in the circuit are identical.
A voltmeter connected across the two lamps reads 2.4 V.
The ammeter reads 0.6 A.
Calculate the resistance of one lamp.
State the formula used and show your working.
formula
working
resistance = .................................................. Ω [3]
(c) The resistance of the variable resistor is reduced.
State the effect this will have on the brightness of the two lamps.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/M/J/17

© UCLES 2017
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
24
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/32/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 6 2 1 6 8 1 0 0 0 8 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (KN/SW) 144776
2
sentences.

[3]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

3
Fig. 1.1
join together.

[2]
test ....................................................................................................................................
positive result ....................................................................................................................

[2]
prediction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
materials needed.
react together.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]

4
water
Fig. 2.1
Table 2.1
time for metal

seconds
A yes yes 15 yes
B yes no 60 no
C yes yes 40 no
beaker A ............................................................................................................................
beaker B ............................................................................................................................
beaker C ............................................................................................................................
[2]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
red litmus paper ................................................................................................................

[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

5
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
A C
Fig. 3.1
Table 3.1

driving force
frictional force
lifting force
weight
[2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

7
Show your working.
speed = .............................................. m / s [1]
[1]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

8
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 3.2
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

9

10
left ventricle
Fig. 4.1
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

11
red blood cells
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
plasma
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

12
Fig. 5.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

13
formula CH4.
number of atoms ..................

[1]
C—
[1]
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

14
outside.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
thermal energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
X Y Z
Fig. 6.1
diagram ...............
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

15
Fig. 6.2
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
gamma
visible light
radiation
Fig. 6.3
[2]
pitch ..........................................................................................................................................
amplitude ..................................................................................................................................
[2]

16
light oxygen air
algae and water

small animals
lake
water plants
fish
Fig. 7.1
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

17
small animals fish
algae water plants

[2]
a herbivore, ...........................................................................................................
a producer. ...........................................................................................................
[2]

18
in Fig. 8.1.
river
process J
chlorination
Fig. 8.1
Name process J.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
test ....................................................................................................................................
result .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

19
bonding type ......................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

chlorine.
.............................. [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

20
cells
0 1
A
ammeter switch
lamps
variable
resistor
Fig. 9.1
shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.2
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

21
formula
working
resistance = .................................................. Ω [3]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

© UCLES 2017
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
24
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/33/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 6 2 1 6 8 1 0 0 0 8 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (KN/SW) 144776
2
sentences.

[3]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

3
Fig. 1.1
join together.

[2]
test ....................................................................................................................................
positive result ....................................................................................................................

[2]
prediction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
materials needed.
react together.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]

4
water
Fig. 2.1
Table 2.1
time for metal

seconds
A yes yes 15 yes
B yes no 60 no
C yes yes 40 no
beaker A ............................................................................................................................
beaker B ............................................................................................................................
beaker C ............................................................................................................................
[2]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
red litmus paper ................................................................................................................

[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

5
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
A C
Fig. 3.1
Table 3.1

driving force
frictional force
lifting force
weight
[2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

7
Show your working.
speed = .............................................. m / s [1]
[1]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

8
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 3.2
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

9

10
left ventricle
Fig. 4.1
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

11
red blood cells
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
plasma
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

12
Fig. 5.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

13
formula CH4.
number of atoms ..................

[1]
C—
[1]
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

14
outside.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
thermal energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
X Y Z
Fig. 6.1
diagram ...............
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

15
Fig. 6.2
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
gamma
visible light
radiation
Fig. 6.3
[2]
pitch ..........................................................................................................................................
amplitude ..................................................................................................................................
[2]

16
light oxygen air
algae and water

small animals
lake
water plants
fish
Fig. 7.1
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

17
small animals fish
algae water plants

[2]
a herbivore, ...........................................................................................................
a producer. ...........................................................................................................
[2]

18
in Fig. 8.1.
river
process J
chlorination
Fig. 8.1
Name process J.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
test ....................................................................................................................................
result .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

19
bonding type ......................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

chlorine.
.............................. [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

20
cells
0 1
A
ammeter switch
lamps
variable
resistor
Fig. 9.1
shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.2
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

21
formula
working
resistance = .................................................. Ω [3]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/M/J/17

© UCLES 2017
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
24
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/33/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 4 0 2 9 3 2 3 7 7 1 *

Paper 4 (Extended) May/June 2017
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 137780/3
2
sentences.
One is done for you. The sentence reads ‘Flowering plants need oxygen for germination of
seeds’.
use auxins to respond to light.
have root hair cells which increase water uptake.

[3]
(b) Fig. 1.1 is a diagram of a wind-pollinated flower.
anther
stigma
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

3
(i) Describe how the following structures make the flower in Fig. 1.1 suitable for
wind-pollination.
the anthers
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
the stigmas
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest one reason why wind-pollinated crops are grown close together by farmers.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The growth of crops can be reduced by acid rain.
(i) Describe how burning fossil fuels can lead to acid rain.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest how acid rain reduces the rate of growth of crops.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

4
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 is a dot-and-cross diagram to show the outer-shell electrons in a molecule of hydrogen
chloride, HCl.
X X
X
H X Cl
X
X X
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the type of chemical bond shown in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the outer-shell electrons in a molecule of

methane, CH4 .
[2]
(b) (i) Name the two products of the complete combustion of methane.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
............................................................... and ............................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

5
direction of
wind
direction of
travel
B D
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State which letter, A, B, C, or D corresponds to
1. frictional force ...................
2. upthrust ...................
[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
(b) The surf board travels at a constant speed of 2 m / s.
The wind speed then increases, and the surf board moves with an acceleration that is not
constant until the surf board reaches a constant speed of 4.5 m / s after 10 s.
On Fig. 3.2 sketch the shape of the speed-time graph of the motion of the surf board from the
time the wind speed increases until just after the constant speed of 4.5 m / s is achieved.
3
speed
m/s
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
time / s
Fig. 3.2
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

7
(c) The kinetic energy of the wind provides the work needed to move the surf board across the
sea.
(i) The mass of the surf board and surfer is 120 kg.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the surf board and surfer when they are moving at 3 m / s.
State the formula you use and show your working.
formula
working
kinetic energy = ............................................... J [2]
(ii) The wind transfers 90 kJ of energy to the surf board when moving it along at 3 m / s
for 50 s.
Use the work done by the wind to calculate the driving force of the wind.
State any formula you use and show your working.
formula
working
driving force = .............................................. N [3]

8
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a drawing of a single-celled organism called Euglena as seen using a light
microscope.
This organism has features of both plants and animals.
eyespot
chloroplast
flagellum
nucleus
cell membrane
Fig. 4.1
(i) Chloroplasts are usually found in plant cells.
Describe in detail the function of chloroplasts.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Name one feature of Euglena you would more likely see in an animal than a plant.
feature ......................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

9
seagull
fish
crab
small
invertebrates
mussel
limpet zooplankton
Fig. 4.2
(i) Use Fig. 4.2 to draw a food chain containing five organisms, including the crab.
[2]
(ii) The chemical energy contained in the producers is transferred through the food web to
the seagull as shown in Fig. 4.2.
Suggest why the seagull gets more energy transferred from the phytoplankton by eating
mussels rather than fish. Explain your answer in detail.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

10
5 A student investigates the reaction between dilute sulfuric acid and excess copper(II) carbonate
powder.
gas syringe
excess copper(II)
carbonate powder dilute sulfuric acid
Fig. 5.1
A salt and another compound are also produced.
(a) (i) Describe the pH change, if any, of the reaction mixture.
pH change .........................................................................................................................
reaction type ......................................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) Complete the balanced symbol equation for the reaction between dilute sulfuric acid and
copper(II) carbonate.
H2SO4 + CuCO3 ............................ + ............................ + ............................ [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

11
(b) Copper(II) carbonate is insoluble in water.
The salt which is produced in this reaction is soluble in water.
Suggest a method of making pure, dry crystals of this salt from the mixture that is left after the
reaction is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The student records the volume of gas in the syringe for 10 minutes.
volume
of
gas
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time / minutes
Fig. 5.2
Describe how the shape of the graph shows the change in the rate of the reaction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) She repeats the experiment using the same volume of less concentrated sulfuric acid.
(i) Draw a line on Fig. 5.2 to show her results. [2]

(ii) Explain, in terms of particle collisions, the effect of using less concentrated sulfuric acid
on the rate of the reaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
12
Fig. 6.1
Explain why wearing a white shirt can prevent the temperature of his back from
increasing.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
The .......................................................................... water molecules escape from the
.......................................................................... so the remaining water on his feet is at a
lower .......................................................................... . [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

13
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a man spear fishing. He sees a fish in the sea in front of him. He says that the
fish appears to be near the surface.
The man thinks the fish is at point F on Fig. 6.2.
Draw a ray diagram on Fig. 6.2 to show where the fish really is. Mark this point with a letter X.
air
F water
Fig. 6.2
[2]
(i) On Fig. 6.3 place microwaves in their correct position in the incomplete electromagnetic
spectrum.
gamma
visible light radio waves
rays
Fig. 6.3 [1]

14
(ii) Microwaves travel at a speed of 3 × 108 m / s. The wavelength of the microwaves used in
the microwave oven is 0.12 m.
Calculate the frequency of the microwaves used.
formula
working
frequency = ............................................... Hz [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

15
food.
Table 7.1

food
bread 7 60 13 20
egg 11 1 13 75
milk 3 5 3 89
(a) The energy for the body provided by one gram of each nutrient is shown below.
of eggs.
Show your working.
energy provided = ............................................. kJ [2]
(b) A person has a family history of coronary heart disease and it is likely that he will develop the
condition too. State which food listed in Table 7.1 he should avoid.
food ...........................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]

16
Complete the balanced symbol equation for respiration.
C6H12O6 + 6O2 + [1]

......................................... .........................................
(ii) Describe how oxygen is transported in the blood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
Name the areas of the alimentary canal where the following processes occur.
1. chemical digestion
........................................................ and ........................................................
and ........................................................
2. absorption
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

17

18
8 (a) Use the Periodic Table on page 24 to determine the electronic structure of an aluminium
atom.
.................................................... [1]
(b) Aluminium is extracted from aluminium oxide by electrolysis, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
carbon cathode carbon

anode
– +
molten electrolyte
containing aluminium oxide
molten
aluminium
Fig. 8.1
Aluminium oxide, Al 2O3, contains aluminium ions, Al 3+, and oxide ions, O2−.
(i) Name the product of electrolysis at the anode.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe, in terms of atoms, ions and electrons, the reaction that takes place at the
cathode.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Iron is extracted from iron(III) oxide in a blast furnace.
(i) Name a substance that reduces iron(III) oxide in this process.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why aluminium cannot be extracted from aluminium oxide in a blast furnace.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

19
(d) A student investigates the reactions between aluminium and solutions of metal sulfates.
(i) When a freshly cleaned piece of aluminium is placed into a solution of magnesium
sulfate, no change is seen, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
magnesium
sulfate
solution
aluminium
before after
Fig. 8.2
Explain this observation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) When a freshly cleaned piece of aluminium is placed into a solution of copper(II) sulfate,
the surface of the aluminium turns brown and the solution starts to decolourise, as shown
in Fig. 8.3.
copper(II)
sulfate
solution
aluminium
before after
Fig. 8.3
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

20
9 Fig 9.1 shows a simple test circuit for testing different materials to see how well they conduct
X Y
Fig. 9.1
(a) Name two materials other than copper that would be found to be good conductors when
tested.
.................................................................. and .................................................................. [1]
(b) A piece of copper wire is connected between X and Y, and a voltmeter is connected in parallel
to resistor R.
The ammeter reads 0.5 A. The voltmeter reads 2 V.
Use the formula R = V to calculate the resistance of R.

I
Give the unit of your answer.
working
resistance = ................................ unit .............. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

21
(c) Two pieces of wire, P and Q, with the same length and made of the same alloy, are connected
in parallel between X and Y.
The current in wire P is 5 A. The ammeter reading is 7 A.
(i) Predict the current in wire Q.
current in wire Q = ....................... A
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) Deduce why different currents flow in wires P and Q. Give reasons for your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

© UCLES 2017
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
24
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/41/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 4 0 2 9 3 2 3 7 7 1 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 137780/3
2
sentences.
One is done for you. The sentence reads ‘Flowering plants need oxygen for germination of
seeds’.
use auxins to respond to light.
have root hair cells which increase water uptake.

[3]
(b) Fig. 1.1 is a diagram of a wind-pollinated flower.
anther
stigma
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

3
(i) Describe how the following structures make the flower in Fig. 1.1 suitable for
wind-pollination.
the anthers
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
the stigmas
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest one reason why wind-pollinated crops are grown close together by farmers.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The growth of crops can be reduced by acid rain.
(i) Describe how burning fossil fuels can lead to acid rain.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest how acid rain reduces the rate of growth of crops.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

4
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 is a dot-and-cross diagram to show the outer-shell electrons in a molecule of hydrogen
chloride, HCl.
X X
X
H X Cl
X
X X
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the type of chemical bond shown in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the outer-shell electrons in a molecule of

methane, CH4 .
[2]
(b) (i) Name the two products of the complete combustion of methane.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
............................................................... and ............................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

5
direction of
wind
direction of
travel
B D
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State which letter, A, B, C, or D corresponds to
2. upthrust ...................
[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
(b) The surf board travels at a constant speed of 2 m / s.
The wind speed then increases, and the surf board moves with an acceleration that is not
constant until the surf board reaches a constant speed of 4.5 m / s after 10 s.
On Fig. 3.2 sketch the shape of the speed-time graph of the motion of the surf board from the
time the wind speed increases until just after the constant speed of 4.5 m / s is achieved.
3
speed
m/s
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
time / s
Fig. 3.2
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

7
(c) The kinetic energy of the wind provides the work needed to move the surf board across the
sea.
(i) The mass of the surf board and surfer is 120 kg.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the surf board and surfer when they are moving at 3 m / s.
formula
working
kinetic energy = ............................................... J [2]
(ii) The wind transfers 90 kJ of energy to the surf board when moving it along at 3 m / s
for 50 s.
Use the work done by the wind to calculate the driving force of the wind.
State any formula you use and show your working.
formula
working
driving force = .............................................. N [3]

8
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a drawing of a single-celled organism called Euglena as seen using a light
microscope.
This organism has features of both plants and animals.
eyespot
chloroplast
flagellum
nucleus
cell membrane
Fig. 4.1
(i) Chloroplasts are usually found in plant cells.
Describe in detail the function of chloroplasts.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Name one feature of Euglena you would more likely see in an animal than a plant.
feature ......................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

9
seagull
fish
crab
small
invertebrates
mussel
limpet zooplankton
Fig. 4.2
(i) Use Fig. 4.2 to draw a food chain containing five organisms, including the crab.
[2]
(ii) The chemical energy contained in the producers is transferred through the food web to
the seagull as shown in Fig. 4.2.
Suggest why the seagull gets more energy transferred from the phytoplankton by eating
mussels rather than fish. Explain your answer in detail.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

10
5 A student investigates the reaction between dilute sulfuric acid and excess copper(II) carbonate
powder.
gas syringe
excess copper(II)
carbonate powder dilute sulfuric acid
Fig. 5.1
A salt and another compound are also produced.
(a) (i) Describe the pH change, if any, of the reaction mixture.
pH change .........................................................................................................................
reaction type ......................................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) Complete the balanced symbol equation for the reaction between dilute sulfuric acid and
copper(II) carbonate.
H2SO4 + CuCO3 ............................ + ............................ + ............................ [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

11
(b) Copper(II) carbonate is insoluble in water.
The salt which is produced in this reaction is soluble in water.
Suggest a method of making pure, dry crystals of this salt from the mixture that is left after the
reaction is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The student records the volume of gas in the syringe for 10 minutes.
volume
of
gas
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time / minutes
Fig. 5.2
Describe how the shape of the graph shows the change in the rate of the reaction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) She repeats the experiment using the same volume of less concentrated sulfuric acid.
(i) Draw a line on Fig. 5.2 to show her results. [2]

(ii) Explain, in terms of particle collisions, the effect of using less concentrated sulfuric acid
on the rate of the reaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
12
Fig. 6.1
Explain why wearing a white shirt can prevent the temperature of his back from
increasing.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
The .......................................................................... water molecules escape from the
.......................................................................... so the remaining water on his feet is at a
lower .......................................................................... . [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

13
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a man spear fishing. He sees a fish in the sea in front of him. He says that the
fish appears to be near the surface.
The man thinks the fish is at point F on Fig. 6.2.
Draw a ray diagram on Fig. 6.2 to show where the fish really is. Mark this point with a letter X.
air
F water
Fig. 6.2
[2]
(i) On Fig. 6.3 place microwaves in their correct position in the incomplete electromagnetic
spectrum.
gamma
visible light radio waves
rays
Fig. 6.3 [1]

14
(ii) Microwaves travel at a speed of 3 × 108 m / s. The wavelength of the microwaves used in
the microwave oven is 0.12 m.
Calculate the frequency of the microwaves used.
formula
working
frequency = ............................................... Hz [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

15
food.
Table 7.1

food
bread 7 60 13 20
egg 11 1 13 75
milk 3 5 3 89
(a) The energy for the body provided by one gram of each nutrient is shown below.
of eggs.
Show your working.
energy provided = ............................................. kJ [2]
(b) A person has a family history of coronary heart disease and it is likely that he will develop the
condition too. State which food listed in Table 7.1 he should avoid.
food ...........................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]

16
Complete the balanced symbol equation for respiration.
C6H12O6 + 6O2 + [1]

......................................... .........................................
(ii) Describe how oxygen is transported in the blood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
Name the areas of the alimentary canal where the following processes occur.
1. chemical digestion
........................................................ and ........................................................
and ........................................................
2. absorption
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

17

18
8 (a) Use the Periodic Table on page 24 to determine the electronic structure of an aluminium
atom.
.................................................... [1]
(b) Aluminium is extracted from aluminium oxide by electrolysis, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
carbon cathode carbon

anode
– +
molten electrolyte
containing aluminium oxide
molten
aluminium
Fig. 8.1
Aluminium oxide, Al 2O3, contains aluminium ions, Al 3+, and oxide ions, O2−.
(i) Name the product of electrolysis at the anode.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe, in terms of atoms, ions and electrons, the reaction that takes place at the
cathode.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Iron is extracted from iron(III) oxide in a blast furnace.
(i) Name a substance that reduces iron(III) oxide in this process.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why aluminium cannot be extracted from aluminium oxide in a blast furnace.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

19
(d) A student investigates the reactions between aluminium and solutions of metal sulfates.
(i) When a freshly cleaned piece of aluminium is placed into a solution of magnesium
sulfate, no change is seen, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
magnesium
sulfate
solution
aluminium
before after
Fig. 8.2
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) When a freshly cleaned piece of aluminium is placed into a solution of copper(II) sulfate,
the surface of the aluminium turns brown and the solution starts to decolourise, as shown
in Fig. 8.3.
copper(II)
sulfate
solution
aluminium
before after
Fig. 8.3
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

20
9 Fig 9.1 shows a simple test circuit for testing different materials to see how well they conduct
X Y
Fig. 9.1
(a) Name two materials other than copper that would be found to be good conductors when
tested.
.................................................................. and .................................................................. [1]
(b) A piece of copper wire is connected between X and Y, and a voltmeter is connected in parallel
to resistor R.
The ammeter reads 0.5 A. The voltmeter reads 2 V.
Use the formula R = V to calculate the resistance of R.

I
Give the unit of your answer.
working
resistance = ................................ unit .............. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

21
(c) Two pieces of wire, P and Q, with the same length and made of the same alloy, are connected
in parallel between X and Y.
The current in wire P is 5 A. The ammeter reading is 7 A.
(i) Predict the current in wire Q.
current in wire Q = ....................... A
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) Deduce why different currents flow in wires P and Q. Give reasons for your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/M/J/17

© UCLES 2017
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
24
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/41/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 2 7 6 3 9 5 2 4 4 9 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 137783/2
2
sentences.
One is done for you. The sentence reads ‘Enzymes are present in all organisms’.
are present in all organisms.
are denatured by low temperatures.
are made from amino acids.

[3]
(b) Microorganisms are used in the production of yoghurt.
If the temperature increases the rate of yoghurt production also increases until 46 °C
is reached. As the temperature increases further, the rate of yoghurt production rapidly
decreases.
A student thinks that enzymes in the microorganisms are involved in making yoghurt.
Suggest whether the student is correct. Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

3
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows a small section of a starch molecule.
Starch is a very large molecule, made up from many basic units which are joined together.
basic unit part of a starch molecule
Fig. 1.1
(i) Name the basic unit shown in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name another large molecule, found in some living organisms, which could be made up
from the same basic unit as shown in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the element found in a protein molecule which is absent from a starch molecule.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

4
water
Fig. 2.1
Table 2.1
time for metal

seconds
A yes yes 15 yes
B yes no 60 no
C yes yes 40 no
beaker A ............................................................................................................................
beaker B ............................................................................................................................
beaker C ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Complete the sentences about the reaction in beaker A using suitable words or phrases.
The temperature in the beaker increases because this is an
........................................................ reaction.
During this reaction ........................................................ energy is changed into
........................................................ and ........................................................ energy.

[3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

5
(iii) The fourth metal in Group I is rubidium, Rb.
The student observes the reaction between a piece of rubidium and water. The piece of
rubidium is the same size as the other metals.
Suggest how long it takes for the piece of rubidium to react completely.
.................. seconds [1]
(b) Suggest why Group I metals must not be added to dilute hydrochloric acid.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows an aircraft flying at a constant height and constant speed above the Earth’s
surface. The arrows labelled A, B, C and D show the forces acting on the aircraft.
A C
Fig. 3.1
(i) State which letter, A, B, C or D, corresponds to:
1. frictional force, ...................
2. lifting force. ...................

[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) During the flight, the aircraft burns 1000 kg of fuel.
State the effect this has on force D.
Explain why this happens.
effect on force D ................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

7
(b) The speed of the aircraft increases steadily in 30 s from 100 m / s to 160 m / s.
(i) Calculate the acceleration of the aircraft.
Show your working and state the unit of your answer.
acceleration = ................................. unit ............. [2]
(ii) As the speed increases, the aircraft loses height from 10 000 m to 8000 m.
The aircraft has a mass of 50 000 kg.
Calculate the loss in gravitational potential energy of the aircraft.
(g = 10 N / kg)
formula
working
potential energy lost = ................................................... J [2]

8
aorta
pulmonary artery
B
left ventricle
Fig. 4.1
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) There is a difference in pressure of the blood travelling in the aorta compared with the
blood travelling in the pulmonary artery.
Explain why it is important for blood to have different pressures in these arteries.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) The heart muscle must be supplied with blood.
Explain how coronary heart disease affects the blood supply to the heart muscle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

9
(ii) State one way in which sufferers of coronary heart disease can improve their lifestyle.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The hormone adrenaline is secreted into the blood by the adrenal glands which are above the
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Hormones can affect the direction of growth in plants.
Fig. 4.2 shows what happens when a plant has bright light coming from one side.
light light
at start after a few days
Fig. 4.2
Explain how hormones in the plant caused the phototropic response shown in Fig. 4.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

10
5 Petroleum is a mixture of hydrocarbons.
(a) (i) Name the process that is used to separate liquids with different boiling points.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the relationship between the size of hydrocarbon molecules and the size of
intermolecular attractive forces.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe the relationship between the size of the intermolecular attractive forces between
hydrocarbon molecules and the boiling points of the hydrocarbons.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The structures of two hydrocarbon molecules, D and E, are shown in Fig. 5.1.
H H H H H H
H C C C H H C C C
H
H H H H
D E
Fig. 5.1
(i) Name the types of hydrocarbon shown by molecules D and E.
D ........................................................................................................................................
E ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

11
(ii) Describe a chemical test used to distinguish between D and E.
State the observation for each.
test ....................................................................................................................................
observation with D .............................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
observation with E .............................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Molecule E is made by heating larger hydrocarbon molecules in the presence of a

catalyst.
Name this process.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Heptane, C7H16, undergoes complete combustion in the presence of excess oxygen.
Complete the equation for this reaction.
C7H16 + ........O2 ........CO2 + ........H2O [2]

12
inside the aircraft the air temperature is kept at 21 °C.
(a) (i) State the main method of thermal energy transfer from air inside the aircraft to the air
outside.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe in terms of molecular motion how thermal energy is lost from air inside the
aircraft to the air outside.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
X Y Z
Fig. 6.1
diagram ..............
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) Suggest how the motion of the water molecules formed in the jet engines differs from the
motion of water molecules in a glass of water inside the aircraft.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

13
(c) Radar is a method of tracking aircraft from the ground using electromagnetic waves.
A radar signal is transmitted from the ground to an aircraft several kilometres away. The signal
is then reflected by the aircraft back to the ground.
(i) The reflected signal is received back at the transmitting station 0.0002 s after
transmission.
The speed of radar waves is 3 × 105 km / s.
Calculate the distance of the aircraft from the transmitter.
Show your working.
distance = ................................................ km [3]
(ii) The radar signal has a frequency of 1.5 × 109 Hz.
Table 6.1 shows the range of frequencies across the electromagnetic spectrum.
Table 6.1
gamma ultra- micro- radio

radiation X-rays visible light infrared
radiation violet waves waves
approximate 1016 Hz 1014 Hz 4 × 1014 Hz 1011 Hz 109 Hz
above below
frequency to to to to to
1019 Hz 19 16 109 Hz
range 10 Hz 10 Hz 8 × 1014 Hz 14
10 Hz 11
10 Hz
Use this data to state whether the radar signal is at the short or long wavelength end of
the electromagnetic spectrum.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

14
7 The lake shown in Fig. 7.1 is a balanced ecosystem. The steady flow of nutrients into the lake
enables the water plants to grow and provide food for the small animals and fish.
light oxygen
nutrients air
algae and water

small animals
lake
water plants
fish
Fig. 7.1
(a) Define the term ecosystem.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
Use the information provided to complete the food web which has been started below.
algae water plants

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

15
(c) The ecosystem becomes unbalanced when fertiliser is accidentally added to the lake.
The fertiliser increases the concentration of nutrients in the lake.
Fig. 7.2 shows the lake after a few weeks.
oxygen
nutrients air
algae water
oxygen lake
plants
die
dead organisms
Fig. 7.2
(i) Explain why the water plants beneath the surface die.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The fish die due to lack of oxygen. However, Fig. 7.2 shows the algae producing oxygen,
some of which goes into the lake.
Explain what happens to the oxygen in the lake.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

16
8 (a) An atom of element X is in Group VI of the Periodic Table.
(i) State the number of outer-shell electrons in an atom of X.
.................. [1]
(ii) State whether element X is a metal or a non-metal.
Suggest one physical property of element X.
metal or non-metal ............................................................................................................
physical property ...............................................................................................................

[1]
(b) Chlorine, Cl, is in Group VII of the Periodic Table.
(i) Complete Fig. 8.1 to show the electronic structure of an atom of chlorine.
Use the Periodic Table on page 20.
Fig. 8.1
[1]
(ii) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show all of the outer-shell electrons in a molecule of
chlorine, Cl 2.
Cl Cl
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

17
(c) Chlorine reacts with sodium to form a compound.
(i) State the type of chemical bond in this compound.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe what happens to sodium atoms and to chlorine atoms when they react together
to form this compound.
Use ideas about electrons in your answer.
sodium atoms ....................................................................................................................
chlorine atoms ...................................................................................................................

[2]
(d) Noble gases are unreactive.
Explain this observation using ideas about the electronic structure of noble gas atoms.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

18
ammeter
lamp
switch
cell
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.2 use the correct circuit symbols to complete the circuit diagram for the circuit
shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.2
[2]
(ii) On Fig. 9.2, using the correct circuit symbol, connect a meter into the circuit that can
measure the potential difference across the lamp. [2]
(b) The cell has a voltage of 1.5 V, and the reading on the ammeter is 0.6 A for the circuit in
Fig. 9.1. The lamp is brightly lit and hot to the touch.
Show by calculation that the power dissipated in the circuit is less than 1 W.
power = ................................................. W [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

19
(c) A second identical lamp is added in series with the lamp in the circuit in Fig. 9.1.
The reading on the ammeter decreases, and both lamps are now dimly lit and cool to the
touch.
(i) Explain why adding the second lamp causes the current to decrease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why less light and thermal energy are emitted by the two bulbs than by one bulb
on its own in the circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

© UCLES 2017
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
20
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/42/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 2 7 6 3 9 5 2 4 4 9 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 137783/2
2
sentences.
One is done for you. The sentence reads ‘Enzymes are present in all organisms’.
are present in all organisms.
are denatured by low temperatures.
are made from amino acids.

[3]
(b) Microorganisms are used in the production of yoghurt.
If the temperature increases the rate of yoghurt production also increases until 46 °C
is reached. As the temperature increases further, the rate of yoghurt production rapidly
decreases.
A student thinks that enzymes in the microorganisms are involved in making yoghurt.
Suggest whether the student is correct. Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

3
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows a small section of a starch molecule.
Starch is a very large molecule, made up from many basic units which are joined together.
basic unit part of a starch molecule
Fig. 1.1
(i) Name the basic unit shown in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name another large molecule, found in some living organisms, which could be made up
from the same basic unit as shown in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the element found in a protein molecule which is absent from a starch molecule.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

4
water
Fig. 2.1
Table 2.1
time for metal

seconds
A yes yes 15 yes
B yes no 60 no
C yes yes 40 no
beaker A ............................................................................................................................
beaker B ............................................................................................................................
beaker C ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Complete the sentences about the reaction in beaker A using suitable words or phrases.
The temperature in the beaker increases because this is an
........................................................ reaction.
During this reaction ........................................................ energy is changed into
........................................................ and ........................................................ energy.

[3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

5
(iii) The fourth metal in Group I is rubidium, Rb.
The student observes the reaction between a piece of rubidium and water. The piece of
rubidium is the same size as the other metals.
Suggest how long it takes for the piece of rubidium to react completely.
.................. seconds [1]
(b) Suggest why Group I metals must not be added to dilute hydrochloric acid.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows an aircraft flying at a constant height and constant speed above the Earth’s
surface. The arrows labelled A, B, C and D show the forces acting on the aircraft.
A C
Fig. 3.1
(i) State which letter, A, B, C or D, corresponds to:
1. frictional force, ...................
2. lifting force. ...................

[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) During the flight, the aircraft burns 1000 kg of fuel.
State the effect this has on force D.
effect on force D ................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

7
(b) The speed of the aircraft increases steadily in 30 s from 100 m / s to 160 m / s.
(i) Calculate the acceleration of the aircraft.
Show your working and state the unit of your answer.
acceleration = ................................. unit ............. [2]
(ii) As the speed increases, the aircraft loses height from 10 000 m to 8000 m.
The aircraft has a mass of 50 000 kg.
Calculate the loss in gravitational potential energy of the aircraft.
(g = 10 N / kg)
formula
working
potential energy lost = ................................................... J [2]

8
aorta
pulmonary artery
B
left ventricle
Fig. 4.1
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) There is a difference in pressure of the blood travelling in the aorta compared with the
blood travelling in the pulmonary artery.
Explain why it is important for blood to have different pressures in these arteries.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) The heart muscle must be supplied with blood.
Explain how coronary heart disease affects the blood supply to the heart muscle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

9
(ii) State one way in which sufferers of coronary heart disease can improve their lifestyle.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The hormone adrenaline is secreted into the blood by the adrenal glands which are above the
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Hormones can affect the direction of growth in plants.
Fig. 4.2 shows what happens when a plant has bright light coming from one side.
light light
at start after a few days
Fig. 4.2
Explain how hormones in the plant caused the phototropic response shown in Fig. 4.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

10
5 Petroleum is a mixture of hydrocarbons.
(a) (i) Name the process that is used to separate liquids with different boiling points.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the relationship between the size of hydrocarbon molecules and the size of
intermolecular attractive forces.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe the relationship between the size of the intermolecular attractive forces between
hydrocarbon molecules and the boiling points of the hydrocarbons.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The structures of two hydrocarbon molecules, D and E, are shown in Fig. 5.1.
H H H H H H
H C C C H H C C C
H
H H H H
D E
Fig. 5.1
(i) Name the types of hydrocarbon shown by molecules D and E.
D ........................................................................................................................................
E ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

11
(ii) Describe a chemical test used to distinguish between D and E.
State the observation for each.
test ....................................................................................................................................
observation with D .............................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
observation with E .............................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Molecule E is made by heating larger hydrocarbon molecules in the presence of a

catalyst.
Name this process.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Heptane, C7H16, undergoes complete combustion in the presence of excess oxygen.
Complete the equation for this reaction.
C7H16 + ........O2 ........CO2 + ........H2O [2]

12
inside the aircraft the air temperature is kept at 21 °C.
(a) (i) State the main method of thermal energy transfer from air inside the aircraft to the air
outside.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe in terms of molecular motion how thermal energy is lost from air inside the
aircraft to the air outside.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
X Y Z
Fig. 6.1
diagram ..............
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) Suggest how the motion of the water molecules formed in the jet engines differs from the
motion of water molecules in a glass of water inside the aircraft.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

13
(c) Radar is a method of tracking aircraft from the ground using electromagnetic waves.
A radar signal is transmitted from the ground to an aircraft several kilometres away. The signal
is then reflected by the aircraft back to the ground.
(i) The reflected signal is received back at the transmitting station 0.0002 s after
transmission.
The speed of radar waves is 3 × 105 km / s.
Calculate the distance of the aircraft from the transmitter.
Show your working.
distance = ................................................ km [3]
(ii) The radar signal has a frequency of 1.5 × 109 Hz.
Table 6.1 shows the range of frequencies across the electromagnetic spectrum.
Table 6.1
gamma ultra- micro- radio

radiation X-rays visible light infrared
radiation violet waves waves
approximate 1016 Hz 1014 Hz 4 × 1014 Hz 1011 Hz 109 Hz
above below
frequency to to to to to
1019 Hz 19 16 109 Hz
range 10 Hz 10 Hz 8 × 1014 Hz 14
10 Hz 11
10 Hz
Use this data to state whether the radar signal is at the short or long wavelength end of
the electromagnetic spectrum.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

14
7 The lake shown in Fig. 7.1 is a balanced ecosystem. The steady flow of nutrients into the lake
enables the water plants to grow and provide food for the small animals and fish.
light oxygen
nutrients air
algae and water

small animals
lake
water plants
fish
Fig. 7.1
(a) Define the term ecosystem.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
Use the information provided to complete the food web which has been started below.
algae water plants

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

15
(c) The ecosystem becomes unbalanced when fertiliser is accidentally added to the lake.
The fertiliser increases the concentration of nutrients in the lake.
Fig. 7.2 shows the lake after a few weeks.
oxygen
nutrients air
algae water
oxygen lake
plants
die
dead organisms
Fig. 7.2
(i) Explain why the water plants beneath the surface die.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The fish die due to lack of oxygen. However, Fig. 7.2 shows the algae producing oxygen,
some of which goes into the lake.
Explain what happens to the oxygen in the lake.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

16
8 (a) An atom of element X is in Group VI of the Periodic Table.
(i) State the number of outer-shell electrons in an atom of X.
.................. [1]
(ii) State whether element X is a metal or a non-metal.
Suggest one physical property of element X.
metal or non-metal ............................................................................................................
physical property ...............................................................................................................

[1]
(b) Chlorine, Cl, is in Group VII of the Periodic Table.
(i) Complete Fig. 8.1 to show the electronic structure of an atom of chlorine.
Use the Periodic Table on page 20.
Fig. 8.1
[1]
(ii) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show all of the outer-shell electrons in a molecule of
chlorine, Cl 2.
Cl Cl
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

17
(c) Chlorine reacts with sodium to form a compound.
(i) State the type of chemical bond in this compound.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe what happens to sodium atoms and to chlorine atoms when they react together
to form this compound.
Use ideas about electrons in your answer.
sodium atoms ....................................................................................................................
chlorine atoms ...................................................................................................................

[2]
(d) Noble gases are unreactive.
Explain this observation using ideas about the electronic structure of noble gas atoms.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

18
ammeter
lamp
switch
cell
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.2 use the correct circuit symbols to complete the circuit diagram for the circuit
shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.2
[2]
(b) The cell has a voltage of 1.5 V, and the reading on the ammeter is 0.6 A for the circuit in
Fig. 9.1. The lamp is brightly lit and hot to the touch.
Show by calculation that the power dissipated in the circuit is less than 1 W.
power = ................................................. W [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

19
(c) A second identical lamp is added in series with the lamp in the circuit in Fig. 9.1.
The reading on the ammeter decreases, and both lamps are now dimly lit and cool to the
touch.
(i) Explain why adding the second lamp causes the current to decrease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why less light and thermal energy are emitted by the two bulbs than by one bulb
on its own in the circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/M/J/17

© UCLES 2017
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
20
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/42/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 9 5 6 2 8 3 9 6 1 8 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 137808/2
2
sentences.
One is done for you. The sentence reads ‘Tobacco smoke contains nicotine’.
keeps bacteria out of the airway.
increases the concentration of carbon monoxide in the blood.
damages the cilia in the airway.
Tobacco smoke contains nicotine.
can cure bronchitis.
does not contain tar if a filter tip is present on the cigarette.
causes more mucus to be produced in the lungs.

[3]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a diagram of an alveolus and a blood capillary.
wall of capillary
plasma
alveolus
oxygen
Fig. 1.1
(i) On Fig. 1.1 draw an arrow to show the net movement of carbon dioxide molecules at the
alveolus. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17

3
(ii) List two features of alveoli that make them a good gas exchange surface.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Oxygen enters the blood as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Describe how oxygen is transported from the alveolus to the heart.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) Increased secretion of adrenaline causes the concentration of blood glucose and pulse rate
to increase. This enables an increase in the respiration rate in cells to occur.
(i) Describe how an increase in blood glucose concentration enables an increase in the
respiration rate in cells to occur.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how an increase in pulse rate enables an increase in the respiration rate in
cells to occur.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

4
2 (a) Ethane and octane are obtained from petroleum by fractional distillation.
The structures of a molecule of ethane and a molecule of octane are shown in Fig. 2.1.
H H H H H H H H H H
H C C H H C C C C C C C C H
H H H H H H H H H H
ethane octane
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the formula of octane.
................................................................. [1]
(ii) Different fractions obtained from petroleum contain different amounts of ethane and
octane.
Explain why a fraction formed higher up the fractional distillation column contains more
ethane than octane.
Use ideas about molecular size, boiling points and intermolecular attractive forces in
your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Ethene molecules are made from large hydrocarbon molecules.
Name this process.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Ethane, ethene and octane are hydrocarbons.
Identify the type of each of these hydrocarbons.
ethane .......................................................................................................................................
ethene .......................................................................................................................................
octane .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17
5
(d) Complete the diagram below to show the bonding electrons in a molecule of ethene, C2H4.
Use dots and crosses to represent the electrons.
C C
[2]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a cyclist riding her bicycle at a constant speed along a road. The arrows labelled A,
B, C and D show the forces acting on the bicycle.
C D
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State which letter, A, B, C or D, corresponds to
2. weight ...................
[1]
State whether force B is 1000 N or has a different value.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The cyclist goes downhill at a constant speed of 15 km / h. The road down the hill is 1km long.
Calculate the time in seconds for the cyclist to reach the bottom of the hill.
Show your working.
time = ................................................... s [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17

7
(c) The cyclist and her bicycle have a total mass of 100 kg. She is moving at 4 m / s.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the cyclist and her bicycle.
formula
working
kinetic energy = ................................................... J [2]
(d) The cyclist works at a rate of 120 W as she cycles. She produces a driving force of 25 N to
move the bicycle.
The cyclist and bicycle travel 1000 m in 250 s.
(i) Calculate the energy input by the cyclist for this journey.
Show your working.
energy input = ................................................... J [1]
(ii) Calculate the work done in moving the cyclist and bicycle for this journey.
formula
working
work done = ................................................... J [2]

8
(iii) Calculate the percentage efficiency of the bicycle.
formula
working
efficiency = ...................................................% [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17

9

10
4 Fig. 4.1 shows what happens to a seed after it is planted. The responses shown by the shoot and
root are controlled by plant hormones called auxins.
surface of soil
shoot
root
1. seed is planted 2. root appears
3. shoot appears
Fig. 4.1
(a) Name the response shown by both the root and the shoot in Fig. 4.1.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A second similar seed is germinated and pinned on a vertical board as shown in Fig. 4.2.
The apparatus is kept in the dark. The distribution of auxin hormones becomes uneven in the
seedling.
pin
board
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17

11
(i) Complete Fig. 4.3 to show how the growth of the shoot and root will change over the
next few days.
Fig. 4.3
[2]
(ii) In terms of the action of auxins, explain your answer to (i) for the shoot only.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Acid rain is produced as the result of burning fossil fuels. Acid rain can reduce the rate of
germination of seeds.
(i) Describe how acid rain is produced.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest how acid rain reduces germination of seeds.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

12
5 (a) The atomic number of magnesium is 12.
Complete Fig. 5.1 to show the electronic structure of a magnesium atom.
Fig. 5.1
[2]
(b) A student investigates the reaction between magnesium and dilute hydrochloric acid.
The student uses the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.2 for the investigation.
conical flask cotton wool
dilute
magnesium hydrochloric
powder acid
balance
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3 shows the mass of the conical flask and its contents during the reaction.
mass
time
Fig. 5.3
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17
13
(i) Explain why
at first the mass decreases,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
later on the mass does not change.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Complete and balance the symbolic equation for this reaction.
Mg + ................... ................... + MgCl 2 [2]
(c) (i) State the effect, if any, of using a higher temperature on the rate of a reaction.
Explain your answer in terms of particle collisions.
effect ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the effect of using a catalyst on the rate of a reaction.
Describe the change, if any, to the catalyst at the end of the reaction.
effect ..................................................................................................................................
change to catalyst .............................................................................................................

[2]

14
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a man riding a snowmobile across snow and ice at a research station in Antarctica.
Fig. 6.1
(a) The temperature of the air is −40 °C, but the man must keep his body temperature at 37 °C.
(i) State the main method of thermal energy transfer from the man through his clothing to
the outside.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The man wears several layers of thin clothing which trap air between them, instead of
one layer of thick clothing.
Suggest one reason for this.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17

15
(b) The snowmobile is driven by a gasoline (petrol) engine. Inside the engine, temperatures
reach 800 °C as the fuel burns. The combustion of the fuel forms carbon dioxide and water
molecules.
(i) State which of the diagrams in Fig. 6.2, X, Y or Z, shows the arrangement of molecules
as they are formed in the engine.
X Y Z
Fig. 6.2
diagram ..............
reason ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Fig. 6.3 shows white trails coming out of the engines of an aircraft landing at the research
station when the air temperature was −45 °C.
Fig. 6.3
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

16
(c) Antarctic research stations use satellites to relay communications to their home bases.
(i) Name the part of the electromagnetic spectrum used for satellite communications.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 6.4, put the part of the electromagnetic spectrum you have named in (i) in its
correct place in the incomplete electromagnetic spectrum.
visible
X-rays
light
Fig. 6.4
[1]
(d) The man on the snowmobile uses a radio to talk to the aircraft pilot as he watches the aircraft
landing. He can hear the sound of the engines of the aircraft in Fig. 6.3 several kilometres
away.
(i) The man hears the sound of the engines for several seconds after the pilot says over the
radio that the engines have been switched off.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how the engines produce sound and how this is transmitted to the man.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17

17

18
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a diagram of the cells in a cross section of a leaf.
(a) Most photosynthesis takes place in the palisade cells of the leaf.
Complete the balanced symbol equation for photosynthesis.
light
6CO2 + 6H2O ........................ + ........................... [1]
chlorophyll
palisade cell
stoma
Y
Fig. 7.1
(b) On Fig. 7.1
(i) draw a line to show a possible path taken by carbon dioxide from point Y to palisade
cell Z, [1]
(ii) label the tissue that provides water for the leaf. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17

19
(c) When the stomata are open there is a net movement of water molecules by diffusion out of
the leaf. This is called transpiration.
Fig. 7.2 shows the area around the stoma of the leaf shown in Fig. 7.1.
air
air
water
A molecule B
Fig. 7.2
(i) Describe how the water molecules get into the space inside the leaf above the stoma, as
shown in Fig. 7.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Fig. 7.2 shows a difference in the environment around the leaf in diagram A compared
with diagram B.
Predict whether the rate of transpiration will be greater in A or B.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

20
8 (a) The melting points of the first four Group I metals are shown in Table 8.1.
Table 8.1
Group I metal melting point / °C
lithium, Li 180
sodium, Na 98
potassium, K 64
rubidium, Rb
………..
Complete Table 8.1 by suggesting the melting point of rubidium, Rb. [1]
(b) A student investigates the reaction between four metals, A, B, C and D, and the oxides of
these metals.
The results of this investigation are shown in Table 8.2.
Table 8.2
metal oxide
metal
A oxide B oxide C oxide D oxide
A ✓ X ✓
B X X ✓
C ✓ ✓ ✓ key
✓ reaction
D X X X X no reaction
(i) Deduce the order of reactivity of the four metals, from most reactive to least reactive.
.................. most reactive
..................
..................
.................. least reactive

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17

21
(ii) The reaction between metal A and metal B oxide is exothermic.
Describe the energy transformation which occurs during an exothermic reaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Sodium, Na, is extracted from sodium chloride, NaCl, by electrolysis, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
low voltage
d.c. supply
– +
molten sodium chloride
Fig. 8.1
(i) Name the electrode at which sodium forms.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the gas that is formed during this electrolysis.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain, in terms of ions, why the sodium chloride must be molten rather than solid during
this electrolysis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

22
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit set up to measure the current in different parts of a circuit.
A
A1
R1
R2 A2 S2
X A Y
R3 S3
A
A3
Fig. 9.1
(a) When both switches are closed, ammeter A1 reads 6 A and ammeter A2 reads 1.5 A.
(i) Predict the reading on ammeter A3.
Reading on A3 = ........................... A
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) Deduce why different currents are recorded on ammeters A2 and A3.
Give reasons for your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17

23
(b) A voltmeter is connected across the battery. The reading is 12 V.
Switch S2 is closed, but switch S3 is left open. Ammeter A1 reads 3 A.
The voltmeter is now connected between points X and Y. The reading is 3 V.
(i) State the reading on ammeter A2.

reading = ................................... A [1]
(ii) Deduce the value of resistance R1.
Show your working.
value of R1 = .................................................. Ω [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/M/J/17

© UCLES 2017
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
24
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/43/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 2 6 2 6 5 3 7 5 0 3 *

1 hour 30 minutes
Additional Materials: As listed in the Confidential Instructions.

Notes for Use in Qualitative Analysis for this paper are printed on page 8.
For Examiner’s Use
Total
DC (ST/SW) 139086/2
2
1 You are going to investigate the nutrient content of banana, chickpea and egg white.
(a) • Label three test-tubes A, B and C.

• Chop up the banana and place in the small beaker. Mash with a little distilled water until
it can be poured.
• Divide the mixture between the three test-tubes.
• Carry out Benedict’s test with test-tube A.
• Carry out the biuret test with test-tube B.
• Carry out the iodine test with test-tube C.
State in which of these tests a source of heat is required.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Complete the third row of Table 1.1 to show your observations.
(ii) Rinse out the test-tubes A, B and C with distilled water or label three clean test-tubes A,
B and C.
Add chickpea to a depth of approximately 2 cm to test-tubes A, B and C.
Repeat the tests and complete the fourth row of Table 1.1 to show your observations.
(iii) Rinse out the test-tubes A, B and C with distilled water or label three clean test-tubes A,
B and C.
Add egg white to a depth of approximately 2 cm to test-tubes A, B and C.
Repeat the tests and complete the fifth row of Table 1.1 to show your observations.
Table 1.1
nutrient tested for reducing sugar protein starch
banana
chickpea
egg white
[3]
(c) Use your observations in (b) to state the nutrient content of the foods you tested.
(i) Banana contains ................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Chickpea contains ................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Egg white contains ............................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/M/J/17

3
(d) Describe how you can test for the presence of fat in egg white.
method ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
observation for positive result ...................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

4
2 Notes for use in Qualitative Analysis for this question are printed on page 8.
Solution H and solution J are each one of the following solutions:
list of possible solutions
ammonia solution
sodium hydroxide solution
hydrochloric acid
sulfuric acid
barium nitrate solution
silver nitrate solution
(a) (i) Test solution H with both red and blue litmus papers.
Record your observations in Table 2.1.
Test solution J with both red and blue litmus papers.
Table 2.1
solution H solution J
red litmus paper
blue litmus paper
[2]
(ii) Using the observations in Table 2.1, choose from the list of possible solutions the two
possible identities for each of solutions H and J.
solution H could be ........................................................................................................ or
...........................................................................................................................................
solution J could be ........................................................................................................ or
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/M/J/17

5
(b) (i) • Place solution H in a test-tube to a depth of 2 cm.

• Slowly add the copper sulfate solution until the test-tube is almost full.
• Record your observations in Table 2.2.
• Filter the mixture and record in Table 2.2 the colour of any residue.
Repeat this procedure with solution J.
Table 2.2
observations on
slowly adding
copper sulfate
solution
colour of any
residue
[3]
(ii) Use (a)(ii) and your observations in Table 2.2 to identify solution H and J.
solution H is .......................................................................................................................
solution J is .......................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest one reason why iron(III) sulfate solution cannot be used in (b)(i) instead of copper
sulfate solution to identify solution J.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

6
3 You are going to investigate how the resistance of a metal wire depends upon its length.
The circuit shown in Fig. 3.1 has been set up for you.
V
sliding contact
resistance wire
metre rule
l C
P Q
0 cm 100 cm
power supply
A
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) • Connect the crocodile clip C to the resistance wire PQ at a length l = 20.0 cm from
end P.
• Close the switch.
• Record in Table 3.1 the current I flowing through the wire and the potential
difference V.
• Switch off the circuit. [1]
Table 3.1
potential difference
length l / cm current I / A resistance R / Ω
V/V
20.0
35.0
50.0
65.0
80.0
95.0
(ii) Repeat the steps in (a)(i) for values of l = 35.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 65.0 cm, 80.0 cm and 95.0 cm.
[3]
(iii) Calculate the resistance R for each length of wire, using the equation
V
R= .
I
Record, in Table 3.1, your values of R. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/M/J/17

7
(b) Use the results in Table 3.1 to plot a graph of R(vertical axis) against l.
Start both axes of your graph at the origin (0, 0). Draw the best-fit straight line. [3]
R /Ω
l / cm
(c) (i) Extend your line to predict the value of R at length l = 110.0 cm.
R = ....................................................... Ω [1]
(ii) Suggest the relationship between the length of the wire and its resistance.
relationship ........................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/M/J/17

8
NOTES FOR USE IN QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS
Tests for anions
anion test test result

carbonate (CO32–) add dilute acid effervescence, carbon dioxide
produced
chloride (Cl –) acidify with dilute nitric acid, then white ppt.
[in solution] add aqueous silver nitrate
nitrate (NO3–) add aqueous sodium hydroxide, ammonia produced
[in solution] then aluminium foil; warm carefully
sulfate (SO42–) acidify with dilute nitric acid, then white ppt.
[in solution] add aqueous barium nitrate
Tests for aqueous cations
cation effect of aqueous sodium hydroxide effect of aqueous ammonia

ammonium (NH4+) ammonia produced on warming –
copper(II) (Cu2+) light blue ppt., insoluble in excess light blue ppt., soluble in excess,
giving a dark blue solution
iron(II) (Fe2+) green ppt., insoluble in excess green ppt., insoluble in excess
iron(III) (Fe3+) red-brown ppt., insoluble in excess red-brown ppt., insoluble in excess
zinc (Zn2+) white ppt., soluble in excess giving white ppt., soluble in excess giving
a colourless solution a colourless solution
Tests for gases
gas test and test result

ammonia (NH3) turns damp red litmus paper blue
carbon dioxide (CO2) turns limewater milky
chlorine (Cl 2) bleaches damp litmus paper
hydrogen (H2) ‘pops’ with a lighted splint
oxygen (O2) relights a glowing splint
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/M/J/17

* 2 6 2 6 5 3 7 5 0 3 *

1 hour 30 minutes

Total
DC (ST/SW) 139086/2
2
1 You are going to investigate the nutrient content of banana, chickpea and egg white.
(a) • Label three test-tubes A, B and C.

• Chop up the banana and place in the small beaker. Mash with a little distilled water until
it can be poured.
• Divide the mixture between the three test-tubes.
• Carry out Benedict’s test with test-tube A.
• Carry out the biuret test with test-tube B.
• Carry out the iodine test with test-tube C.
State in which of these tests a source of heat is required.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Complete the third row of Table 1.1 to show your observations.
(ii) Rinse out the test-tubes A, B and C with distilled water or label three clean test-tubes A,
B and C.
Add chickpea to a depth of approximately 2 cm to test-tubes A, B and C.
Repeat the tests and complete the fourth row of Table 1.1 to show your observations.
(iii) Rinse out the test-tubes A, B and C with distilled water or label three clean test-tubes A,
B and C.
Add egg white to a depth of approximately 2 cm to test-tubes A, B and C.
Repeat the tests and complete the fifth row of Table 1.1 to show your observations.
Table 1.1
banana
chickpea
egg white
[3]
(c) Use your observations in (b) to state the nutrient content of the foods you tested.
(i) Banana contains ................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Chickpea contains ................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Egg white contains ............................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/M/J/17

3
method ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

4
Solution H and solution J are each one of the following solutions:
list of possible solutions
ammonia solution
hydrochloric acid
sulfuric acid
(a) (i) Test solution H with both red and blue litmus papers.
Test solution J with both red and blue litmus papers.
Table 2.1
red litmus paper
blue litmus paper
[2]
(ii) Using the observations in Table 2.1, choose from the list of possible solutions the two
possible identities for each of solutions H and J.
solution H could be ........................................................................................................ or
...........................................................................................................................................
solution J could be ........................................................................................................ or
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/M/J/17

5
(b) (i) • Place solution H in a test-tube to a depth of 2 cm.

• Slowly add the copper sulfate solution until the test-tube is almost full.
• Record your observations in Table 2.2.
• Filter the mixture and record in Table 2.2 the colour of any residue.
Repeat this procedure with solution J.
Table 2.2
observations on
slowly adding
copper sulfate
solution
colour of any
residue
[3]
(ii) Use (a)(ii) and your observations in Table 2.2 to identify solution H and J.
solution H is .......................................................................................................................
solution J is .......................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest one reason why iron(III) sulfate solution cannot be used in (b)(i) instead of copper
sulfate solution to identify solution J.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

6
3 You are going to investigate how the resistance of a metal wire depends upon its length.
V
sliding contact
resistance wire
metre rule
l C
P Q
0 cm 100 cm
power supply
A
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) • Connect the crocodile clip C to the resistance wire PQ at a length l = 20.0 cm from
end P.
• Close the switch.
• Record in Table 3.1 the current I flowing through the wire and the potential
difference V.
• Switch off the circuit. [1]
Table 3.1
length l / cm current I / A resistance R / Ω
V/V
20.0
35.0
50.0
65.0
80.0
95.0
(ii) Repeat the steps in (a)(i) for values of l = 35.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 65.0 cm, 80.0 cm and 95.0 cm.
[3]
(iii) Calculate the resistance R for each length of wire, using the equation
V
R= .
I
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/M/J/17

7
(b) Use the results in Table 3.1 to plot a graph of R(vertical axis) against l.
Start both axes of your graph at the origin (0, 0). Draw the best-fit straight line. [3]
R /Ω
l / cm
(c) (i) Extend your line to predict the value of R at length l = 110.0 cm.
R = ....................................................... Ω [1]
relationship ........................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/M/J/17

8
Tests for anions

carbonate (CO32–) add dilute acid effervescence, carbon dioxide
produced
chloride (Cl –) acidify with dilute nitric acid, then white ppt.
nitrate (NO3–) add aqueous sodium hydroxide, ammonia produced
sulfate (SO42–) acidify with dilute nitric acid, then white ppt.

Tests for gases
gas test and test result

chlorine (Cl 2) bleaches damp litmus paper
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/M/J/17

* 8 1 4 7 5 5 7 4 1 3 *

1 hour 30 minutes

Total
DC (LK/SW) 139105/2
2
1 You are provided with a flower.
Carefully remove 2 petals.
(a) In the box below, make a large pencil drawing of the flower.
This should show all the flower parts including some petals.
[4]
(b) You are going to calculate the magnification of your drawing.
(i) Draw a straight line across your drawing from one edge to the other.
Measure the length of this line in millimetres to the nearest millimetre.
length = .................................................... mm
Measure the same length of the same part on the real flower in millimetres to the nearest
millimetre.
length = .................................................... mm
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/M/J/17

3
(ii) Use your two measurements to calculate the magnification of your drawing.
Show your working in the space below.
magnification = ...............................................[1]
(c) Flowers contain nectar.
Plan an investigation using two different flowers to find out which nectar contains more
reducing sugar.
You should include details of how you will carry out the test and what observations will allow
you to conclude which nectar contains more reducing sugar.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]

4
2 You are going to investigate how the temperature of a reactant affects the rate of reaction between
calcium carbonate and hydrochloric acid.
You are provided with marble chips (calcium carbonate) and hydrochloric acid.
(a) Set up the apparatus provided as shown in Fig. 2.1.
To obtain an inverted 100 cm3 measuring cylinder full of water:
• fill the measuring cylinder with water

• place your finger or hand firmly over the open end of the cylinder so no water can
run out
• invert and place this end under the water in the water container
• remove your hand and clamp the cylinder in place (note that a small amount of air in
the measuring cylinder will not be a problem in this experiment)
• push the tubing of the delivery tube up into the cylinder a little way.
delivery tube
clamp

large test-tube
water
water container
Fig. 2.1
(i) experiment 1
• Disconnect the large test-tube and use a measuring cylinder to place 20 cm3 of
hydrochloric acid into it.
• Measure the temperature of the acid in the large test-tube and record in Table 2.1
the temperature to the nearest half degree for experiment 1.
• Add ten marble chips to the acid.
• Connect the delivery tube to the large test-tube making sure that the tube goes up
into the measuring cylinder as in Fig. 2.1.
• Start the stopclock.
• When one minute is shown on the stopclock read the volume V1 of gas collected in
the measuring cylinder.
• Record in Table 2.1 this volume V1 for experiment 1.
• When two minutes is shown on the stopclock read the volume V2 of gas collected
in the measuring cylinder.
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/M/J/17

5
Table 2.1
experiment temperature of volume of gas volume of gas volume of gas

acid / °C after one minute after two minutes produced in
V1 / cm3 V2 / cm3 second minute
V / cm3
1
2
3
(ii) experiment 2
• Pour the contents of the large test-tube into the beaker labelled waste.
• Rinse out the large test-tube with water.
• Refill the inverted measuring cylinder with water and replace the tube as in Fig. 2.1.
• Remove some water from the water container if it is close to overflowing.
• Using a measuring cylinder, place 20 cm3 of hydrochloric acid into the large test-tube.
• Place the large test-tube containing the acid in a beaker of hot water.
• When the temperature of the acid in the large test-tube is about 10 °C above the
temperature for experiment 1, record in Table 2.1 this temperature to the nearest
half degree for experiment 2.
• Immediately remove the large test-tube from the beaker of hot water and add ten
unused marble chips to the acid.
• Connect the delivery tube to the large test-tube making sure that the tube goes up
into the measuring cylinder as in Fig. 2.1.
• Start the stopclock.
• When one minute is shown on the stopclock read the volume V1 of gas collected in
• When two minutes is shown on the stopclock read the volume V2 of gas collected in
[2]
(iii) experiment 3
Repeat (a)(ii), increasing the temperature of the acid by a further 10 °C.
You may need to replace the hot water in the beaker. [2]

6
(b) (i) For each experiment calculate the volume V of gas produced during the second minute.
Record your values in Table 2.1.
[1]
(ii) Use your data to describe the relationship between the temperature of the acid and the
rate of the reaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Suggest an alternative method for measuring the rate of reaction between marble chips
and acid.
You may draw a labelled diagram but you must state what is being measured.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/M/J/17

7
Please turn over for Question 3.

8
3 You are going to find the density of water.
You are provided with a test-tube, a balance, a measuring cylinder and a beaker containing water.
(a) (i) Use the balance to measure the mass m of the test-tube to the nearest 0.1 g.
m = ................................................... g [1]
(ii) Pour approximately 65 cm3 of water from the beaker into the measuring cylinder.
Record the volume V1 of water on the scale of the measuring cylinder.
V1 = ............................................... cm3 [1]
(iii) Slowly and carefully lower the test-tube into the measuring cylinder until it floats,
approximately vertically, as shown in Fig. 3.1. The test-tube should not touch the bottom
of the measuring cylinder.
Fig. 3.1
Record the new volume V2 of water on the scale of the measuring cylinder.
V2 = ............................................... cm3 [2]
(iv) Use your volume values from (a)(ii) and (a)(iii) to calculate the volume V3 of water
displaced by the test-tube.
V3 = ............................................... cm3 [1]
(v) Calculate the density d of the water using your values from (a)(i) and (a)(iv), using the
equation below. Include the unit in your answer.
m
d=
V3
d = ............................................... unit ............................ [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/M/J/17

9
(b) (i) Suggest two possible sources of inaccuracy in this experiment.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State and explain the effect that one of the sources of inaccuracy you gave in (b)(i)
would have on the calculated value of d.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/M/J/17

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/M/J/17

11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/M/J/17

12
Test for anions

carbonate (CO32– ) add dilute acid effervescence, carbon dioxide
produced
chloride (Cl – ) acidify with dilute nitric acid, then white ppt.
nitrate (NO3– ) add aqueous sodium hydroxide ammonia produced
sulfate (SO42– ) acidify with dilute nitric acid, then white ppt.
Test for aqueous cations

copper(II) (Cu2+) light blue ppt., insoluble in excess light blue ppt., soluble in excess
Test for gases
gas test and test results

chlorine (Cl2) bleaches damp litmus paper
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/M/J/17

* 1 5 1 8 9 6 7 4 5 3 *

1 hour

DC (SR/JG) 145656
2
1 A student investigates the nutrient content of banana, chickpea and egg white.
• He divides some mashed banana between three test-tubes.

• He carries out Benedict’s test on one portion, the biuret test on another and the iodine
test on the third portion.
• He repeats the procedure with the chickpea and egg white.
(a) State in which of these tests a source of heat is required.
............................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The banana tests positive for reducing sugar and starch.
The chickpea tests positive for starch.
The egg white tests positive for protein.
All other results are negative.
Complete Table 1.1 to show the colours the student obtains in these tests.
Table 1.1

for reducing sugar for protein for starch
banana
chickpea
egg white
[3]
(c) Plan an investigation to compare the reducing sugar content of two different brands of clear
apple juice.
In your answer you should include how you will determine which brand contains the most
reducing sugar and how to make a fair comparison.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

3
method ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

4
2 Solution H and solution J are each one of the following possible solutions.
ammonia solution
hydrochloric acid
sulfuric acid
A student carries out some tests to identify solution H and solution J.
(a) She tests solutions H and J separately with both red and blue litmus papers.
She records her observations in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
red litmus paper remains red changes to blue
blue litmus paper remains blue remains blue
Using the observations in Table 2.1, choose from the list of possible solutions the two possible
identities for each of solutions H and J.
solution H could be ............................................................................................................. or
.................................................................................................................
solution J could be ............................................................................................................. or
.................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

5
(b) (i) The student reacts solid copper(II) oxide with dilute sulfuric acid to prepare a solution
containing copper sulfate only.
Describe clearly a method for this preparation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) She places solution H in a test-tube.
She slowly adds copper sulfate solution until the test-tube is almost full. She filters this
mixture to identify the colour of any precipitate (ppt.).
She repeats this process for solution J.
Her observations are shown in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2
dark blue solution

slowly add copper
white ppt. at first then blue
sulfate solution
ppt. appears
Use the observations in Tables 2.1 and 2.2 to identify solutions H and J.
solution H is .......................................................................................................................
solution J is .......................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Another student suggests that iron(III) sulfate solution may be used in (b) (ii) instead of
copper sulfate solution to identify solutions H and J.
Explain in detail why the student is only partially correct.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

7
3 A student investigates how the resistance of a metal wire depends upon its length.
She sets up the circuit shown in Fig. 3.1.
V sliding contact
metre rule resistance wire
l
P C Q
0 0
100
Fig. 3.1
• She connects the sliding contact C to the resistance wire at a length l = 20.0 cm from
end P.
• She closes the switch.
• She measures the current I flowing through the wire and the potential difference
V between P and C.
• She opens the switch.

8
(a) Part of the scale of the voltmeter is shown in Fig. 3.2.

0.3
0.4
0.2
Fig. 3.2
Read the scale and record the value in Table 3.1. [1]
Table 3.1
length l / cm current I / A resistance R / Ω
V/V
20.0 0.18
35.0 0.18 0.58 3.22
50.0 0.18 0.79 4.39
65.0 0.18 1.00 5.56
80.0 0.18 1.22
95.0 0.18 1.43 7.94
(b) She measures the current I in the wire and records its value in Table 3.1.
She repeats this process for values of l = 35.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 65.0 cm, 80.0 cm and 95.0 cm.
She records in Table 3.1 her values for I and V.
(i) Calculate the resistance R for lengths of wire 20.0 cm and 80.0 cm, using the equation
shown.
V
R= I

© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17
9
(ii) Use the results in Table 3.1 to plot a graph of R against l. Start your graph at (0, 0). Draw
the best-fit straight line.
R/Ω
l / cm
[3]
(c) (i) Extend your line to predict the value of resistance R at length l = 10.0 cm.
R = ..................................................... Ω [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Give one possible source of inaccuracy in this experiment and the precaution you would take
to minimise it.
source of inaccuracy .................................................................................................................
precaution .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

10
4 A nurse takes a blood sample from a patient.
(a) Describe a safety precaution the nurse should take when obtaining the blood sample from the
patient.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a photograph of some of this blood as seen under a microscope.
A white blood cell has been labelled.
white blood cell
Fig. 4.1
(i) On Fig. 4.1 draw label lines and label one red blood cell and one platelet. [2]
(ii) In the box make a large pencil drawing of the labelled white blood cell.
Label the visible components.
[4]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

11
(c) (i) Measure to the nearest 0.5 mm the diameter of the labelled white blood cell in Fig. 4.1.
diameter = ................................................... mm [1]
(ii) Measure to the nearest 0.5 mm the diameter of this cell in your drawing.
diameter = ................................................... mm [1]
(iii) Use these measurements to calculate the magnification of your drawing to the nearest
whole number.
magnification = ...........................................................[1]

12
5 A student investigates the effect of changing acid concentration on the rate of the reaction between
hydrochloric acid and calcium carbonate.
In each experiment, he uses the same volume of hydrochloric acid and the same mass of
powdered calcium carbonate.
Method
• He measures the volume of hydrochloric acid of concentration 0.2 mol / dm3 and puts it
into a conical flask.
• He measures the mass of the calcium carbonate with a balance and adds it to the acid.
• He measures the volume of gas produced after 2 minutes.
• He repeats the experiment for this concentration of acid.
• He repeats this procedure for concentrations of acid of 0.5, 1.0, 2.0 and 2.5 mol / dm3.
• He records in Table 5.1 the volume of gas produced in each experiment.
(a) Complete the diagram in Fig. 5.1 to show how he can collect and measure the volume of gas
produced. Remember to label the diagram. [2]
hydrochloric
acid
calcium
carbonate
powder
Fig. 5.1
(b) Calculate the average (mean) volume of gas produced for each concentration of acid and
record these values in Table 5.1.
[1]
Table 5.1
concentration of volume of gas produced in 2 minutes / cm3

hydrochloric acid in
mol / dm3 experiment 1 experiment 2 average
0.2 5 7
0.5 13 14
1.0 29 27
2.0 53 56
2.5 66 64
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

13
(c) State which concentration of hydrochloric acid produced the fastest rate of reaction.
Use the data in Table 5.1 to justify your answer.
concentration ............................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(d) (i) There is a piece of equipment not mentioned in the method, but which is needed to carry
out a rate of reaction experiment.
State the name of this piece of equipment.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The student measures the volume of hydrochloric acid using a measuring cylinder.
State the name of a different piece of apparatus which could be used to measure the
volume more accurately.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) (i) Suggest one factor not mentioned in the method which must be kept constant throughout
the investigation.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why the experiment was repeated for each concentration of hydrochloric acid.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(f) One of the products of the reaction is a gas.
State the name of the gas and describe a test which can be used to confirm its identity.
Remember to include the result of the test in your answer.
gas ............................................................................................................................................
test ............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

14
6 A student investigates the air temperature at different heights, h, above a lamp as shown in
Fig. 6.1.
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
metre rule thermometer
30
20
10 h
0
lamp
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the apparatus that she should use to keep the thermometer at a fixed height above the
lamp.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Suggest one safety precaution the student should take while doing this experiment.
.............................................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

15
(c) She records in Table 6.1 the temperature at different heights above the lamp.
Table 6.1
h / cm 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
temperature / °C 50 49 47 44 39 38 27 23 22 22
She plots her results on a graph as shown in Fig. 6.2.
60
55
temperature
/ °C 50
45
40
35
30
25
20
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
h / cm
Fig. 6.2
(i) Plot the two missing points on the graph. [1]
(ii) Draw the curve of best-fit. [2]
(iii) Use the graph to estimate the temperature 15 cm above the lamp.
Show clearly on the graph how this temperature is determined.
temperature = ......................................................°C [2]
(iv) Use the graph to describe the relationship between the height, h, of the thermometer
above the lamp and the temperature.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(v) Suggest why she stopped taking temperature measurements at 20 cm above the lamp.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

* 1 5 1 8 9 6 7 4 5 3 *

1 hour

DC (SR/JG) 145656
2
1 A student investigates the nutrient content of banana, chickpea and egg white.
• He divides some mashed banana between three test-tubes.

• He carries out Benedict’s test on one portion, the biuret test on another and the iodine
test on the third portion.
• He repeats the procedure with the chickpea and egg white.
(a) State in which of these tests a source of heat is required.
............................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The banana tests positive for reducing sugar and starch.
The chickpea tests positive for starch.
The egg white tests positive for protein.
All other results are negative.
Complete Table 1.1 to show the colours the student obtains in these tests.
Table 1.1

for reducing sugar for protein for starch
banana
chickpea
egg white
[3]
(c) Plan an investigation to compare the reducing sugar content of two different brands of clear
apple juice.
In your answer you should include how you will determine which brand contains the most
reducing sugar and how to make a fair comparison.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

3
method ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

4
2 Solution H and solution J are each one of the following possible solutions.
ammonia solution
hydrochloric acid
sulfuric acid
A student carries out some tests to identify solution H and solution J.
(a) She tests solutions H and J separately with both red and blue litmus papers.
She records her observations in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
red litmus paper remains red changes to blue
blue litmus paper remains blue remains blue
Using the observations in Table 2.1, choose from the list of possible solutions the two possible
identities for each of solutions H and J.
solution H could be ............................................................................................................. or
.................................................................................................................
solution J could be ............................................................................................................. or
.................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

5
(b) (i) The student reacts solid copper(II) oxide with dilute sulfuric acid to prepare a solution
containing copper sulfate only.
Describe clearly a method for this preparation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) She places solution H in a test-tube.
She slowly adds copper sulfate solution until the test-tube is almost full. She filters this
mixture to identify the colour of any precipitate (ppt.).
She repeats this process for solution J.
Her observations are shown in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2
dark blue solution

slowly add copper
white ppt. at first then blue
sulfate solution
ppt. appears
Use the observations in Tables 2.1 and 2.2 to identify solutions H and J.
solution H is .......................................................................................................................
solution J is .......................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Another student suggests that iron(III) sulfate solution may be used in (b) (ii) instead of
copper sulfate solution to identify solutions H and J.
Explain in detail why the student is only partially correct.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

7
3 A student investigates how the resistance of a metal wire depends upon its length.
She sets up the circuit shown in Fig. 3.1.
V sliding contact
metre rule resistance wire
l
P C Q
0 0
100
Fig. 3.1
• She connects the sliding contact C to the resistance wire at a length l = 20.0 cm from
end P.
• She closes the switch.
• She measures the current I flowing through the wire and the potential difference
V between P and C.
• She opens the switch.

8
(a) Part of the scale of the voltmeter is shown in Fig. 3.2.

0.3
0.4
0.2
Fig. 3.2
Read the scale and record the value in Table 3.1. [1]
Table 3.1
length l / cm current I / A resistance R / Ω
V/V
20.0 0.18
35.0 0.18 0.58 3.22
50.0 0.18 0.79 4.39
65.0 0.18 1.00 5.56
80.0 0.18 1.22
95.0 0.18 1.43 7.94
(b) She measures the current I in the wire and records its value in Table 3.1.
She repeats this process for values of l = 35.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 65.0 cm, 80.0 cm and 95.0 cm.
She records in Table 3.1 her values for I and V.
(i) Calculate the resistance R for lengths of wire 20.0 cm and 80.0 cm, using the equation
shown.
V
R= I

© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17
9
(ii) Use the results in Table 3.1 to plot a graph of R against l. Start your graph at (0, 0). Draw
the best-fit straight line.
R/Ω
l / cm
[3]
(c) (i) Extend your line to predict the value of resistance R at length l = 10.0 cm.
R = ..................................................... Ω [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Give one possible source of inaccuracy in this experiment and the precaution you would take
to minimise it.
source of inaccuracy .................................................................................................................
precaution .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

10
4 A nurse takes a blood sample from a patient.
(a) Describe a safety precaution the nurse should take when obtaining the blood sample from the
patient.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a photograph of some of this blood as seen under a microscope.
A white blood cell has been labelled.
white blood cell
Fig. 4.1
(i) On Fig. 4.1 draw label lines and label one red blood cell and one platelet. [2]
(ii) In the box make a large pencil drawing of the labelled white blood cell.
Label the visible components.
[4]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

11
(c) (i) Measure to the nearest 0.5 mm the diameter of the labelled white blood cell in Fig. 4.1.
diameter = ................................................... mm [1]
(ii) Measure to the nearest 0.5 mm the diameter of this cell in your drawing.
diameter = ................................................... mm [1]
(iii) Use these measurements to calculate the magnification of your drawing to the nearest
whole number.
magnification = ...........................................................[1]

12
5 A student investigates the effect of changing acid concentration on the rate of the reaction between
hydrochloric acid and calcium carbonate.
In each experiment, he uses the same volume of hydrochloric acid and the same mass of
powdered calcium carbonate.
Method
• He measures the volume of hydrochloric acid of concentration 0.2 mol / dm3 and puts it
into a conical flask.
• He measures the mass of the calcium carbonate with a balance and adds it to the acid.
• He measures the volume of gas produced after 2 minutes.
• He repeats the experiment for this concentration of acid.
• He repeats this procedure for concentrations of acid of 0.5, 1.0, 2.0 and 2.5 mol / dm3.
• He records in Table 5.1 the volume of gas produced in each experiment.
(a) Complete the diagram in Fig. 5.1 to show how he can collect and measure the volume of gas
produced. Remember to label the diagram. [2]
hydrochloric
acid
calcium
carbonate
powder
Fig. 5.1
(b) Calculate the average (mean) volume of gas produced for each concentration of acid and
record these values in Table 5.1.
[1]
Table 5.1
concentration of volume of gas produced in 2 minutes / cm3

hydrochloric acid in
mol / dm3 experiment 1 experiment 2 average
0.2 5 7
0.5 13 14
1.0 29 27
2.0 53 56
2.5 66 64
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

13
(c) State which concentration of hydrochloric acid produced the fastest rate of reaction.
Use the data in Table 5.1 to justify your answer.
concentration ............................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(d) (i) There is a piece of equipment not mentioned in the method, but which is needed to carry
out a rate of reaction experiment.
State the name of this piece of equipment.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The student measures the volume of hydrochloric acid using a measuring cylinder.
State the name of a different piece of apparatus which could be used to measure the
volume more accurately.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) (i) Suggest one factor not mentioned in the method which must be kept constant throughout
the investigation.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why the experiment was repeated for each concentration of hydrochloric acid.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(f) One of the products of the reaction is a gas.
State the name of the gas and describe a test which can be used to confirm its identity.
Remember to include the result of the test in your answer.
gas ............................................................................................................................................
test ............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

14
6 A student investigates the air temperature at different heights, h, above a lamp as shown in
Fig. 6.1.
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
metre rule thermometer
30
20
10 h
0
lamp
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the apparatus that she should use to keep the thermometer at a fixed height above the
lamp.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Suggest one safety precaution the student should take while doing this experiment.
.............................................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

15
(c) She records in Table 6.1 the temperature at different heights above the lamp.
Table 6.1
h / cm 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
temperature / °C 50 49 47 44 39 38 27 23 22 22
She plots her results on a graph as shown in Fig. 6.2.
60
55
temperature
/ °C 50
45
40
35
30
25
20
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
h / cm
Fig. 6.2
(i) Plot the two missing points on the graph. [1]
(ii) Draw the curve of best-fit. [2]
(iii) Use the graph to estimate the temperature 15 cm above the lamp.
Show clearly on the graph how this temperature is determined.
temperature = ......................................................°C [2]
(iv) Use the graph to describe the relationship between the height, h, of the thermometer
above the lamp and the temperature.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(v) Suggest why she stopped taking temperature measurements at 20 cm above the lamp.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/M/J/17

* 4 2 3 9 1 5 6 0 2 3 *

1 hour

DC (SR/CGW) 145657
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a flower that has been cut in half lengthways. The photograph is life-size.
A B
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) In the box shown, make a large pencil drawing of the flower. This should show all the
flower parts including the petals.
[4]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

3
(ii) On your drawing, use label lines to label only the following structures.
• an anther
• a stigma
[2]
(i) On Fig. 1.1 draw a straight line between points A and B.
length = ........................................................ mm
Draw a matching line A–B on your pencil drawing.
length = ........................................................ mm
[2]
magnification = .......................................................... [1]
(c) On Fig. 1.1, circle the structure that receives pollen during pollination. [1]

4
2 A student investigates how the temperature of a reactant affects the rate of reaction between
calcium carbonate (marble chips) and hydrochloric acid.
He sets up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 2.1.
delivery tube
clamp
large test-tube 100 cm3 measuring cylinder
water
water container
Fig. 2.1
• He places 20 cm3 of hydrochloric acid into the large test-tube, measures the temperature of
the acid and records the value in Table 2.1.
• He adds five marble chips to the acid and reconnects the delivery tube.
• He starts the stopclock.
• After one minute he reads the volume V1 of gas collected in the measuring cylinder.
• After two minutes he reads the new total volume V2 of gas collected in the measuring cylinder.
• Both values are shown in Table 2.1.
• This is repeated for different temperatures of acid.
Table 2.1
volume of volume of volume of gas

temperature of gas after one gas after produced in
experiment
acid / °C minute two minutes second minute
V1 / cm3 V2 / cm3 V / cm3
1 21.5 6 13
2 34.5 9 19 10
3 44.0 13 27
4 55.0 17 38
(a) (i) For each experiment use the equation shown to calculate the volume of gas V produced
in the second minute. One has been done for you. Record these values in Table 2.1.
V = V2 – V1
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

5
(ii) On the grid provided, plot a graph of the volume of gas V produced in the second minute
(vertical axis) against the temperature of the hydrochloric acid.
Draw the best-fit straight line or smooth curve as appropriate.
5
20
[4]
(iii) Use your graph to describe the relationship between the temperature of the acid and the
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

6
(b) (i) Suggest one reason why it is more accurate to compare the volumes of gas produced in
the second minute rather than in the first minute.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Another student does not change the marble chips for each new temperature of acid.
His results are significantly different from those of the first student.
Suggest why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Suggest an alternative method for measuring the rate of reaction between marble chips
and acid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

7

8
3 A student measures the density of water by two different methods.
(a) Method 1
She uses a balance to measure the mass m1 of an empty measuring cylinder.
The scale of the balance is shown in Fig. 3.1.
Fig. 3.1
(i) Read the scale and record the mass of the empty measuring cylinder to the nearest 0.1 g.
m1 = .................... g [1]
(ii) She removes the measuring cylinder from the balance and pours water into it. Part of the
scale of the measuring cylinder is shown in Fig. 3.2.
70
60
Fig. 3.2
Read the scale and record the volume V1 of water in the measuring cylinder.
V1 = .................... cm3 [1]
(iii) State how the student should ensure that the reading of the volume of water in the
measuring cylinder that she records in (a)(ii) is as accurate as possible.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

9
(iv) She uses the balance to measure and record the mass m2 of the measuring cylinder and
water.
m2 = 120.4 g
Calculate the density d1 of the water using your values from (a)(i) and (a)(ii) and the
value of m2. Use the equation shown. State the unit of your answer.
(m2 – m1)
d1 =
V1
d1 = .................... unit = .................... [2]
(b) Method 2
The student uses the balance provided to measure and record the mass m3 of a test-tube.
m3 = 18.1 g
She takes the measuring cylinder and water used in Method 1 and slowly lowers the test-tube
into the measuring cylinder until it floats, approximately vertically, as shown in Fig. 3.3.
test-tube
water
Fig. 3.3
She measures the volume V2 of water recorded by the measuring cylinder.
V2 = 85 cm3

10
(i) Use the volume value from (a)(ii) and V2 to calculate the volume of water V3 displaced
by the test-tube.
V3 = .................... cm3 [1]
(ii) Calculate the density d2 of the water using your value from (b)(i) and the value of m3.
Use the equation shown.
m3
d2 =
V3
d2 = .................... [2]
(c) (i) Apart from the reading of the volumes, suggest one other possible source of inaccuracy
in Method 2.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest one reason why it is good experimental practice for the student to carry out the
two measurements of density in the order that she does.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

11

12
4 A student investigates the starch and sugar content of plants using four similar shoots.
She sets up the shoots as shown in Fig. 4.1.
A B C D
lid
jar
shoot destarched
shoot
test-tube
water
soda lime sodium hydrogen carbonate solution

to remove releases carbon dioxide
carbon dioxide into the air
Fig. 4.1
The shoot in jar D is destarched. The other three shoots are not destarched.
(a) Describe how a shoot can be destarched.
...................................................................................................................................................
�� [2]
(b) The jars are left for five days. Jars A and B are placed in light. Jars C and D are placed in the
dark.
Each test-tube is tested for starch and reducing sugar at the start of day 1 and at the end of
day 5. The results of these tests are shown in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
A B C D
presence of carbon dioxide none present present present
light conditions light light dark dark
starch content on day 1 high high high none
starch content on day 5 none high none none
reducing sugar content on day 1 high high high little
reducing sugar content on day 5 little high little none
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

13
(i) Describe how the student can test a leaf for starch. Include the observation for a positive
result.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Describe how the student can test for reducing sugar. Include the observation for a
positive result.
��
��
��
�� [3]
(iii) State and explain one important safety precaution that the student should take in either
of the above tests.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Use the results in Table 4.1 to state what the student can conclude from her investigation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

14
5 A student prepares some pure blue crystals of copper sulfate.
He heats some dilute sulfuric acid in a beaker and then adds a small amount of black copper
oxide, CuO.
He stirs the mixture and keeps adding copper oxide until it is in excess. See Fig� 5.1.
glass rod
beaker
sulfuric acid
black copper oxide
Bunsen burner
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Explain how he knows when the copper oxide is in excess. Include observations in your
answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why he adds excess copper oxide.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Describe how the student removes the excess copper oxide.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) The student wants to make pure dry crystals of blue copper sulfate.
He heats the solution from (a)(iii) strongly with a Bunsen burner, but he does not obtain
blue crystals of copper sulfate. Instead he sees a white powder which gradually turns
black.
Suggest what might have happened to the copper sulfate during this heating to dryness.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

15
(ii) Describe a three-step method which the student should have used to obtain pure dry
crystals of blue copper sulfate.
step 1 ................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
step 2 ................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
step 3 ................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) The student wants to show that the blue crystals contain the sulfate ion.
Describe the test for the sulfate ion. Include the result for a positive test in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Another student is asked to make a sample of zinc chloride crystals using the same method
as in (a) and (b)(ii)�
Name the two chemicals he should use.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

17
6 Five students, P, Q, R, S and T, investigate how temperature changes during the process of
evaporation. They use the apparatus shown in Fig. 6.1.
They each perform the same experiment.
cotton wool
soaked in
alcohol
thermometer
Fig. 6.1
They each put 1 cm3 of alcohol onto the cotton wool surrounding the thermometer bulb.
They measure the starting temperature and then the temperature every 30 seconds for five
minutes.
(a) (i) Name a suitable piece of equipment for putting 1 cm3 of alcohol onto the cotton wool
surrounding the bulb of the thermometer.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why it is important for the students to use the same sized pieces of cotton wool
to make it a fair comparison.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

18
(b) (i) Read the thermometers shown in Fig. 6.2, which show the temperatures measured by
student Q at 0 s and 150 s.
°C °C
28 15
14
27
13
26
0 seconds 150 seconds

Fig. 6.2
Record the temperatures to the nearest 0.5 °C in Table 6.1. [2]
Table 6.1
average
time / s P Q R S T
temperature / °C
0 25.0 26.5 25.0 25.0 25.8
30 22.0 20.5 22.0 19.0 20.5 20.8
60 18.0 17.0 18.0 17.0 19.0
90 14.0 16.5 17.0 15.5 14.5 15.5
120 12.0 14.5 15.5 13.0 12.0 13.4
150 11.0 11.5 12.0 10.5 11.8
180 14.0 11.0 10.0 11.0 10.0 11.2
210 10.0 10.0 9.0 10.0 9.5 9.7
240 9.0 9.0 8.5 9.5 9.0
270 8.0 8.0 8.0 9.0 8.0 8.2
300 8.0 7.0 8.0 7.5 8.0 7.7
(ii) Calculate the average (mean) temperatures at 60 s and 240 s. Record these values in
Table 6.1.
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

19
(c) One of student P’s results is anomalous.
(i) State the time at which this anomalous result occurred.
time = ....................................................... s [1]
(ii) Suggest what could have happened to cause this anomaly.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Explain why the changes in temperature between 240 s and 300 s are very small.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) On the axes provided, sketch a line to show how the average temperature changes with time.
You do not have to plot the points.
30
average
temperature
/ °C
0
0 300
time / s
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

* 4 2 3 9 1 5 6 0 2 3 *

1 hour

DC (SR/CGW) 145657
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a flower that has been cut in half lengthways. The photograph is life-size.
A B
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) In the box shown, make a large pencil drawing of the flower. This should show all the
flower parts including the petals.
[4]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

3
(ii) On your drawing, use label lines to label only the following structures.
• an anther
• a stigma
[2]
(i) On Fig. 1.1 draw a straight line between points A and B.
length = ........................................................ mm
Draw a matching line A–B on your pencil drawing.
length = ........................................................ mm
[2]
magnification = .......................................................... [1]
(c) On Fig. 1.1, circle the structure that receives pollen during pollination. [1]

4
2 A student investigates how the temperature of a reactant affects the rate of reaction between
calcium carbonate (marble chips) and hydrochloric acid.
delivery tube
clamp
large test-tube 100 cm3 measuring cylinder
water
water container
Fig. 2.1
• He places 20 cm3 of hydrochloric acid into the large test-tube, measures the temperature of
the acid and records the value in Table 2.1.
• He adds five marble chips to the acid and reconnects the delivery tube.
• He starts the stopclock.
• After one minute he reads the volume V1 of gas collected in the measuring cylinder.
• After two minutes he reads the new total volume V2 of gas collected in the measuring cylinder.
• Both values are shown in Table 2.1.
• This is repeated for different temperatures of acid.
Table 2.1
volume of volume of volume of gas

temperature of gas after one gas after produced in
experiment
acid / °C minute two minutes second minute
V1 / cm3 V2 / cm3 V / cm3
1 21.5 6 13
2 34.5 9 19 10
3 44.0 13 27
4 55.0 17 38
(a) (i) For each experiment use the equation shown to calculate the volume of gas V produced
in the second minute. One has been done for you. Record these values in Table 2.1.
V = V2 – V1
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

5
(ii) On the grid provided, plot a graph of the volume of gas V produced in the second minute
(vertical axis) against the temperature of the hydrochloric acid.
Draw the best-fit straight line or smooth curve as appropriate.
5
20
[4]
(iii) Use your graph to describe the relationship between the temperature of the acid and the
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

6
(b) (i) Suggest one reason why it is more accurate to compare the volumes of gas produced in
the second minute rather than in the first minute.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Another student does not change the marble chips for each new temperature of acid.
His results are significantly different from those of the first student.
Suggest why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Suggest an alternative method for measuring the rate of reaction between marble chips
and acid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

7

8
3 A student measures the density of water by two different methods.
(a) Method 1
She uses a balance to measure the mass m1 of an empty measuring cylinder.
The scale of the balance is shown in Fig. 3.1.
Fig. 3.1
(i) Read the scale and record the mass of the empty measuring cylinder to the nearest 0.1 g.
m1 = .................... g [1]
(ii) She removes the measuring cylinder from the balance and pours water into it. Part of the
scale of the measuring cylinder is shown in Fig. 3.2.
70
60
Fig. 3.2
Read the scale and record the volume V1 of water in the measuring cylinder.
V1 = .................... cm3 [1]
(iii) State how the student should ensure that the reading of the volume of water in the
measuring cylinder that she records in (a)(ii) is as accurate as possible.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

9
(iv) She uses the balance to measure and record the mass m2 of the measuring cylinder and
water.
m2 = 120.4 g
Calculate the density d1 of the water using your values from (a)(i) and (a)(ii) and the
value of m2. Use the equation shown. State the unit of your answer.
(m2 – m1)
d1 =
V1
d1 = .................... unit = .................... [2]
(b) Method 2
The student uses the balance provided to measure and record the mass m3 of a test-tube.
m3 = 18.1 g
She takes the measuring cylinder and water used in Method 1 and slowly lowers the test-tube
into the measuring cylinder until it floats, approximately vertically, as shown in Fig. 3.3.
test-tube
water
Fig. 3.3
She measures the volume V2 of water recorded by the measuring cylinder.
V2 = 85 cm3

10
(i) Use the volume value from (a)(ii) and V2 to calculate the volume of water V3 displaced
by the test-tube.
V3 = .................... cm3 [1]
(ii) Calculate the density d2 of the water using your value from (b)(i) and the value of m3.
Use the equation shown.
m3
d2 =
V3
d2 = .................... [2]
(c) (i) Apart from the reading of the volumes, suggest one other possible source of inaccuracy
in Method 2.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest one reason why it is good experimental practice for the student to carry out the
two measurements of density in the order that she does.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

11

12
4 A student investigates the starch and sugar content of plants using four similar shoots.
She sets up the shoots as shown in Fig. 4.1.
A B C D
lid
jar
shoot destarched
shoot
test-tube
water
soda lime sodium hydrogen carbonate solution

to remove releases carbon dioxide
carbon dioxide into the air
Fig. 4.1
The shoot in jar D is destarched. The other three shoots are not destarched.
(a) Describe how a shoot can be destarched.
...................................................................................................................................................
�� [2]
(b) The jars are left for five days. Jars A and B are placed in light. Jars C and D are placed in the
dark.
Each test-tube is tested for starch and reducing sugar at the start of day 1 and at the end of
day 5. The results of these tests are shown in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
A B C D
presence of carbon dioxide none present present present
light conditions light light dark dark
starch content on day 1 high high high none
starch content on day 5 none high none none
reducing sugar content on day 1 high high high little
reducing sugar content on day 5 little high little none
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

13
(i) Describe how the student can test a leaf for starch. Include the observation for a positive
result.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Describe how the student can test for reducing sugar. Include the observation for a
positive result.
��
��
��
�� [3]
(iii) State and explain one important safety precaution that the student should take in either
of the above tests.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Use the results in Table 4.1 to state what the student can conclude from her investigation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

14
5 A student prepares some pure blue crystals of copper sulfate.
He heats some dilute sulfuric acid in a beaker and then adds a small amount of black copper
oxide, CuO.
He stirs the mixture and keeps adding copper oxide until it is in excess. See Fig� 5.1.
glass rod
beaker
sulfuric acid
black copper oxide
Bunsen burner
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Explain how he knows when the copper oxide is in excess. Include observations in your
answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why he adds excess copper oxide.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Describe how the student removes the excess copper oxide.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) The student wants to make pure dry crystals of blue copper sulfate.
He heats the solution from (a)(iii) strongly with a Bunsen burner, but he does not obtain
blue crystals of copper sulfate. Instead he sees a white powder which gradually turns
black.
Suggest what might have happened to the copper sulfate during this heating to dryness.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

15
(ii) Describe a three-step method which the student should have used to obtain pure dry
crystals of blue copper sulfate.
step 1 ................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
step 2 ................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
step 3 ................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) The student wants to show that the blue crystals contain the sulfate ion.
Describe the test for the sulfate ion. Include the result for a positive test in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Another student is asked to make a sample of zinc chloride crystals using the same method
as in (a) and (b)(ii)�
Name the two chemicals he should use.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

17
6 Five students, P, Q, R, S and T, investigate how temperature changes during the process of
evaporation. They use the apparatus shown in Fig. 6.1.
They each perform the same experiment.
cotton wool
soaked in
alcohol
thermometer
Fig. 6.1
They each put 1 cm3 of alcohol onto the cotton wool surrounding the thermometer bulb.
They measure the starting temperature and then the temperature every 30 seconds for five
minutes.
(a) (i) Name a suitable piece of equipment for putting 1 cm3 of alcohol onto the cotton wool
surrounding the bulb of the thermometer.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why it is important for the students to use the same sized pieces of cotton wool
to make it a fair comparison.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

18
(b) (i) Read the thermometers shown in Fig. 6.2, which show the temperatures measured by
student Q at 0 s and 150 s.
°C °C
28 15
14
27
13
26
0 seconds 150 seconds

Fig. 6.2
Record the temperatures to the nearest 0.5 °C in Table 6.1. [2]
Table 6.1
average
time / s P Q R S T
temperature / °C
0 25.0 26.5 25.0 25.0 25.8
30 22.0 20.5 22.0 19.0 20.5 20.8
60 18.0 17.0 18.0 17.0 19.0
90 14.0 16.5 17.0 15.5 14.5 15.5
120 12.0 14.5 15.5 13.0 12.0 13.4
150 11.0 11.5 12.0 10.5 11.8
180 14.0 11.0 10.0 11.0 10.0 11.2
210 10.0 10.0 9.0 10.0 9.5 9.7
240 9.0 9.0 8.5 9.5 9.0
270 8.0 8.0 8.0 9.0 8.0 8.2
300 8.0 7.0 8.0 7.5 8.0 7.7
(ii) Calculate the average (mean) temperatures at 60 s and 240 s. Record these values in
Table 6.1.
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

19
(c) One of student P’s results is anomalous.
(i) State the time at which this anomalous result occurred.
time = ....................................................... s [1]
(ii) Suggest what could have happened to cause this anomaly.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Explain why the changes in temperature between 240 s and 300 s are very small.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) On the axes provided, sketch a line to show how the average temperature changes with time.
You do not have to plot the points.
30
average
temperature
/ °C
0
0 300
time / s
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/M/J/17

* 0 5 7 9 4 3 6 0 4 0 *

1 hour

DC (SR/SG) 145658
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

3
1 A student investigates the production of gas by yeast cells.
• He adds some yeast suspension to a large test-tube and places the test-tube in a water-bath
at 35 °C.
• He adds 5 g of sucrose to the test-tube and stirs well.
• e attaches a delivery tube to the large test-tube and collects the gas produced in an inverted
H
measuring cylinder as shown in Fig. 1.1.
clamp
measuring
yeast cylinder
suspension
and sucrose
water
water-bath
Fig. 1.1
• e starts the stopclock and measures the volume of gas collected to the nearest 0.1 cm3
H
every 2 minutes for 10 minutes.

4
His measurements are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
time / minutes volume of gas collected / cm3
0 0.0
2 0.5
4 1.5
6 6.2
8
10
(a)
Read the volumes of gas in the measuring cylinder in Fig. 1.2.
cm3 cm3
10
10
15
15
11
11
16
16
12
12
8 minutes 10 minutes
Fig. 1.2
Record these values in Table 1.1. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

5
(b)
On the grid provided, plot a graph of the volume of gas produced (vertical axis) against time.
Draw the best-fit line.
[4]
(c)
The student empties the measuring cylinder. He adds limewater to the measuring cylinder
and shakes it for a few seconds. The limewater turns milky.
(i) Name the gas identified by this test.
........................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Name the process in yeast cells that produces this gas.
........................................................................................................................................[1]

6
(d)
Another student wants to investigate the effect of the amount of sucrose on the production of
gas by yeast. She carries out the same experiment but uses only half the amount of sucrose.
(i) Predict, by adding a new line to your graph in (b), how this would change the volume of
gas collected. Label this new line S.[1]
(ii) State one variable that the student needs to keep constant.
........................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

7

8
2 A student has to identify compounds H and J. Compound J is a solution of a sulfate and has the
same cation as solid H.
• She strongly heats a test-tube containing H.

(a)
• The gas produced is bubbled through a delivery tube into limewater.
• She removes the delivery tube from the limewater before she stops heating.
(i) Complete Fig. 2.1 to show the apparatus when it is connected together.
Label the apparatus and the chemicals.
Fig. 2.1.
[2]
(ii) Explain why it is important that the student removes the delivery tube from the limewater
before she stops heating.
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[1]

(iii) Her observations are shown below.
appearance of solid:
green solid changes to a black solid
appearance of limewater:
colourless solution becomes milky

State what these observations tell you about the identity of H.
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17
9
• She places solution J (which is blue in colour) in a large test-tube and adds an excess of
(b)
sodium hydroxide solution.
• She stirs well and then filters the mixture.
Her description of the filtrate F, and the residue R, is shown below.
colourless
F .................................

blue
R .................................

Use the information in (a)(iii) and (b) to identify H and J.
H is ............................................................................................................................................
J is .............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c)
She heats R, the residue from (b), in a test-tube. She observes that steam and a black solid
are produced.
During this reaction R changes into compound K.
K contains the same cation as H.
K also forms when H is heated in (a).
Identify K.
Compound K is ......................................................................................................................[1]
(d)
Filtrate F in (b) should be a mixture of sodium sulfate and sodium hydroxide. Suggest how
the presence of the sulfate ion can be confirmed.
....................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................[1]

(e)
A student carries out the test in (b) using zinc sulfate solution instead of solution J.

(i) State what the student observes during the test.
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why no residue is seen when the mixture is filtered.
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[1]

10
3 A student measures the focal length, f, of a convex lens using the experimental set-up shown in
Fig. 3.1.
illuminated screen
object convex lens in holder
u v1
Fig. 3.1
He places the lens a distance u = 25.0 cm from the illuminated object. He adjusts the position
of the screen by moving it backwards and forwards along the bench, until a sharp image of the
illuminated object is formed on the screen.
(a) (i) On Fig. 3.1, measure, to the nearest 0.1 cm, the image distance v1 from the lens to the
screen.
v1 = ...................................................... cm [1]
(ii) Fig. 3.1 is drawn one-fifth full size. Calculate the actual image distance v from the lens to
the screen.
Write your answer in Table 3.1.
[1]
(iii) The student repeats the procedure described above for values of u of 35.0 cm, 45.0 cm,
55.0 cm and 65.0 cm.
His results are shown in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
1000 1 1000 1
object distance u / cm image distance v / cm y= / x= /
u cm v cm
25.0
35.0 26.2 28.6 38.2
45.0 22.6 22.2 44.2
55.0 20.5 18.2 48.8
65.0 19.4 15.4 51.5
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

11
1000
Complete Table 3.1 by filling in the remaining values of y (where y = u ) and
1000
x (where x = v ).
Write your values of y and x to one decimal place. [1]
(b)
State one precaution that the student should take while carrying out the experiment to ensure
that the readings he obtains are as accurate as possible.
....................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i) On the grid provided, plot a graph of y (vertical axis) against x. Start the x-axis from zero.
Draw the best-fit straight line.
70
60
50
40
1
y/
cm
30
20
10
0
1
x/
cm
[3]

12
(ii) Use your graph to determine the intercept your line makes with the y-axis.
You may need to extend your graph line until it cuts the y-axis.
intercept = .............................................................[1]

(iii) The focal length, f, of the lens is given by the equation shown.
1000
f=
intercept
Calculate the focal length of the lens.
f = ....................................................... cm [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

13
4 A student investigates the effect of temperature on the growth of germinated seeds.
• She takes several seeds that have been allowed to germinate.
• She places some of the germinated seeds onto some cotton wool in dish A.
• She repeats for dishes B and C.
• She places dish A in a room at 5 °C,

dish B in a room at 15 °C,
and dish C in a room at 25 °C.
• After two days she measures the height of the shoots.
(a)
State two conditions or substances that the seeds need in order to germinate.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b)
State how the student can make sure the shoots of the germinated seeds grow vertically
upwards.
................................................................................................................................................[1]
(c)
Predict the appearance of the germinated seeds after the two days by drawing one shoot in
each dish.
Draw these shoots in Fig. 4.1.
dish A dish B dish C
Fig. 4.1
[3]

14
(d) Describe how she could test for the presence of reducing sugar. Include the observation for a
positive result.
method .......................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
observation ................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(e)
Suggest why the student used more than one germinating seed in each dish.
................................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

15
5 A student investigates the effect of surface area of a solid on the rate of reaction.
He uses the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1.
gas syringe
conical
flask stopclock
hydrochloric
magnesium
acid
ribbon
Fig. 5.1
(a)
1. He places one 3 cm piece of magnesium ribbon into the conical flask.
2. He adds 25 cm3 of hydrochloric acid.
3. He connects the flask to the gas syringe and starts the stopclock.
List the measurements he should record in this experiment.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................[2]

16
(b)
He repeats the steps in (a) but uses two 3 cm pieces of magnesium ribbon instead of one
piece.
(i) State how the observations and measurements he makes are different from those in (a).
observations .......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
measurements ...................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest how the student should continue the experiment to obtain a more reliable
conclusion about the effect of surface area of a solid on the rate of reaction.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State two factors, other than the volume of hydrochloric acid, which must be kept
constant throughout the investigation.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c)
Name the gas produced in this reaction and describe the test to confirm its identity.
name of gas ...............................................................................................................................
test to confirm identity ................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

17
6 A student investigates energy transfer.
He attaches a mass onto a piece of string which is attached to a clamp.
He lays a rough cloth on the bench and places a ball bearing, with a diameter of 6 mm, onto the
cloth next to the hanging mass as shown in Fig. 6.1.
He places a metre rule on the cloth alongside the ball bearing so that the ball bearing is at the
0 cm mark.
clamp
string
bench with rough cloth
ball bearing
mass
100 cm 0 cm
metre rule
Fig. 6.1
He pulls the mass to the side to make an angle θ = 10° as shown in Fig. 6.2.
He lets go of the mass and as it swings down it hits the ball bearing which moves to the left as
shown in Fig. 6.3.
clamp clamp
θ
ball bearing mass ball bearing mass
d
100 cm 0 cm 100 cm 0 cm
Fig. 6.2 Fig. 6.3
He measures the distance d travelled by the ball bearing.
He repeats the experiment for angles θ = 20°, 30°, 40°, 50°, 60° and 70°.

18
(a)
Fig. 6.4 shows the distance travelled by the ball bearing at θ = 20°.
41 40 39
direction
of travel
Fig. 6.4
Read the distance on the metre rule and record it in Table 6.1.
Table 6.1
angle θ / ° distance / cm
10 20.3
20
30 59.2
40 56.2
50 88.0
60 91.9
70 95.4
[1]
(b)
The student plotted his results onto a graph as shown in Fig. 6.5.
100
80
60
distance / cm
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
angle θ / °
Fig. 6.5
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

19
(i) Plot the point at θ = 20°.
Draw a line of best-fit.

[2]
(ii) Use your graph to describe in detail the relationship between the angle θ and the distance
moved by the ball bearing.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[2]
(c)
Another student carries out a similar experiment to investigate how the distance moved by
the ball bearing changes as the diameter of the ball bearing changes.
State the changes that he should make to this experiment. Include the diameters of the ball
bearings to be used.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................[3]
(d)
In these experiments, some of the energy of the mass transfers to the ball bearing.
(i) Complete the sentence by adding the names of the energies involved in the
transformation.
The .................................................................................. energy of the mass transfers to
.................................................................................................. energy of the ball bearing.

[1]
(ii) Suggest why this experiment is carried out on a rough cloth instead of the surface of the
bench.
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

* 0 5 7 9 4 3 6 0 4 0 *

1 hour

DC (SR/SG) 145658
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

3
1 A student investigates the production of gas by yeast cells.
• He adds some yeast suspension to a large test-tube and places the test-tube in a water-bath
at 35 °C.
• He adds 5 g of sucrose to the test-tube and stirs well.
• e attaches a delivery tube to the large test-tube and collects the gas produced in an inverted
H
measuring cylinder as shown in Fig. 1.1.
clamp
measuring
yeast cylinder
suspension
and sucrose
water
water-bath
Fig. 1.1
• e starts the stopclock and measures the volume of gas collected to the nearest 0.1 cm3
H
every 2 minutes for 10 minutes.

4
His measurements are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
time / minutes volume of gas collected / cm3
0 0.0
2 0.5
4 1.5
6 6.2
8
10
(a)
Read the volumes of gas in the measuring cylinder in Fig. 1.2.
cm3 cm3
10
10
15
15
11
11
16
16
12
12
8 minutes 10 minutes
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

5
(b)
On the grid provided, plot a graph of the volume of gas produced (vertical axis) against time.
Draw the best-fit line.
[4]
(c)
The student empties the measuring cylinder. He adds limewater to the measuring cylinder
and shakes it for a few seconds. The limewater turns milky.
(i) Name the gas identified by this test.
........................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Name the process in yeast cells that produces this gas.
........................................................................................................................................[1]

6
(d)
Another student wants to investigate the effect of the amount of sucrose on the production of
gas by yeast. She carries out the same experiment but uses only half the amount of sucrose.
(i) Predict, by adding a new line to your graph in (b), how this would change the volume of
gas collected. Label this new line S.[1]
(ii) State one variable that the student needs to keep constant.
........................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

7

8
2 A student has to identify compounds H and J. Compound J is a solution of a sulfate and has the
same cation as solid H.
• She strongly heats a test-tube containing H.

(a)
• The gas produced is bubbled through a delivery tube into limewater.
• She removes the delivery tube from the limewater before she stops heating.
(i) Complete Fig. 2.1 to show the apparatus when it is connected together.
Label the apparatus and the chemicals.
Fig. 2.1.
[2]
(ii) Explain why it is important that the student removes the delivery tube from the limewater
before she stops heating.
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[1]

(iii) Her observations are shown below.
appearance of solid:
green solid changes to a black solid
appearance of limewater:
colourless solution becomes milky

State what these observations tell you about the identity of H.
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17
9
• She places solution J (which is blue in colour) in a large test-tube and adds an excess of
(b)
sodium hydroxide solution.
• She stirs well and then filters the mixture.
Her description of the filtrate F, and the residue R, is shown below.
colourless
F .................................

blue
R .................................

Use the information in (a)(iii) and (b) to identify H and J.
H is ............................................................................................................................................
J is .............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c)
She heats R, the residue from (b), in a test-tube. She observes that steam and a black solid
are produced.
During this reaction R changes into compound K.
K contains the same cation as H.
K also forms when H is heated in (a).
Identify K.
Compound K is ......................................................................................................................[1]
(d)
Filtrate F in (b) should be a mixture of sodium sulfate and sodium hydroxide. Suggest how
the presence of the sulfate ion can be confirmed.
....................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................[1]

(e)
A student carries out the test in (b) using zinc sulfate solution instead of solution J.

(i) State what the student observes during the test.
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why no residue is seen when the mixture is filtered.
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[1]

10
3 A student measures the focal length, f, of a convex lens using the experimental set-up shown in
Fig. 3.1.
illuminated screen
object convex lens in holder
u v1
Fig. 3.1
He places the lens a distance u = 25.0 cm from the illuminated object. He adjusts the position
of the screen by moving it backwards and forwards along the bench, until a sharp image of the
illuminated object is formed on the screen.
(a) (i) On Fig. 3.1, measure, to the nearest 0.1 cm, the image distance v1 from the lens to the
screen.
v1 = ...................................................... cm [1]
(ii) Fig. 3.1 is drawn one-fifth full size. Calculate the actual image distance v from the lens to
the screen.
Write your answer in Table 3.1.
[1]
(iii) The student repeats the procedure described above for values of u of 35.0 cm, 45.0 cm,
55.0 cm and 65.0 cm.
Table 3.1
1000 1 1000 1
object distance u / cm image distance v / cm y= / x= /
u cm v cm
25.0
35.0 26.2 28.6 38.2
45.0 22.6 22.2 44.2
55.0 20.5 18.2 48.8
65.0 19.4 15.4 51.5
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

11
1000
Complete Table 3.1 by filling in the remaining values of y (where y = u ) and
1000
x (where x = v ).
Write your values of y and x to one decimal place. [1]
(b)
State one precaution that the student should take while carrying out the experiment to ensure
that the readings he obtains are as accurate as possible.
....................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i) On the grid provided, plot a graph of y (vertical axis) against x. Start the x-axis from zero.
70
60
50
40
1
y/
cm
30
20
10
0
1
x/
cm
[3]

12
(ii) Use your graph to determine the intercept your line makes with the y-axis.
You may need to extend your graph line until it cuts the y-axis.
intercept = .............................................................[1]

(iii) The focal length, f, of the lens is given by the equation shown.
1000
f=
intercept
Calculate the focal length of the lens.
f = ....................................................... cm [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

13
4 A student investigates the effect of temperature on the growth of germinated seeds.
• She takes several seeds that have been allowed to germinate.
• She places some of the germinated seeds onto some cotton wool in dish A.
• She repeats for dishes B and C.
• She places dish A in a room at 5 °C,

dish B in a room at 15 °C,
and dish C in a room at 25 °C.
• After two days she measures the height of the shoots.
(a)
State two conditions or substances that the seeds need in order to germinate.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b)
State how the student can make sure the shoots of the germinated seeds grow vertically
upwards.
................................................................................................................................................[1]
(c)
Predict the appearance of the germinated seeds after the two days by drawing one shoot in
each dish.
Draw these shoots in Fig. 4.1.
dish A dish B dish C
Fig. 4.1
[3]

14
(d) Describe how she could test for the presence of reducing sugar. Include the observation for a
positive result.
method .......................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
observation ................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(e)
Suggest why the student used more than one germinating seed in each dish.
................................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

15
5 A student investigates the effect of surface area of a solid on the rate of reaction.
He uses the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1.
gas syringe
conical
flask stopclock
hydrochloric
magnesium
acid
ribbon
Fig. 5.1
(a)
1. He places one 3 cm piece of magnesium ribbon into the conical flask.
2. He adds 25 cm3 of hydrochloric acid.
3. He connects the flask to the gas syringe and starts the stopclock.
List the measurements he should record in this experiment.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................[2]

16
(b)
He repeats the steps in (a) but uses two 3 cm pieces of magnesium ribbon instead of one
piece.
(i) State how the observations and measurements he makes are different from those in (a).
observations .......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
measurements ...................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest how the student should continue the experiment to obtain a more reliable
conclusion about the effect of surface area of a solid on the rate of reaction.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State two factors, other than the volume of hydrochloric acid, which must be kept
constant throughout the investigation.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c)
Name the gas produced in this reaction and describe the test to confirm its identity.
name of gas ...............................................................................................................................
test to confirm identity ................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

17
6 A student investigates energy transfer.
He attaches a mass onto a piece of string which is attached to a clamp.
He lays a rough cloth on the bench and places a ball bearing, with a diameter of 6 mm, onto the
cloth next to the hanging mass as shown in Fig. 6.1.
He places a metre rule on the cloth alongside the ball bearing so that the ball bearing is at the
0 cm mark.
clamp
string
bench with rough cloth
ball bearing
mass
100 cm 0 cm
metre rule
Fig. 6.1
He pulls the mass to the side to make an angle θ = 10° as shown in Fig. 6.2.
He lets go of the mass and as it swings down it hits the ball bearing which moves to the left as
shown in Fig. 6.3.
clamp clamp
θ
ball bearing mass ball bearing mass
d
100 cm 0 cm 100 cm 0 cm
Fig. 6.2 Fig. 6.3
He measures the distance d travelled by the ball bearing.
He repeats the experiment for angles θ = 20°, 30°, 40°, 50°, 60° and 70°.

18
(a)
Fig. 6.4 shows the distance travelled by the ball bearing at θ = 20°.
41 40 39
direction
of travel
Fig. 6.4
Read the distance on the metre rule and record it in Table 6.1.
Table 6.1
angle θ / ° distance / cm
10 20.3
20
30 59.2
40 56.2
50 88.0
60 91.9
70 95.4
[1]
(b)
The student plotted his results onto a graph as shown in Fig. 6.5.
100
80
60
distance / cm
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
angle θ / °
Fig. 6.5
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

19
(i) Plot the point at θ = 20°.
Draw a line of best-fit.

[2]
(ii) Use your graph to describe in detail the relationship between the angle θ and the distance
moved by the ball bearing.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[2]
(c)
Another student carries out a similar experiment to investigate how the distance moved by
the ball bearing changes as the diameter of the ball bearing changes.
State the changes that he should make to this experiment. Include the diameters of the ball
bearings to be used.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................[3]
(d)
In these experiments, some of the energy of the mass transfers to the ball bearing.
(i) Complete the sentence by adding the names of the energies involved in the
transformation.
The .................................................................................. energy of the mass transfers to
.................................................................................................. energy of the ball bearing.

[1]
(ii) Suggest why this experiment is carried out on a rough cloth instead of the surface of the
bench.
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/63/M/J/17

Grade thresholds – November 2017

Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0653 (Combined Science) in the November 2017 examination.

maximum raw
mark A B C D E F G
available
Component 11 40 – – 20 18 16 12 8
Component 12 40 – – 21 19 18 16 14
Component 13 40 – – 21 19 17 15 13
Component 21 40 28 23 19 17 15 13 11
Component 22 40 26 22 19 17 16 14 12
Component 23 40 28 24 20 17 15 12 9
Component 31 80 – – 37 30 22 17 12
Component 32 80 – – 34 29 24 19 14
Component 33 80 – – 35 31 27 23 19
Component 41 80 48 38 26 24 20 17 14
Component 42 80 44 36 26 24 21 18 16
Component 43 80 41 33 24 22 19 17 15
Component 51 30 22 19 17 14 12 10 8
Component 52 30 22 19 17 15 12 10 8
Component 61 60 35 29 24 19 15 11 7
Component 62 60 33 28 23 19 15 12 9
Component 63 60 34 27 21 18 15 12 9
Combination of
Components
BX 21, 41, 51 155 131 107 84 74 64 54 44
BY 22, 42, 52 143 123 103 84 75 66 57 48
CX 21, 41, 61 149 125 101 77 67 58 48 38
CY 22, 42, 62 136 116 96 76 68 60 52 44
CZ 23, 43, 63 137 116 95 74 65 56 47 38
Learn more! For more information please visit www.cambridgeinternational.org/igcse or contact Customer Services
on +44 (0)1223 553554 or email info@cambridgeinternational.org
Combination of
Components
FX 11, 31, 51 – – – 99 83 68 53 38
GX 11, 31, 61 – – – 92 77 62 47 32
GY 12, 32, 62 – – – 89 78 67 56 45
GZ 13, 33, 63 – – – 89 79 69 59 49

Paper 5 Practical Test October/November 2017
* 0 9 6 5 3 8 8 3 6 5 *
with the scripts.
e-mail info@cie.org.uk
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
DC (RW) 139616/2
2
between them.
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/O/N/17

3
Question 1
Each candidate will require:
(i) 20 cm3 milk in a small beaker, labelled milk (see note 1)
[MH] (ii) 10 cm3 4% trypsin in a small beaker, labelled 4% enzyme solution (see note 2)
(iii) 2 test-tubes (125 × 15 mm)
(iv) three 5 cm3 syringes without needle
(v) a stirring rod
(vi) distilled water
(vii) a stopclock
(viii) a means of labelling test-tubes.
Notes
1. Milk should be made as a 2% solution from powdered skimmed milk, not fresh milk, with a protein
content of approximately 35%.
2. Powdered trypsin made up to 4% solution with distilled water.
Prior to the exam the supervisor should test that when equal volumes of milk and enzyme are
mixed at room temperature, the milk should clear in about one minute. The enzyme concentration
may be adjusted accordingly. Candidates must not be made aware of any changes to the enzyme
concentration.
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/O/N/17 [Turn over

4
Question 2
(i) approximately 30 cm3 distilled water labelled distilled water
[C] [MH] (ii) approximately 3.0 g solid calcium oxide labelled H
(iii) 10 marble chips (3–4 mm)
(iv) approximately 20 cm3 1.0 mol dm–3 hydrochloric acid labelled hydrochloric acid
[C] [MH] (v) approximately 10 cm3 0.5 mol dm–3 copper nitrate solution labelled J
[MH] [N] (vi) approximately 20 cm3 1.0 mol dm–3 ammonia solution labelled ammonia
(vii) Universal indicator paper with access to pH chart
(viii) a stirring rod
(ix) a delivery tube to fit test-tube (125 mm × 15 mm)
(x) 100 cm3 beaker
(xi) 4 test-tubes (125 mm × 15 mm)
(xii) 1 large test-tube (150 mm × 25 mm)
(xiii) means to support test-tubes
(xiv) a filter funnel
(xv) filter paper
(xvi) safety glasses or goggles.
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/O/N/17

5
Question 3
(i) a d.c. power source of approximately 1.5 V to 2 V. This should preferably be a type C
dry cell. If candidates are supplied with a power source of variable voltage output, the
voltage should be set by the supervisor and fixed e.g. taped
(ii) a low voltage lamp that glows when connected to the power supply. The lamp must be
supplied in a suitable holder
(iii) a voltmeter capable of measuring up to 2.5 V with minimum resolution of 0.1 V
(iv) an ammeter capable of measuring up to 1.00 A with a minimum resolution of 0.05 A
(v) a switch. The switch may be an integral part of the power supply
(vi) a wooden or plastic metre rule
(vii) approximately 100 cm of straight, bare constantan wire of diameter 0.32 mm (30 swg),
taped to a metre rule at two places (between the 5.0 cm and 10.0 cm mark and between
the 90.0 cm and 95.0 cm mark). The zero end of the wire is to be labelled S.
(viii) a sliding contact, labelled C. This may be a crocodile clip attached to a lead.
Notes
1. The circuit shown in Fig. 3.1 below must be set up for the candidates. The crocodile clip must
not be connected to the resistance wire. At changeover, check that the circuit is still connected
correctly and working.
resistance wire
C
S
0 cm 100 cm
metre rule
power supply
Fig. 3.1
3. Spare lamps should be available.

6
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/O/N/17

7
BLANK PAGE

8
0653/51
October/November 2017
General
for each session and a copy of the ‘Supervisor’s Results’.
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
SIGNED .........................................................................
Supervisor
CENTRE NUMBER ....................................
of the examination.
NAME ......................................................................................................................................................
(in block capitals)
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/O/N/17


* 5 9 1 5 9 9 1 0 0 1 *
with the scripts.
e-mail info@cie.org.uk
phone +44 1223 553554
fax +44 1223 553558
DC (RW) 139618/2
2
between them.
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/O/N/17

3
Question 1
(i) a pea seedling (see note 1)
(ii) a hand lens
(iii) a white tile
(iv) a 30 cm ruler graduated in mm
(v) 10 cm3 seed puree labelled seed puree (see note 2)
[N] (vi) iodine solution and dropper, labelled iodine solution
[C] (vii) biuret solution and dropper, labelled biuret solution
(viii) 2 test-tubes (125 mm × 15 mm) and a means of supporting them.
Notes
1. Germinate the pea seeds and allow them to germinate until the root and shoot are at least 5 mm
long.
2. Take some of the same pea seeds as in note 1 but only soak overnight and liquidise 100 g with
100 cm3 distilled water to form a runny paste. This should provide sufficient puree for about
10 candidates.

4
Question 2
(i) approximately 50 cm3 0.4 mol dm–3 sodium carbonate solution labelled H
[MH] (ii) a test-tube (125 mm × 15 mm) containing 1 cm depth of sodium carbonate solid, stoppered
and labelled H
(iii) approximately 5 cm3 0.5 mol dm–3 ammonium sulfate solution labelled ammonium
sulfate
(iv) approximately 5 cm3 0.1 mol dm–3 copper sulfate solution labelled copper sulfate
(v) approximately 5 cm3 0.1 mol dm–3 iron(III) sulfate solution labelled iron(III) sulfate
(vi) approximately 5 cm3 0.1 mol dm–3 zinc sulfate solution labelled zinc sulfate
(vii) approximately 10 cm3 1.0 mol dm–3 hydrochloric acid labelled hydrochloric acid
(viii) red litmus paper
(ix) blue litmus paper
(x) a stirring rod
(xi) 5 test-tubes (125 mm × 15 mm) and a means to support them
(xii) Bunsen burner and means to light it
(xiii) test-tube holder or stand and clamp for holding test-tube
(xiv) safety glasses or goggles.
case, candidates will have to rinse a test-tube with distilled water which must be provided.
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/O/N/17

5
Question 3
(i) a 250 cm3 graduated beaker – if the beaker is ungraduated, lines should be drawn on the
side of the beaker to indicate the 100 cm3 level and the 200 cm3 level
(ii) a thermometer, −10 °C to 110 °C graduated in 1 °C intervals
(iii) a supply of hot water (see note 1)
(iv) a stopclock.
Notes
1. Each candidate will require 300 cm3 of hot water. The hot water must be available throughout the
experiment and should be maintained at an approximately constant temperature of between 80 °C
and 100 °C.
2. Candidates should be warned of the dangers of burns or scalds when using very hot water.
3. There should be access to spare beakers, thermometers and hot water in case of breakages or
spillage.
Empty the water from the beaker and check that the apparatus is intact.

6
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/O/N/17

7
BLANK PAGE

8
0653/52
October/November 2017
General
for each session and a copy of the ‘Supervisor’s Results’.
NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................
SIGNED .........................................................................
Supervisor
CENTRE NUMBER ....................................
of the examination.
NAME ......................................................................................................................................................
(in block capitals)
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/CI/O/N/17

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core) October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

0653/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
1 B 1
2 B 1
3 C 1
4 B 1
5 B 1
6 C 1
7 D 1
8 C 1
9 D 1
10 A 1
11 A 1
12 C 1
13 B 1
14 B 1
15 D 1
16 B 1
17 A 1
18 B 1
19 A 1
20 C 1
21 A 1
22 D 1
23 D 1
24 C 1
25 A 1
26 B 1
27 C 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 B 1
30 A 1
31 C 1
32 C 1
33 B 1
34 A 1
35 D 1
36 B 1
37 C 1
38 B 1
39 A 1
40 A 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 C 1
4 C 1
5 B 1
6 C 1
7 B 1
8 B 1
9 D 1
10 D 1
11 A 1
12 A 1
13 A 1
14 B 1
15 D 1
16 B 1
17 D 1
18 B 1
19 A 1
20 B 1
21 A 1
22 C 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 A 1
26 B 1
27 C 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 B 1
30 D 1
31 D 1
32 D 1
33 A 1
34 D 1
35 A 1
36 C 1
37 B 1
38 A 1
39 B 1
40 D 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 B 1
2 B 1
3 C 1
4 C 1
5 C 1
6 B 1
7 A 1
8 C 1
9 C 1
10 A 1
11 A 1
12 D 1
13 B 1
14 B 1
15 D 1
16 D 1
17 B 1
18 B 1
19 A 1
20 D 1
21 A 1
22 A 1
23 C 1
24 D 1
25 A 1
26 B 1
27 C 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 B 1
30 C 1
31 C 1
32 C 1
33 B 1
34 D 1
35 A 1
36 C 1
37 C 1
38 A 1
39 B 1
40 B 1


Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 A 1
4 B 1
5 D 1
6 C 1
7 C 1
8 D 1
9 D 1
10 A 1
11 A 1
12 C 1
13 D 1
14 B 1
15 D 1
16 C 1
17 A 1
18 B 1
19 B 1
20 A 1
21 C 1
22 C 1
23 C 1
24 B 1
25 D 1
26 B 1
27 A 1
28 A 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 B 1
30 C 1
31 B 1
32 C 1
33 D 1
34 D 1
35 B 1
36 C 1
37 A 1
38 C 1
39 A 1
40 C 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 C 1
4 C 1
5 D 1
6 B 1
7 B 1
8 D 1
9 D 1
10 D 1
11 A 1
12 A 1
13 C 1
14 B 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 A 1
18 C 1
19 B 1
20 A 1
21 D 1
22 B 1
23 C 1
24 B 1
25 D 1
26 B 1
27 D 1
28 B 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 B 1
30 C 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 A 1
34 D 1
35 A 1
36 C 1
37 A 1
38 D 1
39 A 1
40 B 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 D 1
4 C 1
5 C 1
6 A 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 A 1
10 D 1
11 A 1
12 D 1
13 B 1
14 B 1
15 D 1
16 D 1
17 C 1
18 B 1
19 B 1
20 A 1
21 C 1
22 D 1
23 C 1
24 C 1
25 B 1
26 B 1
27 A 1
28 A 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 D 1
30 C 1
31 A 1
32 A 1
33 B 1
34 D 1
35 D 1
36 C 1
37 A 1
38 B 1
39 A 1
40 D 1


Paper 3 Core Theory October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) red blood cells ; 4

pulmonary vein ;
aorta ;
capillaries ;
1(b)(i) activity is affected by the adrenaline ; 1
1(b)(ii) (destroyed) by the liver ; 1
1(c) A trachea ; 2
B bronchiole ;
1(d) becomes faster ; 2

becomes deeper ;
2(a)(i) (negative) cathode and 1

(positive) anode ;
2(a)(ii) (negative) lead ; 2

(positive) bromine / Br2 ;
2(a)(iii) ionic / electrovalent ; 1
2(a)(iv) new substance(s) made ; 1
2(b)(i) hydrochloric (acid) / HCl ; 1
2(b)(ii) Increases ; 1
2(b)(iii) (test) (acidified) silver nitrate ; 2

(observation) white precipitate / solid ;

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a)(i) 80 waves / cycles / vibrations / oscillations per second ; 1
3(a)(ii) first note louder than second note ; 1
3(a)(iii) yes (no mark) 1

frequency range of guitar lies within frequency range of normal human hearing / is within range 20 Hz – 20 kHz ;
3(b) electromagnetic waves ; 1
3(c)(i) any two from max 2

upright ;
virtual ;
same size ;
3(c)(ii) 45° ; 1
3(d)(i) answer in range 80–84 N ; 1
3(d)(ii) string breaks (as graph goes up vertically) / permanently stretches / owtte ; 1
4(a) Any two from max 2

(large) petals ;
anther(s) / are inside the flower ;
stigma / is inside the flower ;
4(b) (flower) D AND any two from max 2

anther is higher than stigma ;
anther produces pollen ;
pollen is more likely to fall on it ;
4(c) sexual reproduction ; max 2

from different parents / different genetic material ;
(seeds contain) some (genetic material) from each parent ;

PUBLISHED 2017
4(d)(i) primroses → snails → thrushes → buzzards 2

correct order ;
correct arrows ;
4(d)(ii) snails, thrushes, buzzards ; 2

(get their energy by) feeding on other organisms ;
5(a)(i) molecule / compound of carbon and hydrogen / C and H bonded ; 2

only (C&H) ;
5(a)(ii) C=C double bond ; 2

4 correct C–H bonds ;
H H
C C
H H
5(a)(iii) carbon dioxide / CO2 ; 2

water / H2O ;
5(b)(i) coal ; 2
petroleum ;
5(b)(ii) methane ; 1

065
53/31 Cambridg
ge IGCSE – Marrk Scheme October/Novem
mber
PUBLISHED 2017
Q
6(a)(i) fuse ; 1
6(a)(ii) to prrotect fan heaterr from overload // current too high

h; 1
6(a)(iii) (both
h) switch 1 and switch
s 2; 1
6(b)(i) 2
corre
ect symbol for ammeter ;
ammmeter in fan motoor branch, all cirrcuit connectionss complete ;
6(b)(ii) R=V V / I or = 240 / 0

0.2 ; 3
(=) 1
1200 ;
ohmm(s) / Ω ;
Q
7(a) carb
bon dioxide + wa ater ; 2
→ suugar / glucose ;
7(b)(i) any time between 100.00 and 13.00 ; 2

maxximum rate of oxygen production
n / gradient of gra
aph is steep(est) ;

PUBLISHED 2017
7(b)(ii) letter X drawn at 14.00 anywhere below line graph ; 2

(rate of) photosynthesis (oxygen production) dependent on (amount of) light ;
7(c) reduces / causes less / prevents transpiration ; 1
8(a)(i) paint(ing) / oil(ing) / grease / plastic coat / AVP ; 1
8(a)(ii) oxygen ; 1
8(a)(iii) add salt / catalyst / increase temperature / heat ; 1
8(b)(i) 1
calcium
(calcium) + water → + Hydrogen ;
hydroxide
8(b)(ii) exothermic ; 1
8(b)(iii) (calcium is) less reactive / sodium is more reactive ; 1
8(c)(i) transition (metals / elements) ; 1
8(c)(ii) (copper alloys are) harder / more resistant to wear ; 1
9(a)(i) friction / frictional force / resistance force ; 1
9(a)(ii) equal (magnitude) ; 2

opposite (direction) ;
9(b) light ; 2
electrical ;

PUBLISHED 2017
9(c)(i) gap will close : 2

(thermal) expansion (of bridge structure) owtte ;
9(c)(ii) evaporates ; 2
faster ;
9(c)(iii) line drawn between the two bottom boxes ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) blood ; 4
ovary ;
14 ;
fertilised ;
1(b) sperm cell / egg cell ; 2

zygote / body cell ;
1(c) genetic material is identical / clones ; 2

because it has come from same egg and sperm / zygote ;
2(a)(i) (metal A) calcium / Ca 2

(metal B) magnesium / Mg
(metal C) zinc / Zn
(metal D) iron / Fe ;;
2(a)(ii) hydrogen ; 1
2(a)(iii) increases (rate) ; 1
2(a)(iv) any one from max 1

change / increase / decrease concentration / surface area / (solid) particle size ;
use / add a catalyst ;
2(b) (iron(II) ions) green ppt / solid ; 2

(iron(III) ions) brown ppt / solid ;
2(c)(i) Any two from 2

high_density ;
high_melting point ;
(form) coloured compounds ;
catalysts ;

PUBLISHED 2017
2(c)(ii) (alloys are) harder / more resistant to wear / more resistant to corrosion ; 1
3(a) force arrow vertically upward labelled ‘uplift’ ; 3

force arrow vertically downward labelled ‘weight’ or ‘gravitational force’ ;
(the two vertical) arrows in contact with helicopter / of equal length ;
3(b) chemical ; 3
kinetic ;
gravitational / potential ;
3(c)(i) one section of plot correct ; 2

all 3 sections of the plot correct ;
3(c)(ii) distance = speed × time (= 50 × 100) ; 2

= 5000 (m) ;

PUBLISHED 2017
4(a) iodine ; 2
goes (from brown) to blue-black ;
4(b) Any three from max 3

results show starch present (around A and / or B) ;
inactive / denatured enzyme ;
because A is boiled ;
because B is acidic / pH3 ;
4(c) Any two from max 2

breaks down large / insoluble molecules ;
into small / soluble molecules ;
so that they can be absorbed ;
4(d) molar ; 3
flat / has cusps / large surface area ;
for grinding food into smaller pieces ;
5(a) number of protons in an atom / nucleus ; 1
5(b)(i) C; 2
A;
5(b)(ii) ionic / electrovalent ; 1
5(b)(iii) releases heat / thermal energy / temperature goes up / gets hotter ; 1
5(c)(i) (pale) green ; 1
5(c)(ii) bromine / Br2 ; 1
5(d)(i) electrolysis ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
5(d)(ii) add water / use (copper chloride) solution ; 1
6(a)(ii) metal / named metal ; 1
6(b)(i) arrows up and across room ; 2

arrows down and back towards radiator ;
6(b)(ii) convection ; 1
6(c)(i) X-rays ; 1
6(c)(ii) tick under radio waves ; 1
6(d) description of charging by friction ; 3

reference to positive and negative charges / opposite charges attract ;
some experimental detail ;
7(a)(i) lower surface 2

when upper leaf is greased water loss is not reduced by much ;
when lower surface is covered there is a great reduction in water loss ;
7(a)(ii) most transpiration occurs through the stomata ; 2

which are (mostly) found on lower surface of leaf ;
7(b) xylem ; 2
position of tissue correctly labelled ;
7(c) carbon dioxide, sugar / glucose, oxygen ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
7(d) Any two from max 2

carnivores cannot produce their own food / cannot photosynthesise ;
carnivores get energy by eating herbivores ;
herbivores feed on producers ;
8(a)(i) 1
(copper carbon
+ carbon → copper +
oxide) dioxide ;
8(a)(ii) respiration / (reaction of) acid + carbonate / thermal_decomposition / fermentation ; 1
8(a)(iii) (solid) coal ; 2

(liquid) petroleum ;
8(b)(i) ethanol ; 1
8(b)(ii) compound / molecule containing / of only carbon and hydrogen ; 1
8(b)(iii) (because it) contains oxygen / O (as well as C and H) ; 1

065
53/32 Cambridg
mber
PUBLISHED 2017
Q
9(a)(i) two mmore rays from hole

h to lens ; 2
all rayys emerge from lens parallel ;
9
9(a)(ii) focal length ; 1
9(b)(i) correcct symbol for variable resistor ; 1
9
9(b)(ii) less than 20 A ; 2
currennt from source is
s larger than in e
each branch ;
9
9(b)(iii) remaiins lit (no mark) 1
still a complete circuitt through that brranch owtte ;


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) xylem ; 3
mesophyll cells ;
stomata ;
1(b) any two from max 2
photosynthesis ;
transport of ions ;
support / turgor ;
AVP ;
1(c) ions / named ion ; max 2
soluble nutrients / named soluble nutrient ;
hormones / named hormone ;
carbon dioxide ;
AVP ;
1(d)(i) transport of oxygen ; 1
1(d)(ii) to replace iron lost during menstruation / period ; 1
1(d)(iii) feeling tired / dizzy ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
2(a)(i) Any two from max 2
electrical conductor ;
thermal / heat conductor ;
malleable ;
ductile ;
sonorous ;
2(a)(ii) high density / high melting point / coloured compounds ; 1
2(b)(i) 1
sulfuric iron
(iron) + Î + hydrogen
acid sulfate
;
2(b)(ii) (anion) chloride ; 2
(acid) hydrochloric (acid) ;
2(c) number of protons in an atom / nucleus ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a) (Q =) friction / (water) resistance ; 2
(R =) gravitational force / weight ;
3(b) (forces P and R) equal / balanced ; 1
3(c)(i) P / uplift ; 1
3(c)(ii) 1
visible micro- radio
gamma
light waves waves ;
3(c)(iii) sound ; 1
3(d) nuclear / batteries ; 1
3(e) either 30 km = 30 000 m or 1 hour = 3600 s ; 2
(30 000 / 3600) = 8.3 m / s ;

PUBLISHED 2017
4(a) A oesophagus ; 2
B colon / large intestine ;
4(b)(i) stomach ; max 3
any two from
stomach has acidic conditions ;
pH 2 is acidic ;
enzyme only worked in tube 1 / tube 1 was acidic / at the optimum pH ;
4(b)(ii) enzyme will become inactive / destroyed at this temperature ; 1
4(b)(iii) large / protein molecules are broken down ; 2
by the action of an enzyme / acid ;
4(b)(iv) chewing food (in mouth) ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
5(a)(i) distillation ; 1
5(a)(ii) decrease ; 1
5(b) (filtration) remove (named) solids ; 2
(chlorination) kill microbes / bacteria / sterilizes ;
5(c)(i) (refinery gas) bottled gas / heating / cooking ; 2
(gas oil) diesel fuel / diesel engines / diesel vehicles ;
5(c)(ii) compound / molecule containing hydrogen and carbon ; 2
only (C and H);
5(d)(i) A F; 1
5(d)(ii) B; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
6(a) temperature at which a solid changes to a liquid owtte 1
6(b)(i) conduction and convection ; 1
6(b)(ii) (reduces convection) as no (gas) circulation (possible) owtte ; 2
(reduces conduction) as foam is a bad conductor owtte ;
6(c) infra-red 1
6(d) d = m / V = (1900 / 2000) ; 2
= 0.95 (g / cm3) ;

PUBLISHED 2017
7(a) transpiration ; 1
7(b)(i) carbon dioxide from the air ; 2
is used in photosynthesis / reacts with water ;
7(b)(ii) by respiration ; 2
carbon dioxide released ;
7(c) rainfall reduced (no mark) 1
less water being transpired / evaporated from trees ;
7(d) soil easily eroded ; 2
due to lack of tree roots ;

PUBLISHED 2017
8(a)(i) (left) cathode ; 2
(right) anode ;
8(a)(ii) orange / brown gas ; 1
8(b) (reduced) oxygen is removed ; 1
8(c) K 2
Ca
Mg
Cu ;;
8(d)(i) any two from 2
heat / increase temperature ;
increase surface area of magnesium ;
increase concentration of acid ;
use / add a catalyst ;
8(d)(ii) magnesium chloride ; 1
8(d)(iii) filter / filtration ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
9(a) 4
motor in parallel with headlamps ;
variable resistor in motor branch, correct symbol ;
switch for headlamps after motor branch, before first headlamp branch ;
all wires required for complete circuit ;
9(b) (decreasing resistance) increases current (so faster motor) ; 1
9(c) in parallel ; 3
the same as ;
less than ;
9(d) rain / water / damaged insulation / AVP ; 2
protect from rain or water / use of protective cover / sensible suggestion related to hazard identified ;


Paper 4 Extended Theory October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017

pulmonary vein ;
aorta ;
capillaries ;
1(b) thick (wall) ; 2

to resist bursting / withstand high blood pressure ;
1(c) A trachea ; 2
B bronchiole ;
1(d) (nicotine) causes addiction / increases blood pressure / leads to heart disease ; 2

(tar) increases mucus / (tar) builds up in lungs / paralyses / destroys cilia / can cause cancer / avp ;
2(a)(i) (negative) cathode and 1

(positive) anode ;
2(a)(ii) (negative) potassium / K ; 2

(positive) bromine / Br2 ;
2(a)(iii) ions must be able to move / be mobile ; 1
2(b)(i) (K2CO3 (s) + 2) HCl (aq) → 2 KCl (aq) + CO2 (g) + H2O (l) 3
HCl ; RHS ; all three states ;
2(b)(ii) (test) (acidified) silver nitrate (solution) ; 2

(observation) white precipitate / solid ;

PUBLISHED 2017
2(b)(iii) filter (to remove excess solid / potassium carbonate) ; max 2

and then one from
heat / boil the solution / filtrate / mixture / diagram showing this process ;
reference to evaporation / removal of water ;
3(a)(i) 80 cycles / vibrations / oscillations per second ; 1
3(a)(ii) first note louder than second note ; 1
3(a)(iii) yes (no mark) 1

frequency range lies within frequency range of normal human hearing ;
3(b) radio / electromagnetic waves travel (much) faster than sound waves / ora ; 1
3(c) 2
both rays shown as continuous straight lines, being reflected from and touching the mirror ;
angles of incidence and reflection the same by inspection and at least one arrow in the correct direction ;
3(d)(i) extension / deformation is proportional to the load / cause / force = a constant × extension / F = kx ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(d)(ii) tension in the range 80 to 84 N ; 1
4(a) length of cell on diagram is 25 mm ; 2

divided by 0.001 = 25 000 ;
4(b)(i) reduces rate – no mark 1

enzymes made inactive / denatured by acid / no longer at optimum pH ;
4(b)(ii) 44°C is optimum temperature ; max 2

above 44°C enzymes denatured by heat ;
additional detail describing denaturation ;
4(c)(i) (an organism) that gets energy from / feeds on dead / waste organic matter ; 1
4(c)(ii) they decompose / break down / get rid of dead bodies / waste ; max 2

allow carbon to be recycled / release carbon dioxide (into the air) ;
the idea that plants make use of carbon dioxide / carbon (during photosynthesis) ;
5(a)(ii) greater 1
lower
greater ;
5(b) cracking ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
5(c)(i) (test) bromine (water) ; 2

(observation A) no change and
(observation B) decolourises / turns (brown to) colourless ;
5(c)(ii) ethene ; 1
5(d)(i) reference to use of (fossil) fuel / named fuel / industrialisation / deforestation ; 1
5(d)(ii) global warming / consequences of global warming ; 1
6(a) (both) switch 1 and switch 3 ; 1
6(b)(i) P = V × I (or rearranged) / 1100 / 240 ; 2

= 4.58 or 4.6 A ;
6(b)(ii) (if everything switched on) then 9.4 A / 2250 W / 0.21 A seen in calculation ; 2

correct comparison of total current with fuse rating ;

065
53/41 Cambridg
mber
PUBLISHED 2017
Q
6(c) 2
correcct symbol for am

mmeter ;
amme eter in fan motorr branch, all circcuit connections complete ;
Q
7(a) plantss produce carbo on dioxide ; 2

duringg respiration ;
7(b) large surface area / elongated shape ; max

x2
increaases rate / efficie
ency of uptake ;
by difffusion ;
7(c)(i) any time between 10.00 and 13.00 ; 2

maxim ent ;
mum rate of oxygen production // steepest gradie
7(c)(ii) line drawn with reduc

ced gradient afte
er 10.00 ; 2
(rate of) photosynthes
sis (oxygen prod
duction) depend
dent on (amount of) light ;

PUBLISHED 2017
8(a)(i) 15 ; 2
16 ;
8(a)(ii) 2, 8, 5 ; 1
8(b)(i) covalent / triple ; 1
8(b)(ii) 1
8(c) (helium) balloons / avp ; 1
8(d) (Group I metals are) more reactive than carbon ; 1
8(e) solid and 165–310 (actual 302) ; 1

065
53/41 Cambridg
mber
PUBLISHED 2017
Q
9(a)(i) weigh
ht / gravitational force
f ; 1
9
9(a)(ii) 2
ed line, convex upwards

curve u ;
from ((0,0) and arriving at 10 m / s at 1
12 s ;
9(b)(i) efficie
ency = {energy out / energy
o in} × 100 ; 2
energ ergy out / efficien
gy in = 100 × ene ncy = 200 000 00
00 (J)
9
9(b)(ii) any tw
wo from hydroelectric / tidal / wavves / geotherma
al / wind ;; 2
9(c)(i) {therm
mal} expansion (of
( bridge structu
ure) ; owtte 1
9(c)(ii) buckle / twist / bend / d
deform etc. ; 1
9
9(c)(iii) evapoorates ; 2
fasterr ;
9
9(c)(iv) line drawn between th
he two bottom b
boxes ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017

placenta ;
umbilical cord ;
1(b) sperm cell / egg cell ; 2

zygote / body cell ;
1(c) for identical twins genetic material is similar and for non-identical the genetic material is different ; max 3
(identical twins) genetic material has come from one egg / one fertilised egg / one sperm / one zygote ;
(non-identical twins) genetic material has come from two eggs / two fertilised eggs / two sperms / two zygotes ;
all eggs / sperms are genetically different / owtte ;
1(d)(i) C label line to any part of the cell membrane ; 2

R label line to any part of the cytoplasm ;
1(d)(ii) C6H12O6 and H2O ; 2

6 before O2, CO2, H2O ;
2(a)(i) D (most reactive) 1

A
C
B; (least reactive)
2(a)(ii) D (most readily) 1

B; (least readily)
2(a)(iii) initially / at the start / (the idea of during the first) two minutes ; 1
2(a)(iv) increases ; 2
particles collide more often / more successful collisions ;
2(b) (iron(II) ions) green ppt / solid ; 2

(iron(III) ions) brown ppt / solid ;

PUBLISHED 2017
2(c)(i) R; 1
2(c)(ii) (alloys are) harder / more resistant to wear / more resistant to corrosion / avp ; 1
3(a) force arrow vertically upward labelled ‘uplift’ ; 3

force arrow vertically downward labelled weight / gravitational force / gravity ;
the two vertical force arrows in contact with helicopter / or the vertical arrows of approximately equal length by inspection ;
3(b) chemical ; 2
gravitational / potential ;
3(c)(i) acceleration = (change of speed / time = 50 / 20 ) = 2.5 ; 2

m / s2 ;
3(c)(ii) ½ × 50 × 20 / 500 (m) / 50 × (50 – 20) / 1500 (m) seen ; 2

= 2000 (m) ;
(also by using the formula for the area of the trapezium, ½ (30 + 50) × 50 )
3(c)(iii) non-constant deceleration / acceleration owtte ; 1
4(a) results show starch present (around A and / or B) ; max 3

reference to inactive / denatured enzymes ;
because A was boiled / heated ;
because B was placed in acid / pH3 / low pH ;
4(b) traps light energy ; 2

converts it to chemical energy / enable carbohydrates / sugar to be formed ;

PUBLISHED 2017
5(a) reference to use of (fossil) fuel / named fuel / industrialisation / deforestation ; 2

global warming / any named effect of global warming ;
5(b) C2H5OH / C2H6O ; 1
5(c)(i) (octane has higher boiling point / ora) 2

(octane has) larger molecules / ora ;
(octane has ) greater intermolecular forces (of attraction) / ora ;
5(c)(ii) (2C8H18) + 25 (O2) → 16 CO2 + 18 H2O 2

correct species ;
balanced (dependent on correct species) ;
5(d)(i) cracking ; 1
5(d)(ii) (ethene) alkene / unsaturated 1

and
(ethane) alkane / saturated ;
6(a) atoms / molecules (in contact with water) vibrate (more) ; 2

the idea that energy / vibrations passed on through collisions / from particle to particle (owtte) ;
6(b)(i) arrows show rise (to ceiling), progress across (ceiling), downward progress (to floor) ; 2
(past people) return to radiator ;
6(b)(ii) warm air is less dense / ora ; 2

so warm air rises / ora ;
6(c) radio (waves) ; 1
6(d) TV signal travels at speed of e / m waves ; 2

e / m waves travel (much) faster than sound (waves) ;

PUBLISHED 2017
7(a)(i) arrow drawn on Fig. 3.1 from red blood cell to any tissue cell ; 1
7(a)(ii) lower concentration in tissue cells than in the red blood cells / blood ; 1
7(b)(i) elongated shape / large surface area ; max 2

for increased rate / efficiency of uptake (of water) ;
7(b)(ii) diffusion rate would slow down / stop ; max 2

because the water / solution concentrations have become similar to / the same as each other ;
or
water diffuses from cells into the soil (water) ;
because the concentration of water is now higher inside the cell / concentration of salt is now higher outside the cell ;
7(c) bacteria feed on dead organisms / bacteria population increases ; max 3

bacteria respire ;
bacteria / respiration use up oxygen ;
no oxygen left for fish ;
8(a)(i) add water / make into a solution / aqueous ; 2

(so that) ions are mobile / can move ;
8(a)(ii) electrons arranged 2,8,7 ; 1
8(a)(iii) two electrons shown between Cl atoms ; 2

six unshared electrons around each Cl atom ;
8(b)(i) thermal / heat (energy) → chemical (energy) ; 1
8(b)(ii) reduction ; 1
8(b)(iii) reactive metals / high in the reactivity series extracted by electrolysis ; max 2

less reactive metals / low in the reactivity series extracted by reaction with carbon ;
reference to the relative reactivity of metal / named metal with carbon ;

065
53/42 Cambridg
mber
PUBLISHED 2017
Q
9(a) two mmore rays from hole

h to lens with at least one add
ditional arrow co
orrectly shown ; 2
all rayys emerge from lens reasonablyy parallel ;
9(b)(i) correcct symbol showiing variable resisstor ; 1
9
9(b)(ii) 20 A ; 2
becauuse lamps in parrallel / current is shared / currentt in main circuit = sum ;
9
9(b)(iii) remaiins lit (no mark) 1
still a complete circuitt through that brranch / reference
e to parallel circu
uit / owtte ;
9(c)(i) I = P / V = 3000 / 240

0 = 12.5 (A) ; 1
9(c)(ii) the id
dea that the resis
stance in the dim
mmer must be de
ecreased / turn control
c to minimu
um resistance ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) right atrium ; 3

right ventricle ;
pulmonary artery ;
1(b)(i) blood passes through heart twice, in each cycle / blood has two circulation paths (to the lungs and to the body) ; 1
1(b)(ii) (higher pressure on left side) 2

needed for blood going all round the body / blood travels further ;
(lower pressure on right side)
needed for blood going to the lungs / shorter distance / so the blood capillaries are not damaged ;
1(c)(i) to take oxygen / glucose to the cells / muscles more quickly / to take more oxygen / more glucose to cells / muscles max 2
remove carbon dioxide from cells / muscles more quickly / remove more carbon dioxide from cells / muscles ;
correct reference to respiration ;
1(c)(ii) to take more oxygen (into blood) / remove carbon dioxide (from blood) more quickly ; 1
1(d) any two from 2

tar increases mucus / tar builds up in lungs / paralyses / destroys cilia / causes cancer ;
or
nicotine causes addiction / increases blood pressure / leads to heart disease ;
or
carbon monoxide reduces the concentration of oxygen carried by the blood / makes carboxyhaemoglobin ;

PUBLISHED 2017
2(a) (a pure substance) A or D ; 2

(a mixture) B or C ;
(an alloy) C;
(a compound) D;
(1) for any two or three correct
(2) for all four correct
2(b)(i) (Ca(s)) + 2HCl )(aq) Î «CaCl 2«(aq) + «H2«(g) ;; 2

species RHS (1)
state symbols (1) for species given
2(b)(ii) (effect on rate) decreases ; 2

(explanation) particles collide less often / less frequently / less chance of collisions ;
2(b)(iii) silver nitrate solution ; 2

white solid / precipitate ;
2(c) Fe2S3 ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a) 2
variable resistor in motor branch, correct symbol ;

switch for headlamps after motor branch, before first headlamp branch ;
3(b) (decreasing resistance) increases current, (so faster motor) ; 1
3(c) in parallel ; 3
the same as ;
less than ;
3(d) 10 min = 1 / 6 h / 5 / 60 = 0.083 (km / min) ; 2

distance = speed × time = 5 × 1 / 6 = 0.83 km / distance = speed × time = 0.083 × 10 = 0.83 km ;

PUBLISHED 2017
4(a) letter A label going to small intestine / ileum ; 1
4(b)(i) stomach ; 3
stomach has acidic conditions ;
enzyme only worked in tube 1 / at pH 2 / in an acidic environment ;
4(b)(ii) any two from max2

enzyme will become denatured ;
further detail of denaturation ;
correct reference to (likely) optimum temperature ;
4(b)(iii) any two from max 2

large / insoluble molecules are broken down ;
small / soluble molecules are produced ;
by the action of an enzyme ;

PUBLISHED 2017
5(a) (trend) increase (in boiling point) ; 3

(explanation) bigger molecules ;
greater intermolecular forces ;
5(b)(i) cracking ; 1
5(b)(ii) ethene ; 1
allow ethylene
5(b)(iii) alkene / unsaturated ; 1
5(b)(iv) (from) orange / brown (to) colourless / decolourises ; 1
5(c) chemical (energy) to thermal / heat (energy) ; max 2

and one from
temperature increases ;
thermal energy (heat) released ;

PUBLISHED 2017
6(a)(i) atoms / molecules / particles vibrate (faster) and / transfer this vibration / energy to neighbouring particles owtte ; 1
6(a)(ii) gas molecules far apart, no vibration ; 1
6(b) radiation ; 1
6(c)(i) P = IV ; (or alternative expression) / I = 80 / 240 ; 2

= 0.33 (A) ;
6(c)(ii) E = P × t / E = V × I × t / E = 80 × 3600 ; 2
= 288 000 (J) ;

PUBLISHED 2017
7(a) transpiration ; 1
7(b) decomposers ; 2
break down dead organisms (or their leaves) ;
7(c) rainfall reduced because less water is being transpired / evaporated from trees ; 1
7(d) soil will be eroded ; 2

no trees / tree roots to stabilise the soil ;
7(e) carbon dioxide increases (no mark) 2

less taken in during photosynthesis ;
oxygen decreases (no mark)

less given out by photosynthesis ;

PUBLISHED 2017
8(a)(i) 2 electrons in 1st shell and 1

6 electrons in 2nd shell ;
8(a)(ii) 2
2 bonding pairs ;
2 lone pairs and no extra electrons anywhere ;
8(b)(i) II / 2 / two ; 1
8(b)(ii) 2+ ; 2
loses two electrons ;
8(c) order of reactivity metal method of extraction 3
most reactive
potassium / K electrolysis ;
blast furnace / reduction

iron / Fe
by C / CO ;
carbon reduction / heat with

copper / Cu ;
least reactive carbon ;
order of reactivity ;
electrolysis linked to potassium ;
carbon reduction owtte for both Fe and Cu ;

PUBLISHED 2017
9(a)(i) (Q =) friction / (water) resistance ; 1
9(a)(ii) (force Q cf force S) equal / balanced ; 1
9(a)(iii) W = mg = 3 000 000 × 10 ; 2

= 30 000 000 (N) ;
9(b) work done = force × distance / F × d = 100 000 × 50 ; 2

= 5 000 000 (J) ;
9(c)(i) v = f λ and λ = 3 × 108 / 120 × 106 ; 2

= 2.5 (m) ;
9(c)(ii) 1
visible micro- radio
gamma
light waves waves ;
9(c)(iii) any two from max2

longitudinal (wave / vibration) / compressions and rarefactions ;
(water) molecules / particles vibrate / oscillate ;
pass on vibration / energy (through water) ;


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 30
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a)(i) result for 4% recorded ; 1
1(a)(ii) full set of results recorded ; 3

all readings present in whole seconds for all readings present ;
increases in time down the table ;
1(b)(i) suitable linear scale using at least half the grid ; 3

all 4 points correctly plotted ± half small square ;
best-fit line ;
1(b)(ii) decreasing concentration increases time ORA ; 1
1(c) all temperatures between 0 and 100 inclusive ; 2

at least 3 between 10 and 50 inclusive ;
2(a)(i) filtrate and residue correctly labelled ; 1
2(a)(ii) blue / purple and 10–12 ; 1
2(a)(iii) milky / white ppt ; 1
2(b)(i) blue ppt ; 3

dark(er) blue solution ;
(J is) copper (nitrate) ;
2(b)(ii) (slight) blue ppt. / blue solid ; 1
2(c)(i) sodium hydroxide ; 1
2(c)(ii) (H is) calcium (oxide) ; 2

H + water gives limewater for CO2 test in (a)(iii) / F is limewater / calcium oxide reacts exothermically with water / H and water
has pH > 7 ;

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a)(i) V and I recorded in table for 0 cm ; 2

V < 2.5 V and I < 1.0 A ;
3(a)(ii) all values recorded ; 4

V values decreasing ;
I values decreasing ;
either V to at least 1 d.p. or I to at least 2 d.p. ;
3(b) all power values correct ; 2

power values decreasing ;
3(c) no / yes (to match results) 2

and
actual values used to show relationship / reference to how P changes with I ;
doubling I does not double P (for no) / doubling I doubles P (for yes) or P / I not constant (for no) or P / I constant (for yes) ;


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 30
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) quality of drawing using at least half the box ; 3

root correctly labelled ;
shoot correctly labelled ;
1(b)(i) sensible measurement in mm ; 1
1(b)(ii) correct measurement in mm ; 1
1(b)(iii) magnification correctly calculated ; 1
1(c)(i) biuret iodine 2
purple ; blue-black ;
1(c)(ii) reducing sugar, protein and starch ;; 2

all 3 for 2 marks, 1 or 2 named for 1 mark
2(a)(i) solution observation 4
ammonium sulfate no reaction / no ppt. ;

copper sulfate blue ppt ;
iron(III) sulfate brown / orange ppt ;
zinc sulfate white ppt ;
2(a)(ii) red litmus goes blue ; 1
2(b) different coloured ppts. / different results ; 3

same coloured ppts. as NaOH or ammonia ;
ammonia from ammonium (as with NaOH) / no ammonia from ammonium (unlike NaOH) ;
2(c)(i) bubbles / effervescence ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
2(c)(ii) should have added dilute nitric acid or dilute hydrochloric acid before adding the barium chloride ; 1
3(a)(i) θ recorded at t = 0 for 200 cm3 ; 1
3(a)(ii) for 200 cm3 ; 3

t values correct ;
all values of temperature recorded ;
θ values decreasing ;
3(b) larger change over 180 s for 100 cm3 beaker ; 1
3(c) to allow maximum temperature of hot water to be recorded / wtte ; 1
3(d) statement matching temperature changes and justification referring to results ; 2

justification referring to temperature changes in the same time ;
3(e) any two from: 2

room temperature / initial water temperature / same volume(s) of water / keep thermometer the same depth ;;


Paper 6 Alternative to Practical October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 60
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) Syringe / burette ; 1
1(b) 3 and 2 ; 1
1(c) Axes labelled time and s (on y) concentration and % (on x) ; 4
Suitable linear scale using at least half the grid ;
all 4 points plotted correctly ± half small square ;
Best fit line ;
1(d) Decreasing concentration increases time ORA ; 1
1(e)(i) All temps below 100 ; 2
At least 3 below 50 must be above 0 ;
1(e)(ii) two from: 1

Volume of milk
Same type of milk
pH
concentration of enzyme
volume of enzyme
volume of water

PUBLISHED 2017
2(a)(i) T1 21.5 ; 2
T2 34.0 ;
2(a)(ii) (+) 12.5 ; 1
2(a)(iii) exothermic ; 1
2(b)(i) alkaline ; 1
2(b)(ii) limewater / calcium hydroxide / Ca(OH)2 ; 1
2(b)(iii) sodium hydroxide ; 1
2(c) (H is) calcium (oxide) ; 2
H + water gives limewater for CO2 test / calcium oxide reacts exothermically with water / F must be calcium hydroxide / F is
limewater ;
2(d) chloride / Cl– ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a) 1.4 ; 2
0.32 ;
3(b)(i) to prevent wire getting hot / resistance of wire changing / cell running down ; 1
3(b)(ii) ammeter shows a reading ; 1
3(c)(i) W / watt(s) ; 1
3(c)(ii) 0.23 and 0.17; 2
2 decimal places ;
3(d)(i) a straight line with a positive gradient ; 2
through the origin ;
3(d)(ii) (actual values used to show that (for example)), doubling I does not double P ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
4(a) Root hair ; 1
4(b)(i) Quality drawing using at least half the box ; 3
Nucleus correctly labelled ;
Cell wall correctly labelled ;
4(b)(ii) 34 ± 1 ; 1
4(b)(iii) Measurement to nearest mm ; 1
4(b)(iv) Magnification correctly calculated ; 1
4(c) Starch present ; 1
4(d) select anther ; 2
use a microscope to observe ;

PUBLISHED 2017
5(a)(i) 6.96 ; 2
6.85 ;
5(a)(ii) 0.49 and 0.49 ; 2
+ and – ;
5(b) any two from: 2

stays as blue ;
mass changes are the same at the electrodes ;
anode dissolves / copper ions from anode go into solution ;
5(c)(i) (iron and copper) because 1

copper dissolves from the anode / positive / plates on the cathode / negative ;
5(c)(ii) copper sulfate (solution) ; 1
5(c)(iii) smaller 2
pink / orange / copper coloured
blue / unchanged ;;
all 3 correct = 2 marks; 1 or 2 correct = 1 mark

PUBLISHED 2017
6(a)(i) correct position marked ; 1
6(a)(ii) 0.87 ; 1
6(a)(iii) data to 2 sf / large variation in raw data ; 1
6(b)(i) 0.76, 0.98, 1.21 1

correct answers only ;
6(b)(ii) plots correct to half a small square – at least 4 correct ; 2
good best fit line judgement ;
6(b)(iii) indication on graph of how data obtained AND at least half of line used ; 2
correct calculation for triangle method using data from graph ;
6(c)(i) correct answer from candidate’s gradient value ; 1
6(c)(ii) reduces percentage error in the time / reduces the effect of (human) reaction error ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 60
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a) quality of drawing ; 3
larger than original ;
root and stem correctly labelled ;
1(b)(i) 14 ± 1 ; 1
1(b)(ii) correct measurement (in mm) ; 1
1(b)(iii) magnification correctly calculated and rounded correctly ; 1
1(c)(i) (placed in a suitable container with) water ; 2
kept in a warm place ;
1(c)(ii) protein ; 2
starch ;
2(a)(i) Different coloured ppts. ; 2
same coloured ppts. as NaOH or ammonia ;
2(a)(ii) (add H to) iron(II) sulfate (solution) ; 1
2(a)(iii) add aqueous sodium hydroxide (and heat) ; 2
(in gas) red litmus turns blue / pungent smell ;
2(b)(i) add (dil) HCl or (dil) nitric acid ; 2
bubbles / effervescence ;

PUBLISHED 2017
2(b)(ii) test-tube / flask connected to test-tube / beaker with delivery tube ; 2
limewater in correct place labelled ;
2(b)(iii) (limewater goes) milky / white ppt. ; 1
3(a)(i) 89.0 ; 1
3(a)(ii) 92.5 ; 1
3(b)(i) s / second / sec and °C ; 1
3(b)(ii) 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 ; 1
3(c) to allow maximum temperature of hot water to be recorded / let thermometer get to temperature of water / beakers owtte ; 1
3(d) rate of temperature drop greater at start / wtte ; 1
3(e) use of table results (e.g. 89 to 80 and 92.5 to 76) ; 2
reference to temperature changes in the same time / same time specified ;
3(f) Any two from: 2

room temperature / initial water temperature / same volumes of water / keep thermometer the same depth ;;

PUBLISHED 2017
4(a)(i) 1.5 and 4.9 ; 1
4(a)(ii) 3.4 2
3.2
3.0
all 3 correct is 2 marks ;;
1 or 2 correct is 1 mark
4(a)(iii) Low 0.16 1

and
High 0.32
4(a)(iv) Increase in temperature increases rate / ORA ; 1
4(b) Any two from: 2

Identify anomalies / more reliable / average is more accurate ;;
4(c)(i) transpiration ; 1
4(c)(ii) Water stored or produced or used by plant ; 1
4(d) (reduced) because surface area reduced / fewer stomata / less evaporation of water / less transpiration AW ; 1
5(a)(i) sulfuric ; 1
5(a)(ii) added solid does not dissolve / no more bubbles ; 1
5(a)(iii) (blue) litmus ; 2

does not go red ;
5(b)(i) funnel with filter paper drawn ; 2
(excess) copper carbonate and filtrate / copper sulfate labelled ;

PUBLISHED 2017
5(b)(ii) insoluble (in water) ; 1
5(c) to avoid dehydration / to avoid decomposition ; 1
5(d)(i) sodium hydroxide is soluble ; 1
5(d)(ii) use an indicator for neutralisation ; 1
6(a) 66.2 ;; 2
6(b) 6.2 and 9.0 ; 1
6(c)(i) suitable choice of scales (⩾ half the grid used) ; 3
6(c)(ii) indication on graph of how data obtained AND at least half of line used ; 2
6(c)(iii) correct answer using candidate’s gradient ; 1
6(d) rule will not balance / balance point is off the scale of the rule ; 1


MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 60
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1(a)(i) Axes correctly labelled: surface area and cm2 and distance / d and cm ; 4
Suitable linear scale using at least half the grid ;
All 4 points plotted correctly ± half small square ;
Best fit straight line through origin ;
1(a)(ii) More enzyme, faster reaction ORA ; 1
1(a)(iii) Correct reading from graph ; 2
Lines on graph to show working ;
1(b) Any two from 2

temperature ;
pH ;
pieces from same potato ;
concentration of peroxide ;
1(c) Glowing splint and relights ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
2(a)(i) 2
HEAT limewater
apparatus ;
H or limewater label and ‘HEAT’ ;
2(a)(ii) to prevent suckback / to stop cold liquid hitting hot solid / to prevent glassware cracking ; 1
2(a)(iii) carbon dioxide (gas) ; 1
2(a)(iv) H is a carbonate ; 1
2(a)(v) zinc carbonate / ZnCO3 ; 1
2(b)(i) white ; 1
2(b)(ii) (white) ppt ; 1
2(c)(i) (test / reagent) (observation) 1
barium nitrate solution no reaction

silver nitrate solution yellow ppt.
;
2(c)(ii) iodide / I– / not sulfate / not SO42– / not chloride / not Cl– / not bromide / not Br– ; 1

PUBLISHED 2017
3(a)(i) 59.8 (cm) ; 1
3(a)(ii) 29.8 (cm) ; 1
3(a)(iii) 1.0 and 1.7 ; 1
3(a)(iv) 2.0 and 2.7 ; 1
3(b)(i) plots correct to half a small square, at least 4 correct ; 2
3(b)(ii) indication on graph of how data obtained AND at least half of line used ; 2
3(b)(iii) (15.0 ± 1.0) 2 / 3 s.f. only ; 1
3(c) any one from 1

move screen slowly to / fro until sharpest focus obtained ;
carry out experiment away from other bright light sources
/ darkened room ;

PUBLISHED 2017
4(a) (Placed in a suitable dish with) water ; 2
(Kept in a) warm (place) / suitable temperature ;
4(b) shorter shoot in A ; 2
taller shoot in C ;
4(c) Heat ; 3
Benedicts solution ;
Yellow / green / orange / red ;
4(d) Lighting from one side ; 3
Control – even light / in the dark ;
More than one seedling (in each condition) ;

PUBLISHED 2017
5(a)(i) alkali / hydroxide ion / OH– ; 1
5(a)(ii) green and ppt. ; 1
5(a)(iii) aqueous Fe3+ / dissolve / react with acid ; 3
add (excess) sodium hydroxide solution / ammonia solution ;
red-brown and ppt. ;
5(b)(i) oil on top label ; 2
boiled water label ;
5(b)(ii) all nails made of iron / steel ; 1
5(c) need to show that water alone does not cause rusting as in L ; 2
need to show that air alone does not cause rusting as in J ;

PUBLISHED 2017
6(a)(i) 4.2 ; 2
13.0 ;
6(a)(ii) 1,4,6,8 ; 3
all use brick / same block ;
all have different surfaces / all surfaces ;
6(a)(iii) sand 1
carpet
wood
glass ;
6(b) difficult to judge the first pull / accuracy / minimise errors / lessens effects of anomalies AVP ; 1
6(c) would be difficult to stop / slip / slide etc. ; 1
6(d) sand / gravel / very rough tarmac ; 2

high resistance to movement / would slow / stop car quickest / big(gest) resisting force / large(st) friction ;


45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*9335794757*

IB17 11_0653_11/3RP
2
1 Which characteristics help to define a living organism?
A diffusion, movement, respiration

B excretion, nutrition, sensitivity
C excretion, reproduction, transpiration
D growth, inspiration, nutrition
2 The diagram shows an image of an insect that has been magnified.
120 mm
The magnification is ×5.
What is the actual length of the insect?
A 0.04 mm B 24 mm C 115 mm D 600 mm
3 What are enzymes made from?
A fat
B hormones
C protein
D starch
4 Which chemical is used to test for a food substance that contains the elements carbon, hydrogen,
nitrogen and oxygen?
A Benedict’s solution
B biuret solution
C ethanol
D iodine solution
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/O/N/17

3
5 Where are guard cells found in a leaf?
A in the cuticle
B in the epidermis
C in the palisade layer
D in the spongy mesophyll
6 In which order does food pass through parts of the alimentary canal?
A oesophagus → colon → small intestine
B small intestine → oesophagus → rectum
C small intestine → rectum → anus
D stomach → colon → small intestine
7 The photomicrograph shows a sample of human blood.
What is the function of the cells marked X?
A antibody formation
B clotting of blood
C phagocytosis
D transport of oxygen
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/O/N/17 [Turn over

4
8 Which word equation represents aerobic respiration?
A carbon dioxide + oxygen → glucose + water
B carbon dioxide + water → glucose + oxygen
C glucose + oxygen → carbon dioxide + water
D glucose + water → carbon dioxide + oxygen
9 When someone is scared, adrenaline is released into their bloodstream.
What is the effect of adrenaline on their blood glucose concentration and pulse rate?
blood glucose
pulse rate
concentration
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
10 The diagrams show shoots of maize seedlings.
Which shoot shows a geotropic response in which it grows away from the stimulus?
A B C D
light light
gravity gravity
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/O/N/17

5
11 The diagram shows a flower.
What is the function of part W?
A attracts insects
B produces pollen
C protects bud
D receives pollen
12 The diagram represents part of the carbon cycle.
1
atmospheric
green plants
carbon dioxide
2
animals
4
microorganisms
Which arrows show where respiration takes place?
A 1, 3 and 4 B 1 and 3 only C 2, 3 and 4 D 2 and 3 only

6
13 Large-scale deforestation of a rain forest occurs in one country.
This can have many undesirable effects on the local environment.
Which undesirable effect could also directly affect the environment of a country on the other side
of the world?
A extinction of animal species native to the rain forest

B increased carbon dioxide concentration in the air
C increased soil erosion on hillsides
D reduced drainage leading to flooding
14 The formulae of three substances are shown.
substance formula
methane CH4
water H2O
oxygen O2
A Methane is made from five different types of atom.

B Methane, water and oxygen are molecules.
C Only methane and water are molecules.
D Oxygen is made from two different types of atom.
15 Which process is used to separate petroleum?
A crystallisation
B distillation
C filtration
D fractional distillation
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/O/N/17

7
16 Which row describes chemical changes and physical changes?
chemical changes physical changes

A the mass of the products is always new substances are made
the same as the mass of the reactants
B the mass of the products is always there is no mass change
the same as the mass of the reactants
C the mass of the products is sometimes new substances are made
more or less than the mass of the reactants
D the mass of the products is sometimes there is no mass change
more or less than the mass of the reactants
17 A compound contains three times as many oxygen atoms as nitrogen atoms.
It contains the same number of sodium atoms as nitrogen atoms.
What is its formula?
A NaNO3 B Na(NO)3 C Na3(NO)3 D Na3N3O
18 What is produced at the anode during the electrolysis of molten lead(II) bromide?
A bromide ions
B bromine
C lead
D lead(II) ions

8
19 The diagram shows gas X burning and heating a liquid.
liquid
flame
gas X
Which row is correct?
the burning of gas X

gas X
is exothermic
A hydrogen
B hydrogen
C oxygen
D oxygen
20 Carbon reacts with carbon dioxide at high temperatures.
carbon + carbon dioxide → carbon monoxide
Which statement about the reaction is correct?
A Both carbon and carbon dioxide are oxidised.

B Both carbon and carbon dioxide are reduced.
C The carbon is oxidised and the carbon dioxide is reduced.
D The carbon is reduced and the carbon dioxide is oxidised.
21 In which test-tube is an alkaline solution formed?
A B C D
water excess dilute

hydrochloric
acid
sodium sodium calcium zinc

hydroxide chloride carbonate
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/O/N/17

9
22 Excess magnesium is added to dilute hydrochloric acid containing Universal Indicator.
The indicator changes colour and a gas is given off.
The gas is tested with limewater.
Which row describes the colour change and the result of the limewater test?
colour change result of the limewater test
A blue to green limewater becomes cloudy

B blue to green no change
C red to green limewater becomes cloudy
D red to green no change
23 Which statement describes the elements across the Periodic Table from left to right?
A Their atoms contain fewer protons.

B Their atoms contain the same number of electrons.
C They change from gases to solids.
D They change from metals to non-metals.
24 Lithium and potassium are in Group I of the Periodic Table.
A Lithium has a higher melting point than potassium.

B Lithium is harder than potassium.
C Potassium conducts electricity but lithium does not.
D Potassium is more reactive than lithium.
25 Platinite is made by melting and mixing iron and nickel.
Which type of substance is platinite?
A alloy
B hydrocarbon
C ionic compound
D transition metal

10
26 P, Q, R and S are four gases found in clean air.
P is very unreactive.
Q makes up 21% of the air.
R makes up 78% of the air.
S is formed when fossil fuels are burned.
P Q R S
A argon nitrogen oxygen carbon dioxide

B argon oxygen nitrogen carbon dioxide
C carbon dioxide oxygen nitrogen argon
D carbon dioxide nitrogen oxygen argon
27 Which power stations burn fossil fuels?
1 a coal-fired power station

2 a nuclear power station
3 an oil-fired power station
28 A car travels at various speeds during a short journey.
The table shows the distances travelled and the times taken during each of four stages
P, Q, R and S.
stage P Q R S
distance travelled / km 1.8 3.6 2.7 2.7

time taken / minutes 2.0 2.0 4.0 3.0
During which two stages is the car travelling at the same average speed?
A P and Q B P and S C Q and R D R and S
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/O/N/17

11
29 A piece of scientific equipment is taken on a space ship from Earth to a distant planet.
Which property or properties of the equipment must remain the same on the distant planet?
mass weight
A key
B = must be the same
C = does not have to be the same
D
30 Two identical, solid cubes have sides of length 5.0 cm. The total mass of both cubes together is
2000 g.
5.0 cm
What is the density of the material from which the cubes are made?
A 8.0 g / cm3 B 16 g / cm3 C 40 g / cm3 D 80 g / cm3
31 Which energy resource is renewable and has the Sun as its source of energy?
A coal
B geothermal
C hydroelectric
D nuclear
32 When a liquid evaporates, which molecules escape and what happens, if anything, to the
temperature of the remaining liquid?
molecules temperature of
escaping remaining liquid
A less energetic decreases
molecules
B less energetic stays the same
molecules
C more energetic decreases
molecules
D more energetic stays the same
molecules

12
33 A nut and a bolt are made of the same metal. The nut is slightly too small to screw on to the bolt.
bolt
nut
Which action is most likely to make the nut fit the bolt?
A Cool the bolt and cool the nut to the same temperature.
B Cool the bolt and heat the nut.
C Heat the bolt and cool the nut.
D Heat the bolt and heat the nut to the same temperature.
34 A double-glazed window consists of two panes of glass with a vacuum between them.
The vacuum reduces the amount of thermal energy transferred through the window.
vacuum
glass glass
Which row shows how much thermal energy is transferred through the vacuum by conduction, by
convection and by radiation?
conduction convection radiation
A none none some

B none some some
C some none none
D some some none
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/O/N/17

13
35 The diagram shows a section of a rope.
Four wave crests pass a point on the rope every second.
Each wave crest travels 80 cm in one second.
wave crest
20 cm
direction
5 cm of wave
What is the speed of the wave?
A 4.0 cm / s B 5.0 cm / s C 20 cm / s D 80 cm / s
36 The diagram shows an object in front of a plane mirror. A ray of light from the object is incident on
the mirror, and the angle between the ray and the mirror is 60°.
Two positions X and Y are labelled.
60°
Y object
What is the angle of reflection, and at which labelled position is an image of the object formed?
angle of position
reflection / ° of image
A 30 X
B 30 Y
C 60 X
D 60 Y

14
37 Electromagnetic waves are used to scan passengers’ luggage before they board an aeroplane.
Electromagnetic waves are also used in a television remote controller.
Which type of electromagnetic wave is used for each of these purposes?
scanning television
luggage remote controller
A radio waves infra-red waves

B radio waves ultraviolet waves
C X-rays infra-red waves
D X-rays ultraviolet waves
38 Two balloons X and Y are suspended by insulating threads. They are each held near a negatively
charged balloon. The balloons hang as shown.
insulating insulating
threads threads
– – ––
– – – – ––
– – X – – Y
– – – – – –
– – – –
What is the charge on balloon X and what is the charge on balloon Y?
balloon X balloon Y
A negative negative
B negative positive
C positive negative
D positive positive
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/O/N/17

15
39 The device Z in this circuit is designed to cut off the electricity supply automatically if too much
current flows.
What is device Z?
A a fuse
B a resistor
C a switch
D an ammeter
40 Four resistors are connected in the arrangement shown.
3.0 Ω
3.0 Ω 6.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
What is a possible value of the combined resistance of this arrangement?
A 11 Ω B 12 Ω C 15 Ω D 18 Ω
© UCLES 2017 0653/11/O/N/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/11/O/N/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*4892948442*

IB17 11_0653_12/2RP
2

2 What is the correct description of diffusion?
A a controlled movement of molecules against a concentration gradient

B a controlled movement of molecules down a concentration gradient
C a random movement of molecules against a concentration gradient
D a random movement of molecules down a concentration gradient
A fat
B hormones
C protein
D starch
4 Which substances must be present in the diet to prevent weak bones and teeth?
A vitamin C and calcium
B vitamin C and iron

C vitamin D and calcium
D vitamin D and iron
5 Plants carry out a process called photosynthesis.
What is the word equation for photosynthesis?
A carbon dioxide + carbohydrates → oxygen + water
B carbon dioxide + water → oxygen + carbohydrates
C oxygen + carbohydrates → carbon dioxide + water
D oxygen + water → carbon dioxide + carbohydrates
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/O/N/17

3
7 When we cut ourselves, blood comes out of the wound.
Which constituent of blood is most important in the formation of a blood clot?
A plasma
B platelets
C red blood cells
D white blood cells
8 Which statements about respiration are correct?
1 It breaks down nutrient molecules.

2 It is a chemical reaction.
3 It only occurs in animal cells.
4 It releases energy.
A 1, 2, 3 and 4
B 1, 2 and 4 only
C 1 and 3 only
D 2, 3 and 4 only

4
9 The depth and rate of breathing can be measured by a spirometer, and recorded in the form of a
graph.
Graph X shows the depth and rate of breathing of a person at rest.
graph X
4.0
3.5
volume
of air in 3.0
lungs / dm3
2.5
2.0
0 30
time / s
Which graph shows the depth and rate of breathing when the same person is running?
A B
4.0 4.0
3.5 3.5
volume volume
of air in 3.0 of air in 3.0
lungs / dm3 lungs / dm3
2.5 2.5
2.0 2.0
0 30 0 30
time / s time / s
C D
4.0 4.0
3.5 3.5
volume volume
2.5 2.5
2.0 2.0
0 30 0 30
time / s time / s
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/O/N/17

5
10 Which changes occur in an athlete just before the start of a race?
adrenaline glucose in
pulse rate
in the blood the blood
A decreases decreases increases

B decreases increases decreases
C increases decreases decreases
D increases increases increases
A B C D
light light
gravity gravity
2
3
Where are eggs produced and where does fertilisation occur?
eggs produced fertilisation occurs
A 1 2
B 1 4
C 3 2
D 3 4

6
13 The diagram shows a food web.
hawk
song bird
spider locust beetle
tree grass
Which statement about this food web is correct?
A Some of the energy from the grass eventually passes to the hawk.
B The producers get their energy from the soil.
C There are more carnivores shown than herbivores.
D There are six consumers shown.
substance formula
methane CH4
water H2O
oxygen O2

© UCLES 2017 0653/12/O/N/17

7
15 What is the correct sequence that takes place during fractional distillation?
A evaporate → condense → collect → heat
B evaporate → condense → heat → collect
C heat → condense → collect → evaporate
D heat → evaporate → condense → collect
16 What is a physical change?
A carbon dioxide turning limewater milky

B the crystallisation of copper sulfate from solution
C the electrolysis of molten lead(II) bromide
D the thermal decomposition of calcium carbonate
17 The diagram represents a molecule of propane.
H H H
H C C C H
H H H
What is the formula of propane?
A C2H6 B C2H8 C C3H6 D C3H8
18 What is formed at the cathode during the electrolysis of aqueous copper chloride?
A chlorine
B copper
C hydrogen
D oxygen

8
liquid
flame
gas X

gas X
is exothermic
A hydrogen
B hydrogen
C oxygen
D oxygen
20 The word equation for the reaction between hydrogen and copper oxide is shown.
hydrogen + copper oxide → copper + water
Which substance, shown in the word equation, is reduced in the reaction?
A copper
B copper oxide
C hydrogen
D water
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/O/N/17

9
21 Lithium is added to water containing Universal Indicator.
A gas is given off and the indicator changes colour.
Which row describes the gas produced and the final colour of the indicator?
gas final colour

produced of the indicator
A hydrogen blue
B hydrogen red
C oxygen blue
D oxygen red
22 A solution of compound X produces a dark green precipitate when aqueous sodium hydroxide is
added.
What is X?
A copper(II) chloride
B copper(II) sulfate
C iron(II) sulfate
D iron(III) chloride
23 Which statement describes the elements in Period 3 of the Periodic Table?
A Metallic character decreases across the period.

B Metallic character decreases and then increases across the period.
C Metallic character increases across the period.
D Metallic character increases and then decreases across the period.
24 Which property is used to distinguish between metals and non-metals?
A boiling point
B colour
C density
D electrical conduction

10
A alloy
B hydrocarbon
C ionic compound
D transition metal
P Q R S


© UCLES 2017 0653/12/O/N/17

11
P, Q, R and S.
stage P Q R S

29 The table gives the volumes and masses of four objects.
Which object has the greatest density?
mass / g volume / cm3
A 5.4 2.0
B 13 3.0
C 15 6.0
D 18 5.0
30 A force acting on an object causes some properties of the object to change.
Which list contains only properties that can be changed by the action of a force?
A mass, motion and shape

B mass, motion and size
C mass, shape and size
D motion, shape and size
31 The molecules in a substance are close together but free to change positions with each other.
Which substance at 20 °C matches this description?

A air
B copper
C iron
D water

12
32 The diagram shows a glass flask with a stopper. A narrow glass tube passes through the stopper.
The flask is full of a liquid.
stopper
liquid
The flask is heated. Some liquid flows out of the top of the tube.
Why does this happen?
A The flask contracts.

B The flask expands.
C The liquid contracts.
D The liquid expands.
33 The diagram shows a heater above a thermometer. The thermometer bulb is in the position
shown.
heater
air
thermometer thermometer bulb
Which row shows how the heat energy from the heater reaches the thermometer bulb?
A no no yes
B no yes no
C no yes yes
D yes yes no
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/O/N/17

13
wave crest
20 cm
direction
5 cm of wave
35 A ray of light travels in glass towards air. The critical angle for the glass is 43°.
Which diagram shows what happens to the ray of light?
A B
air some of air

the light
glass glass
42° 42°
some of all of
the light the light
C D
air air
some of all of
glass 42° the light glass 42° the light
some of
the light

14
scanning television

37 A man stands 1.20 km away from a cliff. The man fires a gun. A timer starts as the gun is fired.
The timer stops when it detects the echo of the sound of the gun from the cliff. The time shown
on the timer is 7.50 s.
What value does this give for the speed of sound in air?
A 160 m / s B 320 m / s C 330 m / s D 640 m / s
current flows.
What is device Z?
A a fuse
B a resistor
C a switch
D an ammeter
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/O/N/17

15
39 The diagram shows a circuit used to find the resistance of lamp L.
Blocks P, Q and R represent the different components used.
12 V
P R
L
Which is a possible choice of components to use for P, Q and R?
P Q R
A ammeter variable resistor voltmeter

B variable resistor voltmeter ammeter
C voltmeter ammeter variable resistor
D voltmeter variable resistor ammeter
40 A circuit contains a battery and three identical resistors. The current at one point in the circuit is
9.0 A, as shown. P and Q are points in the connecting wires.
9.0 A
What is the current at point P and what is the current at point Q?
current current
at P / A at Q / A
A 3.0 3.0
B 6.0 0
C 6.0 9.0
D 9.0 9.0
© UCLES 2017 0653/12/O/N/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/12/O/N/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*9164514986*

IB17 11_0653_13/2RP
2

2 Which two structures are found in a plant cell but not an animal cell?
A cell membrane and cell wall

B cell wall and chloroplasts
C chloroplasts and nucleus
D nucleus and cell membrane
A fat
B hormones
C protein
D starch
4 The list shows chemicals that are important to a plant.
1 carbon dioxide
2 nitrates
3 oxygen
4 water
Which chemicals does a plant use in photosynthesis?
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/O/N/17

3
6 Which row shows the effects of increasing humidity, light intensity and temperature on the rate of
transpiration in a plant?
increasing increasing increasing

humidity light intensity temperature
A rate decreases rate decreases rate decreases

B rate decreases rate increases rate increases
C rate increases rate decreases rate increases
D rate increases rate increases rate decreases
7 The diagram shows a section through the human heart.
Which is the septum?

4
8 Which row correctly matches the cell to its function?
cell function
A blood clotting
B blood clotting
C oxygen transport
D oxygen transport
9 The table shows the percentage of some gases in four samples of air.
Which sample is expired air?
percentage of gas
carbon
oxygen nitrogen
dioxide
A 1 16 75
B 1 21 78
C 4 16 78
D 4 21 75
10 Which statements about hormones are correct?
1 They are carried by the blood.

2 They are chemical substances.
3 They are destroyed by the pancreas.
4 They are produced by a target organ.
A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/O/N/17

5
A B C D
light light
gravity gravity
12 A student investigated the conditions needed for the germination of seeds.
Which seeds will germinate first?
A B C D
5 °C 5 °C 20 °C 20 °C
seeds
dry damp dry damp

cotton wool cotton wool cotton wool cotton wool
13 The graph shows changes in the number of different species in the water flowing along a river.
At which point is untreated sewage released into the river?
number of
different
species
direction of
water flow
A B C D
distance along river

6
substance formula
methane CH4
water H2O
oxygen O2

15 Chromatography separates ink into different colours.
Which diagram shows how the apparatus is set up?
A B
beaker beaker
paper ink
ink paper
water water
C D
beaker beaker
paper paper
ink ink
water water
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/O/N/17

7
16 Which row describes the type of change for each process?
sodium reacting
melting ice
with water
A chemical physical
B chemical chemical
C physical physical
D physical chemical
17 One molecule of a compound contains twice as many carbon atoms as oxygen atoms, and three
times as many hydrogen atoms as carbon atoms.
What is the formula of this compound?
A C2H3O B C2H6O C C2H6O2 D C4H6O2
18 Which row describes an ionic compound?
can be
melting point
electrolysed
A high no
B high yes
C low no
D low yes

8
liquid
flame
gas X

gas X
is exothermic
A hydrogen
B hydrogen
C oxygen
D oxygen
20 Copper is produced by heating copper oxide with carbon.
The word equation for this reaction is shown.
copper oxide + carbon → copper + carbon dioxide
Which statement explains why this is a redox reaction?
A Carbon dioxide contains oxygen.

B Carbon is a solid and carbon dioxide is a gas.
C Copper oxide is oxidised.
D Copper oxide loses oxygen and carbon gains oxygen.
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/O/N/17

9
21 Dilute sulfuric acid is added to copper(II) oxide. The mixture is warmed gently.
Which observations are correct?
colour of
gas formed
solution formed
A blue no
B blue yes
C colourless no
D colourless yes
22 Separate samples of the gases ammonia, carbon dioxide, chlorine and hydrogen are tested with
damp red litmus paper.
How many of these gases turn the litmus paper blue?
A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4
23 Which statement describes the arrangement of elements from sodium to argon in the Periodic
Table?
A They are in neutron number order and change from metallic to non-metallic.
B They are in neutron number order and change from non-metallic to metallic.
C They are in proton number order and change from metallic to non-metallic.
D They are in proton number order and change from non-metallic to metallic.
24 What is not a property of transition elements?
A conduct electricity
B form coloured compounds
C high melting point
D low density
A alloy
B hydrocarbon
C ionic compound
D transition metal

10
P Q R S


P, Q, R and S.
stage P Q R S

29 The mass of an astronaut on the Moon is 70 kg.
What is the mass of the astronaut on the Earth?
A 7 kg B 70 kg C 80 kg D 700 kg
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/O/N/17

11
30 Diagram 1 shows an empty measuring cylinder on a balance.
Diagram 2 shows the same measuring cylinder on the balance, but it now contains a liquid.
cm3 cm3
16.0 16.0
14.0 14.0
12.0 12.0
10.0 10.0
8.0 8.0
6.0 6.0
4.0 4.0
2.0 2.0
g g
diagram 1 diagram 2
What is the density of the liquid?
A 0.20 g / cm3 B 0.50 g / cm3 C 2.0 g / cm3 D 5.0 g / cm3
31 On a hot day with no wind, a boy swims in warm water in a swimming pool.
The boy now leaves the pool and feels cold.
Why does the boy feel cold even though it is a hot day?
A The less energetic water molecules on his skin escape as the water evaporates.
B The less energetic water molecules on his skin escape as the water freezes.
C The more energetic water molecules on his skin escape as the water evaporates.
D The more energetic water molecules on his skin escape as the water freezes.

12
32 A substance is a gas and loses energy thermally at a constant rate.
The graph shows how the temperature of the gas changes with time. Two points on the graph are
labelled P and Q.
temperature
P
0
0 time
In which state is the substance at P and in which state is the substance at Q?
state at P state at Q
A all gas all liquid

B all gas gas and liquid
C gas and liquid all liquid
D gas and liquid gas and liquid
33 The diagram shows an air-conditioning unit on the wall of a room. The unit draws in warm air
from the room and releases cold air into the room.
air-conditioning
unit
What happens to the cold air and what is the reason?
cold air reason
A falls it is less dense than warm air

B falls it is more dense than warm air
C rises it is less dense than warm air
D rises it is more dense than warm air
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/O/N/17

13
wave crest
20 cm
direction
5 cm of wave
35 Which diagram shows a ray of light undergoing total internal reflection?
A B
air air
glass glass
incident incident
ray ray
C D
glass glass
air air
incident incident
ray ray

14
scanning television

37 What is the approximate range of frequencies of sound that can be heard by a human, and which
property of a sound wave causes echoes?
range of property that

frequencies / Hz causes echoes
A 2.0 to 2000 reflection

B 2.0 to 2000 refraction
C 20 to 20 000 reflection
D 20 to 20 000 refraction
current flows.
What is device Z?
A a fuse
B a resistor
C a switch
D an ammeter
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/O/N/17

15
39 Which circuit is used to determine the resistance of the resistor R?
A B
V A
R R
A
C D
V A
R R
V
40 Three 3.0 Ω resistors are connected in a circuit as shown.
3.0 Ω
3.0 Ω
3.0 Ω
What is the combined resistance of the three resistors in this circuit?
A less than 3.0 Ω
B between 3.0 Ω and 6.0 Ω
C between 6.0 Ω and 9.0 Ω
D 9.0 Ω
© UCLES 2017 0653/13/O/N/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/13/O/N/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*7877868817*

IB17 11_0653_21/3RP
2

2 The diagram shows a palisade cell.
Which structure converts energy from light into chemical energy?
C
A
3 Why does the rate of enzyme activity change when the temperature rises above the optimum
temperature?
A The enzyme has been denatured.

B The enzyme has been used up.
C The enzyme molecules are moving too slowly.
D The enzyme speeds up the rate of the reaction.
4 Which chemical is used to test for a food substance that contains the elements carbon, hydrogen,
nitrogen and oxygen?
A Benedict’s solution
B biuret solution
C ethanol
D iodine solution
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/O/N/17

3
5 Which letters from the list represent the balanced equation for photosynthesis?
P C6H12O6 T H2O
Q 6C6H12O6 U 6H2O
R CO2 V O2
S 6CO2 W 6O2
A P + U → R + V
B Q + T → S + U
C R + T → W + P
D U + S → P + W
7 The diagram shows a plant cell.
What does structure X do?
A decreases the surface area of the cell for water and ion absorption
B decreases the surface area of the cell for water and sugar absorption
C increases the surface area of the cell for water and ion absorption
D increases the surface area of the cell for water and sugar absorption

4
8 The diagram shows the double circulation of blood around the human body.
Which blood vessel contains blood at the highest pressure?
lungs
A B
C D
body
9 The photomicrograph shows a sample of human blood.
What is the function of the cells marked X?
A antibody formation
B clotting of blood
C phagocytosis
D transport of oxygen
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/O/N/17

5
10 Which component of tobacco smoke reduces the ability of haemoglobin to carry oxygen?
A carbon monoxide
B nicotine
C smoke particles
D tar
11 During pregnancy, the fetus is contained within the amniotic sac. The amniotic sac contains
amniotic fluid.
What is the function of the amniotic fluid?
A It protects the fetus against knocks and bumps.

B It provides the fetus with oxygen and nutrients.
C It removes the fetal waste products.
D It supplies the fetus with blood.
12 The diagram represents part of the carbon cycle.
1
atmospheric
green plants
carbon dioxide
2
animals
4
microorganisms
Which arrows show where respiration takes place?
A 1, 3 and 4 B 1 and 3 only C 2, 3 and 4 D 2 and 3 only
13 Which gas dissolves in water vapour to produce acid rain?
A methane
B nitrogen
C oxygen
D sulfur dioxide

6
substance formula
methane CH4
water H2O
oxygen O2

15 Which process is used to separate petroleum?
A crystallisation
B distillation
C filtration
16 What is the electronic structure of a chlorine atom, Cl, and of a chloride ion, Cl –?
chlorine atom chloride ion
A 2,8,6 2,8,8
B 2,8,7 2,8,6
C 2,8,7 2,8,8
D 2,8,8 2,8,7
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/O/N/17

7
17 Element Q and element R combine to form a covalent compound, Q2R.
The arrangement of the outer-shell electrons in the compound is shown.
Q R Q
Which compound has the same arrangement of outer shell electrons as Q2R?
A carbon dioxide
B hydrogen chloride
C methane
D water
18 Aluminium sulfate contains aluminium ions, Al 3+, and sulfate ions, SO42–.
Iron(II) nitride contains iron(II) ions, Fe2+, and nitride ions, N3–.
What are the formulae of aluminium sulfate and of iron(II) nitride?
aluminium sulfate iron(II) nitride
A Al 2(SO4)3 Fe2N3
B Al 2(SO4)3 Fe3N2
C Al 3(SO4)2 Fe2N3
D Al 3(SO4)2 Fe3N2
19 What is produced at the anode during the electrolysis of molten lead(II) bromide?
A bromide ions
B bromine
C lead
D lead(II) ions

8
liquid
flame
gas X

gas X
is exothermic
A hydrogen
B hydrogen
C oxygen
D oxygen
21 Gases X and Y react together to form gas Z.
The equation for the reaction is shown.
2X(g) + Y(g) → Z(g)
The total volume of gas is measured as the reaction occurs. The dotted line in the graph shows
the results.
The reaction is repeated using the same volumes of X and Y under the same conditions but with
the addition of a catalyst.
Which line shows the results for the second experiment?
A
total B
volume
of gas C
time / s
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/O/N/17

9
22 Carbon reacts with carbon dioxide at high temperatures.
carbon + carbon dioxide → carbon monoxide
Which statement about the reaction is correct?
A Both carbon and carbon dioxide are oxidised.

B Both carbon and carbon dioxide are reduced.
C The carbon is oxidised and the carbon dioxide is reduced.
D The carbon is reduced and the carbon dioxide is oxidised.
23 Excess aqueous barium nitrate is added to dilute sulfuric acid to produce barium sulfate.
How is barium sulfate obtained from the reaction mixture?
A electrolysis
B evaporation
C filtration
24 Which statement about elements in the Periodic Table is correct?
A Barium is a non-metal in Group II and its atoms have two electrons in their outer shells.
B Chlorine is a non-metal in Group VII and its atoms have seven electrons in their outer shells.
C Fluorine is a non-metal in Group VII and its atoms have one electron in their outer shells.
D Sodium is a metal in Group II and its atoms have one electron in their outer shells.
25 Which substance is added to the blast furnace to remove acidic impurities during the extraction of
iron?
A calcium silicate
B carbon monoxide
C coke
D limestone

10
P Q R S

27 Which process is an example of thermal decomposition?
A cracking an alkane
B electrolysis of molten lead(II) bromide

C extraction of iron in a blast furnace
D fractional distillation of petroleum
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/O/N/17

11
28 The diagram is a speed-time graph for a moving object.
10.0
speed
m/s
0
0 2.0
time / s
What is the acceleration of the object and what distance does it travel in 2.0 s?
A 5.0 10
B 5.0 20
C 20 10
D 20 20
29 A piece of scientific equipment is taken on a space ship from Earth to a distant planet.
Which property or properties of the equipment must remain the same on the distant planet?
mass weight
A key
B = must be the same
C = does not have to be the same
D
30 A student stretches a steel spring by hanging a load on it. The measurements for the extension of
the spring are shown in the table.
load / N 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

extension / cm 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
What is the value for the spring constant k of the spring?
A 0.50 N / cm B 1.0 N / cm C 2.0 N / cm D 18 N / cm

12
31 A panel of solar cells is 15% efficient. The power supplied by the Sun to the panel is 40 kW.
What is the output power of the panel?
A 2.7 kW B 6.0 kW C 25 kW D 34 kW
32 When a liquid evaporates, which molecules escape and what happens, if anything, to the
temperature of the remaining liquid?
molecules temperature of
escaping remaining liquid
A less energetic decreases
molecules
B less energetic stays the same
molecules
C more energetic decreases
molecules
D more energetic stays the same
molecules
33 A teacher explains about transfer of thermal energy.
When air is ......X......, it becomes less dense and rises.

This helps to explain transfer of thermal energy by «...Y«... .
Which words complete gaps X and Y?
X Y
A cooled conduction
B cooled convection
C heated conduction
D heated convection
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/O/N/17

13
wave crest
20 cm
direction
5 cm of wave
35 The diagram shows a ray of light striking a plane mirror X.
Plane mirror Y is at 90° to mirror X.
mirror Y
NOT TO
SCALE
mirror X
60°
What is the angle of reflection at mirror Y?
A 30° B 60° C 90° D 120°
scanning television


14
37 The diagram represents a wave in air. Molecules are closer together in region P than they are in
region Q.
region P region Q
What are the names of regions P and Q, and which type of wave is represented?
region P region Q type of wave
A compression rarefaction longitudinal

B compression rarefaction transverse
C rarefaction compression longitudinal
D rarefaction compression transverse
38 The resistance of a wire depends on its length and on its diameter.
Which row shows two changes that both increase the resistance of the wire?
change 1 change 2
A decrease the length decrease the diameter

B decrease the length increase the diameter
C increase the length decrease the diameter
D increase the length increase the diameter
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/O/N/17

15
current flows.
What is device Z?
A a fuse
B a resistor
C a switch
D an ammeter
40 The diagram shows a circuit containing a 12 V battery, four identical resistors, an ammeter and a
voltmeter. Two values of current are shown.
12 V
A
3.0 A
3.0 A
What is the reading on the ammeter and what is the reading on the voltmeter?
reading on reading on
ammeter / A voltmeter / V
A 3.0 6.0
B 3.0 12
C 6.0 6.0
D 6.0 12
© UCLES 2017 0653/21/O/N/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/21/O/N/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*4541115173*

IB17 11_0653_22/2RP
2

C
A
3 What is the role of microorganisms in the manufacture of yoghurt?
A to turn lactic acid into lactose sugar and lower the pH

B to turn lactic acid into lactose sugar and raise the pH
C to turn lactose sugar into lactic acid and lower the pH
D to turn lactose sugar into lactic acid and raise the pH
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/O/N/17

3
5 These four conditions may be a result of malnutrition.
1 constipation
2 coronary heart disease
3 obesity
4 starvation
Which conditions are a direct result of an imbalance between energy intake and energy output?
A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4
6 What are the functions of root hairs?
uptake of ions uptake of sugar uptake of water
A
B
C
D
7 When we cut ourselves, blood comes out of the wound.
Which constituent of blood is most important in the formation of a blood clot?
A plasma
B platelets
C red blood cells
D white blood cells
8 What is the equation for aerobic respiration?
A 6CO2 + 6O2 → C6H12O6 + 6H2O
B 6H2O + 6CO2 → C6H12O6 + 6O2
C C6H12O6 + 6H2O → 6CO2 + 6O2
D C6H12O6 + 6O2 → 6CO2 + 6H2O

4
9 The depth and rate of breathing can be measured by a spirometer, and recorded in the form of a
graph.
Graph X shows the depth and rate of breathing of a person at rest.
graph X
4.0
3.5
volume
of air in 3.0
lungs / dm3
2.5
2.0
0 30
time / s
Which graph shows the depth and rate of breathing when the same person is running?
A B
4.0 4.0
3.5 3.5
volume volume
2.5 2.5
2.0 2.0
0 30 0 30
time / s time / s
C D
4.0 4.0
3.5 3.5
volume volume
2.5 2.5
2.0 2.0
0 30 0 30
time / s time / s
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/O/N/17

5
10 A student carried out an experiment to test geotropism.
A bean seed was pinned to a card with wet cotton wool, as shown.
card
wet cotton wool
bean seed
pin
gravity
Every day the card was turned 90° clockwise.
After a few days the student drew the results of the root growth.
Which diagram shows the student’s result?
A B
C D
amniotic fluid.


6
12 The diagram shows a food web.
hawk
song bird
spider locust beetle
tree grass
Which statement about this food web is correct?
A Some of the energy from the grass eventually passes to the hawk.
B The producers get their energy from the soil.
C There are more carnivores shown than herbivores.
D There are six consumers shown.
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/O/N/17

7
13 Which graph shows the effect of large-scale deforestation on the changes in the concentrations
of oxygen and carbon dioxide in the air?
A B
O2
changes in changes in
concentration O2 concentration
CO2
CO2
time after deforestation time after deforestation
C D
O2
changes in O2 changes in
concentration concentration CO2
CO2
time after deforestation time after deforestation
substance formula
methane CH4
water H2O
oxygen O2


8
15 What is the correct sequence that takes place during fractional distillation?
A evaporate → condense → collect → heat
B evaporate → condense → heat → collect
C heat → condense → collect → evaporate
D heat → evaporate → condense → collect
16 Which substances react to produce a mixture of an element and a compound?
A copper oxide and carbon

B hydrochloric acid and sodium carbonate
C hydrogen and oxygen
D nitric acid and sodium hydroxide
17 The electronic structure of a sodium atom is 2,8,1.
The electronic structure of a sodium ion is 2,8.
A Sodium ions form metallic bonds.

B The electronic structure of a sodium ion is more stable than that of a sodium atom.
C The sodium atom loses one electron to become an ion.
D The sodium ion has a noble gas electronic structure.
18 The symbols for some ions are shown.
name of ion symbol
silver Ag+
nitrate NO3–
magnesium Mg2+
chloride Cl –
Which symbol equation is correct?
A AgNO3 + MgCl → AgCl + MgNO3
B Ag2NO3 + MgCl → Ag2Cl + MgNO3
C 2AgNO3 + MgCl2 → 2AgCl + Mg(NO3)2
D 2AgNO3 + Mg2Cl → 2AgCl + 2MgNO3
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/O/N/17

9
19 What is formed at the cathode during the electrolysis of aqueous copper chloride?
A chlorine
B copper
C hydrogen
D oxygen
liquid
flame
gas X

gas X
is exothermic
A hydrogen
B hydrogen
C oxygen
D oxygen
21 What is the effect of increasing the temperature on the collisions between reacting particles
during a chemical reaction?
number of collisions
energy of collisions
per second
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases

10
22 The word equation for the reaction between hydrogen and copper oxide is shown.
hydrogen + copper oxide → copper + water
Which substance, shown in the word equation, is reduced in the reaction?
A copper
B copper oxide
C hydrogen
D water
A electrolysis
B evaporation
C filtration
24 Weather balloons are used to carry scientific instruments into the atmosphere.
Which gas is used to fill the balloons?
A argon
B helium
C krypton
D xenon
25 Which reaction does not take place in the blast furnace?
A Calcium carbonate decomposes to make calcium oxide.

B Carbon dioxide reacts with carbon to make carbon monoxide.
C Carbon monoxide reacts with iron oxide to make iron.
D Limestone reacts with iron oxide to make slag.
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/O/N/17

11
P Q R S

27 In the fractional distillation of petroleum, fractions X and Y are removed at the positions shown.
fraction X
fraction Y
petroleum
Which row describes the molecular sizes and the intermolecular attractive forces in fractions X
and Y?
molecular sizes intermolecular attractive forces
A X larger than Y X greater than Y

B X larger than Y Y greater than X
C Y larger than X X greater than Y
D Y larger than X Y greater than X

12
28 The speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops.
Where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus greatest?
C
speed
B
A D
0
0 time
29 The table gives the volumes and masses of four objects.
Which object has the greatest density?
mass / g volume / cm3
A 5.4 2.0
B 13 3.0
C 15 6.0
D 18 5.0
load / N 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

extension / cm 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
31 A 600 W motor is 75% efficient. The motor is used to do 3600 J of useful work.
How long does it take the motor to do this work?
A 4.5 s B 6.0 s C 8.0 s D 24 s
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/O/N/17

13
32 Which description is correct for the molecules of a gas with a temperature that is rising?
force between average speed

molecules of molecules
A negligible decreasing
B negligible increasing
C strong decreasing
D strong increasing
33 The diagram shows a heater above a thermometer. The thermometer bulb is in the position
shown.
heater
air
thermometer thermometer bulb
Which row shows how the heat energy from the heater reaches the thermometer bulb?
A no no yes
B no yes no
C no yes yes
D yes yes no

14
wave crest
20 cm
direction
5 cm of wave
35 Two plane mirrors are placed at 90° to each other. A ray of light strikes one mirror at an angle of
incidence of 60°.
Which diagram shows this ray and its path after reflection?
A B
60°
60° 60° 60°
C D
60° 60° 60°

60°
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/O/N/17

15
scanning television

region Q.
region P region Q

38 A piece of wire has electrical resistance.
The wire is stretched so that it becomes longer and thinner.
What, if anything, happens to its resistance?
A It could increase or decrease depending on how much it is stretched.

B It does not change because its smaller diameter cancels the effect of its greater length.
C It must decrease.
D It must increase.

16
current flows.
What is device Z?
A a fuse
B a resistor
C a switch
D an ammeter
40 The diagram shows three resistors connected to a 12 V battery.
The current at two points in the circuit and the p.d. across one resistor are shown.
Another resistor is labelled R.
12 V
3.0 A
3.0 V R
2.0 A
What is the current in resistor R and what is the p.d. across resistor R?
current in p.d. across

resistor R / A resistor R / V
A 1.0 3.0
B 1.0 9.0
C 2.0 3.0
D 2.0 9.0
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/O/N/17

17
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/O/N/17

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/O/N/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/22/O/N/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
20
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/22/O/N/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*4058289354*

IB17 11_0653_23/3RP
2

C
A
3 Which substance is produced by respiration in microorganisms during yoghurt making?
A amino acids
B fatty acids
C hydrochloric acid
D lactic acid
4 The list shows chemicals that are important to a plant.
1 carbon dioxide
2 nitrates
3 oxygen
4 water
Which chemicals does a plant use in photosynthesis?
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/O/N/17

3
6 The graph shows the uptake of water by root hair cells over many hours during a day.
water uptake
by root hair cells
0
0 time
What could have caused the change in the rate of uptake at T?
A decrease in temperature
B decrease in humidity
C increase in light intensity
D increase in temperature

4
7 Which row correctly matches the cell to its function?
cell function
A blood clotting
B blood clotting
C oxygen transport
D oxygen transport
8 Dust particles and pathogens may be inhaled from the air. These can cause damage to the
airways if they are not removed.
Which features work together to remove them from the airways?
A cilia and enzymes

B mucus and cilia
C mucus and saliva
D saliva and enzymes
9 How does auxin cause a plant shoot to bend to the right?
A Cells elongate more on the left side of the shoot than on the right side.
B Cells elongate more on the right side of the shoot than on the left side.
C Cells shrink on the left side of the shoot.
D Cells shrink on the right side of the shoot.
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/O/N/17

5
10 The table shows features of four flowers.
Which row shows features of a typical wind-pollinated flower?
petals pollen grains shape of stigma

A large white petals large and hooked branched and feathery
and sweet scent
B large white petals small and light straight and enclosed
and sweet scent within the flower
C small green petals large and hooked straight and enclosed
and no scent within the flower
D small green petals small and light branched and feathery
and no scent
amniotic fluid.

12 The diagram shows the trophic levels of a food chain.
producer herbivore carnivore carnivore

→ → →
1st trophic 2nd trophic 3rd trophic 4th trophic
level level level level
Why do most food chains not have more than four trophic levels?
A There are too many carnivores in the 3rd trophic level.

B There are too many herbivores in the 2nd trophic level.
C There is no energy transferred from the 2nd trophic level to the 3rd trophic level.
D There is not enough energy available to be transferred to a 5th trophic level.

6
13 The graph shows changes in the number of different species in the water flowing along a river.
At which point is untreated sewage released into the river?
number of
different
species
direction of
water flow
A B C D
distance along river
substance formula
methane CH4
water H2O
oxygen O2

© UCLES 2017 0653/23/O/N/17

7
15 Chromatography separates ink into different colours.
Which diagram shows how the apparatus is set up?
A B
beaker beaker
paper ink
ink paper
water water
C D
beaker beaker
paper paper
ink ink
water water
16 Which statement describes how sodium atoms and oxygen atoms combine to form sodium oxide,
Na2O?
A One sodium atom gains two electrons and two oxygen atoms lose one electron each.
B One sodium atom loses two electrons and two oxygen atoms gain one electron each.
C Two sodium atoms gain one electron each and one oxygen atom loses two electrons.
D Two sodium atoms lose one electron each and one oxygen atom gains two electrons.

8
17 Which dot-and-cross diagrams show the outer-shell electrons in molecules of water and of
carbon dioxide?
water carbon dioxide
A H O H O C O
B H O H O C O
C H O H O C O
D H O H O C O
18 The formulae of some ions are shown.
● ammonium, NH4+
● calcium, Ca2+
● nitrate, NO3–
● phosphate, PO43–
What is the formula of calcium nitrate and of ammonium phosphate?
calcium nitrate ammonium phosphate
A Ca(NO3)2 NH4(PO4)3
B Ca(NO3)2 (NH4)3PO4
C Ca2NO3 NH4(PO4)3
D Ca2NO3 (NH4)3PO4
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/O/N/17

9
19 Which row describes an ionic compound?
can be
melting point
electrolysed
A high no
B high yes
C low no
D low yes
liquid
flame
gas X

gas X
is exothermic
A hydrogen
B hydrogen
C oxygen
D oxygen

10
21 Dilute hydrochloric acid reacts with marble pieces to produce carbon dioxide.
The results of some experiments to investigate the rate of reaction are shown.
relative time taken to

size of
concentration of make 50 cm3 of
marble pieces
hydrochloric acid carbon dioxide / s
1 large 100
2 large 50
1 small 80
2 small 40
Which conclusion can be made from these results?
A When bigger marble pieces are used, the rate of reaction is greater.
B When smaller marble pieces are used, the rate of reaction is doubled.
C When the concentration is doubled, the rate of reaction is doubled.
D When the concentration is doubled, the rate of reaction is halved.
22 Copper is produced by heating copper oxide with carbon.
The word equation for this reaction is shown.
Which statement explains why this is a redox reaction?
A Carbon dioxide contains oxygen.

B Carbon is a solid and carbon dioxide is a gas.
C Copper oxide is oxidised.
D Copper oxide loses oxygen and carbon gains oxygen.
A electrolysis
B evaporation
C filtration
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/O/N/17

11
24 What is a use for argon?
A as a fuel
B filling balloons
C providing an inert atmosphere
D the extraction of copper
25 Which diagram shows the arrangements of atoms in an alloy?
A B C D
– + – + – +
+ – + – + –
– + – + – +
+ – + – + –
P Q R S

27 Which statement about the fractional distillation of petroleum is not correct?
A Fractions obtained from higher up the fractional distillation column have higher boiling point
ranges.
B Fractions obtained from lower down the fractional distillation column contain larger
molecules.
C Refinery gas is used for heating and cooking.
D Smaller molecules have weaker intermolecular attractive forces.

12
28 The diagram shows the speed-time graph for a car.
20
speed
m/s
10
0
0 5.0
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car?
A 2.0 m / s2 B 4.0 m / s2 C 50 m / s2 D 75 m / s2
29 Which conditions are necessary for an object to have weight?
must must be in a must be in an

have mass gravitational field electric field
A no yes no
B no yes yes
C yes no yes
D yes yes no
load / N 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

extension / cm 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
31 A motor is used to lift a load of 3000 N through a vertical height of 40 m in 2.0 minutes.
How much useful power does the motor produce?
A 1000 W B 9000 W C 60 000 W D 240 000 W
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/O/N/17

13
32 The molecules of a substance are far apart and moving at high speeds in straight lines. The
forces between them are negligible.
Two changes are now made to the substance.
change 1 The average speed of the molecules is reduced but they remain far apart.
change 2 The molecules move much closer together. There are much stronger forces
between them, but they can change places with each other.
What is the effect of each change?
change 1 change 2
A temperature decreases gas to liquid

B temperature decreases liquid to solid
C temperature increases gas to liquid
D temperature increases liquid to solid
33 The diagram shows an air-conditioning unit on the wall of a room. The unit draws in warm air
from the room and releases cold air into the room.
air-conditioning
unit
What happens to the cold air and what is the reason?
cold air reason
A falls it is less dense than warm air

B falls it is more dense than warm air
C rises it is less dense than warm air
D rises it is more dense than warm air

14
wave crest
20 cm
direction
5 cm of wave
35 A man stands a distance d in front of a plane mirror and views his own image in the mirror.
Is the image real or virtual, and what is the distance between the man and his image?
distance between
image
man and image
A real d
B real 2d
C virtual d
D virtual 2d
scanning television

© UCLES 2017 0653/23/O/N/17

15
region Q.
region P region Q

38 Which circuit is used to determine the resistance of the resistor R?
A B
V A
R R
A
C D
V A
R R
V

16
current flows.
What is device Z?
A a fuse
B a resistor
C a switch
D an ammeter
40 The diagram shows a 12 V battery connected to a 2.0 Ω resistor, a 4.0 Ω resistor and resistor R.
The current at two points in the circuit and the p.d. across the 2.0 Ω resistor are shown.
12 V
6.0 A
2.0 Ω
2.0 A 4.0 Ω
6.0 V
What is the current in resistor R and what is the p.d. across resistor R?
current in p.d. across

resistor R / A resistor R / V
A 2.0 3.0
B 2.0 6.0
C 4.0 3.0
D 4.0 6.0
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/O/N/17

17
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/O/N/17

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/O/N/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/23/O/N/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
20
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/23/O/N/17
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 3 0 1 0 3 5 7 8 1 4 *

Paper 3 (Core) October/November 2017
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/FC) 139541/2
2
1 (a) Use the following words or phrases to complete the flow chart about the transport of oxygen
to the tissues of the body.
Each word or phrase may be used once, more than once, or not at all.
aorta capillaries muscles plasma platelets
pulmonary artery pulmonary vein red blood cells white blood cells
Oxygen diffuses into the blood from the air in the alveoli.
Oxygen is carried in the blood by the ...................................................................... .
Blood travels from the lungs through the ......................................................................

towards the heart.
Blood leaves the heart to go around the body through the ................................................................ .
Blood enters the ...................................................................... in the tissues.
Oxygen diffuses into tissue cells.
[4]
(b) A person is going to run a race. Her heart starts to beat faster as she is waiting to start. This
is due to the hormone adrenaline being released into her bloodstream.
(i) Explain why the heart is described as a target organ.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe how the adrenaline is removed from the bloodstream after the race.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17
3
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows the human gas exchange system.
Fig. 1.1
Name the structures A and B shown in Fig. 1.1.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
B ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Describe two ways in which a person’s pattern of breathing changes during a race.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]

4
2 (a) Electrolysis is used to break up some compounds into simpler substances.
Fig. 2.1 shows the electrolysis of molten lead(II) bromide using inert electrodes.
low voltage
d.c.supply
negative electrode positive electrode

– +
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the names of the negative electrode and of the positive electrode.
negative electrode .............................................................................................................
positive electrode ..............................................................................................................

[1]
(ii) Identify the substances formed at the negative electrode and at the positive electrode.
at negative electrode .........................................................................................................
at positive electrode ..........................................................................................................

[2]
(iii) State the type of chemical bonding in compounds that are broken up by electrolysis.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17

5
(iv) Electrolysis results in a chemical change.
Explain what is meant by the term chemical change.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Potassium chloride is made when solid potassium carbonate reacts with an acid.
A gas is made during this reaction.
(i) Name the acid that reacts with potassium carbonate to form potassium chloride.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe the change of the pH of the solution during the reaction.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Describe a test to show that the colourless solution formed by this reaction contains
chloride ions.
test ....................................................................................................................................
observation ........................................................................................................................
[2]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a guitar.
Fig. 3.1
(a) The guitar produces sounds with frequencies between 80 Hz and 5000 Hz.
(i) State what is meant by a frequency of 80 Hz.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A guitarist plays a note of frequency 250 Hz twice on his guitar.
The first time he plays the note with a large amplitude.
The second time he plays the note with a small amplitude.
Describe the difference the listener will hear between these two notes.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) State whether a person with normal hearing can hear all the frequencies produced by
this guitar. Give a reason for your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) At a concert the sound of the guitar is broadcast on a radio programme using radio waves.
Name the type of wave to which radio waves belong.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17

7
(c) Fig. 3.2 shows a girl using a periscope to see the guitarist over the heads of people in front
of her.
mirror 1
periscope
mirror 2
Fig. 3.2
(i) Describe the characteristics of the image of the guitarist that the girl sees in the periscope.
...........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Fig. 3.3 shows one of the rays of light as it reflects off mirror 2.
normal
45º
mirror 2
Fig. 3.3 (not to scale)
State the value of the angle of incidence.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

8
(d) The guitarist investigates the extension of a guitar string made of steel when different tension
forces are used to stretch it.
Fig. 3.4 shows the graph of some results obtained from this experiment.
extension / mm 3
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
tension force / N
Fig. 3.4
The guitarist adjusts the note played by a guitar string by adjusting the tension in the guitar
string. The more the tension force, the higher the note.
(i) The guitarist must only increase the tension force while the extension remains
proportional to the tension force.
Use the graph to suggest the maximum tension force that the guitarist can use.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest what would happen to the guitar string if the tension force is increased to 110 N.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17
9
4 Fig. 4.1 shows diagrams of primrose flowers. The flowers have two slightly different forms, C
and D.
stigma anther
anther stigma
C D
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe two pieces of evidence from Fig. 4.1 that suggest these primroses are
insect-pollinated.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Compare the diagrams in Fig. 4.1 and predict which flower, C or D, is more likely to be
pollinated by its own pollen.
flower .................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

10
(c) Cross-pollination is the transfer of pollen from one flower to another flower on a different
plant. This leads to the production of seeds.
State and explain why the genetic material in the seeds is different from the genetic material
in the parent plants.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The following feeding relationships occur in the field where the primroses grow.
• thrushes feed on snails

• snails feed on primroses
• buzzards feed on thrushes
(i) Draw a food chain to show the flow of energy through these organisms.
[2]
(ii) State all of the organisms in the food chain which are consumers.
consumers .........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17

11
5 (a) Ethene is a hydrocarbon.
(i) State what is meant by the term hydrocarbon.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Complete Fig. 5.1 to show the structure of ethene.
C C
Fig. 5.1
[2]
(iii) State the two products of complete combustion of hydrocarbons.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Natural gas is a fossil fuel.
(i) Name two other fossil fuels.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Name the main constituent of natural gas.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

12
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a fan heater used to heat a room in cold weather.
Fig. 6.1
The fan heater is connected to the mains electricity supply.
Fig. 6.2 shows the circuit diagram for the fan heater.
240 V
switch 1
heater
switch 2
M
motor
Fig. 6.2
(a) (i) State the name of the circuit component represented by this symbol.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why it is important for this component to be included in the circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Deduce which switch or switches must be closed (on) for the heater to work.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17

13
(b) (i) An electrician wants to measure the current through the fan motor.
Complete the circuit diagram in Fig. 6.3 to show how the electrician should connect a
meter to do this.
You should use the correct symbol for the meter to be used, and complete all missing
circuit connections.
240 V
switch 1
switch 2
Fig. 6.3
[2]
(ii) The current through the fan motor is found to be 0.2 A when connected to a mains
electricity supply of 240 V.
Calculate the resistance of the fan motor.
State the formula you use, show your working and state the unit of your answer.
formula
working
resistance = ............................................... unit ...................[3]

14
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a sealed glass jar containing soil and plants. An oxygen sensor is used to find out
how the concentration of oxygen in the glass jar changes during the day.
The plants can live in the glass jar for several weeks without opening the jar.
bung
oxygen sensor
glass jar
soil
Fig. 7.1
(a) The plants in Fig. 7.1 produce oxygen during photosynthesis.
Complete the word equation for photosynthesis.
light
+ + oxygen
chlorophyll
[2]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a graph of the oxygen concentration in the glass jar shown in Fig. 7.1 over a
12-hour period on a sunny day.
oxygen
concentration
06.00 08.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00 18.00

time / hours
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17
15
(i) State a time when the rate of photosynthesis is highest.
time .........................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) On a different day the graph follows a similar pattern until 10.00 hours.
After 10.00 hours the weather changes and it becomes darker. This affects the
concentration of oxygen in the glass jar.
On Fig. 7.2, add the letter X to show a possible value for oxygen concentration at
14.00 hours.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Water is lost as water vapour from leaves by transpiration.
On a very warm day the concentration of water vapour in the air in the glass jar increases.
Describe the effect of this increase in water vapour on the rate of transpiration from the plants
in the glass jar.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

16
8 (a) An iron nail is left in a beaker of water, as shown in Fig. 8.1a.
Another iron nail is left in dry air in a closed container, as shown in Fig. 8.1b.
dry air
water
iron nail
iron nail
Fig. 8.1a Fig. 8.1b
The iron nail in the water rusts but the iron nail in the dry air does not rust.
(i) Describe one other method of rust prevention.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Rust is a form of iron oxide.
Name the element that combines with iron to form iron oxide.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Suggest one change that can be made to the experiment shown in Fig. 8.1a which
increases the rate of rusting.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17

17
(b) A piece of calcium is placed into a beaker of water, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
thermometer
bubbles of
hydrogen gas
water
calcium
Fig. 8.2
(i) Hydrogen and calcium hydroxide are produced during this reaction.
Complete the word equation for this reaction.
calcium + +
[1]
(ii) During this reaction the temperature in the beaker increases.
State the type of chemical reaction that causes an increase in temperature.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Explain, in terms of reactivity, why calcium reacts with water more slowly than sodium
reacts with water.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i) Copper is a metal that has a high melting point and a high density. It forms coloured
compounds.
Name the collection of metals in the Periodic Table which includes copper.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Copper alloys, rather than pure copper, are used to make coins.
Suggest one reason, other than cost, for this.
...........................................................................................................................................
��[1]

18
9 Fig. 9.1 shows two horizontal forces acting on a car driving along a road.
force B force A
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) Force A is the driving force produced by the engine.
Name force B.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The car is travelling at constant speed.
Describe how force A compares with force B.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The car is powered by batteries that can be recharged from solar cells when the batteries run
down.
Complete the sequence of energy transfers as the batteries are recharged. Write the types of
energy produced in the blank spaces.
Nuclear
..................... energy in the Sun
............................................. energy transferred from the Sun to the solar cells
............................................. energy transferred from the solar cells
chemical energy in the batteries.

..................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17

19
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows a car crossing a bridge.
Fig. 9.2
Fig. 9.3 shows a gap in the road surface on the bridge.
Fig. 9.3
(i) On a hot sunny day the temperature of the bridge rises. Describe what will happen to the
gap as the temperature rises.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Use words from the list below to complete the blanks in the sentence that follows.
Each word may be used once, more than once, or not at all.
boils evaporates faster larger melts slower smaller
After rain, the road surface is wet with water which slowly ..............................................
as the .............................................. molecules escape from the water surface. [2]

20
(iii) On a cold winter’s day, the temperature is –5 °C.
Water vapour in the air freezes onto the road surface as ice.
On Fig. 9.4 draw a line to link the correct arrangement of molecules in water vapour to
the correct arrangement of molecules in ice.
water vapour ice
Fig. 9.4
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17

21
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/31/O/N/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
24
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/31/O/N/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 3 0 7 5 2 0 2 4 2 5 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/FC) 139542/2
2
1 (a) Use the following numbers or words to complete the sentences about the menstrual cycle.
Each number or word may be used once, more than once or not at all.
4 14 28 blood enzymes fertilised
hormones nerves ovary oviduct
pancreas pollinated uterus
The menstrual cycle starts when the lining of the uterus breaks down and leaves the body
along with some ....................................................... .
A new lining of the uterus is made and starts to become thicker. At the same time an egg
starts to mature in the ....................................................... .
The egg is released around day ....................................................... .
The lining of the uterus continues to thicken to prepare for a
....................................................... egg.
[4]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a flow chart of how identical twins occur.
A fetus is the name given to a developing baby in the later stages of pregnancy.
sperm cell egg cell
zygote
cell division
body cell of embryo embryo
fetus
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/O/N/17

3
Use Fig. 1.1 to name
1. a haploid cell, ........................................................................................................................
2. a diploid cell. .........................................................................................................................

[2]
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows how the genetic material in the nuclei of the cells is passed from the egg and
sperm to the fetus.
Use the information in Fig. 1.1 to compare the genetic material in the body cells of the twins.
Explain your answers.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

4
2 A student places four pieces of metal, at the same time, into separate beakers containing dilute
hydrochloric acid, HCl.
The four metals react with the acid to produce the same gas, but at different rates.
The gas is collected in test-tubes, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
gas
bubbles
of gas
dilute
hydrochloric metal
acid
metal A metal B metal C metal D
Fig. 2.1
The four metals are calcium, iron, magnesium, and zinc.
(a) (i) Using the information in Fig. 2.1 and your knowledge of the reactivity series, identify
metals A, B, C and D.
metal A ...............................................................
metal B ...............................................................
metal C ...............................................................
metal D ...............................................................
[2]
(ii) Name the gas made in the reaction between magnesium and dilute hydrochloric acid.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) State the effect of increasing the temperature of the acid on the rate of reaction with the
metals.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Suggest one other way of changing the rate of reaction.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/O/N/17

5
(b) When iron reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid, a solution of an iron salt is made.
The student thinks that this salt contains iron(II) ions.
Another student thinks that the salt contains iron(III) ions.
They add dilute sodium hydroxide solution to a sample of the iron salt solution.
Describe the observations that are expected for iron(II) ions and for iron(III) ions.
iron(II) ions ...............................................................................................................................
iron(III) ions ..............................................................................................................................

[2]
(c) Iron is a transition metal.
(i) Suggest two properties of iron that are not properties of Group I metals.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Explain why iron is used in the form of alloys, rather than as pure iron, for kitchen knives.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a helicopter hovering above the ground.
rotor blades
Fig. 3.1
(a) The helicopter stays in one place as it hovers. The turning rotor blades provide the uplift force
to keep it in the air.
On Fig. 3.1 draw two force arrows to show the vertical forces acting on the helicopter.
Label each arrow with the name of the force acting on the helicopter. [3]
(b) The helicopter uses fuel to power its engines which turn the rotor blades. The pilot increases
the speed of the rotor blades and the helicopter climbs vertically to a height of 1000 m. It then
hovers again at this height.
Complete the sequence of energy transfers for the helicopter below.
........................................................ energy in the fuel
........................................................ energy of the rotor blades

kinetic
........................................................ energy of the climbing helicopter
........................................................ energy of the helicopter at 1000 m. [3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/O/N/17

7
(c) The helicopter starts to move forward.
It increases speed for 20 s until it reaches a constant speed of 50 m / s.
It continues at this speed for 100 s.
It then slows down for 10 s to hover in one place again.
(i) On the grid in Fig. 3.2, plot a speed-time graph of the helicopter journey, which lasts 130 s.
50
40
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
time / s
Fig. 3.2
[2]
(ii) Calculate the distance moved by the helicopter while flying at constant speed.
Show your working.
working
distance = ............................................... m [2]

8
4 A student does an experiment to investigate the germination of barley seeds. The treatment of the
seeds before the experiment is shown in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
seed treatment of seeds before the experiment pH of soaking solution

A boiled in water for 10 minutes 7
B soaked at room temperature for a few hours 3
C soaked at room temperature for a few hours 7
• After treatment, a piece of each seed is placed on an agar plate containing starch.
• After two days a test solution is added to the plate. This solution changes colour when
starch is present.
The results are shown in Fig. 4.1.
barley seed
barley seed piece
A B piece A B
area containing
starch
C
C
area containing starch clear area
at the start after a few days
Fig. 4.1
(a) Name the test solution and the colour change that occurs when starch is present.
name of solution .......................................................................................................................
colour change ...........................................................................................................................

[2]
(b) The student thinks that an enzyme is produced by the barley seed C which causes the starch
to be broken down in the clear area.
Explain how the results for seed A and seed B, shown in Fig. 4.1, support this idea.
seed A ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
seed B .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/O/N/17
9
(c) The breaking down of starch is an example of chemical digestion.
Explain why chemical digestion is necessary in the human alimentary canal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) In the human alimentary canal, food is broken down by both chemical and mechanical
digestion. The teeth are involved in mechanical digestion.
Fig. 4.2 shows one type of tooth found in the human mouth.
Fig. 4.2
Name this type of tooth and explain how the structure of the tooth makes it suitable for its
function.
name .........................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

10
5 (a) The Periodic Table lists all of the elements in atomic number order.
Define atomic number.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Part of the Periodic Table is shown in Fig. 5.1. The letters in this table are not the symbols of
the elements.
A
B C
D E
F G H
Fig. 5.1
(i) Use the letters in Fig. 5.1 to identify
one element that is an unreactive gas, ..................................
the element with the lowest mass (nucleon) number .................................. .

[2]
(ii) State the type of chemical bond that forms between element D and element E.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Element F and element B combine in an exothermic reaction.
State what is meant by exothermic.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/O/N/17

11
(c) Chlorine gas is bubbled through a solution of potassium bromide, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
chlorine gas
potassium
bromide solution
Fig. 5.2
(i) State the colour of chlorine gas.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The solution of potassium bromide turns from colourless to orange-brown.
Name the orange-brown substance.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A student tries to produce chlorine gas using the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.3.
low voltage
d.c. supply
– +
inert carbon rods
solid copper chloride
Fig. 5.3
No chlorine gas is made.
(i) Name the process that the student is trying to use.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest one change that the student must make to produce chlorine gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
12
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a radiator which uses hot water to provide heating for people sitting in a room
watching television.
warm air rising
cooler water
out
hot radiator
water in
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) Name the method of thermal energy transfer from the hot water inside the radiator,
through the radiator, to the air outside the radiator.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest a suitable material for making the radiator so that this thermal energy transfer is
efficient.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) On Fig. 6.1 complete a sequence of five arrows to show how the warm air from the
radiator is able to transfer thermal energy to the people sitting in the room and return as
cool air to the radiator. [2]
(ii) State the term used to describe this type of thermal energy transfer.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/O/N/17

13
(c) Television signals use electromagnetic waves.
Fig. 6.2 shows an incomplete electromagnetic spectrum.
ultra- micro-
gamma visible infra-red radio
violet waves
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, in the first row of the table, write the name of the missing type of
electromagnetic waves in the blank box. [1]
(ii) The aerial on the television set receives a signal from a television transmitter on a nearby
hill.
On Fig. 6.2 in the second row of the table place a tick in the box under the electromagnetic
waves used by this television set. [1]
(d) The screen of the television set is very dusty. A man uses a cloth to clean the screen, but he
notices that the dust is attracted back to the screen.
His friend tells him that this is due to an electrostatic charge on the screen.
Describe one or more experiments that the friend could do to show the man
• how electrostatic charges are produced,
• that there are two types of electric charge.
You may wish to include diagrams to help your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
14
7 (a) During transpiration water is lost from the leaves of a plant.
An experiment is carried out to compare the transpiration rates of the upper and lower
surfaces of leaves of three similar plants, N, U and B, using the apparatus shown in Fig. 7.1.
The leaves of two plants are treated with petroleum jelly, a waterproof substance which
prevents evaporation from the surface of the leaf.
plastic bag to
prevent water
from evaporating
from the soil
balance
plant N plant U plant B
no petroleum jelly petroleum jelly on the petroleum jelly on both
upper surface of leaves surfaces of the leaves
Fig. 7.1
The masses of plants N, U and B are measured.
After six hours the mass of each plant is measured again and the mass of water lost from
each plant is calculated.
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
mass of water
lost / g 5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
plant N plant U plant B
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/O/N/17

15
(i) Use the results in Fig. 7.2 to state which surface of the leaf, upper or lower, loses more
water.
surface ..........................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Explain your conclusion to (i) in terms of leaf structure.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Water is taken in at the roots and travels upwards to the leaves through the stem.
Fig. 7.3 shows the tissues found in a cross-section of a plant stem.
Fig. 7.3
Label the tissue that transports water with the correct name. [2]
(c) Water is one of the raw materials needed for photosynthesis.
Complete the word equation for photosynthesis.
light
water + +
chlorophyll
[1]
(d) Green plants are producers which rely on the Sun to provide light energy for photosynthesis.
Explain why carnivores cannot survive without producers.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
16
8 (a) (i) Copper is extracted when copper oxide is heated with carbon.
Carbon dioxide is produced and released into the air.
Complete the word equation for this reaction.
copper oxide + +
[1]
(ii) Fossil fuels also release carbon dioxide during combustion.
Suggest one other process that releases carbon dioxide into the air.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Natural gas is a fossil fuel.
Name one solid fossil fuel and one liquid fossil fuel.
solid ...................................................................................................................................
liquid ..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows the structure of a molecule of compound X.
H H
H C C O H
H H
Fig. 8.1
(i) Name compound X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what is meant by a hydrocarbon.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Explain why compound X is not a hydrocarbon.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/O/N/17

17
9 In a theatre, spotlights are used to shine a beam of light on one person on the stage.
Fig. 9.1 shows a spotlight shining a parallel beam of light on a singer.
Fig. 9.1
(a) Fig. 9.2 shows a powerful lamp shining through a narrow hole in front of a lens inside the
spotlight.
Fig. 9.2
(i) On Fig. 9.2 use a ruler to draw three rays that come through the narrow hole, pass
through the lens and emerge parallel to each other to form a narrow beam of light.
One ray has been started for you. [2]
(ii) Name the distance from the narrow hole to the lens.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

18
(b) Fig. 9.3a shows the way the lamps in two spotlights are connected to a power supply. The
circuit contains a dimmer control so that the brightness of the lights can be changed.
Fig. 9.3b shows part of the circuit diagram for this.
dimmer
control
Fig. 9.3a
power
supply
Fig. 9.3b
(i) The dimmer control contains a variable resistor.
On Fig 9.3b complete the circuit diagram by connecting the variable resistor into the
circuit between X and Y using the correct circuit symbol. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/O/N/17

19
(ii) The current from the power supply is 20 A.
State the conclusion that can be drawn about the size of the current through each lamp.
conclusion .........................................................................................................................
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) The filament of one of the lamps breaks.
State what will happen to the other lamp. Give a reason for your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/32/O/N/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
20
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/32/O/N/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 8 9 9 5 5 8 6 8 2 3 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/FC) 139543/2
2
1 (a) Use the following words or phrases to complete the flow chart about a possible pathway
taken by water through a plant from the soil to the air.
Each word or phrase may be used once, more than once or not at all.
cuticle epidermal cells mesophyll cells phloem
root hair cells stomata tubes xylem
from the soil into the root
through the ....................................................... in the stem
into the cells in the leaf
evaporation from surfaces of the ....................................................... inside the leaf
through the ....................................................... into the air
[3]
(b) State two functions of water in plants.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) A supply of water is needed by humans too. Most of the plasma in the blood is made up from
water. The plasma carries the blood cells around the body.
State two other substances that are transported by the plasma.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

3
(d) The haemoglobin in red blood cells contains iron.
(i) State the role of haemoglobin in the blood.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why a menstruating woman needs to make sure she takes enough iron in her
diet.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Describe one symptom of iron deficiency in the body.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

4
2 (a) Some iron objects are shown in Fig. 2.1.
Fig. 2.1
(i) State two physical properties of all metals.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Iron is a transition metal.
State one physical property of transition metals that is not a physical property of
Group I metals.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A student adds some iron nails to dilute sulfuric acid.
Iron sulfate and hydrogen gas are produced.
(i) Complete the word equation to show this reaction.
iron + +
[1]
(ii) The student tests another dilute acid with aqueous silver nitrate.
A white solid forms.
Deduce the anion present and name the acid.
anion .................................................................................................................................
acid ....................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

5
(c) The atomic number of iron is 26.
Explain what is meant by atomic number.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows four forces, P, Q, R and S, acting on a submarine. The submarine is travelling
underwater and moving to the right at constant speed.
S Q
Fig. 3.1
(a) In Table 3.1 complete the names of the forces P, Q, R and S.
Table 3.1
P uplift
Q
R
S driving force
[2]
(b) The submarine is travelling at a constant depth.
State how the magnitude of force P compares to force R.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The submarine captain cannot use a radio transmitter underwater.
The captain orders the crew to take the submarine to the surface so he can use a radio
transmitter.
(i) State which force must be increased to bring the submarine to the surface.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

7
(ii) Fig. 3.2 shows an incomplete electromagnetic spectrum. On Fig. 3.2 add radio waves in
their correct place.
visible micro-
gamma
light waves
Fig. 3.2
[1]
(iii) Electromagnetic waves do not pass easily through sea water. Suggest a different kind of
wave that can travel in water and might be used to send a signal.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) When submerged, the submarine has to use an energy source that does not depend upon
the Sun or on burning a fuel.
Suggest a suitable energy source that can be carried in a submarine in order to power the
submarine underwater.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) Use steps 1 to 3 below to calculate the average speed of the submarine in metres per second
(m / s) if it travels 30 kilometres in 1 hour.
Step 1: convert 30 kilometres to metres.
....................................................... m
Step 2: convert 1 hour to seconds.
........................................................ s
Step 3: calculate the speed in metres per second.
speed = ....................................................... m / s
[2]

8
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a diagram of the alimentary canal. The main areas where digestion takes place are
labelled.
mouth cavity
(approximately neutral)
stomach
duodenum (acidic)
(alkaline)
B
Fig. 4.1
(a) Name structures A and B shown in Fig. 4.1.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
B ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A student is investigating human digestive enzymes.
He has three test-tubes, 1, 2 and 3, containing protein solution at different pH values. He then
adds the same enzyme to all three test-tubes and keeps them at 35 °C.
The protein solution is cloudy at the start of the experiment. If the protein in the solution is
broken down the solution becomes clear and colourless.
tube 1 tube 2 tube 3
clear cloudy
colourless protein
solution solution
pH 2 pH 7 pH 8
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17
9
(i) Use the information in Fig. 4.1 to identify the likely source of the digestive enzyme that
produces the result in tube 1 in Fig. 4.2.
source of enzyme ..............................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Suggest why a temperature of 60 °C is not suitable for this experiment.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Explain why the change that takes place in tube 1 is an example of chemical digestion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iv) Describe one example of mechanical digestion.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

11
5 (a) Pure water can be separated from sea water using the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1.
water out
condenser
cold water
in
sea water pure water
heat
Fig. 5.1
(i) Name this process.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe the change in the temperature of the pure water as it passes through the
condenser.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The purification of a water supply involves filtration and chlorination.
Explain how filtration and chlorination purify the water supply.
filtration .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
chlorination ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

12
(c) Petroleum is separated into different fractions, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
refinery gas
gasoline
gas oil
hot
petroleum
Fig. 5.2
(i) State one use for refinery gas and one use for gas oil.
refinery gas .......................................................................................................................
gas oil ................................................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) Gasoline is a mixture of hydrocarbons.
Explain what is meant by a hydrocarbon.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

13
(d) The structures of six compounds are shown in Fig. 5.3.
H H H
O C O H C H H C C H
H H H
A B C
H H H H
C C H C C OH O
H H H H H H
D E F
Fig. 5.3
(i) Using letters A to F, identify the two products of the complete combustion of hydrocarbons.
........................... and ........................... [1]
(ii) Using letters A to F, identify the main constituent of natural gas.
........................... [1]

14
6 Fig. 6.1a shows an insulated bag used to carry frozen food. The bag keeps the food below the
melting point of ice.
Fig. 6.1b shows the structure of the walls of the bag.
plastic
covering
insulating
foam
Carry – ke co
ep ol! aluminium
foil
Fig 6.1a Fig. 6.1b (not to scale)
(a) State the meaning of melting point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The insulating foam is designed to reduce thermal energy transfer through the bag.
(i) Name two methods of thermal energy transfer that the insulating foam is designed to
reduce.
................................................................ and ...............................................................[1]
(ii) Describe how the insulating foam reduces thermal energy transfer by these two methods.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

15
(c) The aluminium foil is designed to reduce thermal energy transfer by radiation.
Name the part of the electromagnetic spectrum mainly involved in thermal energy transfer by
radiation.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A box of ice cream is carried in the bag.
The ice cream weighs 1900 g, and has a volume of 2000 cm3.
Calculate the density of the ice cream.
formula
working
density = ............................................... g / cm3 [2]

16
7 Fig. 7.1 shows some processes occurring in a forest growing on a hill.
clouds
water vapour
X
tree
leaves fall
onto the soil surface of soil
roots
Fig. 7.1
(a) Name the process labelled X.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) The leaves of the trees contain carbohydrates, for example sugar.
Describe how leaves use a carbon compound in the air to make sugar.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) When leaves die they fall onto the soil. Decomposers (bacteria and fungi) feed on the
dead leaves and use the sugar present in the leaves.
Suggest and explain how the carbon in the sugar is returned to the atmosphere by the
decomposers.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

17
(c) The trees in the forest shown in Fig. 7.1 are cut down.
Predict and explain the effect of clearing the trees on the amount of rain falling on the area.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A storm occurs higher up the hill and water comes flowing down the hill.
Suggest how the soil in the cleared area will be affected by water from heavy rainfall flowing
down the hill.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

18
8 (a) Molten lead(II) bromide is broken down into simpler substances using the apparatus shown
in Fig. 8.1.
low voltage
d.c.supply
................................. .................................
– +
molten lead (II) bromide
Fig. 8.1
(i) Use the names of the electrodes to complete Fig. 8.1. [2]
(ii) Describe the appearance of the substance that forms at the positive electrode.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Copper is extracted from copper oxide by heating with carbon.
The equation for this reaction is
copper oxide + carbon copper + carbon dioxide.
State whether the copper oxide is oxidised or reduced during this reaction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

19
(c) Copper, Cu, does not react with water.
Calcium, Ca, reacts rapidly with water.
Magnesium, Mg, reacts slowly with water.
Potassium, K, reacts very rapidly with water.
Place these four metals in order of reactivity, from most to least reactive.
.......................................................... most reactive
..........................................................
..........................................................
.......................................................... least reactive

[2]
(d) A student adds excess magnesium to dilute hydrochloric acid.
(i) State two changes that the student can make to increase the rate of this reaction.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Identify the salt produced during this reaction.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) After the reaction finishes, the student removes the unreacted magnesium from the
solution that has formed.
Name the separation technique that the student uses.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

20
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a toy car powered by batteries.
Fig. 9.1
Fig. 9.2 shows part of the circuit diagram for a circuit in the toy car, including the two headlamps
which can be switched on when needed.
Fig. 9.2
(a) The car is driven by an electric motor which must be able to operate whenever the switch
shown in Fig. 9.2 is on.
On Fig. 9.2 complete the circuit diagram by adding
• the electric motor in parallel with the headlamps, with a wire connecting it to point X on
the circuit.
The symbol for an electric motor is M .
• a variable resistor connected to the electric motor to control the speed of the motor.
• a separate switch to control both headlamps only.
• any wires needed to complete the circuit connections.

[4]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

21
(b) The resistance of the variable resistor is decreased in order to speed up the motor.
Suggest why decreasing the resistance will speed up the motor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Complete the sentences below by writing the correct phrase in each space.
Each phrase may be used once, more than once or not at all.
by an ammeter by an insulator in parallel in series
less than more than the same as
The headlamps are connected ....................................................... with each other.
When the headlamps are switched off, the current through the motor is
....................................................... the current through the battery.
When the headlamps are switched on, the combined resistance of the motor and
headlamps is ....................................................... the resistance of the motor before the
headlamps are switched on. [3]
(d) Some modern cars on the road are powered by batteries.
Fig. 9.3 shows an electric car being charged by connecting it to the mains supply at an
outdoor charging point.
Fig. 9.3
Suggest one important electrical hazard for this charging process.
Suggest a way to make this safer.
hazard .......................................................................................................................................
safety improvement ..................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/33/O/N/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
24
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/33/O/N/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 7 8 0 6 8 1 8 8 2 0 *

Paper 4 (Extended) October/November 2017
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/SG) 139538/2
2
1 (a) Use the following words or phrases to complete the flow chart about the transport of oxygen
to the tissues of the body.
Each word or phrase may be used once, more than once, or not at all.
aorta capillaries muscles plasma platelets
pulmonary artery pulmonary vein red blood cells white blood cells
Oxygen diffuses into the blood from the air in the alveoli.
Oxygen is carried in the blood by the ..................................................................... .
Blood travels through the ..................................................................... towards the heart.
Blood leaves the heart through the ..................................................................... .
Blood enters the ..................................................................... in the tissues.
Oxygen diffuses into tissue cells.
[4]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a cross-sectional diagram of an artery which carries blood away from the
heart.
Fig. 1.1
Describe one way in which the structure of the wall of the artery helps it to carry out its
function.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17
3
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows the human gas exchange system.
Fig. 1.2
Name the structures A and B shown in Fig. 1.2.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
B ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Tobacco smoke can have harmful effects on the gas exchange system and the body.
Describe the harmful effects of the following components of tobacco smoke.
nicotine .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
tar .............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

4
2 (a) Electrolysis is used to break up some compounds into simpler substances.
Fig. 2.1 shows the electrolysis of molten potassium bromide using inert electrodes.
d.c. supply
negative electrode positive electrode

– +
molten potassium bromide
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the names of the negative electrode and of the positive electrode.
negative electrode .............................................................................................................
positive electrode ..............................................................................................................

[1]
(ii) Identify the substances formed at the negative electrode and at the positive electrode.
at negative electrode .........................................................................................................
at positive electrode ..........................................................................................................

[2]
(iii) Explain, in terms of the ions present, why potassium bromide must be molten during this
electrolysis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17

5
(b) The salt potassium chloride is made when excess solid potassium carbonate reacts with an
acid.
A gas is made during this reaction.
(i) Complete the balanced symbolic equation, with state symbols, for this reaction.
K2CO3(s) + 2 .................(.....) .........KCl (aq) + .................(.....) + .................(.....)

[3]
(ii) Describe a test to show that a solution contains chloride ions.
test ....................................................................................................................................
observation ........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) A mixture is formed in the reaction between excess solid potassium carbonate and the
acid.
Suggest how pure, dry crystals of potassium chloride can be obtained from this mixture.
You may draw a diagram as part of your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a guitar.
Fig. 3.1
(a) The guitar produces sounds with frequencies between 80 Hz and 5000 Hz.
(i) State what is meant by a frequency of 80 Hz.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A guitarist plays a note of frequency 250 Hz twice on his guitar.
The first time he plays the note with a large amplitude.
The second time he plays the note with a small amplitude.
Describe the difference the listener will hear between these two notes.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) State whether a person with normal hearing can hear all the frequencies produced by
this guitar. Give a reason for your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17

7
(b) At a concert the sound of the guitar is broadcast on a radio programme using radio waves.
A boy in the audience is 100 m from the stage. He listens to the guitar on his radio, but he can
also hear the sound of the guitar coming directly from the stage.
The boy hears the sound from his radio before the same sound comes from the stage.
Explain why the sound coming directly from the stage arrives later than the sound from his
radio.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Fig. 3.2 shows a girl using a mirror to see the guitarist over the heads of people.
guitarist
mirror
girl
Fig. 3.2
On Fig. 3.2 draw accurately one light ray from the guitarist to show how the girl is able to see
the guitarist. [2]

8
(d) The guitarist investigates the extension of a guitar string made of steel when different tension
forces are used to stretch it.
Fig. 3.3 shows the graph of some results obtained from this experiment.
extension / mm
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
tension force / N
Fig. 3.3
The guitarist adjusts the note played by a guitar string by adjusting the tension force in the
string. The more the tension force, the higher the note.
The guitarist must only increase the tension force within the limits where Hooke’s Law applies.
(i) State Hooke’s Law.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Use the graph to identify the limit of proportionality for this guitar string.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17

9
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows some bacterial cells as seen using an electron microscope. They are an
example of the microorganisms used in the manufacture of yoghurt.
cell B
length
Fig. 4.1
The actual length of cell B is 0.001 mm.
Calculate the magnification of cell B.
magnification = .......................................................... [2]
(b) The microorganisms break down the sugar in milk. They produce an acid as a waste product.
The acid affects the activity of the enzymes in the microorganisms.
(i) Suggest the effect of the acid on the rate of sugar breakdown. Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Yoghurt can be made at a range of temperatures. However the reaction is usually carried
out at 44 °C.
Suggest why the temperature of 44 °C is used, and not a higher temperature.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

10
(c) Microorganisms have the role of decomposers in the carbon cycle.
(i) Define the term decomposer.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain two reasons why decomposers are essential in the carbon cycle.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17

11
5 Petroleum is separated into useful products by process W shown in Fig. 5.1.
Process X changes some molecules into shorter molecules.
process X
column
process W
strong heat
petroleum
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Name process W shown in Fig. 5.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Use words from the list to complete the sentences about process W.
higher greater lower
smaller stronger weaker
Products with ................................................... molecular sizes collect at the bottom of

the column.
Products with ................................................... boiling points collect at the top of the

column.
Molecules with higher boiling points have ................................................... intermolecular

attractive forces.
[1]
(b) Process X produces short hydrocarbon molecules.
Name process X.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

12
(c) Two hydrocarbon molecules, A and B, are shown in Fig. 5.2.
H H
H H
H C C H C C
H H
H H
A B
Fig. 5.2
(i) Describe the chemical test that is used to distinguish between these two hydrocarbon
molecules.
test ....................................................................................................................................
observation with A .............................................................................................................
observation with B .............................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) Name hydrocarbon B.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Combustion of hydrocarbons produces carbon dioxide.
(i) Explain why the proportion of carbon dioxide in air is increasing.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why people are concerned that the proportion of carbon dioxide in air is
increasing.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17

13
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a fan heater used to heat a room in cold weather.
Fig. 6.1
The fan heater is connected to the mains electricity supply.
Fig. 6.2 shows the circuit diagram for the fan heater.
The fan heater has two heating elements, heater 1 and heater 2, and a motor to drive the fan,
connected to a 240 V mains electricity supply.
240 V
switch 3
heater 1
switch 1
heater 2
switch 2
M
motor
Fig. 6.2
(a) Deduce which switch or switches must be closed (on) for heater 1 and the motor to work
without heater 2.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

14
(b) (i) Each heating element has a power consumption of 1100 W.
Calculate the current through one heating element when switched on.
State the formula that you use and show your working.
formula
working
current = ....................................................... A [2]
(ii) The fan motor is rated at 50 W.
The fuse in the circuit is rated at 10 A.
Explain whether this fuse provides good protection if an overload happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17

15
(c) An electrician wants to measure the current through the fan motor.
Complete the circuit diagram in Fig. 6.3 to show how the electrician should connect a meter
to do this.
You should use the correct symbol for the meter to be used, and complete all missing circuit
connections.
240 V
switch 3
heater 1
switch 1
heater 2
switch 2
M
motor
Fig. 6.3
[2]

16
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a sealed glass jar containing soil and plants. An oxygen sensor is used to find out
how the concentration of oxygen in the glass jar changes during the day.
The plants can live in the glass jar for several weeks without opening the jar.
bung
oxygen sensor
glass jar
soil
Fig. 7.1
(a) The plants in Fig. 7.1 use carbon dioxide for photosynthesis.
Explain why they do not run out of carbon dioxide in the sealed jar.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The water needed for photosynthesis enters the root hair cells of the plants.
Describe how the structure of a root hair cell adapts it for water uptake.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17

17
(c) Fig. 7.2 shows a graph of the oxygen concentration in the glass jar shown in Fig. 7.1 over a
12-hour period on a sunny day.
oxygen
concentration
0600 0800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

time / hours
Fig. 7.2
Oxygen is produced by photosynthesis taking place in the plant.
(i) State a time at which the rate of photosynthesis is highest.
time .........................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) On a different day the graph follows a similar pattern as Fig. 7.2 until 10.00 hours.
After 10.00 hours the weather changes and it becomes darker.
On Fig. 7.2 draw a line to show how the oxygen production changes after this time.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
18
8 (a) An atom of phosphorus is represented as shown.

31
15 P
(i) State the number of protons and neutrons in this atom of phosphorus.
number of protons .................................
number of neutrons .................................

[2]
(ii) Deduce the electronic structure of an atom of phosphorus.
...................................................................... [1]
(b) Nitrogen, N, is in the same group of the Periodic Table as phosphorus.
Nitrogen forms molecules, N2.
(i) State the type of chemical bonding in a molecule of nitrogen.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the multiple bonds in a molecule of
nitrogen.
N N
[1]
(c) The noble gases, in Group VIII of the Periodic Table, are unreactive and do not bond with
other elements.
State one use for helium.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Lithium, sodium and potassium are Group I metals.
Explain why these metals cannot be extracted from their ores by heating the ores with
carbon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17

19
(e) The melting points and physical states at room temperature of the first four elements in
Group VII are shown in Table 8.1.
Table 8.1
physical melting
element
state point / °C
fluorine gas −220
chlorine gas −101
bromine liquid −7
iodine solid 114
astatine
Complete Table 8.1 by predicting the physical state and melting point of astatine, the fifth
element in Group VII. [1]

20
9 Fig. 9.1 shows the horizontal and vertical forces which act on a car on a level road.
frictional force driving force
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) Name the force represented by the arrow pointing downwards.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) After the car starts to move, the driving force is constant, but the frictional force increases.
The car reaches a speed of 10 m / s after 12 seconds.
On the grid below sketch a speed-time graph for this part of the journey.
12
10
speed
m/s
6
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
time / s
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17
21
(b) The car is powered by batteries that can be recharged from solar cells when the batteries
run down.
(i) 40 000 000 J of electrical energy are needed to charge the batteries from the solar cells.
The solar cells have an efficiency of 20%.
Calculate the energy input from the Sun to the solar cells required to charge the batteries.
State the formula that you use and show your working.
formula
working
energy input = ....................................................... J [2]
(ii) Electric cars are intended to replace cars that use fossil fuels. The electricity is usually
generated by power stations, many of which use non-renewable resources such as fossil
fuels.
Solar panels are a renewable energy resource.
State two other renewable energy resources that can be used to generate electricity.
......................................................... and ......................................................... [2]

22
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows the car crossing a bridge.
Fig. 9.2
Fig. 9.3 shows a gap in the road surface on the bridge.
Fig. 9.3
(i) On a hot sunny day the temperature of the bridge rises and the gap shown closes.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest what might happen to the bridge on a hot sunny day if this gap was not provided.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17

23
(iii) Use words from the list below to complete the blanks in the sentence that follows.
boils evaporates faster larger melts slower smaller
After rain, the road surface is wet with water which slowly ...............................................
as the ............................................... molecules escape from the water surface. [2]
(iv) On a cold winter’s day, the temperature is −5 °C.
Water vapour in the air freezes onto the road surface as ice.
On Fig. 9.4 draw a line to link the correct arrangement of molecules in water vapour to
the correct arrangement of molecules in ice.
water vapour ice
Fig. 9.4
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/41/O/N/17

© UCLES 2017
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
24
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/41/O/N/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 2 6 5 2 3 3 5 2 6 3 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/SG) 139539/2
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

3
1 (a) A fetus is the name given to a developing baby in the later stages of pregnancy.
Use the following words or phrases to complete the flow chart about the supply of oxygen to
a growing fetus.
amniotic fluid diaphragm placenta plasma
red blood cells trachea umbilical cord white blood cells
Oxygen diffuses through the alveoli in the mother’s lungs.
Oxygen is carried by the ..................................................................... in the blood.
The oxygen diffuses across the ..................................................................... which is

attached to the wall of the uterus.
The oxygenated blood goes through the .....................................................................

towards the fetus.
Oxygen reaches the cells of the growing fetus.
[3]

4
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows flow charts of how identical and non-identical twins occur.
identical twins non-identical twins
sperm cell egg cell sperm egg sperm egg

cell cell cell cell
zygote zygote zygote

cell division
cell cell
division division
body cell embryo embryo

of embryo
fetus fetus
Fig. 1.1
Use Fig. 1.1 to name
1. a haploid cell, ........................................................................................................................
2. a diploid cell. .........................................................................................................................

[2]
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows how the genetic material in the nuclei of the cells is passed from the egg and
sperm to the fetus.
Taking each pair of twins in turn, predict whether the genetic material in their body cells is
similar or different from each other.
identical twins ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
non-identical twins ....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

5
(d) Fig. 1.2 shows one of the cells from a growing fetus.
Fig. 1.2
(i) Identify the cell parts on Fig. 1.2 using label lines and the letters C and R.
Use C to show the part which controls what enters and leaves the cell.
Use R to show where chemical reactions, such as respiration, take place. [2]
(ii) Complete the balanced symbolic equation for aerobic respiration.
................................... + .........O2 .........CO2 + ................................... [2]

6
2 (a) A student places identical sized pieces of four metals, A, B, C and D, into separate beakers
containing dilute hydrochloric acid, HCl, of the same concentration, volume and temperature.
The gas made during the reactions with the acid is collected, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
gas measuring cylinder
dilute
hydrochloric metal
acid
Fig. 2.1
The total volume of the gas that is collected is measured every two minutes.
Table 2.1 shows the volumes of the gas that the student records.
Table 2.1
total volume of gas collected / cm3

metal
2 minutes 4 minutes 6 minutes 8 minutes
A 7 13 17 20
B 1 2 3 4
C 3 5 6 7
D 10 15 18 20
(i) Using the information in Table 2.1, deduce the order of reactivity of the four metals, from
most to least reactive.
......................... most reactive
.........................
.........................
......................... least reactive

[1]
(ii) State which of these four metals forms positive ions
most readily, .........................
least readily. .........................

[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

7
(iii) Using the information in Table 2.1, state when the rate of the reaction between metal D
and dilute hydrochloric acid is the greatest.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Describe and explain, in terms of particle collisions, the effect of increasing the
temperature on the rate of reaction.
effect ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) When iron reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid, a solution of an iron salt is made.
The student thinks that this salt contains iron(II) ions.
Another student thinks that the salt contains iron(III) ions.
They add dilute sodium hydroxide solution to a sample of the iron salt solution.
Describe the observations that are expected for iron(II) ions and for iron(III) ions.
iron(II) ions ...............................................................................................................................
iron(III) ions ..............................................................................................................................

[2]
(c) The arrangements of particles in four substances are shown in Fig. 2.2.
P Q R S
Fig. 2.2
(i) State which arrangement, P, Q, R or S, represents the structure of an alloy.
........................ [1]
(ii) Explain why iron is used in the form of alloys, rather than as pure iron, for kitchen knives.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

8
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a helicopter hovering above the ground.
rotor blades
Fig. 3.1
(a) The helicopter stays in one place as it hovers. The turning rotor blades provide the uplift force
to keep it in the air.
On Fig. 3.1 draw two force arrows to show the vertical forces acting on the helicopter.
Label each arrow with the name of the force acting on the helicopter. [3]
(b) The helicopter uses fuel to power its engines which turn the rotor blades. The pilot increases
the speed of the rotor blades and the helicopter climbs vertically to a height of 1000 m. It then
hovers again at this height.
Complete the sequence of energy transfers for the helicopter below.
................................................. energy in the fuel

kinetic
................................................. energy of the rotor blades
kinetic
................................................. energy of the climbing helicopter
................................................. energy of the helicopter at 1000 m. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

9
(c) Fig. 3.2 shows the speed-time graph for a helicopter journey.
60
40
speed
m/s
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
time / s
Fig. 3.2
(i) Use Fig. 3.2 to calculate the initial acceleration of the helicopter from rest to constant
speed.
Show your working and give the units of your answer.
acceleration = .............................................. unit ........................... [2]
(ii) Use Fig. 3.2 to calculate the distance moved by the helicopter in the first 50 seconds of
this journey.
Show your working on the graph or below.
distance = .............................................. m [2]
(iii) Describe the motion of the helicopter between 50 s and 65 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

10
4 (a) A student does an experiment to investigate the germination of barley seeds. The treatment
of the seeds before the experiment is shown in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
seed treatment of seeds before the experiment pH of soaking solution

A boiled in water for 10 minutes 7
B soaked at room temperature for a few hours 3
C soaked at room temperature for a few hours 7
• After treatment, a piece of each seed is placed on an agar plate containing starch.
• After two days an iodine solution is added to the plate which shows the area of starch
remaining on the plate.
barley seed barley seed

piece piece
A B A B
blue-black area
where starch
C remains
C
area containing starch clear area
at the start after a few days
Fig. 4.1
The student thinks that an enzyme is produced by the barley seed which causes the starch to
be broken down in the clear area.
Explain in detail how the results for seed A and seed B, shown in Fig. 4.1, support this idea.
seed A ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
seed B ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

11
(b) Germinating seeds use their store of energy until the young seedlings have chlorophyll in
their leaves. Chlorophyll is needed for photosynthesis.
Describe the role of chlorophyll in photosynthesis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

12
5 (a) Explain why the proportion of carbon dioxide in the air is increasing.
Suggest why some people are concerned about this increase.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The structure of ethanol is shown in Fig. 5.1.
H H
H C C O H
H H
Fig. 5.1
Deduce the formula of ethanol.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Octane, C8H18, and methane are obtained from petroleum by fractional distillation.
(i) State and explain the difference in the boiling points of octane and methane.
Use ideas about molecular size and intermolecular attractive forces in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Complete the balanced symbolic equation for the complete combustion of octane.
2C8H18 + ......... O2 ........................ + .........................

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

13
(d) Ethene is manufactured by breaking down larger hydrocarbon molecules obtained from the
fractional distillation of petroleum.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Ethene and ethane are two different types of hydrocarbon.
Name these two different types of hydrocarbon.
ethene ...............................................................................................................................
ethane ...............................................................................................................................
[1]

14
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a radiator which uses hot water to provide heating for people sitting in a room
watching television.
warm air rising
cooler water
out
hot radiator
water in
Fig. 6.1
(a) Describe, in terms of the motion of the atoms and molecules, how thermal energy is conducted
from the hot water inside the radiator through the solid radiator.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) (i) On Fig. 6.1 complete a sequence of five arrows to show how the warm air from the
radiator is able to transfer thermal energy to the people sitting in the room and return as
cool air to the radiator. [2]
(ii) Explain why the air moves around the room in this way.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

15
(c) Television signals use electromagnetic waves.
Fig. 6.2 shows the electromagnetic spectrum.
gamma X-rays ultraviolet visible infra-red microwaves radio
Fig. 6.2
The aerial on the television set receives a signal from a television transmitter on a nearby hill.
State the type of electromagnetic waves received by the television set.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The people in the room are watching a game of football on the television. The game is being
played in a stadium two kilometres away.
A goal is scored and the crowd shouts very loudly. The people in the room hear the sound on
the television, and a few seconds later they hear the sound directly from the stadium coming
through the window.
Explain why they hear the sound of the crowd at different times.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

16
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a longitudinal section of a capillary next to some tissue cells.
tissue cell
wall of capillary
Fig. 7.1
(i) On Fig. 7.1 draw an arrow to show the direction of the net movement of oxygen molecules
by diffusion. [1]
(ii) Explain your answer to (i).
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a diagram of a root hair cell. It absorbs water by diffusion.
water
soil particle
Fig. 7.2
(i) Describe how the structure of the root hair cell is adapted for its function.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

17
(ii) A large amount of salt is added to the soil. The salt dissolves in the water in the soil.
Suggest what happens to the rate of diffusion of water into the root hair cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Some fertiliser is washed by rain into a pond.
The fertiliser causes the algae on the surface of the pond to reproduce rapidly and cover the
surface of the pond. Many algae and plants beneath the surface die due to lack of light.
Describe the changes that follow in the pond which can cause fish in the pond to die.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]

18
8 (a) A student tries to produce chlorine gas and copper by electrolysis.
He uses solid copper chloride, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
low voltage
d.c. supply
– +
inert electrodes
solid copper chloride
Fig. 8.1
(i) Describe one change that the student must make to produce chlorine gas and copper.
Explain, in terms of the ions present, why the student must do this.
change ..............................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The atomic number of chlorine is 17.
Complete Fig. 8.2 to show the electronic structure of a chlorine atom.
nucleus
Fig. 8.2
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

19
(iii) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram of a molecule of chlorine, Cl 2, in Fig. 8.3.
Show all of the outer shell electrons only.
Cl Cl
Fig. 8.3
[2]
(b) Copper can be produced by heating copper oxide with carbon.
(i) The reaction between carbon and copper oxide is endothermic.
State the energy change that occurs in an endothermic reaction.
.................................................. energy .................................................. energy [1]
(ii) In the reaction between carbon and copper oxide, oxygen is removed from copper.
State the type of reaction that involves the loss of oxygen.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Copper can be extracted from its ore by reaction with carbon and by electrolysis.
Group I metals are only extracted by electrolysis.
Relate the method of extraction of a metal from its ore to its position in the reactivity
series.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

20
9 In a theatre, spotlights are used to shine a beam of light on one person on the stage.
Fig. 9.1 shows a spotlight shining a parallel beam of light on a singer.
Fig. 9.1
(a) Fig. 9.2 shows a powerful lamp shining through a narrow hole in front of a lens inside the
spotlight.
Fig. 9.2
On Fig. 9.2 use a ruler to draw three rays that come through the narrow hole, pass through
the lens and emerge parallel to each other to form a narrow beam of light.
One ray has been started for you. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

21
(b) Fig. 9.3a shows the way the lamps in two identical spotlights are connected to the electricity
supply. The circuit contains a dimmer control so that the brightness of the lights can be
changed.
Fig. 9.3b shows part of the circuit diagram for this.
dimmer
control
Fig. 9.3a
power
supply
Fig. 9.3b
(i) The dimmer control contains a variable resistor.
On Fig. 9.3b complete the circuit diagram by connecting the variable resistor into the
circuit between X and Y using the correct circuit symbol. [1]

22
(ii) The dimmer control is set so that the current through one of the lamps is 10 A.
State the current in the main circuit. Explain your answer.
current = .............................................. A
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) The filament of one of the lamps breaks.
State what will happen to the other lamp. Give a reason for your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) One lamp has a label as shown in Fig. 9.4.
Voltage = 240 V
Maximum power = 3000 W
Fig. 9.4
(i) Use the formula P = IV to calculate the maximum current through the lamp.
Show your working.
current = ....................................................... A [1]
(ii) Describe how to set the variable resistor in the dimmer control to provide maximum
power in the lamp.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/42/O/N/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
24
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/42/O/N/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 5 0 9 9 7 0 4 6 2 6 *

1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/SG) 139540/2
2
1 (a) Use the following words or phrases to complete the flow chart about the structures the blood
passes through on one side of the heart during the cardiac cycle.
aorta left atrium left ventricle pulmonary artery
right atrium right ventricle valve
vena cava
.........................................................................................................
valve
.........................................................................................................
valve
.........................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i) Explain why the human circulation system is described as a double circulation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why the blood leaving the left side of the heart has a higher pressure than blood
leaving the right side of the heart.
Higher pressure is needed in the blood on the left side of the heart because ..................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Lower pressure is needed in the blood on the right side of the heart because .................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

3
(c) During exercise the heart rate and breathing rate both increase.
(i) Explain why the heart rate increases during exercise.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why the breathing rate increases during exercise.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Smoking tobacco can have harmful effects on the gas exchange system and the body.
Choose two of the following components of tobacco smoke and describe one harmful effect
of each component.
carbon monoxide nicotine tar
component ............................................................
effect .........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
component ............................................................
effect .........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

4
2 (a) The arrangements of particles in four substances are shown in Fig. 2.1.
A B C D
Fig. 2.1
Use letters A, B, C and D to identify
a pure substance, ........................
a mixture, ........................
an alloy, ........................
a compound. ........................
[2]
(b) A student adds pieces of calcium to dilute hydrochloric acid. A vigorous reaction is observed.
(i) Complete the balanced equation to show this reaction.
Include state symbols in the equation.
Ca(s) + 2 HCl (.........) ............................ (.........) + ............................ (.........)

[2]
(ii) The student repeats the reaction using a solution of hydrochloric acid that has a lower
concentration.
State the effect of this change on the rate of the reaction.
Explain this effect using ideas about colliding particles in your answer.
effect on rate .....................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) State a simple chemical test that shows the presence of chloride ions in dilute hydrochloric
acid.
test ....................................................................................................................................
result .................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

5
(c) A salt contains iron(III) ions, Fe3+, and sulfide ions, S2−.
Determine the formula of this salt.
formula ......................................... [1]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a toy car powered by batteries.
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2 shows part of the circuit diagram for a circuit in the toy car, including the two headlamps
which can be switched on when needed.
M
motor
Fig. 3.2
(a) The car is driven by an electric motor which must be able to operate whenever the switch
shown in Fig. 3.2 is on.
The speed of the electric motor is controlled by a variable resistor.
The two headlamps are only switched on when needed, so a separate switch controls both
headlamps.
On Fig. 3.2, using the correct symbols, complete the circuit diagram by adding
• a variable resistor that controls the electric motor.
• the switch that controls both headlamps.
• any wires needed to complete the circuit connections.

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

7
(b) The resistance of the variable resistor is decreased in order to speed up the motor.
Suggest why decreasing the resistance will speed up the motor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Complete the sentences below by writing the correct phrase in each space.
Each phrase may be used once, more than once or not at all.
by an ammeter by an insulator in parallel in series
less than more than the same as
The electric motor and the headlamps are connected ............................................ .
When the car is travelling by day, the headlamps are switched off. The current through the
motor is then ............................................ the current through the battery.
When the car is travelling at night, the headlamps are switched on. The combined resistance
of the motor and headlamps is ............................................ the resistance of the motor before
the headlamps are switched on. [3]
(d) The toy car travels at 5.0 km / h for 10 min before the battery runs out.
Calculate the distance travelled by the car during this 10 minute period.
Show your working.
distance = .................................................... km [2]

8
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a diagram of the alimentary canal. The main areas where digestion takes place are
labelled.
mouth cavity
(approximately neutral)
stomach
duodenum (acidic)
(alkaline)
Fig. 4.1
(a) On Fig. 4.1 use a label line and the letter A to show where absorption of digested food occurs.
[1]
(b) A student is investigating human digestive enzymes.
He has three test-tubes, 1, 2 and 3, containing protein solution at different pH values. He then
adds the same enzyme to all three test-tubes and keeps them at 35 °C.
The protein solution is cloudy at the start of the experiment. If the protein in the solution is
broken down the solution becomes clear and colourless.
tube 1 tube 2 tube 3
clear
colourless cloudy
solution protein
solution
pH 2 pH 7 pH 8
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

9
(i) Use the information in Fig. 4.1 to identify the likely source of the digestive enzyme that
produces the result in tube 1 in Fig. 4.2.
source of enzyme ..............................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Explain why a temperature of 60 °C is not suitable for this experiment.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) Explain why the change that takes place in tube 1 is an example of chemical digestion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

10
5 Fractional distillation of petroleum produces fractions containing different compounds.
C3H8
C5H12 process Y
C16H34
strong heat
hot
petroleum
Fig. 5.1
(a) The formulae of three compounds contained in three fractions are shown in Fig. 5.1.
Describe the trend in the boiling points of these three compounds, from C3H8 to C16H34.
Explain this trend in terms of the sizes of the molecules and the forces between the molecules.
trend .........................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

11
(b) Process Y, shown in Fig. 5.1, changes the molecules in one fraction.
The molecular structure of a hydrocarbon produced in process Y is shown in Fig. 5.2.
H H
C C
H H
Fig. 5.2
(i) Name process Y.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Name the hydrocarbon shown in Fig. 5.2.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Name this type of hydrocarbon.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) State the colour change that is seen when this hydrocarbon is added to bromine water.
from ......................................................... to ......................................................... [1]
(c) The combustion of a fossil fuel is an exothermic reaction.
Explain why this is an exothermic reaction.
Use ideas about temperature change and energy transformation in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

12
6 Fig. 6.1a shows an insulated bag used to carry frozen food from the shop to home.
Fig. 6.1b shows the structure of the walls of the bag.
plastic
covering
insulating
foam
Carry – ke co
ep ol! aluminium
foil
Fig. 6.1a Fig. 6.1b (not to scale)
(a) The insulating foam is designed to reduce thermal energy transfer through the bag. It has
many small pockets of trapped gas which reduce conduction of thermal energy.
(i) Describe how thermal energy is transferred through solids by conduction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why the trapped gas is less able to transfer thermal energy by conduction.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The aluminium foil also helps to reduce thermal energy transfer.
Name the method of thermal energy transfer reduced by the use of aluminium foil.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

13
(c) The food is transferred from the insulated bag into a refrigerator.
The refrigerator has an electric motor with a power input of 80 W when connected to a 240 V
mains supply.
(i) Calculate the current through the electric motor.
formula
working
current = ....................................................... A [2]
(ii) Calculate the energy used by the refrigerator when the motor runs for one hour.
formula
working
energy = ....................................................... J [2]

14
7 Fig. 7.1 shows some processes occurring in a forest.
clouds
water vapour
X
tree
leaves fall
onto the soil surface of soil
roots
Fig. 7.1
(a) Name the process labelled X.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The leaves of the trees contain nutrients in the form of minerals. When the leaves die they fall
onto the soil. Organisms in the soil can make the minerals available to the trees again.
Name the type of organisms that make the minerals available. Explain your answer.
type of organism .......................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The trees in the forest shown in Fig. 7.1 are cut down.
Predict and explain the effect of clearing the trees on the amount of rain falling on the forest.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

15
(d) A storm occurs higher up the hill and water comes flowing down the hill.
Suggest how the soil in the cleared area will be affected by water from heavy rainfall flowing
down the hill.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) The concentration of gases in the atmosphere changes immediately after the trees are
cleared.
Describe and explain how the concentrations of the following gases change.
carbon dioxide ..........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
oxygen ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

16
8 (a) (i) The atomic number of oxygen is 8.
Complete Fig. 8.1 to show the electronic structure of an oxygen atom.
nucleus
Fig. 8.1
[1]
(ii) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram of a molecule of water.
Show all the outer shell electrons.
H O H
[2]
(b) Element Z has two electrons in its outer shell.
Z is not the symbol for this element.
(i) Predict the group number of element Z in the Periodic Table.
..................... [1]
(ii) An atom of element Z forms an ion.
State the charge of this ion.
Explain how this ion forms.
charge .....................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17
17
(c) Potassium, copper and iron are extracted by different methods.
Complete Table 8.1 to show the order of reactivity of these three metals.
State the method of extraction of each metal from its ore.
Table 8.1
order of reactivity metal method of extraction
most reactive
least reactive
[3]

18
9 Fig. 9.1 shows four forces, P, Q, R and S, acting on a submarine travelling underwater. The
submarine is moving to the right at constant speed.
S Q
Fig. 9.1
The submarine has a mass of 3 000 000 kg.
(a) (i) Name force Q.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The submarine is travelling at constant speed at a constant depth.
State how the magnitude of force Q compares to the magnitude of force S.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Calculate the value of force R.
g = 10 N / kg
formula
working
force R = ...................................................... N [2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

19
(b) The captain orders the crew to bring the submarine to the sea surface from a depth of 50 m.
The crew change force P so that there is a net upward force of 100 000 N.
Calculate the work done by this upward force to bring the submarine to the surface.
formula
working
work done = .............................................. J [2]
(c) (i) On the surface of the sea the captain is able to use a radio to send a message to his
base.
The radio sends a signal at a frequency of 120 MHz.
Calculate the wavelength of the radio waves used.
Speed of electromagnetic waves = 3 × 108 m / s.
formula
working
wavelength = .............................................. m [2]
(ii) Fig. 9.2 shows an incomplete electromagnetic spectrum. On Fig. 9.2 add radio waves in
their correct place.
gamma
visible light microwaves
rays
Fig. 9.2
[1]

20
(iii) Radio waves do not travel through sea water. But when submerged, submarines can
receive sound signals from sound sources placed on the sea floor.
Sound is transmitted through water in the same way that it is transmitted through air.
Suggest how sound waves are transmitted through water. You should say how water
molecules are involved, and you may wish to draw a diagram as part of your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

21
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/43/O/N/17

Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
24
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
0653/43/O/N/17
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 1 1 4 4 4 1 0 8 9 7 *

1 hour 30 minutes

Total
DC (RW/SG) 139617/2
2
1 You are going to investigate the action of four different concentrations of an enzyme on milk
protein.
Milk contains a protein that makes it look white (opaque). When the protein is broken down the
milk becomes clear.
Read through the whole question before starting.
(a) (i) • Label three syringes E (for enzyme), M (for milk) and W (for water).
• Label two test-tubes A and B.
• Use syringe E to add 4 cm3 enzyme solution to test-tube A.
• Use the same syringe to add 2 cm3 enzyme solution to test-tube B.
• Use syringe M to add 2 cm3 milk to test-tube B and immediately start the stopclock.
• Using the stirring rod, mix the contents of test-tube B well.
• Time how long it takes for the protein to break down by observing test-tube B until it
is clear. Use test-tube A as a comparison to help you.
Record in row two of Table 1.1 your result to the nearest second. [1]
(ii) • Rinse out test-tube B.

• Use syringe W to add 0.5 cm3 distilled water to test-tube B.
• Use syringe E to add 1.5 cm3 enzyme solution to test-tube B and mix well.
• Use syringe M to add 2 cm3 milk to test-tube B and immediately start the stopclock.
• Mix well.
• Time how long it takes for the protein to break down by observing test-tube B until it
is clear. Use test-tube A as a comparison to help you.
• Record in Table 1.1 your result to the nearest whole second.
• Rinse out test-tube B.
• Repeat the experiment twice more, using the volumes of water and enzyme shown
in the rest of Table 1.1.
Record in Table 1.1 your results to the nearest second. [3]
Table 1.1
volume of enzyme volume of distilled concentration of time taken to clear

solution / cm3 water / cm3 enzyme / % /s
2.0 0.0 4
1.5 0.5 3
1.0 1.0 2
0.5 1.5 1
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/O/N/17

3
(b) (i) On the grid below, plot a graph of time to clear against enzyme concentration.
Draw a line of best fit. [3]
time to
clear / s
enzyme concentration / %
(ii) Use your graph to describe the relationship between the concentration of enzyme and
the time taken for the milk to clear.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A student uses a similar method to investigate how the rate of this enzyme-catalysed reaction
varies with temperature.
Suggest suitable temperatures for the student to use.
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

4
2 Notes for use in Qualitative Analysis for this section are printed on page 8.
You are going to identify compounds H and J.
H is an oxide. J is a nitrate salt.
(a) (i) You must wear safety glasses for this experiment.
• Place 15 cm3 distilled water into a beaker.

• Add the sample of solid H to the water in the beaker.
• Stir the mixture well.
• Filter the mixture into a large test-tube as shown in Fig. 2.1. This produces filtrate F.
Fig. 2.1
Label the filtrate and the residue on Fig. 2.1. [1]
(ii) • Test filtrate F with Universal indicator paper.

• Keep filtrate F for (a)(iii) and (b)(ii).
Record the final colour of the paper and the pH of the filtrate.
final colour .........................................................................................................................
pH ..............................................
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/O/N/17

5
(iii) • One-third fill a test-tube with filtrate F. Keep the remainder of F for (b)(ii).
• Place ten marble chips (calcium carbonate) in another test-tube.
• Add about one-third of a test-tube of dilute hydrochloric acid to the marble chips.
• Immediately attach a delivery tube to the test-tube containing acid and marble chips
and pass any gas produced into the test-tube containing filtrate F.
Record your observations of the filtrate.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Test a small amount of solution J in a test-tube with ammonia solution.
Remember to add the ammonia solution slowly until it is in excess.
Record your observations and identify J.
observations ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
J is ........................................................ nitrate.
[3]
(ii) Place about 2 cm3 of solution J in a test-tube and slowly add filtrate F until there is no
further change.
Record your observations.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i) In (b)(ii), filtrate F is behaving like a reagent used in Qualitative Analysis.
Name this reagent.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Use all of the evidence in (a) and (b) to suggest a chemical name for H.
State how you have used the evidence to arrive at your answer.
H is ........................................................ oxide.
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

6
3 You are going to investigate how the power output P of a filament lamp depends upon the current
I flowing through it.
resistance wire
C
S
0 cm 100 cm
metre rule
power supply
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Connect the crocodile clip C to the end S (0 cm) of the resistance wire. Switch on.
Use the voltmeter and the ammeter to measure the potential difference V across the
lamp and the current I flowing through the lamp.
Record in Table 3.1 your values of V and I. Switch off. [2]
Table 3.1
position of sliding potential difference current power

contact C / cm V/V I /A P/W
0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
(ii) Repeat step (a)(i) for different positions of the crocodile clip, by connecting it at 20.0 cm,
40.0 cm, 60.0 cm and 80.0 cm from end S.
Record in Table 3.1 your values of V and I. Remember to switch off between readings. [4]
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/O/N/17

7
(b) Calculate the power output P of the filament lamp for each pair of readings using the equation
P = V × I.
Record in Table 3.1 your values of P.
[2]
(c) A student suggests that the power output P of the filament lamp is directly proportional to the
current I flowing through it.
State whether your experimental results support this suggestion and justify your statement by
reference to your results in Table 3.1.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/51/O/N/17

8
Tests for anions

produced
nitrate (NO3– ) add aqueous sodium hydroxide, ammonia produced

zinc (Zn2+) white ppt., soluble in excess, giving white ppt., soluble in excess, giving
Tests for gases

© UCLES 2017 0653/51/O/N/17

* 0 8 6 9 8 8 8 4 3 8 *

1 hour 30 minutes

Total
DC (RW) 139619/2
2
1 You are provided with a seedling from a seed that has germinated and started to grow.
(a) In the box below make a large pencil drawing of the seedling.
Label the root and the stem.
[3]
(b) (i) Measure the length of the seed provided (excluding the root and stem).
Record this length in millimetres.
length of seed = ............................................... mm [1]
(ii) Use a straight line to show this length on your drawing.
Record the length of this line in millimetres.
length of line on drawing = ............................................... mm [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/O/N/17

3
(iii) Use your measurements to calculate the magnification of your drawing.
magnification = ........................................................[1]
(c) You are provided with some pureed seeds. You are going to test the seeds for the presence
of protein and starch. The result of testing for reducing sugar is already given in Table 1.1.
(i) Carry out the other two tests using the solutions supplied and complete Table 1.1 to
show your observations.
• Use 1 cm depth of seed puree in each of the tests.

• Add 2 cm depth of test solution for the biuret test.
• Add a few drops of iodine solution for the iodine test.
Table 1.1

observation with
green precipitate
seed puree
[2]
(ii) State the nutrients present in the seeds.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

4
A good reagent in qualitative analysis gives positive and different results with different ions.
H is a sodium compound. You are going to investigate the reactions of H and assess whether
H could be used as a reagent to identify cations. You have been given a solution of H for the
reactions and a sample of solid H for (c).
(a) You are provided with the following solutions:
ammonium sulfate
copper sulfate
iron(III) sulfate
zinc sulfate
(i) • For each of the above solutions place about 1 cm3 of the solution into a clean
test‑tube.
• Add solution H to each test‑tube until there is no further change.
• If no change is observed in a test‑tube keep for use in (a)(ii).
Table 2.1
solution observations
ammonium sulfate
copper sulfate
iron(III) sulfate
zinc sulfate
[4]
(ii) • If no change is observed in a test‑tube in (i), stir the mixture.

• If necessary pour away some of the mixture to leave a half‑filled test‑tube.
• Then heat the test‑tube gently and carefully bring to the boil.
• Test for the presence of ammonia gas.
test ....................................................................................................................................
observations ..................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/O/N/17

5
(b) Use your observations in (a) to explain whether H could be used as a reagent to identify the
cations in the four solutions.
You should make comparisons with the usual reagents for analysis of cations.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) A student adds barium nitrate solution to solution H and a white precipitate is produced. The
student concludes that H is sodium sulfate.
You are going to check the student’s conclusion.
(i) Remove the bung from the test‑tube containing solid H and add dilute hydrochloric acid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Use your observations in (c)(i) to state the mistake made by the student when testing
H with barium nitrate solution which led the student to conclude that sulfate ions are
present.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

6
3 You are going to investigate the cooling rates of different volumes of water. A supply of hot water,
a beaker and a thermometer have been provided for you.
• Pour hot water into the beaker up to the 200 cm3 mark.
• Place the thermometer into the beaker.
• Wait approximately 90 s.
(a) (i) Start the stopclock.
Record, in Table 3.1, the temperature θ of the hot water at time t = 0. [1]
(ii) Record, in Table 3.1, the temperature θ of the water and the time t at 30 s intervals for
3 minutes. [3]
Table 3.1
cooling of 200 cm3 of hot water cooling of 100 cm3 of hot water
time t / s temperature θ / °C temperature θ / °C
(b) Empty the beaker.
• Pour hot water into the beaker up to the 100 cm3 mark.
• Place the thermometer into the beaker.
• Wait approximately 90 s.
Repeat (a)(i) and (a)(ii). [1]
(c) Suggest why it is important to wait 90 s before measuring the initial temperature of the hot
water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/O/N/17

7
(d) A student suggests that the rate of cooling is slower for the larger volume of water than for the
smaller volume of water.
State whether your results support this suggestion. Justify your answer by referring to your
results in Table 3.1.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) The experiment is repeated with the same apparatus to check the results.
Suggest two variables that should be kept constant to give a fair comparison.
variable 1 ..................................................................................................................................
variable 2 ..................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/O/N/17

8
Tests for anions

produced
nitrate (NO3– ) add aqueous sodium hydroxide, ammonia produced

zinc (Zn2+) white ppt., soluble in excess, giving white ppt., soluble in excess giving
Tests for gases

Permission to reproduce items where third‑party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer‑related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
© UCLES 2017 0653/52/O/N/17

* 0 0 6 5 3 8 4 8 4 4 *

1 hour

DC (LEG) 154836
2
1 A student investigates the action of different concentrations of an enzyme solution on milk protein.
When the protein is broken down the milk becomes clear.
• The student adds 2 cm3 of 4% enzyme solution to some milk in a test-tube and
immediately starts a stopclock.
• He mixes the contents of the test-tube well.
• He times how long it takes for the protein to break down by observing the test-tube until
the milk is clear.
• He records his result to the nearest whole second in Table 1.1.
• He repeats the procedure using different concentrations of enzyme solution by diluting

the solution with distilled water, as shown in Table 1.1.
(a) Suggest a suitable piece of apparatus the student could use to measure the small volumes of
enzyme solution and distilled water.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The original enzyme solution has a concentration of 4%.
In Table 1.1, use the values given for volume of enzyme solution and volume of distilled water
to calculate the new concentrations of enzyme.
Record these concentrations in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
concentration of
volume of enzyme volume of distilled time taken for the
enzyme
solution / cm3 water / cm3 milk to clear / s
%
2.0 0.0 4 63
1.5 0.5 98
1.0 1.0 144
0.5 1.5 1 191
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/O/N/17

3
(c) On the grid provided, plot a graph of time taken for the milk to clear (vertical axis) against
concentration of enzyme.
[4]
(d) Use your graph to describe the relationship between the concentration of enzyme and the
time taken for the milk to clear.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) The student uses a similar method to investigate how the rate of this enzyme-catalysed
reaction varies with temperature.
(i) Suggest suitable temperatures for the student to use.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State two variables that the student should keep constant in this experiment where the
temperature is varied.
variable 1 ...........................................................................................................................
variable 2 ...........................................................................................................................
[1]

4
2 A student investigates the temperature change in the reaction between H and water.
H is a white solid and is an oxide. J is a blue solution of a copper salt.
The student carries out reactions to identify compounds H and J.
(a) • She places 25 cm3 of distilled water into a beaker.
• She measures the temperature T1 of this water.
• She adds a sample of solid H to the water in the beaker, stirs the mixture and measures
the highest temperature T2 of the mixture.
Table 2.1
temperature temperature change in

T1 / °C T2 / °C temperature / °C
(i) Read the thermometers in Fig. 2.1 and record in Table 2.1 the temperatures T1 and T2 to
the nearest 0.5 °C.
°C °C
30 40
25 35
20 30
temperature T1 temperature T2
Fig. 2.1
[2]
(ii) Calculate the temperature change in this reaction.
Record in Table 2.1 the value with a plus or minus sign as appropriate. [1]
(iii) Use this temperature change to state which type of reaction has taken place.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/O/N/17

5
(b) The student filters the mixture from (a) and the resulting filtrate F is treated as follows. Her
observations and conclusions are shown in each case.
• Filtrate F is tested with Universal Indicator paper.
The paper turns a colour that suggests pH 12.
• Dilute hydrochloric acid is added to marble chips (calcium carbonate) and the gas
produced is passed into filtrate F.
Filtrate F becomes milky, then becomes colourless.
• An excess of F is slowly added to a small volume of solution J.
A blue ppt. forms and does not disappear when excess F is added.
This is like the test for copper ions.
Use the student’s observations and conclusions to answer the following questions about
filtrate F.
(i) State what the student can deduce from the Universal Indicator test.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State which common reagent would behave like F when the gas produced from the
reaction between the acid and marble chips is passed through it.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) In the reaction between F and J, F is behaving like a reagent used to test for cations.
Name this reagent.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Use all of the evidence from (a) and (b) to suggest a chemical name for H.
State how you have used the evidence to arrive at your answer.
H is ......................................................... oxide
reason .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The student now tries to identify the anion in J.
• She adds nitric acid to solution J and splits this into two portions.
• To one portion she adds barium nitrate solution. There is no change.
• To the other portion she adds silver nitrate solution and obtains a white precipitate.
Identify the anion in J.
anion in J ................................... [1]

6
3 A student investigates how the power P of a filament lamp depends upon the current I flowing
through it.
She uses the circuit shown in Fig. 3.1.
resistance wire
0 C 100
S
metre rule
Fig. 3.1
She connects the crocodile clip C to the end S (0 cm) of the resistance wire.
She switches on the circuit.
She measures the potential difference V across the lamp and the current I flowing through
the lamp.
The meter readings are shown in Fig. 3.2.
1 0.3
0.2 0.4
0 2
V A
potential difference current
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/O/N/17

7
(a) Record in Table 3.1 the readings shown on the meters in Fig. 3.2.
Table 3.1
position of crocodile potential difference current power

clip C / cm V/V I /A P / ...........
0
20.0 1.1 0.28 0.31
40.0 0.9 0.26
60.0 0.7 0.24
80.0 0.4 0.23 0.09
[2]
(b) She repeats this procedure for different positions of the crocodile clip C, by connecting it at
20.0 cm, 40.0 cm, 60.0 cm and 80.0 cm from end S. Her results are shown in Table 3.1.
(i) The student switches off the circuit between taking readings.
Explain why this is important.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) With the crocodile clip C at the 80.0 cm mark, the glow of the filament lamp becomes too
dim to see.
State how the student knows that the lamp is not broken.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i) Add the unit of power to the heading of the fourth column in Table 3.1. [1]
(ii) Calculate the missing power P values of the filament lamp for each pair of readings
using the equation shown.
P=V×I
Record, in Table 3.1, your values of P. [2]

8
(d) The student suggests that the power P of the filament lamp is directly proportional to the
current I flowing through it.
(i) Sketch, on the axes provided, the graph that the student would expect if this is correct.
0
I
[2]
(ii) Without plotting a graph, show that the results in Table 3.1 do not support the student’s
suggestion.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/O/N/17

9

10
4 A student is studying cells using a light microscope.
She prepares cells from a plant and stains them using iodine solution.
Fig. 4.1 shows some of the cells from her microscope slide.
A B
Fig. 4.1
(a) Name the type of cell labelled X.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Make an enlarged pencil drawing of cell X in the box provided.
Your drawing must be larger than cell X in Fig. 4.1.
Label the nucleus and cell wall.
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/O/N/17
11
(ii) On cell X in Fig. 4.1, measure the length A–B in millimetres.
Record this length to the nearest millimetre.
length of cell X in Fig. 4.1 ................................................... mm [1]
(iii) On your drawing, mark two points equivalent to A and B on Fig. 4.1.
Label these points C and D.
Measure the length C–D in millimetres to the nearest millimetre.
length of line on drawing ................................................... mm [1]
(iv) Use your measurements in (b)(ii) and (b)(iii) to calculate the magnification of your
drawing.
magnification = ...........................................................[1]
(c) Some parts of cell X stain blue-black after the addition of iodine solution.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The plant has a flower.
Describe the procedure you would use if you wanted to examine a sample of pollen from this
flower.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

12
5 A student investigates the electroplating of copper onto metals.
She uses a solution of copper sulfate.
Copper sulfate contains the copper ion, Cu2+. Cu2+ ions make the solution blue in colour.
(a) In her first experiment, she investigates the plating of copper onto a copper strip.
• She takes two strips of copper metal and weighs them. She records their masses in
Table 5.1.
• She sets up the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1.
10 V power supply
– +
– +
cathode (–) anode (+)
copper strip copper strip
beaker
copper sulfate
solution
Fig. 5.1
• She closes the switch and leaves the circuit running for 10 minutes.
• She then opens the switch and removes the copper strips carefully.
• She lets the strips dry and weighs each one again.
• She observes that the copper sulfate solution is still as blue at the end as it was at the
beginning.
Table 5.1

copper strip copper strip
mass at the start / g 6.47 7.34
mass at the end / g
change in mass / g
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/O/N/17

13
(i) The balance readings for the copper strips at the end of the experiment are shown in
Fig. 5.2.
Record, in Table 5.1, the masses of the copper strips to 2 decimal places.
6.957 g 6.852 g
mass mass
of copper of copper
at the end at the end
Fig. 5.2
[2]
(ii) Calculate the change in mass of each copper strip and record these values in Table 5.1.
Your answers should include a ‘+’ sign to show an increase in mass or a ‘–’ sign to show
a decrease in mass.
[2]
(b) The student says that the Cu2+ ions from the solution are attracted to the negatively charged
cathode and are deposited there as copper metal.
The teacher says that the student is correct but suggests that the student looks at her
observations and her results as something else is happening in the beaker at the same time.
Use the student’s ideas, her observations and her results in Table 5.1 to state how she
knows that the copper ions in solution stay at the same concentration even though some are
removed to coat the cathode and explain how this happens.
she knows copper ions stay at the same concentration because ............................................
...................................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

14
(c) In her second experiment, the student plates copper onto an iron nail.
She looks at her results from the first experiment and sets up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 5.3.
10 V power supply
copper strip
iron nail
beaker
copper sulfate
solution
Fig. 5.3
(i) State which metal should be the cathode and which should be the anode.
Explain your choice.
cathode .....................................................
anode ........................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) State the name of the electrolyte shown in Fig. 5.3.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The student closes the switch on the power supply and leaves it running for 10 minutes.
Suggest what happens to the appearance of the copper strip, the iron nail and the copper
sulfate solution by the end of the experiment.
appearance of copper strip ...............................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
appearance of iron nail ......................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
appearance of copper sulfate solution ..............................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/O/N/17
15

16
6 A student measures the acceleration g due to gravity by timing a small steel ball rolling down a
slope.
• He places a 2 m long plank of wood on the bench.
• He uses a metre rule and a marker pen to draw horizontal graduations on the plank at
20 cm intervals.
• He places a wooden block under one end and adjusts the position of the block until the
plank is inclined at an angle of 10° to the horizontal.
The experimental set-up is shown in Fig. 6.1.
0
cm 20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160 plank
wooden
block
10°
bench
Fig. 6.1
The student uses a stopclock to time the ball rolling down the slope from rest, from the 0 cm mark
to the 60 cm mark.
Fig. 6.2 shows the ball at rest at the 0 cm mark.
ball
0
cm 20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
10°
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/O/N/17

17
(a) (i) On Fig. 6.2, draw the ball to show its position when it has travelled 60 cm. [1]
(ii) The student records the time it takes the ball to roll from the 0 cm mark to the 60 cm
mark. He does this three times. His results are shown.
0.84 s 0.90 s 0.86 s
Calculate the average time t for the ball to travel a distance of 60 cm.
Give your answer to two significant figures.
average time t = ....................................................... s [1]
(iii) Suggest why your answer is not given to more than two significant figures.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

18
(b) The student repeats this procedure and records the time it takes the ball to roll from rest
down the slope for distances d = 80 cm, 100 cm, 120 cm, 140 cm and 160 cm.
Table 6.1
distance d travelled average time t t2

/ cm /s / s2
60
80 0.99
100 1.10
120 1.21 1.46
140 1.31 1.72
160 1.37 1.88
(i) Record, in Table 6.1, your value of t from (a)(ii).
Calculate, and record in Table 6.1, the value of t 2 for each value of average time t for the
distances d = 60 cm, 80 cm and 100 cm. [1]
(ii) Plot a graph of d (vertical axis) against t 2. Draw the best-fit straight line.
160
140
d / cm
120
100
80
60
0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.9
t2/s2
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/O/N/17
19
(iii) Calculate the gradient of your line.
Show all working and indicate on your graph the values you chose to enable the
gradient to be calculated.
gradient = ............................................... cm / s2 [2]
(c) (i) A value for the acceleration g due to gravity can be calculated using the equation shown.
gradient
g=
8 .7
Calculate a value of g.
g = ................................................. m / s2 [1]
(ii) Another student says that a more accurate value of g would be obtained if the ball was
timed travelling over greater distances.
Explain why this student is correct.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/O/N/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/61/O/N/17

* 8 0 4 6 6 6 5 9 4 0 *

1 hour

DC (LEG) 154952/1
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a bean seedling from a seed that has germinated and has started to grow.
Fig. 1.1
(a) In the box provided, make an enlarged pencil drawing of the seedling.
Label the root and stem.
[3]
(b) (i) Measure the length of the bean seed in Fig. 1.1, excluding the root and stem.
Record this length, in millimetres, to the nearest millimetre.
length of seed in Fig. 1.1 ................................................... mm [1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/O/N/17

3
(ii) Use a straight line to show this length on your drawing.
Record the length of this line, in millimetres, to the nearest millimetre.
length of seed in drawing .................................................. mm [1]
(iii) Use your measurements in (i) and (ii) to calculate the magnification of your drawing.
magnification = ...........................................................[1]
(c) (i) A student wants to carry out an experiment on some germinated bean seeds.
Describe how the student can germinate the seeds.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The student tests the bean seeds for their nutrient content.
Her results are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1

colour observed clear blue purple blue-black
Use the information in Table 1.1 to identify the nutrients present in the bean seeds.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

4
2 A student investigates the reactions of H, a solution of a sodium compound.

He assesses whether H could be used as a reagent to identify cations in qualitative analysis.
A good reagent in qualitative analysis gives positive and different results with different ions.
He adds H to each of the following solutions.
ammonium sulfate
copper sulfate
iron(III) sulfate
zinc sulfate
He records his observations in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
solution observation
ammonium sulfate no visible reaction
copper sulfate blue precipitate
iron(III) sulfate brown precipitate
zinc sulfate white precipitate
(a) (i) Use the observations in Table 2.1 to explain whether H could be used as a reagent to
identify cations.
You should make comparisons with the usual reagents used for the analysis of cations.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Suggest a solution, not shown in Table 2.1, which you could expect to give a different
coloured precipitate with H.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Describe another test, not involving H, and its observations that the student could carry
out to identify the ammonium ion in ammonium sulfate solution.
test ....................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
observations ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/O/N/17

5
(b) The student tests for sulfate ions in H but only adds barium nitrate solution. A white precipitate
is produced.
He incorrectly concludes that H is sodium sulfate solution.
H is sodium carbonate solution.
(i) State the full details of the test for a sulfate that the student should have carried out.
State what he observes if he carries out this full test on H (sodium carbonate).
details of test .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
observations ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Draw a labelled diagram to describe a test to identify the carbonate ion in H.
[2]
(iii) State the observation in (b)(ii) that would confirm the presence of the carbonate ion in H.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

6
3 A student investigates the cooling rates of different volumes of water.
The apparatus used is shown in Fig. 3.1.
thermometer
beaker
Fig. 3.1
The student labels a beaker P and pours 200 cm3 of hot water into the beaker.
After waiting for a short while, he reads and records the temperature θ.
Table 3.1
cooling of 200 cm3 of hot cooling of 100 cm3 of hot

water in beaker P water in beaker Q
time t / ............ temperature θ / ............ temperature θ / ............
87.0 89.0
85.0 86.0
83.5 83.5
82.0 81.0
81.0 78.5
80.0 76.0
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/O/N/17

7
(a) (i) Read and record in Table 3.1 the temperature of the water in beaker P shown in Fig. 3.2
at time t = 0.
90
85
80
Fig. 3.2
[1]
(ii) The student pours 100 cm3 of hot water into another beaker and labels it Q. The
temperature rises to the value shown in Fig. 3.3.
95
90
85
Fig. 3.3
Read and record in Table 3.1 the temperature of the water in beaker Q shown in Fig. 3.3
at time t = 0. [1]
(b) The student measures the temperature of the water in each beaker at 30 second intervals for
3 minutes. These temperatures are shown in Table 3.1.
(i) Complete the column headings in Table 3.1 by inserting the correct units. [1]
(ii) Insert the values of t in Table 3.1. [1]

8
(c) Suggest why it is important for the student to wait a short while before measuring the initial
temperature of the hot water in both beakers.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The temperature of the water in both beakers decreases with time.
Give one other similarity in the way that the temperature of the water in both beakers
decreases with time.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) Another student suggests that the rate of cooling is slower for the larger volume of water than
for the smaller volume of water.
Use the results in Table 3.1 to show that the results support this suggestion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(f) The experiment is repeated with the same apparatus to check the results.
Suggest two variables that should be kept constant.
variable 1 ..................................................................................................................................
variable 2 ..................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/O/N/17

9

10
4 A student investigates the effect of temperature on the movement of water through a plant.
He sets up the apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1.
• The student records the initial position of the air bubble.
• He leaves the apparatus at a low temperature for 10 minutes and records the new position of
the air bubble.
• He repeats this at a high temperature.
water
cut shoot
tap
water
cm
air bubble
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
horizontal tube
Fig. 4.1
(a) The movement of the air bubble in the apparatus shows the uptake of water by the shoot.
Table 4.1 shows some of the results the student obtains.
Table 4.1
position of distance average distance average distance

initial position
temperature bubble after moved in moved in moved per
of bubble / cm
10 minutes / cm 10 minutes / cm 10 minutes / cm minute / cm
low temperature
2.1 3.6 1.5
trial 1
1.6
low temperature
3.7 5.4 1.7
trial 2
high temperature
trial 1
high temperature
3.8 6.8
trial 2
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/O/N/17
11
(i) Fig. 4.2 shows the initial position of the air bubble for trial 1 at high temperature and its
position after 10 minutes.
air bubble horizontal tube air bubble horizontal tube
cm cm
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
initial reading position after 10 minutes
Fig. 4.2
Measure the positions of the bubble at the right hand side of the bubble.
Record these positions in Table 4.1. [1]
(ii) Calculate the distances and the average distance moved in 10 minutes by the air bubbles
for the high temperature trials.
Record these in Table 4.1. [2]
(iii) Calculate and record, in the last column of Table 4.1, the average distances moved per
minute at each temperature.
[1]
(iv) Use the information in Table 4.1 to state the effect of temperature on the rate of water
uptake by the plant.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The teacher suggests that the student should carry out a third trial at each temperature.
Explain why this improves the investigation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

12
(c) (i) Name the process by which water is lost by evaporation from the leaves of the shoot.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why the amount of water taken up by the shoot may not be the same as the
water lost by the shoot.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Predict and explain the effect on the rate of bubble movement if the experiment is repeated
with two of the leaves removed from the cut shoot in Fig. 4.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/O/N/17

13

14
5 Copper sulfate is a salt.
A student uses the following method to make a pure sample of copper sulfate crystals.
step 1
Place some acid in a beaker.
step 2
Add copper carbonate solid to the acid while stirring, until the copper carbonate no longer reacts.
step 3
Filter the mixture to remove excess copper carbonate.
step 4
Heat the blue filtrate until its volume is halved.
step 5
Pour this remaining liquid into an evaporating dish.
step 6
Allow the water in the remaining liquid in the dish to evaporate at room temperature.
(a) (i) Name the acid used in step 1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest how the student knows when there is no further reaction in step 2.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Suggest how the student can test the mixture to make sure that all of the acid has
reacted.
test ....................................................................................................................................
observation ........................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/O/N/17

15
(b) (i) Draw a diagram of the apparatus used in step 3.
Label the excess copper carbonate and the filtrate.
[2]
(ii) State which property of copper carbonate allows the excess copper carbonate to be
removed from the mixture.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Explain why it is important in step 4 not to heat the filtrate to dryness.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Another student says that the same method may be used to make a sample of
sodium chloride from hydrochloric acid and sodium hydroxide.
When she carries out the reaction she cannot separate the excess sodium hydroxide by
filtration.
(i) Using your knowledge of sodium hydroxide in Qualitative Analysis, state why filtration
cannot be used to separate excess sodium hydroxide from the sodium chloride solution.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe briefly an alternative method to make a sample of sodium chloride from
hydrochloric acid and sodium hydroxide.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

16
6 A student measures the mass of a metre rule using a balancing method.
• She places a pivot directly under the 60.0 cm mark of a metre rule so that the distance d,
measured from the end of the metre rule to the pivot, is 60.0 cm.
• She places a load of 200 g on the metre rule.
• She adjusts the position of the load carefully, until the rule is just balanced.
Fig. 6.1 shows the rule when balanced.
x 200 g load metre rule

d = 60.0 cm
bench
0 100
pivot
Fig. 6.1
• She determines the scale reading at the centre of the 200 g load.
Fig. 6.2 shows part of the scale of the rule when balanced.
65 66 67 68
cm
view from above

200 g load
Fig. 6.2
(a) Use the information in Fig. 6.2 to determine the position p of the centre of the load when
balanced.
Show your working and record p in Table 6.1.
[2]
Table 6.1
distance d of pivot position p of centre of load distance of load from pivot

/ cm when balanced / cm x = (p−d) / cm
60.0
65.0 74.0
70.0 81.8 11.8
75.0 90.0 15.0
80.0 97.9 17.9
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/O/N/17

17
(b) The student repeats this procedure to balance the load when the pivot is placed at distances
d = 65.0 cm, 70.0 cm, 75.0 cm and 80.0 cm from the end of the metre rule. She records the
positions p for each value of d in Table 6.1.
Calculate the distance x of the load from the pivot, using x = (p−d), for values of d = 60.0 cm
and 65.0 cm.
(c) (i) On the grid provided, plot a graph of d (vertical axis) against x. You do not need to start
the axes from the origin (0, 0). Draw the best-fit straight line.
d / cm
x / cm
[3]
18
(ii) Calculate the gradient of your line.
Show all working and indicate on your graph the values you chose to enable the gradient
to be calculated.
gradient = .......................................................... [2]
(iii) The gradient of your line is related to the mass m in grams of the metre rule, by the
equation shown.
200
m=
gradient
Calculate the mass m of the metre rule.
m = ....................................................... g [1]
(d) When carrying out the experiment, the student decided not to place the pivot at distances
greater than 80.0 cm from the end of the rule.
Suggest why this was a sensible decision.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/O/N/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/O/N/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0653/62/O/N/17

Grade thresholds – March 2018

Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0653 (Combined Science) in the March 2018 examination.

maximum raw
mark A B C D E F G
available
Component 12 40 – – 24 22 20 17 14
Component 22 40 28 24 21 19 17 15 13
Component 32 80 – – 37 30 23 18 13
Component 42 80 48 38 27 23 17 12 7
Component 62 60 35 30 25 20 16 11 6
Combination of
Components
CY 22, 42, 62 145 124 103 82 70 58 45 32
GY 12, 32, 62 – – – 99 84 70 55 40
Learn more! For more information please visit www.cambridgeinternational.org/igcse or contact Customer Services
on +44 (0)1223 553554 or email info@cambridgeinternational.org

Paper 1 Multiple Choice – Core March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2018 series for most
components.

0653/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
1 D 1
2 A 1
3 C 1
4 B 1
5 D 1
6 B 1
7 A 1
8 A 1
9 A 1
10 C 1
11 B 1
12 C 1
13 B 1
14 D 1
15 C 1
16 B 1
17 B 1
18 D 1
19 D 1
20 C 1
21 C 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 A 1
25 B 1
26 C 1
27 B 1
28 A 1

PUBLISHED
29 D 1
30 B 1
31 C 1
32 C 1
33 D 1
34 B 1
35 B 1
36 C 1
37 B 1
38 D 1
39 A 1
40 B 1


Paper 2 Multiple Choice – Extended March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
1 D 1
2 C 1
3 C 1
4 B 1
5 D 1
6 B 1
7 A 1
8 D 1
9 D 1
10 A 1
11 C 1
12 C 1
13 A 1
14 D 1
15 B 1
16 A 1
17 C 1
18 B 1
19 C 1
20 C 1
21 A 1
22 A 1
23 C 1
24 A 1
25 B 1
26 D 1
27 C 1
28 D 1

PUBLISHED
29 B 1
30 C 1
31 C 1
32 A 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 B 1
36 C 1
37 C 1
38 C 1
39 D 1
40 A 1


Paper 3 Core Theory March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:
Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

PUBLISHED
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

PUBLISHED
1(a)(i) cervix correctly labelled ; 2

vagina correctly labelled ;
1(a)(ii) zygote results from fertilisation ; max 3

cells divide / ball of cells forms ;
(ball of cells / embryo) becomes implanted ;
in wall of uterus / uterus lining ;
1(b) haploid ; 3
half ;
diploid ;
2(a)(i) electrolysis ; 1
2(a)(ii) 2
cathode
anode
electrolyte
;;
all three correct (2)
one or two correct (1)

PUBLISHED
2(a)(iii) copper chloride / other soluble copper compound ; 1
2(a)(iv) dissolve in water ; 1
2(a)(v) chemical 1
and
new substance(s) made ;
2(b)(i) carbon / hydrogen ; 1
2(b)(ii) reduction ; 1
2(c)(i) form coloured compounds ; 1
2(c)(ii) increases reaction rate ; 1
3(a) gravitational force / weight ; 1
3(b) speed = distance / time or AV ; 2

distance (= speed × time) = 28 000 × 90 / 60 = 42 000 (km) ;
3(c) density = mass / volume ; 3

= 5972 × 1021 / 1.08 × 1021 = 5530 ;
(units) kg / m3 ;
3(d)(i) electrical (energy in solar cells) ; 2

chemical (energy in the batteries) ;
3(d)(ii) regular arrangement of at least 10 atoms of similar size ; 2

all touching ;

PUBLISHED
4(a) an animal that gets its energy / feeds only on plants ; 1
4(b)(i) growth (of tissues) ; 2

repair (of tissues) ;
4(b)(ii) 20.0 / 2.6 ; 2
×100 = 770 ;
4(b)(iii) the bamboo does not contain much protein / nutrition ; 2

a lot needed to satisfy need / panda needs a lot because it is big ;
4(c) only food supply disappearing ; max 2

danger of loss of habitat ;
more difficult to find a mate ;
5(a)(i) compound containing hydrogen and carbon ; 2

only;
5(a)(ii) 2
;;
LHS (1)
RHS either order (1)
5(a)(iii) exothermic ; 1
5(a)(iv) heating / cooking ; 1
5(b) idea that oil and grease provide a barrier against oxygen / water ; 1

PUBLISHED
6(a)(i) sound ; 1
6(a)(ii) from handset to base station (or reverse) ; 2

from satellite dish to satellite (or reverse) ;
6(b) 2
gamma visible infrared
microwaves ; radio waves;
rays light waves
6(c) (infrared) radiation from Sun absorbed during day ; 2

at night, radiation from satellite results in cooling ;
6(d) sound needs a medium to travel through – no medium in space ; 1
7(a) One mark for each correct line of table ;;;; 4
process
fact chemical
respiration photosynthesis
digestion
needs light 9
takes place in animals 9 9
needs carbon dioxide 9
produces smaller
molecules from larger 9 9
molecules
7(b)(i) shading in at least one area of xylem in stem ; 2

shading in at least one area of xylem in root ;
PUBLISHED
7(b)(ii) root hair cells ; 1
7(b)(iii) replace water lost in transpiration / prevent wilting ; max 1

to carry minerals to all parts of the plant ;
raw material in photosynthesis ;
7(c) transports food / sugars / amino acids ; 1
8(a)(i) (electrons) 17 2
(neutrons) 18
(protons) 17 ;;
8(a)(ii) (approximate relative 2

(particle) (relative charges)
masses)
(electrons) –1 negligible / 1/2000
(neutrons) 0 / none 1
(protons) +1 1
;;
all three relative charges (1)
all three approximate relative masses (1)
8(b) (sodium and chlorine) ionic 3

and
(hydrogen and chlorine) covalent ;
(sodium explanation) metal and non-metal / loss gain of electrons ;
(hydrogen explanation) two non-metals / shared electrons ;

PUBLISHED
8(c) (sodium) bromide AND (magnesium) iodide ; 1
8(d) (test) (damp) litmus paper ; 2

(result) bleaches / turns white ;
9(a)(i) 2
A
both ammeter and lamp symbols correct ;

complete series circuit ;
9(a)(ii) voltmeter symbol correct ; 2

connected in parallel with lamp ;
9(b)(i) R = V / I ; 3
= 1.5 / 0.6 = 2.5 ;
Ω / ohm ;
9(b)(ii) total resistance in circuit increases ; 2

voltage same, so current must decrease ;


Paper 4 Extended Theory March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 80
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a)(i) 1 ovulation ; 2
2 fertilisation ;
1(a)(ii) amnion / amniotic membrane ; 2

contains (amniotic) fluid ;
1(b)(ii) (waste product of / produced by) respiration ; 1
1(b)(iii) through umbilical cord ; 1
1(c) reduces oxygen available (to fetus) ; 2

any consequence e.g. reduced respiration / growth ;
2(a)(i) chemical 1
AND
the idea that new substance(s) made ;
2(a)(ii) copper(II) / Cu2+ AND chloride / Cl – ; 3
(copper(II) / Cu2+) gains (2) electrons ;

(chloride / Cl –) loses (1) electron ;
2(b)(i) reduction / redox ; 1
2(b)(ii) C + 2CuO → CO2 + 2Cu 2

all formulae correct ;
correctly balanced ;
2(c) act as catalysts / form (compounds which act as) catalysts / other valid answers ; 1

PUBLISHED
3(a) weight ; 1
3(b) speed = distance / time (or rearranged) ; 2

distance (= speed × time) = 28 000 × 90 / 60 = 42 000 (km) ;
3(c)(i) density = mass / volume (or rearranged) ; 2

mass (= volume × density) = 1.08 × 1021 × 5530 = 5.97 × 1024 (kg) ;
3(c)(ii) (average) density of mantle and core is higher (than 2700 kg / m3) ; 2

in order to give an average density higher than the density of the crust / owtte ;
3(c)(iii) atoms in outer core randomly arranged / inner core regular arrangement / owtte ; 2

atoms in outer core able to move freely / inner core fixed positions / orderly pattern / owtte ;
3(d) electrical ; 2
4(a) line drawn from R to any nucleus ; 2

line drawn from S to any xylem tube cross section ;
4(b)(i) P is nearer to the surface / top so it captures more light ; 1
4(b)(ii) P has more chloroplasts than Q ; max 2

chloroplast is the site of photosynthesis ;
reference to increased light absorption / increased amounts of chlorophyll ;
4(c) traps light energy ; 2

converts it to chemical energy / for formation of carbohydrates ;

PUBLISHED
5(a)(i) (electrons) 35 2
(neutrons) 44
(protons) 35 ;;
5(a)(ii) (approximate relative 2

(particle) (relative charges)
masses)
(electrons) –1 / negative / –ve negligible / 1 / 2000
(neutrons) 0 / none / neutral 1
(protons) +1 / positive / +ve 1
each column correct ;;
5(b) (sodium) ionic / electrovalent and (hydrogen) covalent ; 3

(ionic) idea of gain / loss / transfer of electrons ;
(covalent) electrons are shared ;
5(c) iodine / astatine ; 1
5(d)(i) 2, 8, 8 ; 1
5(d)(ii) lamps / inert atmosphere / other valid answers ; 1
6(a) the idea that current is flow of (electrical) charge ; 2
identifies the charge carriers as electrons ;
6(b)(i) between mouth and handset / handset and ear ; 2

sound waves ;

PUBLISHED
6(b)(ii) between handset and base station / satellite dish and satellite ; 2

microwaves or radio waves ;
6(c) the idea that waves (of any kind) have an associated speed of travel ; max 2
the idea that waves / signals will take time to cover distance ;
reference to great distance / high speed of emr :
7(a)(i) making of / contained in haemoglobin ; 1
7(a)(ii) feel tired / dizzy / other correct symptoms ; 1
7(b)(i) 1 to pasteurise the milk / kill unwanted microbes ; 2

2 so that the microorganisms in the (added) yoghurt do not get killed ;
7(b)(ii) microorganisms will multiply in the milk ; 1
7(b)(iii) yes –no mark 1

(student’s yoghurt) contains live organisms ;
7(c) the acid denatures / destroys the proteins in the milk ; 2

the proteins lose their (3D) shape / owtte ;
7(d)(i) prevents constipation; 1
7(d)(ii) adding fruit ; 1

PUBLISHED
8(a) (fraction P) max2

lower boiling point ;
smaller molecules ;
weaker intermolecular (attractive) forces ;
greater flammability ;
lower viscosity ;
8(b) (catalytic or thermal) cracking ; 1
8(c)(i) increases surface area ; 1
8(c)(ii) particles move faster / have greater kinetic energy ; 2

particles collide (with the catalyst) more often ;
8(d) (A) alkene / unsaturated 1

and
(B) alkane / saturated ;
8(e)(i) CO2 ; 1
8(e)(ii) reference to global warming / excessive (runaway / enhanced) greenhouse effect / negative effects such as climate 1
change / polar melting / rising sea levels / ocean acidification ;
9(a) total current of 14 A needs higher value fuse / reference to the safety margin / owtte ; 1
9(b) (R = ) V / I ; 2
(R = ) 240 / 14 = 17.1 (Ω) ;
OR
1 / R = 1 / R1 + 1 / R2 ;
R1 = 240 /4 = 60 Ω and R2 = 240 / 10 = 24 Ω
and so 1/R = 1/60 + 1/24 = 7/120, so R = 17.1 Ω ;

PUBLISHED
9(c) E = IVt ; 2
= 10 × 240 × 8 × 60 ×60 = 69 120 000 (J) ;
9(d) reference to convection ; 3
the idea that water at higher temperature rises / has a lower density ;
the idea that the convection current from heater 1 does not affect the water in the lower part of the tank / water below heater 1
has greater density and so does not mix with heated water / owtte ;


Paper 6 Alternative to Practical March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 60
Published
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED
marking principles.
descriptors.

PUBLISHED

PUBLISHED
1(a)(i) Blue-black indicates starch present (initially); 3

Brown indicates starch breaks down in A;
Starch still remains in B / starch not broken down
1(a)(ii) Would get brown / starch breaks down faster / AW 1
1(b) Benedicts solution; 4

Heat;
Yellow / green / orange / red;
Wore goggles because of hot water / chemicals / water bath not Bunsen / gloves / lab coat as iodine stains; AVP
1(c)(i) Enzyme / amylase is a protein so could give a positive result; AW 1
1(c)(ii) (blue--black) colour masks test; AW 1
2(a) 10 cm3 and 10 cm3 ; 1
2(b)(i) 28: 2
99 ;
2(b)(ii) decreasing concentration increases time ; 1
2(b)(iii) 0.03571 and 0.01010 to any rounding ; 2
0.036 and 0.010 ;
2(b)(iv) both ratios worked out ; 2
same effect as within 10% / same effect as both nearly the same ;
2(c)(i) too corrosive / would be too short a time / would be too fast a reaction ; 1

PUBLISHED
2(c)(ii) starting stopclock after gas begins to be released / irregular size of marble chips / use of measuring cylinder for dilution 1
exercise ;
3(a)(i) 1.4(0) (V) ; 3
0.23 (A) ;
I to 2 s.f. and V to 3 s.f. ;
3(a)(ii) V / volt and A / amp ; 1
3(a)(iii) cell runs down / wire gets hot ; 1
3(b)(i) axes labelled ; 2

3(b)(ii) good best fit line judgement ; 1
3(c) extrapolation and value ± half small square ; 1
3(d) current values too high / cell runs down ; 1
4(a)(i) Jelly is alkaline; 1
4(a)(ii) Sodium hydroxide / sodium hydrogen carbonate 1
4(b) container and acid level above jelly cube drawn; 2

Labels for container and acid (and jelly cube)
4(c) 5 and 10 mm; 1

PUBLISHED
4(d) 59; 2
155;
4(e)(i) larger cube (has) greater distance (so) time is longer; ORA 1
4(e)(ii) large cube is more than twice small cube / large cube is 2.5 times 1
4(e)(iii) Difficulty in deciding end point/cutting cubes exactly / AVP 1
5(a)(i) 17 ; 1
5(a)(ii) test-tube 1 blue ppt. ; 2

test-tube 6 dark blue solution ;
5(b)(i) to keep total volume the same / so can measure height of ppt. when settles ; 1
5(b)(ii) curve at bottom of test-tube / different compaction on settling ; 1
5(c) the more ammonia solution the higher the ppt. ; 3
height drops / less ppt. ;
ppt. dissolves / ppt. disappears / ammonia in excess ;
5(d)(i) ppt. does not dissolve in sodium hydroxide solution ; 1
5(d)(ii) 26 ; 1

PUBLISHED
6(a)(i) 6.3 ± 0.1 and 2.5 ± 0.1 and 2.5 ± 0.1 ; 2

to nearest millimetre ;
6(a)(ii) 39.375 (cm3) ; 1
e.c.f (i)
6(a)(iii) dimensions of block not consistent ; 1
6(a)(iv) 0.8 (N) ; 1
6(v) 2.0(3) (g / cm3) ; 1
6(b)(i) 83 (cm3) ; 1
6(b)(ii) 1.8(6) (g / cm3) ; 1
6(c)(i) Method 2, as dimensions of block irregular ; 1
6(c)(ii) modelling clay will get wet/mass of clay increases due to water, or similar ; 1


Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core) February/March 2018
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*9399649878*

IB18 03_0653_12/3RP
2
1 Which is a characteristic of all living organisms?
A breathing
B eating
C egestion
D movement
2 The diagram shows a blood capillary and a red blood cell, next to three respiring muscle cells.
red blood cell
1 2
muscle cells
Which arrows show the net movement of carbon dioxide?
A 1 only
B 2 only
C 1 and 2
D neither arrow
A All enzymes work best at pH 7.

B All proteins are enzymes.
C Enzymes are biological catalysts.
D Low temperatures denature enzymes.
4 Tests were performed on four samples of food. The results are shown in the table.
Which food contains protein only?
results of food tests

A blue blue blue/black

B blue purple brown
C red blue blue/black
D red purple brown
© UCLES 2018 0653/12/F/M/18

3
5 The diagram shows a section through a leaf.
Where does carbon dioxide enter the leaf and where does water leave?
carbon dioxide
water leaves
enters
A 1 2
B 1 3
C 3 1
D 3 3
6 The diagram shows the alimentary canal.
Which label shows where bile is stored?
© UCLES 2018 0653/12/F/M/18 [Turn over

4
7 The graph shows the rate of water loss from a plant during daylight hours.
rate of water
loss / g per hour
Y
0
0 time / hours
What could cause the change in the rate of water loss between point X and point Y?
A The air becomes cooler.

B The air becomes drier.
C The day becomes sunnier.
D The stomata open wider.
8 The diagram shows the human heart and the main blood vessels associated with it.
Which blood vessel is the pulmonary artery?
© UCLES 2018 0653/12/F/M/18

5
9 The depth and rate of breathing changes depending on the activity the body is doing.
Which row shows the effects of strenuous physical exercise on the depth and rate of breathing?
depth of rate of
breathing breathing
A deep fast
B deep slow
C shallow fast
D shallow slow
10 What is the result of a tropism?
A feeding
B gravity
C growth
D light
Where are the male and female gametes (sex cells) made?
male gametes female gametes
A P Q
B P R
C Q P
D Q R

6
12 The diagram shows part of the carbon cycle.
Which arrow represents a process that releases oxygen into the atmosphere?
carbon dioxide
in the air
B
A carbohydrates in
dead organic matter
C D
death
carbohydrates
in animals death
carbohydrates
in green plants
13 Many countries work to conserve important resources.
Which is not an important resource to conserve?
A fossil fuels
B sewage
C species
D water
14 Which statement about atoms and molecules is correct?
A Atoms gain or lose electrons to become molecules.

B Atoms of the same element contain the same number of molecules.
C Molecules are the simplest unit of an atom.
D Molecules contain atoms which are covalently bonded.
© UCLES 2018 0653/12/F/M/18

7
15 The chromatogram obtained from inks P, Q, R, S and T is shown.
yellow P Q R S T
Which inks contain the colour yellow?
A P and R B Q and S C R and T D S and T
16 Which diagram represents a mixture of two elements?
A B C D
17 The atomic number of argon is 18.
The mass number of argon is 40.
How many protons, neutrons and electrons are there in an argon atom?
protons neutrons electrons
A 18 18 22
B 18 22 18
C 22 18 18
D 22 18 22
18 What is the formula of sulfuric acid?
A HSO3 B HSO4 C H2SO3 D H2SO4

8
19 During the electrolysis of aqueous copper chloride, inert electrodes are placed in the solution.
The copper chloride solution is the ««1«« .
Copper is deposited on the ««2«« when electricity is passed through the solution.
Which words complete gaps 1 and 2?
1 2
A electrode anode
B electrode cathode
C electrolyte anode
D electrolyte cathode
20 Excess magnesium ribbon is reacted with 10 cm3 of dilute hydrochloric acid. The hydrogen gas
produced is collected and measured.
Which change to the reaction conditions increases the rate of reaction and the volume of
hydrogen produced?
A Use a lower temperature.

B Use a transition metal catalyst.
C Use concentrated hydrochloric acid.
D Use powdered magnesium.
21 The equation shows the reaction of copper oxide with carbon.
In the reaction, the carbon is the ««1«« agent and is ««2«« during the reaction.
1 2
A oxidising oxidised
B oxidising reduced
C reducing oxidised
D reducing reduced
© UCLES 2018 0653/12/F/M/18

9
22 What reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid to make magnesium chloride?
1 magnesium
2 magnesium carbonate
3 magnesium oxide
23 Which row describes the properties of a transition element?
melting electrical
density
point conductor
A high high yes

B high low no
C low high no
D low low yes
24 The noble gases make up Group VIII of the Periodic Table.
A Argon exists as non-bonded atoms.

B Krypton is very poisonous.
C Neon burns in pure oxygen with a red flame.
D The chemical formula of helium is He2.
25 Why is drinking water treated with chlorine?
A to improve the taste

B to kill bacteria
C to remove colour
D to remove insoluble impurities
26 Which statement about the rusting of iron is correct?
A Iron becomes lighter when it rusts.

B Iron is reduced when it rusts.
C Rusting is a reaction involving iron, oxygen and water.
D Rusting is a reaction involving iron and water only.

10
27 What gas is the main constituent of natural gas?
A carbon dioxide
B methane
C nitrogen
D oxygen
28 The diagrams show distance-time and speed-time graphs.
Which graph represents a body at rest?
A B C D
distance distance speed speed
0 0 0 0
0 time 0 time 0 time 0 time
29 The solid block shown is made of a metal with density 7.0 g / cm3.
3.0 cm
5.0 cm 4.0 cm
What is the mass of the block?
A 4.7 g B 8.6 g C 84 g D 420 g
© UCLES 2018 0653/12/F/M/18

11
30 A student plots an extension-load graph for a spring.
He measures the length of the spring with no load attached.
Next he hangs a load from the spring and measures the new length of the spring. He repeats this
for different loads.
How does the student calculate the extension for each value of load?
A new length + original length

B new length – original length
C new length × original length
D new length ÷ original length
31 Which energy resource is non-renewable?
A geothermal energy
B hydroelectric energy
C nuclear energy
D wave energy
32 In an experiment, four students each lift a different empty metal box from the floor on to a stool or
a table. Two students lift a box made of aluminium, and two students lift a box made of steel.
The diagrams show the height of the stool and the table, and the masses of the boxes.
Which student does the most work on the box that he or she is lifting?
A B
stool stool
0.50 m 0.50 m
aluminium steel
1000 g 800 g
C D
table table
0.80 m 0.80 m
aluminium steel
1000 g 800 g

12
33 What is a property of both solids and liquids?
A They always fill a container.

B They can flow.
C They have a fixed shape.
D They have a fixed volume.
34 A student makes two statements about infra-red radiation.
1 It is electromagnetic radiation.
2 It transfers thermal energy through a vacuum.
Which of these statements are correct?
A 1 only
B 1 and 2
C 2 only
D neither 1 nor 2
35 The diagram represents a wave.
6.0 cm
distance
8.0 cm
What is the wavelength of the wave?
A 3.0 cm B 4.0 cm C 6.0 cm D 8.0 cm
© UCLES 2018 0653/12/F/M/18

13
36 Which diagram shows how a ray of light passes from air into a glass block, and shows the angle
of incidence labelled i ?
A B C D
i i
i i
glass glass
block block
37 A boy on an island is 500 m from some cliffs.
500 m
cliffs
island
He shouts and he hears an echo from the cliffs.
Sound travels at 340 m / s through the air.
What is the time interval between when the boy shouts and when he hears the echo?
A 500 s B 2 × 500 s C 340 s D 2 × 340 s

340 340 500 500
38 Why is the electricity supply to a house fitted with a fuse?
A to increase the current in the circuit

B to increase the resistance of the circuit
C to maintain a constant current in the circuit
D to prevent overheating of the cables in the circuit

14
39 The diagrams show four circuits, each containing an ammeter and two lamps with different
resistances.
Which circuit shows an ammeter with a reading equal to the current in each lamp?
A B C D
A
A A
A
40 Three 4.0 Ω resistors are connected as shown.
4.0 Ω
4.0 Ω
4.0 Ω
What is the combined resistance of this arrangement?
A less than 4.0 Ω
B between 4.0 Ω and 8.0 Ω
C between 8.0 Ω and 12 Ω
D 12 Ω
© UCLES 2018 0653/12/F/M/18

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0653/12/F/M/18

Group
© UCLES 2018
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
0653/12/F/M/18
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) February/March 2018
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*8468472230*

IB18 03_0653_22/2RP
2
1 Which is a characteristic of all living organisms?
A breathing
B eating
C egestion
D movement
2 The diagram shows a typical animal cell.
What are the functions of structures X, Y and Z?
X Y Z
A traps light contains controls entry and
genetic material exit of materials
B traps light site of chemical provides support
reactions
C contains site of chemical controls entry and
genetic material reactions exit of materials
D contains controls entry and provides support
genetic material exit of materials
3 The statements explain the activity of a human enzyme as the temperature increases from 20 °C
to 50 °C. The statements are in the wrong order.
1 The enzyme is working at its optimum rate.

2 The kinetic energy of the enzyme molecules begins to increase.
3 The enzyme begins to change shape.
4 The enzyme is completely denatured.
What is the correct order of the statements?
A 1→3→2→4
B 1→4→3→2
C 2→1→3→4
D 3→2→4→1
© UCLES 2018 0653/22/F/M/18

3
4 Tests were performed on four samples of food. The results are shown in the table.
Which food contains protein only?
results of food tests

A blue blue blue/black

B blue purple brown
C red blue blue/black
D red purple brown
5 A student is investigating how light affects photosynthesis.
gas measuring cylinder
beaker
water glass funnel
aquatic plant
X Y
The student shines a light from point Y and measures the volume of gas produced in five
minutes.
Which gas is produced and how does the rate of gas production change when the light is moved
from Y to X?
rate of gas
gas produced
production
A carbon dioxide decreases

B carbon dioxide increases
C oxygen decreases
D oxygen increases

4
6 The diagram shows the alimentary canal.
Which label shows where bile is stored?
7 The graph shows the rate of water loss from a plant during daylight hours.
rate of water
loss / g per hour
Y
0
0 time / hours
What could cause the change in the rate of water loss between point X and point Y?
A The air becomes cooler.

B The air becomes drier.
C The day becomes sunnier.
D The stomata open wider.
© UCLES 2018 0653/22/F/M/18

5
8 What are possible causes of coronary heart disease?
exercise smoking stress
A
B
C
D
9 During aerobic respiration of glucose, oxygen is used up and water is produced.
How many molecules of oxygen are used and how many molecules of water are produced when
one molecule of glucose is respired?
number of number of
molecules of molecules of
oxygen used water produced
A 1 1
B 1 6
C 6 1
D 6 6
10 Light shines on a shoot tip from the direction shown.
light
X Y
After three days the shoot tip has bent towards the light.
What is the reason for this change?
A Auxin moves away from the light causing cell elongation in area Y.
B Auxin moves away from the light preventing cell elongation in area Y.
C Auxin moves towards the light causing cell elongation in area X.
D Auxin moves towards the light preventing cell elongation in area X.

6
11 How do male gametes compare with female gametes?
move
size
independently
A larger
B larger
C smaller
D smaller
12 The diagram shows part of the carbon cycle.
Which arrow represents a process that releases oxygen into the atmosphere?
carbon dioxide
in the air
B
A carbohydrates in
dead organic matter
C D
death
carbohydrates
in animals death
carbohydrates
in green plants
13 Eutrophication occurs after fertiliser is washed into a lake.
What is not true of eutrophication?
A Algae population in the lake decreases.

B Bacteria population in the lake increases.
C Nitrate concentration in the lake increases.
D Oxygen concentration in the lake decreases.
© UCLES 2018 0653/22/F/M/18

7
14 Which statement about atoms and molecules is correct?
A Atoms gain or lose electrons to become molecules.

B Atoms of the same element contain the same number of molecules.
C Molecules are the simplest unit of an atom.
D Molecules contain atoms which are covalently bonded.
15 Which diagram represents a mixture of two elements?
A B C D
16 Which statement about atoms and ions is not correct?
A A chlorine atom loses one electron to obtain a noble gas electronic structure.
B A magnesium atom has two valency electrons.
C A sodium ion, Na+, has eight electrons in its outer shell.
D Oxygen atoms and oxide ions each have two occupied electron shells.
17 Which substance contains a multiple covalent bond?
A hydrogen
B methane
C nitrogen
D water
18 Which equation represents the reaction at the cathode during the electrolysis of aqueous
copper(II) chloride?
A 2Cl – → Cl 2 + 2e−
B Cu2+ + 2e− → Cu
C 2H+ + 2e− → H2
D 4OH– → O2 + 2H2O + 4e−

8
19 In the reaction between an acid and a metal, the rate of reaction decreases as the reaction
proceeds.
A student suggests three reasons why the rate of this reaction decreases.
1 The concentration of the acid decreases as it gets used up.

2 The energy needed to break bonds is used up as the product forms.
3 The surface area of the metal increases as it gets smaller.
Which reasons are correct?
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 only D 3 only
20 The equation shows the reaction of copper oxide with carbon.
In the reaction, the carbon is the ««1«« agent and is ««2«« during the reaction.
1 2
A oxidising oxidised
B oxidising reduced
C reducing oxidised
D reducing reduced
21 Magnesium, magnesium oxide and magnesium carbonate are insoluble in water.
Which method is used to make pure crystals of magnesium sulfate?
A Add an excess of magnesium carbonate to dilute sulfuric acid, filter and evaporate the filtrate
to dryness.
B Add an excess of magnesium oxide to dilute sulfuric acid and leave overnight to crystallise.
C Add magnesium oxide to an excess of dilute sulfuric acid and evaporate to dryness.
D Add magnesium ribbon to an excess of dilute sulfuric acid, filter and evaporate to dryness.
© UCLES 2018 0653/22/F/M/18

9
22 Solid X is warmed with dilute sodium hydroxide. A gas, which turns moist red litmus paper to
blue, is given off.
Dilute hydrochloric acid is added to solid X. A gas, which turns limewater cloudy, is given off.
What is X?
A ammonium carbonate
B ammonium chloride
C sodium carbonate
D sodium chloride
23 Astatine is at the bottom of Group VII of the Periodic Table.
What happens if astatine is added to aqueous potassium chloride?
A A black precipitate is formed.

B Chlorine is formed.
C No reaction takes place.
D The colour of the solution becomes darker.
24 The noble gases make up Group VIII of the Periodic Table.
A Argon exists as non-bonded atoms.

B Krypton is very poisonous.
C Neon burns in pure oxygen with a red flame.
D The chemical formula of helium is He2.
25 Why is drinking water treated with chlorine?
A to improve the taste

B to kill bacteria
C to remove colour
D to remove insoluble impurities

10
26 A gas that causes climate change is formed during the extraction of iron from iron ore.
Which solution reacts with this gas?
A aqueous sodium chloride

B hydrochloric acid
C dilute sulfuric acid
D limewater
27 Which statement about the rusting of iron is correct?
A Iron becomes lighter when it rusts.

B Iron is reduced when it rusts.
C Rusting is a reaction involving iron, oxygen and water.
D Rusting is a reaction involving iron and water only.
28 Diagrams 1, 2 and 3 each show either a distance-time graph or a speed-time graph.
distance speed speed
0 0 0
0 time 0 time 0 time
diagram 1 diagram 2 diagram 3
Which of the diagrams represent the motion of an object moving with a non-zero constant
acceleration?
A 1 and 3 B 1 only C 2 only D 3 only
© UCLES 2018 0653/22/F/M/18

11
29 Two objects on Earth each have a mass of 20 kg.
One object is moved to a planet larger than Earth. The other object is moved into deep space.
What is the mass of the objects in these new positions?
mass of object on mass of object in

the other planet / kg deep space / kg
A 20 0
B 20 20
C more than 20 0
D more than 20 20
30 A spring that obeys Hooke’s law has no load attached to it. The length of the spring is 8.0 cm and
it has a spring constant k of 5.0 N / cm.
A load is now hung from the spring, and the length of the spring increases to 18 cm. The limit of
proportionality is not reached.
What is the weight of the load?
A 2.0 N B 40 N C 50 N D 90 N
31 Which energy resource is non-renewable?
A geothermal energy
B hydroelectric energy
C nuclear energy
D wave energy
32 A force of 20 N does 10 J of work when it moves an object through a distance d in the direction of
the force.
What is distance d?
A 0.50 m B 2.0 m C 10 m D 200 m

12
33 The molecules of a substance are far apart and move at high speed in straight lines until they hit
something.
The temperature of the substance is changed and this causes the molecules to move more
quickly.
What is the state of the substance, and how has its temperature changed?
state of how temperature

substance has changed
A gas decreased
B gas increased
C liquid decreased
D liquid increased
34 The diagram shows a cold gas in a tank. The tank contains a heater that is switched off.
cold gas
heater
The heater is now switched on.
What happens to the density of the gas near the heater, and in which direction does the heated
gas start to move?
direction of
density
movement
A decreases downwards
B decreases upwards
C increases downwards
D increases upwards
© UCLES 2018 0653/22/F/M/18

13
35 The diagram represents a wave.
6.0 cm
distance
8.0 cm
What is the wavelength of the wave?
A 3.0 cm B 4.0 cm C 6.0 cm D 8.0 cm
36 Which diagram shows how a ray of light passes from air into a glass block, and shows the angle
of incidence labelled i ?
A B C D
i i
i i
glass glass
block block
37 A sound wave travels in substance P. The sound wave then passes into a different substance Q
and the speed of the sound wave decreases.
What are possible substances for P and Q?
P Q
A air steel
B air water
C water air
D water steel

14
38 A lamp is labelled 12 V, 25 W.
How much electrical energy does the lamp convert in 4.0 minutes when lit at its normal
brightness?
A 100 J B 1200 J C 6000 J D 72 000 J
39 Why is the electricity supply to a house fitted with a fuse?
A to increase the current in the circuit

B to increase the resistance of the circuit
C to maintain a constant current in the circuit
D to prevent overheating of the cables in the circuit
40 The diagrams show four circuits, each containing an ammeter and two lamps with different
resistances.
Which circuit shows an ammeter with a reading equal to the current in each lamp?
A B C D
A
A A
A
© UCLES 2018 0653/22/F/M/18

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0653/22/F/M/18

Group
© UCLES 2018
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/22/F/M/18
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 3 9 8 3 1 2 2 6 3 1 *

Paper 3 (Core) February/March 2018
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/SG) 151392/4
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows a diagram of the female reproductive system and some of the events that take
place before and during early pregnancy.
fertilisation
ovulation
uterus
embryo in uterus
Fig. 1.1
(i) On Fig. 1.1 use label lines to identify
1. the cervix,
2. the vagina. [2]
(ii) Describe the events that follow fertilisation leading to the presence of the embryo in the
uterus as shown in Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Use words or phrases from the list to complete the following sentences about reproduction in
a plant.
a chromosome a quarter of a seed diploid half
haploid the same twice
Pollen grains have ..................................................................... nuclei because they contain
..................................................................... the amount of genetic information as the nuclei
of palisade cells. The nucleus of a fertilised egg cell is .......................................................... .

[3]
© UCLES 2018 0653/32/F/M/18

3
2 (a) Copper is extracted from a substance using the apparatus shown in Fig. 2.1.
low voltage
d.c. supply
− +
............................ ............................
............................
Fig. 2.1
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Complete Fig. 2.1 by labelling the anode, cathode and electrolyte. [2]
(iii) Name one compound that can be used in this process to extract copper at room
temperature.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) State what is done to this solid compound before it can be used in this process.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(v) State whether this process for the extraction of copper involves a chemical change or a
physical change.
change ..............................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) A student finds out that copper can also be extracted by heating a different compound, copper
oxide, with a non-metallic element.
(i) Name this non-metallic element.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Name the type of chemical reaction in which copper oxide is changed to copper.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

4
(c) Copper is one element in a collection of metals which have high melting points, high densities
and often act as catalysts.
(i) Suggest one other property that is shown by these metals that is not shown by other
metals.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the effect of a catalyst on a chemical reaction.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0653/32/F/M/18

5
3 Fig. 3.1 is a diagram which shows the International Space Station which is kept in orbit around the
Earth by a force which prevents it escaping into space.
Fig. 3.1
(a) Name this force.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On one of its orbits, the space station travels at a speed of 28 000 km / h and takes 90 minutes
to complete one orbit of the Earth.
Calculate the distance travelled by the space station during this orbit.
Show your working.
distance = .................................................... km [2]

6
(c) The mass of the Earth is 5972 × 1021 kg.
The volume of the Earth is 1.08 × 1021 m3.
Calculate the density of the Earth.
State the formula you use, show your working and give the units of your answer.
formula
working
density = ...................................... units ................... [3]
(d) Fig. 3.2 shows the large solar panels that provide energy for the space station.
solar panels
Fig. 3.2
(i) The solar cells are in large panels that face the Sun to gather energy. This energy is
stored by charging batteries on board the space station.
Complete the sequence of energy conversions that take place.
Radiation from the Sun
to ................................................ energy in the solar cells
to ................................................ energy in the batteries. [2]
© UCLES 2018 0653/32/F/M/18

7
(ii) Each solar cell contains solid crystals of silicon.
On Fig. 3.3 below draw a diagram to show the arrangement of atoms in a crystal of
silicon.
One atom has been drawn for you; you should draw at least 10 more atoms of the same
size.
Fig. 3.3
[2]

8
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a giant panda which lives in bamboo forests in China.
Fig. 4.1
(a) The panda has the diet of a herbivore. It feeds almost entirely on bamboo shoots.
Define the term herbivore.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Table 4.1 shows the mass of protein contained in 100 g of bamboo shoots and 100 g of beef.
Table 4.1
nutrient bamboo shoots / g beef / g

protein 2.6 20.0
(i) State the roles of protein in the body.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the mass of bamboo shoots needed to provide the same amount of protein as
100 g of beef.
mass = ....................................................... g [2]
(iii) Use your answer from (ii) to suggest why the panda has to eat large amounts of shoots
every day.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0653/32/F/M/18

9
(c) Deforestation is causing the population of pandas in the area to decrease.
Suggest two reasons why deforestation decreases the population of pandas in bamboo
forests.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

10
5 Petroleum is a mixture of hydrocarbons. It is separated into useful fractions by the process of

fractional distillation.
This process is shown in Fig. 5.1.
refinery gas
gasoline
gas oil
petroleum
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) State what is meant by the term hydrocarbon.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Ethane is found in refinery gas.
Methane and ethane are both hydrocarbons and form the same products when they burn.
Complete the word equation for the complete combustion of ethane.
ethane + +
[2]
(iii) During the combustion of ethane there is a temperature rise.
State the type of chemical reaction that produces a temperature rise.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) State one use for bottled refinery gas.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Oil and grease are produced from petroleum.
Describe how these substances protect iron from rusting.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0653/32/F/M/18
11
6 Fig. 6.1 shows two people talking to each other using cordless telephones over a link to a
communications satellite.
communications
satellite
person A person B
handset
satellite satellite
handset B
dish dish
A
base telephone telephone base

station exchange exchange station
Fig. 6.1
(a) At every stage wave motion is used to transmit the conversation.
(i) Use information from Fig. 6.1 to complete the following sentence.
......................................................... waves transmit the conversation between person A

and handset A. [1]
(ii) State two different ways in which microwaves or radio waves are used in Fig. 6.1.
1. from ......................................................... to ......................................................... .
2. from ......................................................... to ......................................................... .

[2]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows an incomplete electromagnetic spectrum.
infra-red
gamma rays visible light
waves
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2 write microwaves and radio waves in their correct positions in the electromagnetic
spectrum. [2]

12
(c) The communications satellite can become very warm in the day, but become very cold at
night.
Explain why these temperature changes happen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Explain why the communications satellite cannot use sound waves to communicate with the
Earth.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0653/32/F/M/18

13
7 (a) Table 7.1 shows some facts about processes in living organisms.
In Table 7.1, place a tick (3) in all the boxes where the fact about each process is correct.
Table 7.1
process
fact
respiration photosynthesis chemical digestion
needs light
takes place in animals
needs carbon dioxide
produces smaller molecules
from larger molecules
[4]
(b) Some red dye in water is used to identify the xylem in a plant. A plant is placed in the red
dye for a few hours. After this time, cross-sections of its stem and its root are prepared and
viewed under the microscope.
Fig. 7.1 shows the tissues in the stem and in the root.
stem root
Fig. 7.1
(i) Shade in one area in both of the drawings in Fig. 7.1 where the red dye can be seen.
[2]
(ii) Name the cells which absorb water from the soil.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Describe one function of water in the plant.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Describe the function of phloem in a plant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

14
8 (a) An atom of chlorine is represented by the symbol:
Cl
35
17
(i) State the number of electrons, neutrons and protons in this atom.
electrons .......................
neutrons .......................
protons .......................
[2]
(ii) Complete Table 8.1 to show the relative charges and approximate relative masses of
electrons, neutrons and protons.
Table 8.1
particle relative charges approximate relative masses

electrons
neutrons
protons
[2]
(b) Chlorine is a non-metallic element.
State the types of bond that form when chlorine reacts with sodium and with hydrogen.
sodium and chlorine ...............................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
hydrogen and chlorine ............................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0653/32/F/M/18

15
(c) Chlorine gas is bubbled through solutions of
• sodium bromide,
• zinc chloride,
• magnesium iodide.
Predict which solutions react with chlorine gas.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) State the test and the positive result for chlorine gas.
test ............................................................................................................................................
result .........................................................................................................................................
[2]

16
ammeter
01 23
4
AMP 5
S
lamp
switch
battery
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.2 use the correct symbols to complete the diagram for the circuit shown in
Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.2
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0653/32/F/M/18

17
(b) The battery has a voltage of 1.5 V, and the reading on the ammeter is 0.6 A for the circuit in
Fig. 9.1.
(i) Calculate the resistance of the lamp and state the units.
formula
working
resistance = .............................................. unit .................. [3]
(ii) A second identical lamp is added in series with the lamp in the circuit in Fig. 9.1.
The reading on the ammeter decreases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0653/32/F/M/18

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0653/32/F/M/18

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0653/32/F/M/18

© UCLES 2018
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
20
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/32/F/M/18
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 4 1 3 3 2 7 1 5 8 2 *

Paper 4 (Extended) February/March 2018
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/SG) 151393/4
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a diagram of the female reproductive system and some events that take place
before and during early pregnancy. The fetus is the name for the developing baby.
event 2
event
3
event 1
fetus
placenta C
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) State what happens during events 1 and 2.
event 1 ..............................................................................................................................
event 2 ..............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Name structure C in Fig. 1.1 and state its function.
name of C ..........................................................................................................................
function of C ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Exchange of substances between blood in the fetus and the mother’s blood takes place at
the placenta. Some materials that are transferred across the placenta are shown.
amino acids carbon dioxide fatty acids glucose oxygen
(i) Name one substance from the list that shows net movement from the fetus into the
mother’s blood.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the source of this substance in the fetus.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Describe how the blood in the fetus reaches the placenta.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0653/42/F/M/18

3
(c) Nicotine and carbon monoxide are taken into the blood when a person smokes.
Carbon monoxide combines with haemoglobin. This prevents oxygen from being carried in
the red blood cells.
Suggest why carbon monoxide in the mother’s blood is harmful to the fetus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

4
2 (a) Copper is extracted from molten copper chloride using electrolysis.
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 2.1.
low voltage
d.c. supply
− +
cathode anode
electrolyte
Fig. 2.1
(i) State whether this process for the extraction of copper involves a chemical change or a
physical change.
change ..............................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) Identify the two ions present in the electrolyte and describe, in terms of electrons, the
changes to these ions at the electrodes.
first ion ..............................................
change ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
second ion ..............................................
change ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0653/42/F/M/18

5
(b) A student finds out that copper can also be extracted by heating copper(II) oxide with carbon.
(i) Name the type of chemical reaction in which copper oxide is changed to copper.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Construct the balanced symbol equation for this reaction.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Copper is one element in a collection of metals which have high melting points, high densities
and form coloured compounds.
Suggest one other property that is shown by these metals and that is not shown by other
metals.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the International Space Station orbiting the Earth.
Fig. 3.1
(a) The space station is kept in orbit by the Earth’s gravitational field.
Name the effect of the Earth’s gravitational field on a mass.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On one of its orbits, the space station travels at a speed of 28 000 km / h and takes 90 minutes
to complete one orbit of the Earth.
Calculate the distance travelled by the space station during this orbit.
Show your working.
distance = .................................................... km [2]
© UCLES 2018 0653/42/F/M/18

7
(c) The volume of the Earth is 1.08 × 1021 m3.
The average density of the whole Earth is 5530 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the mass of the Earth.
formula
working
mass = ..................................................... kg [2]
(ii) The average density of the Earth’s crust is 2700 kg / m3.
Fig. 3.2 shows the interior structure of the Earth.
crust
mantle
core
Fig. 3.2
Suggest how the average density of the mantle and core compares with the density of
the crust.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

8
(iii) The Earth’s core has two layers. The outer core is liquid, while the inner core is solid.
Both parts are made mostly of iron.
State two ways in which the atoms in the outer core will be arranged differently from the
atoms in the inner core.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Fig. 3.3 shows large solar panels that provide energy for the space station.
solar panels
Fig. 3.3
The solar cells are in large panels that face the Sun to gather radiation energy from the Sun.
This energy is stored by charging batteries on board the space station.
Complete the sequence of energy conversions that take place.
Radiation from the Sun
to ................................................ energy in the solar cells
to ................................................ energy in the batteries. [2]
© UCLES 2018 0653/42/F/M/18

9
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a cross-section of a leaf. Cells P and Q are examples of mesophyll cells in the leaf.
R
cell P
cell Q S
Fig. 4.1
(a) On Fig. 4.1 draw label lines from
1. R to the part of any cell which contains the genetic material,
2. S to a part of tissue that transports water.

[2]
(b) Cell P is able to carry out photosynthesis at a greater rate than cell Q.
Use evidence from Fig. 4.1 to support this statement referring to
(i) the position of cell P in the leaf compared with cell Q,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the number of chloroplasts in cells P and Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Describe in detail the function of chlorophyll in chloroplasts.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

10
5 (a) An atom of bromine is represented by the symbol
Br
79
35
(i) State the number of electrons, neutrons and protons in this atom.
electrons .......................
neutrons .......................
protons .......................
[2]
(ii) Complete Table 5.1 to show the relative charges and approximate relative masses of
electrons, neutrons and protons.
Table 5.1
particle relative charges approximate relative masses

electrons
neutrons
protons
[2]
(b) Bromine is a non-metallic element.
State the types of bond that form when bromine reacts with sodium and with hydrogen.
Explain your answers in terms of electrons.
sodium and bromine ....................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
hydrogen and bromine ....................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) The Periodic Table on page 20 shows the positions of bromine and the other elements in
Group VII.
Predict one Group VII element that is displaced from its salts by bromine.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0653/42/F/M/18

11
(d) Argon is a noble gas. The noble gases are in Group VIII of the Periodic Table.
(i) State the electronic structure of an atom of argon.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State one use of argon.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

12
6 Fig. 6.1 shows two people talking to each other using cordless telephones over a link to a
communications satellite.
communications
satellite
person 1 person 2
satellite satellite handset

handset dish dish
copper
wires
base telephone telephone base

station exchange exchange station
Fig. 6.1
(a) The conversation between the base stations and the satellite dishes is transmitted by electric
currents in copper wires. These electric currents change rapidly when each person speaks.
Define current and suggest what is happening in terms of particles in a copper wire when a
changing current passes through it.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) One person is speaking. Information is transmitted at frequencies of 300 Hz and 2.8 × 109 Hz
at different stages in the communications system.
Identify the stage at which each of these frequencies is being used, and state the type of
wave involved.
(i) A frequency of 300 Hz.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) A frequency of 2.8 × 109 Hz.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0653/42/F/M/18

13
(c) When a satellite telephone is used, there is a delay of about 0.1 s between one person
speaking and the other person hearing.
Explain why this delay happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

14
7 (a) Breast milk contains all the nutrients needed for a newborn baby.
One mineral contained in milk is iron.
(i) State the role of iron in the body.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Anaemia occurs due to a shortage of iron in the body.
Describe one symptom of anaemia.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A student uses milk to make yoghurt at home. The stages below show the method he uses.
stage 1 He heats some milk to 90 °C, then allows it to cool.
stage 2 He adds a small amount of yoghurt which he bought in a supermarket.

The yoghurt contains live microorganisms.
stage 3 He stirs the mixture then leaves it in an oven set at 45 °C for several hours.
stage 4 When the mixture thickens the yoghurt is ready and the student places it in a
fridge.
(i) Explain why the student carries out the following processes in stage 1.
1. Heating the milk to 90 °C.
...........................................................................................................................................
2. Allowing the milk to cool.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest why the student only needs to use a small amount of the yoghurt in stage 2.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Predict whether the student can use some of the yoghurt he has made to repeat stages 1
to 4.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0653/42/F/M/18

15
(c) Microorganisms in the yoghurt feed on the sugar in the milk and make lactic acid. The acid
affects the proteins in the milk and the yoghurt becomes thick.
Suggest and describe in detail what happens to the protein molecules in the milk.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) There is no fibre present in the yoghurt.
(i) Explain why fibre is needed in a balanced diet.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest a way of including fibre in the yoghurt.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

16
8 Petroleum is separated into useful fractions by fractional distillation.
Process Y produces short alkene molecules from longer alkane molecules.
These processes are shown in Fig. 8.1.
fractional
process Y powdered
distillation fraction P solid catalyst
column
strong heat
petroleum fraction Q
Fig. 8.1
(a) Fraction P and fraction Q contain different compounds.
Describe two of the differences between the compounds in fraction P and those in fraction Q.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Name process Y.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0653/42/F/M/18

17
(c) The rate of reaction in process Y is increased by using a powdered solid catalyst and a high
temperature.
(i) State why the catalyst is used in the form of a powder.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how a high temperature increases the rate of reaction in process Y.
Use ideas about particles in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Bromine is added to two different samples of hydrocarbons A and B.
Hydrocarbon A decolourises the bromine.
Hydrocarbon B has no effect on the bromine.
State these two types of hydrocarbon.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
B ...............................................................................................................................................
[1]
(e) The combustion of hydrocarbons produces a gas that turns limewater milky.
(i) State the formula of this gas.
............................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest one concern that people have as the proportion of this gas is increasing in the
air.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

18
9 Fig. 9.1 shows the circuit for an immersion heater using electrical energy to heat water. Two
electric heating elements are immersed in water inside a large tank.
hot water out
heater 1
A ammeter 1
fuse
240 V
supply A ammeter 2
heater 2
cold water
supply
Fig. 9.1
The electrical energy is supplied at 240 V.
When both heaters are switched on, ammeter 1 reads 4 A, and ammeter 2 reads 10 A, giving a
total current of 14 A through the fuse.
(a) The fuse in the supply circuit has a value of 20 A printed on it.
Explain why a 20 A fuse is used in this circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate the total resistance of the two heaters.
State the formula you use, and show your working.
formula
working
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [2]
© UCLES 2018 0653/42/F/M/18

19
(c) Calculate the electrical energy supplied by heater 2 when it is switched on for 8 hours.
State any formula you use, and show your working.
formula
working
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
(d) Heater 2 is used to provide a full tank of hot water, while heater 1 is used to provide a small
amount of hot water quickly when the water in the tank is cold.
Explain why heater 1 is able to provide a small amount of hot water quickly without heating
the whole tankful of water. You may wish to draw a diagram to help your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0653/42/F/M/18

© UCLES 2018
Group
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
20
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0653/42/F/M/18
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
* 9 1 9 2 9 8 9 5 5 4 *

Paper 6 Alternative to Practical February/March 2018
1 hour

DC (NH/CGW) 150100/2
2
1 A student investigates the action of the enzyme amylase on starch. The laboratory temperature is
20 °C.
(a) Method
Step 1 The student labels two spotting tiles A and B.

Step 2 She adds two drops of iodine solution to six wells in each of the two spotting tiles, as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
iodine solution pipette
spotting tile spotting tile
A B
Fig. 1.1
Step 3 She labels two test-tubes A and B.

Step 4 She measures 5 cm3 starch solution into each of the test-tubes A and B.
Step 5 She adds 1 cm3 enzyme solution to test-tube A and mixes.
Step 6 She adds 1 cm3 water to test-tube B and mixes.
Step 7 She places two drops from test-tube A into one of the wells in spotting tile A containing
iodine solution and records in Table 1.1 the colour obtained.
Step 8 She then places two drops from test-tube B into one of the wells in spotting tile B
containing iodine solution and records in Table 1.1 the colour obtained.
Step 9 She repeats steps 7 and 8 using a different well each time at 1 minute intervals for a
further 5 minutes.
Table 1.1
colour in spotting tile

time / minutes
test-tube A (with enzyme) test-tube B (without enzyme)
0 blue-black blue-black
3 dark brown blue-black
4 dark brown blue-black

5 brown blue-black
© UCLES 2018 0653/62/F/M/18

3
(i) Describe and explain the results for test-tube A and test-tube B.
test-tube A .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
test-tube B .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Predict the results for test-tube A if the method had been carried out at 35 °C rather than
at 20 °C.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Reducing sugar is produced as a result of this enzyme-controlled reaction.
Describe the method that you would use to confirm the presence of reducing sugar in
test-tube A after 5 minutes.
In your answer you should include the observation for a positive result and explain any safety
precautions you would take.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) (i) The student tests the contents of test-tube A for the presence of protein and obtains a
positive result. Suggest why there is protein present in this test-tube.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The student tests the contents from the well for time = 0 for spotting tile A with biuret
solution.
Suggest why it might be difficult to make a conclusion from this test.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

4
2 A student investigates the effect of varying concentration on the rate of the reaction between
hydrochloric acid and calcium carbonate (marble chips).
The student must first make the different concentrations of hydrochloric acid.
He is given hydrochloric acid of concentration 2.0 mol / dm3 which he uses for one of his reactions.
He also uses this solution to make more dilute solutions.
He prepares 20 cm3 of hydrochloric acid of concentration 1.5 mol / dm3 by mixing 15 cm3 of the
2.0 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid with 5 cm3 of water, as shown in Table 2.1.
He prepares 20 cm3 of hydrochloric acid of concentration 0.75 mol / dm3 by mixing 7.5 cm3 of the
2.0 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid with 12.5 cm3 of water, as shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
volume of
concentration hydrochloric acid
volume of
of hydrochloric of concentration
water / cm3
acid / (mol / dm3) 2.0 mol / dm3
/ cm3
2.0 20 0
1.5 15 5
1.0
0.75 7.5 12.5
(a) Complete Table 2.1 to show the volumes of the 2.0 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid and water
which must be mixed to make 20 cm3 of hydrochloric acid of concentration 1.0 mol / dm3. [1]
delivery tube
clamp
100 cm3
measuring
cylinder
large
test-tube water
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2018 0653/62/F/M/18

5
(b) • He removes the large test-tube from the apparatus.

• He places four marble chips into the large test-tube.
• He adds 20 cm3 hydrochloric acid of concentration 2.0 mol / dm3 to the marble chips in
the large test-tube.
• He replaces the large test-tube in the apparatus as quickly as possible and starts the
stopclock.
• He stops the stopclock when 10 cm3 of gas have been collected in the measuring
cylinder.
• He washes out the large test-tube and discards the marble chips.
He repeats (b) for concentrations of hydrochloric acid of 1.5, 1.0 and 0.75 mol / dm3.

6
(i) Fig. 2.2 shows the stopclock readings for this experiment using hydrochloric acid of
concentrations 2.0 and 0.75 mol / dm3.
Record in Table 2.2 the time t to the nearest second for each of these readings. [2]
min : sec min : sec
2.0 mol / dm3 0.75 mol / dm3
Fig. 2.2
Table 2.2
concentration of time t to collect measure of rate

acid / (mol / dm3) 10 cm3 of gas / s of reaction, 1
t
2.00
1.50 45 0.022
1.00 62 0.016
0.75
(ii) Use Table 2.2 to make a conclusion about the relationship between the concentration of
the hydrochloric acid and the time t to collect 10 cm3 of gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
1
(iii) is a measure of the rate of reaction.
t
1
Calculate for concentrations 2.0 mol / dm3 and 0.75 mol / dm3 of acid in Table 2.2.
t
1
Record in Table 2.2 the values of to 2 significant figures.
t
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0653/62/F/M/18

7
1 1
(iv) 1. Use the values of in Table 2.2 to calculate the ratio of for concentration 2.0 mol / dm3
t t
1 3
to for concentration 1.0 mol / dm .
t
ratio = ...............................................................
1 1
2. Use the values of in Table 2.2 to calculate the ratio of for concentration 1.5 mol / dm3
t t
1 3
to for concentration 0.75 mol / dm .
t
ratio = ...............................................................
3. Use these ratios to state and explain whether halving the concentration of hydrochloric
acid always halves the rate of reaction. You should refer to experimental error in your
answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) (i) Suggest why hydrochloric acid of concentrations greater than 2.0 mol / dm3 are not used
in this experiment.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest one source of inaccuracy in this procedure.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

8
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0653/62/F/M/18

9
3 A student measures the electromotive force (voltage) of a power supply.
(a) She sets up the circuit shown in Fig. 3.1 and follows the instructions below.
power supply
A
resistance wire
C
P Q
0 cm 100 cm
metre rule
Fig. 3.1
• Connect the crocodile clip C to the resistance wire at a distance d = 100.0 cm from the
end P of the wire.
• Switch on the circuit.
• Record the ammeter and voltmeter readings.
• Switch off the circuit.

10
The ammeter and voltmeter readings are shown in Fig. 3.2.
voltmeter
0 2
ammeter
0.4 0.5 0.6

0.3 0.7
0.2 0.8
0.1 0.9
0 1
Fig. 3.2
(i) Read and record in Table 3.1 the potential difference V and the current I. Record your
answers to an appropriate number of significant figures. [3]
(ii) Add appropriate units to the headings of the columns in Table 3.1. [1]
Table 3.1
d / cm V / ............... I / ...............
100.0 ................................. .................................

80.0 1.35 0.28
60.0 1.30 0.36
40.0 1.20 0.50
20.0 1.00 0.83
(iii) She repeats the procedure in (a) for values of d = 80.0 cm, 60.0 cm, 40.0 cm and 20.0 cm.
Her results are shown in Table 3.1.
Explain why the student switches off the circuit between taking readings.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0653/62/F/M/18

11
(b) (i) On the grid provided, plot a graph of V (vertical axis) against I. [2]
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
(ii) Draw the best-fit straight line. [1]
(c) Continue your line until it crosses the vertical (V) axis.
The value of the intercept on the vertical axis is the electromotive force (voltage) of the power
supply.
Write down your value in the space below.
electromotive force of power supply = ....................................................... V [1]
(d) Explain why, when carrying out this experiment, it is important not to choose values of d less
than 10.0 cm.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

12
4 A student investigates diffusion in large and small organisms by observing the movement of acid
into two different sized cubes of jelly.
The jelly used to make the cubes is neutral and colourless. When the student makes the jelly
cubes she adds an indicator and also chemical C to make the jelly pink. The indicator is pink in
alkali and colourless in acid.
(a) (i) Explain why the jelly is pink at the start of the investigation.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest the identity of chemical C.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The student cuts one small cube and one large cube from the jelly. She places the small cube
of jelly in a beaker and covers the cube with acid.
Complete Fig. 4.1 to show how she sets up the apparatus. Label your diagram fully. The jelly
cube has been drawn for you.
Fig. 4.1
[2]
(c) As the acid moves into the jelly cube, the colour changes from pink to colourless.
She times how long it takes for the small cube to become completely colourless.
She repeats this procedure with the large jelly cube.
The dimensions of the cubes are shown in Table 4.1.
© UCLES 2018 0653/62/F/M/18

13
Table 4.1
cube length of each minimum distance time / seconds

side / mm moved by the
acid / mm
small cube 10
large cube 20
Calculate the minimum distance the acid has to move in each cube to decolourise the cube
completely. Record these values in Table 4.1.
[1]
(d) The stopclocks in Fig. 4.2 show the times taken for the two cubes to become completely
colourless. Read and record these values in Table 4.1. [2]
min s min s
small cube large cube
Fig. 4.2
(e) (i) Use the data in Table 4.1 to explain the difference in the time taken for each cube to
become completely colourless.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The teacher suggests that one of the cubes should take twice as long as the other to
become completely colourless.
State and explain if the results support this suggestion.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Describe one source of error in the experiment.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
14
5 A student investigates the reaction between H and ammonia solution.
H is a solution of a copper salt.
• He places 10 cm3 of H in each of six large test-tubes.

• He adds different volumes of ammonia solution and water to each test-tube, as shown in
Table 5.1.
• He shakes each test-tube and leaves the contents to settle for several minutes.
• He measures the height h of any precipitate formed in each test-tube by measuring from the
bottom of the test-tube to the top of the precipitate.
• Test-tube 4 is shown in Fig. 5.1.
test-tube
liquid
precipitate
test-tube 4
Fig. 5.1
• He records in Table 5.1 the heights h to the nearest millimetre.
© UCLES 2018 0653/62/F/M/18

15
Table 5.1
test-tube volume of volume of height h of

ammonia water / cm3 precipitate / mm
solution / cm3
1 5 35 9
2 10 30 17
3 15 25 26
4 20 20
5 25 15 8
6 30 10 0
(a) (i) Measure and record in Table 5.1 the height h of the precipitate in test-tube 4 shown in
Fig. 5.1.
[1]
(ii) Describe what the student observes in test-tubes 1 and 6.

Include colours in your answer.
test-tube 1 .........................................................................................................................
test-tube 6 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) Suggest why the amount of water is varied in this experiment.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Use Fig. 5.2 to explain why the volume of a precipitate with height h = 20 mm is not twice
the volume of a precipitate with height h = 10 mm.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
20 mm
10 mm
Fig. 5.2 (not to scale)

16
(c) Use the results in Table 5.1 to describe and explain the relationship between the height h of
the precipitate and the volume of ammonia solution added.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) The student repeats the experiment in (a) using sodium hydroxide solution instead of
ammonia solution to react with the copper salt solution H.
As in Table 5.1, the maximum height h of precipitate formed is reached in test-tube 3 and is
26 mm.
However, the heights of precipitate in test-tubes 4, 5 and 6 have the same value as each
other.
(i) Explain why the heights h of precipitate in test-tubes 4, 5 and 6 differ from those using
ammonia solution, as shown in Table 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Predict the value for the heights h of precipitate in test-tubes 4, 5 and 6.
h = ....................................................mm [1]
© UCLES 2018 0653/62/F/M/18

17
6 A student measures the density of modelling clay by two different methods and compares her
answers.
(a) Method 1
She takes a piece of modelling clay and shapes it into a rectangular block. Fig. 6.1 shows the
block from two different views.
Fig. 6.1
(i) Measure the length l, width w and height h of the block to the nearest 0.1 cm and record
your results below.
l = .......................................................... cm
w = .......................................................... cm
h = .......................................................... cm
[2]
(ii) Calculate the volume V1 of the block by using the equation shown.
V1 = l × w × h
V1 = ................................................... cm3 [1]
(iii) State one source of inaccuracy in the measurement of the volume of the block.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

18
(iv) The student uses a length of cotton to attach the block of modelling clay to a newton
meter, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
N
0
1
newton meter
block of
modelling clay
Fig. 6.2
Read the newton meter in Fig. 6.2 and record the weight W of the block of modelling
clay.
W = ....................................................... N [1]
(v) Use your answers from (a)(ii) and (a)(iv) to calculate the density d1 of modelling clay by
100 W
d1 =
V1
d1 = ............................................... g / cm3 [1]
© UCLES 2018 0653/62/F/M/18

19
(b) Method 2
The student adds 40 cm3 of water to a measuring cylinder.
She lowers the block carefully into the water.
The new reading V2 of the measuring cylinder is shown in Fig. 6.3.
cm3
80
70
Fig. 6.3
(i) Record the reading V2 on the measuring cylinder in the space below.
V2 = ................................................... cm3 [1]
(ii) Use your answers from (a)(iv) and (b)(i) to calculate the density d2 of the modelling clay
100 W
d2 =
V2 – 40
d2 = ............................................... g / cm3 [1]
(c) (i) State which method you consider to be the more accurate. Give a reason to support your
answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why the student obtained more accurate results by carrying out the two methods
of determining the density of the clay in the order that she did.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0653/62/F/M/18

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0653/62/F/M/18

Grade Thresholds - June 2017: Cambridge IGCSE Combined Science (0653)

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Grade Thresholds - June 2017: Cambridge IGCSE Combined Science (0653)

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Grade thresholds – June 2017

Cambridge IGCSE Combined Science (0653)

minimum raw mark required for grade:

Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component.

Cambridge IGCSE Combined Science (0653)

minimum raw mark required for grade:

Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component.

COMBINED SCIENCE 0653/51

This document consists of 7 printed pages and 1 blank page.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

C corrosive substance MH moderate hazard

HH health hazard T acutely toxic

N hazardous to the aquatic environment

Hazard data sheets should be available from your suppliers.

© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17

Each candidate will require

(i) approximately 3 cm long piece of ripe peeled fresh banana

(ii) chickpea puree labelled chickpea (see note 1)

(iii) 10 cm3 1% albumen solution labelled egg white

(v) stirring rod

(vi) table knife

(vii) white tile

(viii) small beaker approximately 100 cm3

[N] (ix) iodine solution and dropper, labelled iodine solution

(x) Benedict’s solution and dropper, labelled Benedict’s solution

[C] (xi) biuret solution and dropper, labelled biuret solution

(xii) access to a water bath at approximately 80 °C

(xiii) paper towels

(xiv) distilled water

(xv) means of labelling glassware.

© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17 [Turn over

Each candidate will require

(ii) approximately 15 cm3 0.40 mol dm–3 ammonia solution labelled J

(iv) red litmus paper

(v) blue litmus paper

(vi) small beaker approximately 100 cm3

(vii) 4 test-tubes (125 mm × 15 mm) (see note)

(viii) 2 filter funnels

(ix) filter papers.

© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17

Each candidate will require

(ii) a voltmeter capable of measuring up to 2.5 V with minimum resolution of 0.1 V

(iii) an ammeter capable of measuring up to 1.00 A with a minimum resolution of 0.05 A

(v) a wooden or plastic metre rule

© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17 [Turn over

Information required from the Supervisor:

© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17

© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17 [Turn over

(a) difficulties due to faulty apparatus;

(b) accidents to apparatus or materials;

(c) physical handicaps, e.g. short sight, colour blindness;

(e) any help given to a candidate.

The Supervisor is asked to supply the following information:

NAME OF CENTRE ................................................................................................................................

CENTRE NUMBER ....................................

DECLARATION (to be signed by the Supervisor)

SIGNED .............................................................................................................................. (Supervisor)

© UCLES 2017 0653/51/CI/M/J/17

COMBINED SCIENCE 0653/51

This document consists of 7 printed pages and 1 blank page.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

C corrosive substance MH moderate hazard

HH health hazard T acutely toxic